Ec PDF

ENGINE
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

SECTION EC EC
E
CONTENTS
VQ35DE (TYPE 1) THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION F
LEARNING : Description .........................................22
FEATURES OF NEW MODEL ..................... 12 THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION
LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement ..............22 G
APPLICATION NOTICE .....................................12
How to Check Vehicle Type .................................... 12 IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING ................................22
IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING : Description .........22
BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 13 IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING : Special Repair H
Requirement ............................................................22
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ........13
Work Flow ............................................................... 13 MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE
I
Diagnostic Work Sheet ............................................ 16 CLEAR .......................................................................24
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT ....................17 CLEAR : Description ................................................24
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE J
BASIC INSPECTION ................................................. 17
CLEAR : Special Repair Requirement .....................24
BASIC INSPECTION : Special Repair Require-
ment ........................................................................ 17 FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS .............................. 25 K
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM .......................... 25
CONTROL UNIT ........................................................ 20
System Diagram .....................................................25
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING L
System Description ..................................................26
CONTROL UNIT : Description ................................ 20
Component Parts Location ....................................26
Component Description ...........................................31
CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement .... 20
M
IDLE SPEED .............................................................. 20
MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM ....... 33
IDLE SPEED : Description ...................................... 20 System Diagram .....................................................33
IDLE SPEED : Special Repair Requirement ........... 20 System Description ..................................................33
Component Parts Location ....................................36 N
IGNITION TIMING ...................................................... 21 Component Description ...........................................41
IGNITION TIMING : Description .............................. 21
IGNITION TIMING : Special Repair Requirement.... 21 ELECTRIC IGNITION SYSTEM ........................ 42 O
System Diagram .....................................................42
ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION System Description ..................................................42
LEARNING ................................................................ 21 Component Parts Location ....................................43
ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION Component Description ...........................................48 P
LEARNING : Description ......................................... 21
ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL .............. 49
LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement .............. 21 System Diagram ......................................................49
System Description ..................................................49
THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARN- Component Parts Location ....................................50
ING ............................................................................. 21 Component Description ...........................................55
Revision: 2008 October EC-1 Z51

AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL .......................... 140
(ASCD) ............................................................... 56 DTC Logic ............................................................. 140
System Diagram ..................................................... 56 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 141
System Description ................................................. 56 Component Inspection .......................................... 142
Component Parts Location ................................... 57
Component Description ......................................... 62 P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 A/F SENSOR 1
HEATER ........................................................... 144
CAN COMMUNICATION ................................... 63 Description ............................................................ 144
System Description ................................................. 63 DTC Logic ............................................................. 144
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 144
COOLING FAN CONTROL ............................... 64 Component Inspection .......................................... 146
System Diagram ..................................................... 64
System Description ................................................. 64 P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEAT-
Component Parts Location ................................... 66 ER ..................................................................... 147
Component Description .......................................... 71 Description ............................................................ 147
DTC Logic ............................................................. 147
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 148
MOUNT .............................................................. 72 Component Inspection .......................................... 149
System Diagram ..................................................... 72
System Description ................................................. 72 P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID
Component Parts Location ................................... 75 VALVE .............................................................. 150
Component Description ......................................... 80 Description ............................................................ 150
DTC Logic ............................................................. 150
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM ............... 81 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 150
System Diagram ..................................................... 81 Component Inspection .......................................... 151
System Description ................................................. 81
Component Parts Location ................................... 85 P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR .......................... 153
Component Description ......................................... 90 Description ............................................................ 153
DTC Logic ............................................................. 153
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL ................. 91 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 154
Component Parts Location ................................... 92 P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR ............................ 158
Component Description .......................................... 97 Description ............................................................ 158
DTC Logic ............................................................. 158
VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR SYSTEM ............. 98 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 159
Component Parts Location ..................................100 P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR ........................... 161
Component Description ........................................105 Description ............................................................ 161
DTC Logic ............................................................. 161
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM ... 106 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 162
Diagnosis Description ............................................106 Component Inspection .......................................... 162
CONSULT-III Function ..........................................117
Diagnosis Tool Function ......................................126 P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR .............................. 164
Description ............................................................ 164
COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 128 DTC Logic ............................................................. 164
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION
Component Inspection .......................................... 166
VALUE ............................................................. 128 Special Repair Requirement ................................. 166
Description .............................................................128
Component Function Check ..................................128 P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1 ......................... 167
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................129 Description ............................................................ 167
DTC Logic ............................................................. 167
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ... 136 Component Function Check ................................. 169
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................136 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 169
U1000, U1001 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ............. 139 P0131, P0151 A/F SENSOR 1 ......................... 171
Description .............................................................139 Description ............................................................ 171
DTC Logic ..............................................................139 DTC Logic ............................................................. 171

P0132, P0152 A/F SENSOR 1 ......................... 174 DTC Logic .............................................................. 225
Description ............................................................ 174 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 225 A
DTC Logic ............................................................. 174 Component Inspection ........................................... 226
P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) ........................... 228
EC
P0133, P0153 A/F SENSOR 1 ......................... 177 Description ............................................................. 228
Description ............................................................ 177 DTC Logic .............................................................. 228
DTC Logic ............................................................. 177 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 229
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 179 Component Inspection ........................................... 231 C
P0137, P0157 HO2S2 ...................................... 182 P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) ......... 232
Description ............................................................ 182 Description ............................................................. 232
D
DTC Logic ............................................................. 182 DTC Logic .............................................................. 232
Component Function Check .................................. 184 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 233
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 185 Component Inspection ........................................... 234
Component Inspection .......................................... 187 E
P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST
P0138, P0158 HO2S2 ...................................... 189 FUNCTION ...................................................... 236
Description ............................................................ 189 DTC Logic .............................................................. 236 F
DTC Logic ............................................................. 189 Component Function Check .................................. 237
Component Inspection .......................................... 196 P0444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME G
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ...................... 241
P0139, P0159 HO2S2 ...................................... 198 Description ............................................................. 241
Description ............................................................ 198 DTC Logic .............................................................. 241 H
Component Function Check .................................. 200 Component Inspection ........................................... 242
P0500 VSS ...................................................... 244 I
Description ............................................................. 244
P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM DTC Logic .............................................................. 244
FUNCTION ....................................................... 205 Component Function Check .................................. 245 J
P0550 PSP SENSOR ...................................... 246
K
P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM Description ............................................................. 246
FUNCTION ....................................................... 209 DTC Logic .............................................................. 246
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 210 Component Inspection ........................................... 247 L
P0197, P0198 EOT SENSOR ........................... 213 P0603 ECM POWER SUPPLY ....................... 248
Description ............................................................ 213 Description ............................................................. 248 M
DTC Logic ............................................................. 213 DTC Logic .............................................................. 248
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 214 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 248
P0605 ECM ..................................................... 250 N
P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR ............................. 216 Description ............................................................. 250
Description ............................................................ 216 DTC Logic .............................................................. 250
DTC Logic ............................................................. 216 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 251 O
Component Inspection .......................................... 218 P0607 ECM ..................................................... 252
Special Repair Requirement ................................. 218 Description ............................................................. 252
DTC Logic .............................................................. 252 P
P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 252
P0306 MISFIRE ................................................ 219
DTC Logic ............................................................. 219
P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY ................ 253
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 220 DTC Logic .............................................................. 253
P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS .................... 225
Description ............................................................ 225
P0850 PNP SWITCH ....................................... 255

Description .............................................................255 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 280
DTC Logic ..............................................................255 Component Inspection .......................................... 282
Component Function Check ..................................256
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................256 P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH ........................ 283
Description ............................................................ 283
P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT ........................... 258 DTC Logic ............................................................. 283
DTC Logic ..............................................................258 Component Inspection (ASCD Brake Switch) ....... 287
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................258 Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch) .......... 287
P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE ............. 259 P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR ....... 288
P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE ......... 260 P1700 CVT CONTROL SYSTEM ..................... 290
DTC Logic ..............................................................260 Description ............................................................ 290
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................261 P1715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR (PRIMARY
SPEED SENSOR) ............................................. 291
P1225 TP SENSOR ......................................... 264 Description ............................................................ 291
Description .............................................................264 DTC Logic ............................................................. 291
DTC Logic ..............................................................264 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 291
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................264
Special Repair Requirement ..................................265 P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 1.. 292
Description ............................................................ 292
P1226 TP SENSOR ......................................... 266 DTC Logic ............................................................. 292
Special Repair Requirement ..................................267 P1801 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 2.. 295
Description ............................................................ 295
P1550 BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR .......... 268 DTC Logic ............................................................. 295
Component Inspection ...........................................269 P1805 BRAKE SWITCH ................................... 298
Description ............................................................ 298
P1551, P1552 BATTERY CURRENT SEN- DTC Logic ............................................................. 298
SOR .................................................................. 271 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 298
Description .............................................................271 Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch) .......... 299
DTC Logic ..............................................................271
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................271 P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MO-
Component Inspection ...........................................272 TOR RELAY ..................................................... 301
Description ............................................................ 301
DTC Logic ..............................................................274
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................274 P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
Component Inspection ...........................................275 FUNCTION ........................................................ 303
Description ............................................................ 303
Component Function Check ..................................277 Special Repair Requirement ................................. 306
Component Inspection ...........................................279 P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR .......... 307
Description ............................................................ 307
P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH ................. 280 DTC Logic ............................................................. 307
DTC Logic ..............................................................280 Component Inspection .........................................

Special Repair Requirement ................................. 308 Description ............................................................. 337
Component Function Check .................................. 337 A
P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 337
ACTUATOR ...................................................... 309
Description ............................................................ 309 ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE
DTC Logic ............................................................. 309 MOUNT ............................................................ 339 EC
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 310 Description ............................................................. 339
Special Repair Requirement ................................. 310 Component Function Check .................................. 339
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 339 C
P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR ........................... 311 Component Inspection ........................................... 340
Description ............................................................ 311
DTC Logic ............................................................. 311 FUEL INJECTOR ............................................ 342 D
Component Inspection .......................................... 313 Component Function Check .................................. 342
Special Repair Requirement ................................. 313 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 342
Component Inspection ........................................... 344 E
P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR ........................... 314
Description ............................................................ 314 FUEL PUMP .................................................... 345
DTC Logic ............................................................. 314 Description ............................................................. 345 F
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 314 Component Function Check .................................. 345
Component Inspection .......................................... 316 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 345
Special Repair Requirement ................................. 317 Component Inspection (Fuel Pump) ...................... 348
Component Inspection (Condenser) ...................... 348 G
P2135 TP SENSOR .......................................... 318
Description ............................................................ 318 IGNITION SIGNAL .......................................... 349
DTC Logic ............................................................. 318 Description ............................................................. 349 H
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 318 Component Function Check .................................. 349
Component Inspection .......................................... 320 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 349
Special Repair Requirement ................................. 320 Component Inspection (Ignition Coil with Power
I
Transistor) ............................................................. 352
P2138 APP SENSOR ....................................... 321 Component Inspection (Condenser) ...................... 353
Description ............................................................ 321
DTC Logic ............................................................. 321 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP .............. 354 J
Component Inspection .......................................... 323 Component Function Check .................................. 354
Special Repair Requirement ................................. 324 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 354 K
P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1 ........................ 325 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION ....... 355
Description ............................................................ 325 Description ............................................................. 355
DTC Logic ............................................................. 325 Component Inspection ........................................... 355 L
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR .......... 356
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH ................................... 329 Description ............................................................. 356
M
Description ............................................................ 329 Component Function Check .................................. 356
Component Inspection (ASCD Brake Switch) ....... 330 VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR SYSTEM .......... 359 N
Description ............................................................. 359
ASCD INDICATOR ........................................... 331 Component Function Check .................................. 359
Description ............................................................ 331 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 360 O
Component Function Check .................................. 331
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 331 ECU DIAGNOSIS ....................................... 363
COOLING FAN ................................................. 332 ECM ................................................................. 363 P
Description ............................................................ 332 Reference Value .................................................... 363
Component Function Check .................................. 332 Wiring Diagram—ENGINE CONTROL SYS-
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 332 TEM— ................................................................... 377
Component Inspection (Cooling Fan Motor) ......... 335 Fail-safe ................................................................. 392
Component Inspection (Cooling Fan Relay) ......... 336 DTC Inspection Priority Chart ............................. 394
DTC Index ............................................................. 395
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL ......................... 337 How to Set SRT Code ........................................ 398

Test Value and Test Limit ...................................400 BASIC INSPECTION : Special Repair Require-
ment ...................................................................... 427
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 407
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM SYMPTOMS ... 407 CONTROL UNIT ...................................................... 430
Symptom Table .....................................................407 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
CONTROL UNIT : Description .............................. 430
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION .............. 411 ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
Description .............................................................411 CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement ... 430
PRECAUTION ............................................ 412 IDLE SPEED ............................................................ 430
IDLE SPEED : Description .................................... 430
PRECAUTIONS ............................................... 412 IDLE SPEED : Special Repair Requirement ......... 430
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- IGNITION TIMING ................................................... 431
SIONER" ................................................................412 IGNITION TIMING : Description ........................... 431
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover..412 IGNITION TIMING : Special Repair Requirement. 431
On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine
and CVT ................................................................412 ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION
General Precautions ..............................................413 LEARNING .............................................................. 431
ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION
PREPARATION .......................................... 416 LEARNING : Description ....................................... 431
ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION
PREPARATION ............................................... 416 LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement ............ 431
Special Service Tools ............................................416
Commercial Service Tools .....................................416 THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARN-
ING ........................................................................... 431
ON-VEHICLE MAINTENANCE .................. 418 THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION
LEARNING : Description ....................................... 432
FUEL PRESSURE ........................................... 418 THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION
Inspection ..............................................................418 LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement ............ 432
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR ............................... 420 IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING ............................. 432
IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING : Description ...... 432
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM ............. 420 IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING : Special Repair
Inspection ..............................................................420 Requirement ......................................................... 432
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE
(SDS) .......................................................... 421 CLEAR ..................................................................... 434
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS CLEAR : Description ............................................. 434
(SDS) ................................................................ 421 MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE
Idle Speed .............................................................421 CLEAR : Special Repair Requirement .................. 434
Ignition Timing .......................................................421
Calculated Load Value ..........................................421 FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS ........................... 435
Mass Air Flow Sensor ............................................421
VQ35DE (TYPE 2) ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM .......................... 435
System Diagram ................................................... 435
FEATURES OF NEW MODEL ................... 422 System Description ............................................... 436
Component Parts Location .................................. 436
APPLICATION NOTICE .................................. 422 Component Description ........................................ 441
How to Check Vehicle Type ..................................422
MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM ....... 443
BASIC INSPECTION .................................. 423 System Diagram ................................................... 443
System Description ............................................... 443
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ...... 423 Component Parts Location .................................. 446
Work Flow ..............................................................423 Component Description ........................................ 451
Diagnostic Work Sheet ..........................................425
ELECTRIC IGNITION SYSTEM ....................... 452
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT ................. 427 System Diagram ................................................... 452
BASIC INSPECTION ................................................427
Component Parts Location .................................. 453

Component Description ......................................... 458 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .. 537
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 537 A
AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL ............. 459
System Diagram .................................................... 459 U1000, U1001 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ............. 540
System Description ............................................... 459 Description ............................................................. 540
Component Parts Location .................................. 460 EC
DTC Logic .............................................................. 540
Component Description ......................................... 465 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 540
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL ......................... 541 C
(ASCD) ............................................................. 466 DTC Logic .............................................................. 541
System Diagram .................................................... 466 Component Function Check .................................. 542
System Description ............................................... 466 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 543 D
Component Parts Location .................................. 467 Component Inspection ........................................... 544
Component Description ........................................ 472
P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID
CAN COMMUNICATION .................................. 473 VALVE ............................................................. 546 E
System Description ............................................... 473 Description ............................................................. 546
DTC Logic .............................................................. 546
COOLING FAN CONTROL .............................. 474 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 546 F
System Diagram .................................................... 474 Component Inspection ........................................... 547
Component Parts Location .................................. 476 P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR ......................... 549
Component Description ......................................... 481 Description ............................................................. 549 G
DTC Logic .............................................................. 549
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 550
MOUNT ............................................................. 482 Component Inspection ........................................... 551 H
System Diagram .................................................... 482
System Description ............................................... 482 P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR .......................... 554
Component Parts Location .................................. 485 Description ............................................................. 554
Component Description ........................................ 490 DTC Logic .............................................................. 554 I
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM .............. 491 Component Inspection ........................................... 555
System Diagram .................................................... 491 J
System Description ............................................... 491 P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR ............................ 557
Component Parts Location .................................. 495 Description ............................................................. 557
Component Description ........................................ 500 DTC Logic .............................................................. 557
K
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL ............... 501 Component Inspection ........................................... 559
System Diagram .................................................... 501 Special Repair Requirement .................................. 559
System Description ............................................... 501 L
Component Parts Location .................................. 502 P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1 ........................ 560
Component Description ......................................... 507 Description ............................................................. 560
DTC Logic .............................................................. 560 M
VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR SYSTEM ............ 508 Component Function Check .................................. 560
System Diagram .................................................... 508 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 561
Component Parts Location .................................. 510 P0131, P0151 A/F SENSOR 1 ........................ 563 N
Component Description ........................................ 515 Description ............................................................. 563
DTC Logic .............................................................. 563
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (ECM) ........................... 516 Component Function Check .................................. 564 O
Diagnosis Description ........................................... 516 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 565
CONSULT-III Function .......................................... 520
P0132, P0152 A/F SENSOR 1 ........................ 567
COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 529 Description ............................................................. 567 P
DTC Logic .............................................................. 567
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION Component Function Check .................................. 568
VALUE .............................................................. 529 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 569
Description ............................................................ 529
Component Function Check .................................. 529 P0139, P0159 HO2S2 ..................................... 571
DTC Logic .............................................................. 571

Component Function Check ..................................573 P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY .................. 604
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................574 DTC Logic ............................................................. 604
Component Inspection ...........................................576 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 604
P0197, P0198 EOT SENSOR .......................... 578 P0850 PNP SWITCH ........................................ 606
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................579 Component Function Check ................................. 607
Component Inspection ...........................................579 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 607
P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR ............................. 581 P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT ........................... 609
Component Inspection ...........................................582
Special Repair Requirement ..................................583 P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE .............. 610
Description ............................................................ 610
P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS .................... 584 DTC Logic ............................................................. 610
DTC Logic ..............................................................584
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................584 P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE ......... 611
Component Inspection ...........................................585 DTC Logic ............................................................. 611
Component Function Check ................................. 611
P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS) ........................... 587 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 612
Description .............................................................587
DTC Logic ..............................................................587 P1225 TP SENSOR .......................................... 615
P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE) .......... 591 Special Repair Requirement ................................. 616
Description .............................................................591
DTC Logic ..............................................................591 P1226 TP SENSOR .......................................... 617
P0500 VSS ....................................................... 595 Special Repair Requirement ................................. 618
Description .............................................................595
DTC Logic ..............................................................595 P1550 BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR ........... 619
Component Function Check ..................................596 Description ............................................................ 619
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................596 DTC Logic ............................................................. 619
P0550 PSP SENSOR ....................................... 597 Component Inspection .......................................... 620
Description .............................................................597
DTC Logic ..............................................................597 P1551, P1552 BATTERY CURRENT SEN-
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................597 SOR .................................................................. 622
Component Inspection ...........................................598 Description ............................................................ 622
DTC Logic ............................................................. 622
P0603 ECM POWER SUPPLY ........................ 599 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 622
Description .............................................................599 Component Inspection .......................................... 623
DTC Logic ..............................................................599
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................599 P1553 BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR ........... 625
Description ............................................................ 625
P0605 ECM ...................................................... 601 DTC Logic ............................................................. 625
P1554 BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR ........... 628
P0607 ECM ...................................................... 603 Description ............................................................ 628
Description .............................................................603 DTC Logic ............................................................. 628
DTC Logic ..............................................................603 Component Function Check ................................. 628

Component Inspection .......................................... 630 Description ............................................................. 658
DTC Logic .............................................................. 658 A
P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH .................. 631 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 658
Description ............................................................ 631 Component Inspection ........................................... 660
DTC Logic ............................................................. 631 Special Repair Requirement .................................. 661
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 631 EC
Component Inspection .......................................... 633 P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR ......... 662
Description ............................................................. 662
P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH ....................... 634 DTC Logic .............................................................. 662 C
Description ............................................................ 634 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 662
DTC Logic ............................................................. 634 Component Inspection ........................................... 663
Component Function Check .................................. 635 Special Repair Requirement .................................. 663 D
Component Inspection (ASCD Brake Switch) ....... 638 P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL
Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch) .......... 639 ACTUATOR ..................................................... 664
Description ............................................................. 664 E
P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR ...... 640 DTC Logic .............................................................. 664
Description ............................................................ 640 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 665
DTC Logic ............................................................. 640 Special Repair Requirement .................................. 665 F
P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR ......................... 666
P1700 CVT CONTROL SYSTEM ..................... 642 Description ............................................................. 666
Description ............................................................ 642 DTC Logic .............................................................. 666 G
P1715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR (PRIMARY Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 666

Component Inspection ........................................... 668
SPEED SENSOR) ............................................ 643 H
Special Repair Requirement .................................. 668
Description ............................................................ 643
DTC Logic ............................................................. 643 P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR ......................... 669
I
DTC Logic .............................................................. 669
P1720 VSS ....................................................... 645
Description ............................................................ 645
DTC Logic ............................................................. 645 J
P2135 TP SENSOR ......................................... 673
P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 1.. 647
Description ............................................................. 673 K
Description ............................................................ 647
DTC Logic .............................................................. 673
DTC Logic ............................................................. 647
Component Inspection .......................................... 648 L
P1801 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 2.. 650
P2138 APP SENSOR ...................................... 676
Description ............................................................ 650
Description ............................................................. 676 M
DTC Logic ............................................................. 650
DTC Logic .............................................................. 676
N
P1805 BRAKE SWITCH ................................... 653 Special Repair Requirement .................................. 679
Description ............................................................ 653
P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1 ....................... 680
DTC Logic ............................................................. 653
Description ............................................................. 680 O
DTC Logic .............................................................. 680
Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch) .......... 654
P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MO- P
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH .................................. 684
TOR RELAY ..................................................... 656 Description ............................................................. 684
Description ............................................................ 656
Component Function Check .................................. 684
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 656 Component Inspection (ASCD Brake Switch) ....... 685
P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ASCD INDICATOR .......................................... 686
FUNCTION ....................................................... 658 Description ............................................................. 686

Component Function Check ..................................686 Component Function Check ................................. 718
A/F SENSOR 1 ................................................ 687
Description .............................................................687 IAT SENSOR .................................................... 721
Component Function Check ..................................687 Description ............................................................ 721
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................687 Component Function Check ................................. 721
A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER ................................. 690 Component Inspection .......................................... 722
Description .............................................................690
Component Function Check ..................................690 IGNITION SIGNAL ............................................ 723
Component Inspection ...........................................691 Component Function Check ................................. 723
COOLING FAN ................................................ 693 Component Inspection (Ignition Coil with Power
Description .............................................................693 Transistor) ............................................................. 726
Component Function Check ..................................693 Component Inspection (Condenser) ..................... 727
Component Inspection (Cooling Fan Motor) ..........696 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP ................ 728
Component Inspection (Cooling Fan Relay) ..........697 Description ............................................................ 728
Component Function Check ................................. 728
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL ......................... 698 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 728
Description .............................................................698
Component Function Check ..................................698 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION ......... 729
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE
MOUNT ............................................................ 700 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR ........... 730
Component Function Check ..................................700 Component Function Check ................................. 730
Component Inspection ...........................................701
VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR SYSTEM ............ 733
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CON- Description ............................................................ 733
TROL SOLENOID VALVE ............................... 703 Component Function Check ................................. 733
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................703 ECU DIAGNOSIS ...................................... 737
Component Inspection ...........................................705 ECM .................................................................. 737
FUEL INJECTOR ............................................. 706 Reference Value ................................................... 737
Description .............................................................706 Wiring Diagram—ENGINE CONTROL SYS-
Component Function Check ..................................706 TEM— ................................................................... 751
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................706 Fail-safe ................................................................ 766
Component Inspection ...........................................708 DTC Inspection Priority Chart ............................. 768
DTC Index ............................................................ 769
FUEL PUMP ..................................................... 709
Description .............................................................709 SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ........................... 772
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM SYMPTOMS .... 772
Symptom Table ..................................................... 772
Component Inspection (Fuel Pump) ......................712
Component Inspection (Condenser) ......................712 NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............... 776
Description ............................................................ 776
HO2S2 .............................................................. 713
Description .............................................................713 PRECAUTION ........................................... 777
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................714 PRECAUTIONS ................................................ 777
Component Inspection ...........................................715 Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
HO2S2 HEATER .............................................. 718 SIONER" ............................................................... 777
Description .............................................................718 Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover. 777

On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine ON-VEHICLE REPAIR ............................... 785
and CVT ................................................................ 777 A
General Precautions ............................................. 778 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM ............. 785
Inspection .............................................................. 785
PREPARATION ......................................... 781
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS EC
PREPARATION ................................................ 781 (SDS) .......................................................... 786
Special Service Tools ............................................ 781
Commercial Service Tools .................................... 781 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS C
(SDS) ............................................................... 786
ON-VEHICLE MAINTENANCE .................. 783 Idle Speed ............................................................. 786
FUEL PRESSURE ............................................ 783 Ignition Timing ....................................................... 786 D
Inspection .............................................................. 783

APPLICATION NOTICE
< FEATURES OF NEW MODEL > [VQ35DE (TYPE 1)]
FEATURES OF NEW MODEL

APPLICATION NOTICE
How to Check Vehicle Type INFOID:0000000004692747
Check the vehicle type to confirm the service information in EC section.
Vehicle type Service information

For Australia and New Zealand VQ35DE (TYPE1)
Except Australia and New Zealand VQ35DE (TYPE2)

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [VQ35DE (TYPE 1)]
BASIC INSPECTION A
Work Flow INFOID:0000000004690345
EC
OVERALL SEQUENCE
C
JMBIA1416GB
DETAILED FLOW

1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM

Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurred) using the “Diagnostic Work Sheet”. (Refer to EC-16, "Diagnostic Work
Sheet".)
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC
1. Check DTC.
2. Perform the following procedure if DTC is displayed.
- Record DTC and freeze frame data. (Print them out with CONSULT-III or GST.)
- Erase DTC. (Refer to EC-106, "Diagnosis Description".)
- Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC and the symptom described by the customer.
(Symptom Table is useful. Refer to EC-407, "Symptom Table".)
3. Check related service bulletins for information.
Are any symptoms described and any DTCs detected?
Symptom is described, DTC is displayed>>GO TO 3.
Symptom is described, DTC is not displayed>>GO TO 4.
Symptom is not described, DTC is displayed>>GO TO 5.
3.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer (except MIL ON).
Also study the normal operation and fail-safe related to the symptom. Refer to EC-411, "Description" and EC-
392, "Fail-safe".
Diagnosis Work Sheet is useful to verify the incident.
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.
>> GO TO 5.
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer.
392, "Fail-safe".
>> GO TO 6.
5.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for the displayed DTC, and then check that DTC is detected
again.
If two or more DTCs are detected, refer to EC-394, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" and determine trouble
diagnosis order.
NOTE:
• Freeze frame data is useful if the DTC is not detected.
• Perform Component Function Check if DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE is not included on Service
Manual. This simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC cannot be detected during
this check.
If the result of Component Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC by DTC CONFIR-
MATION PROCEDURE.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> Check according to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident".
6.PERFORM BASIC INSPECTION
Perform EC-17, "BASIC INSPECTION : Special Repair Requirement".
Will CONSULT-III be used?

YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 9. A
7.PERFORM “SPEC” OF “DATA MONITOR” MODE
With CONSULT-III EC
Check that “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “B/FUEL SCHDL”, “A/F ALPHA-B1” and “A/F ALPHA-B2” are within the SP
value using “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Refer to EC-128, "Component Function
Check".
Are they within the SP value? C
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> GO TO 8.
D
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-129, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is a malfunctioning part detected? E
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> GO TO 9.
9.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM TABLE F
Detect malfunctioning system according to EC-407, "Symptom Table" based on the confirmed symptom in
step 4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptoms.
G
>> GO TO 10.
10.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE H
Inspect according to Diagnostic Procedure of the system.
NOTE:
The Diagnostic Procedure in EC section described based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit inspection I
is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. For details, refer to “Circuit Inspection” in GI-
38, "Circuit Inspection".
Is a malfunctioning part detected? J
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> Monitor input data from related sensors or check voltage of related ECM terminals using CON-
SULT-III. Refer to EC-363, "Reference Value". K
11.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART
1. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
2. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnostic Procedure again after repair and replace- L
ment.
3. Check DTC. If DTC is displayed, erase it, refer to EC-106, "Diagnosis Description".
M
>> GO TO 12.
12.FINAL CHECK
N
When DTC was detected in step 2, perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE or Overall Function Check
again, and then check that the malfunction have been completely repaired.
When symptom was described from the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and check that
the symptom is not detected. O
Is DTC detected and does symptom remain?
YES-1 >> DTC is detected: GO TO 10.
YES-2 >> Symptom remains: GO TO 6. P
NO >> Before returning the vehicle to the customer, always erase unnecessary DTC in ECM and TCM
(Transmission Control Module). (Refer to EC-106, "Diagnosis Description".) If the completion of
SRT is needed, drive vehicle under the specific DRIVING PATTERN in EC-398,
"How to Set SRT Code".

Diagnostic Work Sheet INFOID:0000000004690346
DESCRIPTION
There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction of
engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can make trou-
bleshooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about symptoms. It is
important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a cus-
tomer complaint.
Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the WORKSHEET SAMPLE
below in order to organize all the information for troubleshooting.
Some conditions may cause the MIL illuminate or blink, and DTC to
be detected. Examples:
• Vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire.
SEF907L
• Fuel filler cap was left off or incorrectly screwed on, allowing fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere.
WORKSHEET SAMPLE
MTBL0017

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
A
BASIC INSPECTION
BASIC INSPECTION : Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000004690347
EC
1.INSPECTION START
1. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for
scheduled maintenance. C
2. Open engine hood and check the following:
- Harness connectors for improper connections
- Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut D
- Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections
- Hoses and ducts for leakage
- Air cleaner clogging E
- Gasket
3. Check that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied.
- Head lamp switch is OFF.
- Air conditioner switch is OFF. F
- Rear window defogger switch is OFF.
SEF983U
- Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc.
G
4. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature
indicator points to the middle of gauge.
Check that engine stays below 1,000 rpm. H
J
SEF976U
5. Run engine at approximately 2,000 rpm for approximately 2 min- K

utes under no load.
6. Check that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-III or GST.
Are any DTCs detected? L
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3.
M
SEF977U N
2.REPAIR OR REPLACE
Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding Diagnostic Procedure. O
>> GO TO 3
3.CHECK IDLE SPEED P
1. Run engine at approximately 2,000 rpm for approximately 2 minutes under no load.

2. Rev engine between 2,000 and 3,000 rpm 2 or 3 times under no
load, then run engine at idle speed for approximately 1 minute.
3. Check idle speed.
For procedure, refer to EC-20, "IDLE SPEED : Special Repair
Requirement".
For specification, refer to EC-421, "Idle Speed".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> GO TO 4.
PBIA8513J
4.PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING

1. Stop engine.
2. Perform EC-21, "ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Require-
ment".
>> GO TO 5.
5.PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING
Perform EC-22, "THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement".
>> GO TO 6.
6.PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
Perform EC-22, "IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement".
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Follow the instruction of Idle Air Volume Learning. Then GO TO 4.
7.CHECK IDLE SPEED AGAIN
1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
For procedure, refer to EC-20, "IDLE SPEED : Special Repair Requirement".
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> GO TO 8.
8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the Following.
• Check camshaft position sensor (PHASE) and circuit. Refer to EC-233, "Diagnosis Procedure".
• Check crankshaft position sensor (POS) and circuit. Refer to EC-229, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part.Then GO TO 4.
9.CHECK ECM FUNCTION
1. Substitute with a non-malfunctioning ECM to check ECM function. (ECM may be the cause of the incident,
although this is rare.)
2. Perform initialization of NVIS (NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to
SEC-12, "ECM RECOMMUNICATING FUNCTION : Description".
>> GO TO 4.
10.CHECK IGNITION TIMING
1. Run engine at idle.
2. Check ignition timing with a timing light.

For procedure, refer to EC-21, "IGNITION TIMING : Special Repair Requirement".
For specification, refer to EC-421, "Ignition Timing". A
YES >> GO TO 19.
NO >> GO TO 11. EC
11. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
1. Stop engine.
C
ment".
D
>> GO TO 12.
Perform EC-22, "THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement". E
>> GO TO 13.
F
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully? G
YES >> GO TO 14.
14.CHECK IDLE SPEED AGAIN H

For procedure, refer to EC-20, "IDLE SPEED : Special Repair Requirement". I
YES >> GO TO 15. J
NO >> GO TO 17.
15.CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN K
L
For specification, refer to EC-421, "Ignition Timing".
YES >> GO TO 19. M
NO >> GO TO 16.
16.CHECK TIMING CHAIN INSTALLATION
Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-54, "Removal and Installation". N
YES >> GO TO 17.
NO >> Repair the timing chain installation.Then GO TO 4. O
Check the following. P
YES >> GO TO 18.
EC-20, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement".
>> GO TO 4.
19.INSPECTION END
If ECM is replaced during this Basic Inspection procedure, perform EC-20, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN
REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement".
>> INSPECTION END

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Description
INFOID:0000000004690348
When replacing ECM, the following procedure must be performed.

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Re-
quirement INFOID:0000000004690349
1.PERFORM INITIALIZATION OF NVIS (NATS) SYSTEM AND REGISTRATION OF ALL NVIS (NATS) IGNI-
TION KEY IDS
Refer to SEC-12, "ECM RECOMMUNICATING FUNCTION : Special Repair Requirement".
>> GO TO 2.
Refer to EC-21, "ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement".
>> GO TO 3.
Refer to EC-22, "THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement".
>> GO TO 4.
Refer to EC-22, "IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement".
>> END
IDLE SPEED
IDLE SPEED : Description INFOID:0000000004690350
This describes how to check the idle speed. For the actual procedure, follow the instructions in “BASIC
INSPECTION”.
IDLE SPEED : Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000004690351
1.CHECK IDLE SPEED

With CONSULT-III
Check idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
With GST
Check idle speed with Service $01 of GST.

>> INSPECTION END A

IGNITION TIMING
IGNITION TIMING : Description INFOID:0000000004690352 EC
This describes how to check the ignition timing. For the actual procedure, follow the instructions in “BASIC
INSPECTION”.
C
IGNITION TIMING : Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000004690353
1.CHECK IGNITION TIMING D

1. Attach timing light to loop wire as shown.
- Timing light (A)
- : Vehicle front E
G
JMBIA1388ZZ
2. Check ignition timing. H
>> INSPECTION END

I
K
JMBIA1135GB
ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING

ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING : Description INFOID:0000000004690354 L
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is a function of ECM to learn the fully released position of the
accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each M
time the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected.
ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Re-
N
1.START
O
1. Check that accelerator pedal is fully released.
2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2 seconds. P
>> END
THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING

THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING : Description INFOID:0000000004690356
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is a function of ECM to learn the fully closed position of the throttle
valve by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time the harness con-
nector of electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected.
THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement
INFOID:0000000004690357
1.START
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
Check that throttle valve moves during the above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound.
>> END
IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING : Description INFOID:0000000004690358
Idle Air Volume Learning is a function of ECM to learn the idle air volume that keeps engine idle speed within
the specific range. It must be performed under the following conditions:
• Each time the electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.
• Idle speed or ignition timing is out of the specification.
IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000004690359
1.PRECONDITIONING
Check that all of the following conditions are satisfied.
Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment.
• Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle)
• Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100°C (158 - 212°F)
• Selector lever position: P or N
• Electric load switch: OFF
(Air conditioner, head lamp, rear window defogger)
- For vehicle equipped with daytime light systems, perform one of the following procedures before
starting engine not to illuminate headlamps.
• Apply parking brake
• Set lighting switch to the 1st position
• Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)
• Vehicle speed: Stopped
• Transmission: Warmed-up
- With CONSULT-III: Drive vehicle until “ATF TEMP SEN” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “CVT” system indi-
cates less than 0.9 V.
- Without CONSULT-III: Drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III
ment".
2. Perform EC-22, "THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement".
4. Select “IDLE AIR VOL LEARN” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
5. Touch “START” and wait 20 seconds.
Is “CMPLT” displayed on CONSULT-III screen?
YES >> GO TO 4.

NO >> GO TO 5.
3.PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING A
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE: EC
• It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
• It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit has
a malfunction.
1. Perform EC-21, "ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Require- C
ment".
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. D
5. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch ON and wait 3 seconds.
6. Repeat the following procedure quickly 5 times within 5 seconds.
- Fully depress the accelerator pedal. E
- Fully release the accelerator pedal.
7. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops blinking
and turns ON. F
8. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turns ON.
9. Start engine and let it idle.
10. Wait 20 seconds.
G
SEC897C
J
>> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK IDLE SPEED AND IGNITION TIMING K
Rev up the engine 2 or 3 times and check that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications.
For procedure, refer to EC-20, "IDLE SPEED : Special Repair Requirement" and EC-21, "IGNITION TIMING :
Special Repair Requirement". L
For specifications, refer to EC-421, "Idle Speed" and EC-421, "Ignition Timing".
YES >> INSPECTION END M
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART-I
Check the following N
• Check that throttle valve is fully closed.
• Check PCV valve operation.
• Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. O
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part. P
6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART-II
Engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of
the incident.
It is useful to perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE”. Refer to EC-128, "Description".
If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the incident and
perform Idle Air Volume Learning again:

• Engine stalls.
• Erroneous idle.
>> INSPECTION END

MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE CLEAR
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE CLEAR : Description INFOID:0000000004690360
This describes show to erase the mixture ratio self-learning value. For the actual procedure, follow the instruc-
tions in “Diagnosis Procedure”.
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE CLEAR : Special Repair Requirement
INFOID:0000000004690361
1.START
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Clear mixture ratio self-learning value by touching “CLEAR”.
With GST
2. Turn ignition switch OFF.
3. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
6. Select Service $03 with GST. Check that DTC P0102 is detected.
7. Select Service $04 with GST to erase the DTC P0102.
>> END

< FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS > [VQ35DE (TYPE 1)]
FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS A
System Diagram INFOID:0000000004690362
EC
JMBIA2095GB

System Description INFOID:0000000004690363
ECM performs various controls such as fuel injection control and ignition timing control.
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000004690364
JMBIA1824ZZ
1. Intake valve timing control solenoid 2. Intake valve timing control solenoid 3. Electronic controlled engine mount
valve (bank 1) valve (bank 2) control solenoid valve
4. Fuel injector (bank 2) 5. Cooling fan motor-2 6. A/F sensor 1 (bank 2)
7. Ignition coil (with power transistor) 8. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) 9. Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
and spark plug (bank 2) (bank 2)
10. Engine coolant temperature sensor 11. Cooling fan motor-1 12. ECM
13. Refrigerant pressure sensor 14. Battery current sensor 15. Cooling fan relay-2
16. IPDM E/R 17. Cooling fan relay-3 18. Mass air flow sensor (with intake air
temperature sensor)
19. Electric throttle control actuator 20. Power valve actuator 2 21. EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve
22. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) 23. Ignition coil (with power transistor) 24. A/F sensor 1 (bank 1)
(bank 1) and spark plug (bank 1)
25. Fuel injector (bank 1) 26. VIAS control solenoid valve 1 and 2 27. Power valve actuator 1

EC
JMBIA1374ZZ
D
1. Mass air flow sensor (with intake air 2. Electric throttle control actuator
temperature sensor)
: Vehicle front
E
H
JMBIA1110ZZ
1. Ignition coil (with power transistor) 2. Fuel injector (bank 1) 3. Fuel injector (bank 2) I
and spark plug (bank 1)
4. Ignition coil (with power transistor) 5. Knock sensor (bank 2) 6. Knock sensor (bank 1)
J
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1377ZZ
N
1. Crankshaft position sensor (POS) 2. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) 3. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
(bank 2) (bank 1)
: Vehicle front
O

JMBIA1112ZZ
1. Cooling fan motor-1 2. Cooling fan motor-1 harness con- 3. Cooling fan motor-2 harness con-
nector nector
4. Cooling fan motor-2 5. Engine coolant temperature sensor
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1378ZZ
1. Refrigerant pressure sensor 2. Battery current sensor

: Vehicle front
JMBIA1689ZZ
1. ECM 2. Cooling fan relay-3 3. Fuel pump fuse

4. Cooling fan relay-2 5. IPDM E/R
: Vehicle front

EC
JMBIA1832GB
JMBIA1116ZZ I
1. A/F sensor 1 (bank 1) harness con- 2. A/F sensor 1 (bank 1) 3. A/F sensor 1 (bank 2) harness con-
nector nector
J
4. A/F sensor 1 (bank 2)
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1380ZZ N
1. HO2S2 (bank 1) 2. HO2S2 (bank 2) 3. HO2S2 (bank 2) harness connector

4. Tie-rod (RH) 5. Power steering pressure sensor 6. HO2S2 (bank 1) harness connector O
: Vehicle front

JMBIA2057ZZ
1. Electronic controlled engine mount 2. VIAS control solenoid valve 1 3. VIAS control solenoid valve 2
control solenoid valve
4. EVAP canister purge volume control
solenoid valve
JMBIA1763ZZ
1. Intake valve timing control solenoid 2. Intake valve timing control solenoid 3. Power steering oil pump
valve (bank 1) valve (bank 2)
4. Engine oil temperature sensor
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1825ZZ
1. EVAP canister 2. Data link connector

: Vehicle front
JMBIA1384ZZ

1. Stop lamp switch 2. ASCD brake switch 3. Accelerator pedal position sensor A
EC
D
JMBIA1120ZZ
1. ASCD steering switch 2. CANCEL switch 3. RESUME/ACCELERATE switch E

4. SET/COAST switch 5. MAIN switch
JMBIA1385ZZ
I
1. Fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump 2. Fuel pressure regulator 3. Fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump
harness connector
: Vehicle front J
Component Description INFOID:0000000004690365
K
Component Reference
A/F sensor 1 EC-167, "Description"
L
A/F sensor 1 heater EC-144, "Description"
Accelerator pedal position sensor EC-311, "Description"
ASCD brake switch EC-283, "Description" M
ASCD steering switch EC-280, "Description"
Battery current sensor EC-268, "Description"
N
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) EC-232, "Description"
Cooling fan motor EC-332, "Description"
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) EC-228, "Description" O
Electric throttle control actuator EC-309, "Description"
Electronic controlled engine mount EC-339, "Description"
Engine coolant temperature sensor EC-161, "Description" P
Engine oil temperature sensor EC-213, "Description"
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve EC-241, "Description"
Fuel injector EC-342, "Description"
Fuel pump EC-345, "Description"
Heated oxygen sensor 2 EC-182, "Description"

Component Reference
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater EC-147, "Description"
Ignition coil with power transistor EC-349, "Description"
Intake air temperature sensor EC-158, "Description"
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve EC-150, "Description"
Knock sensor EC-225, "Description"
Mass air flow sensor EC-153, "Description"
PCV valve EC-355, "Description"
Power steering pressure sensor EC-246, "Description"
Power valves 1 and 2 EC-359, "Description"
Refrigerant pressure sensor EC-356, "Description"
Stop lamp switch EC-298, "Description"
TCM EC-255, "Description"
Throttle control motor EC-307, "Description"
Throttle control motor relay EC-301, "Description"
Throttle position sensor EC-164, "Description"
VIAS control solenoid valve 1 EC-292, "Description"

MULTIPORT FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
A
EC
JMBIA1833GB
I
J
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART
Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator

K
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed*3
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Piston position
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air L
Intake air temperature sensor Intake air temperature
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature
M
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Throttle position sensor Throttle position
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Fuel injection N
TCM Gear position & mixture ratio Fuel injector
control
Battery Battery voltage*3
O
Knock sensor Engine knocking condition
Power steering pressure sensor Power steering operation
Heated oxygen sensor 2*1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas P

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) VDC/TCS operation command*2
Combination meter Vehicle speed*2
BCM Air conditioner operation*2
*1: This sensor is not used to control the engine system under normal conditions.
*2: This signal is sent to the ECM via the CAN communication line.

*3: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the length of
time the valve remains open (injection pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a program value in the
ECM memory. The program value is preset by engine operating conditions. These conditions are determined
by input signals (for engine speed and intake air) from the crankshaft position sensor (POS), camshaft position
sensor (PHASE) and the mass air flow sensor.
VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION
In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under various operat-
ing conditions as listed below.
<Fuel increase>
• During warm-up
• When starting the engine
• During acceleration
• Hot-engine operation
• When selector lever position is changed from N to D
• High-load, high-speed operation
<Fuel decrease>
• During deceleration
• During high engine speed operation
MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP CONTROL)
PBIB3020E
The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air-fuel mixture ratio for driveability and emission control.
The three way catalyst (manifold) can better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions. This system uses A/F sen-
sor 1 in the exhaust manifold to monitor whether the engine operation is rich or lean. The ECM adjusts the
injection pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. For more information about A/F sensor 1, refer to
EC-167, "Description". This maintains the mixture ratio within the range of stoichiometric (ideal air-fuel mix-
ture).
This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition.
Heated oxygen sensor 2 is located downstream of the three way catalyst (manifold). Even if the switching
characteristics of A/F sensor 1 shift, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the signal from heated
oxygen sensor 2.
• Open Loop Control
The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects any of the following conditions. Feedback
control stops in order to maintain stabilized fuel combustion.
- Deceleration and acceleration
- High-load, high-speed operation
- Malfunction of A/F sensor 1 or its circuit
- Insufficient activation of A/F sensor 1 at low engine coolant temperature
- High engine coolant temperature
- During warm-up
- After shifting from N to D
- When starting the engine
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL
The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture ratio signal transmitted from A/F sensor 1.
This feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the basic mixture ratio as close to the theoret-
ical mixture ratio as possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily controlled as originally

designed. Both manufacturing differences (i.e., mass air flow sensor hot wire) and characteristic changes dur-
ing operation (i.e., fuel injector clogging) directly affect mixture ratio. A
Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical mixture ratios is monitored in this system. This is
then computed in terms of “injection pulse duration” to automatically compensate for the difference between
the two ratios.
EC
“Fuel trim” refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection duration. Fuel trim
includes “short-term fuel trim” and “long-term fuel trim”.
“Short-term fuel trim” is the short-term fuel compensation used to maintain the mixture ratio at its theoretical
value. The signal from A/F sensor 1 indicates whether the mixture ratio is RICH or LEAN compared to the the- C
oretical value. The signal then triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the mixture ratio is rich, and an increase in
fuel volume if it is lean.
“Long-term fuel trim” is overall fuel compensation carried out over time to compensate for continual deviation D
of the “short-term fuel trim” from the central value. Continual deviation will occur due to individual engine differ-
ences, wear over time and changes in the usage environment.
FUEL INJECTION TIMING E
SEF179U
H
Two types of systems are used.
• Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the ignition order. This system is
used when the engine is running. I
• Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected simultaneously into all six cylinders twice each engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals of
the same width are simultaneously transmitted from the ECM. J
The six injectors will then receive the signals 2 times for each engine cycle.
This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the fail-safe system (CPU) is operating.
FUEL SHUT-OFF K
Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration, operation of the engine at excessively high speeds or oper-
ation of the vehicle at excessively high speeds.
L

JMBIA1824ZZ
temperature sensor)
solenoid valve

EC
JMBIA1374ZZ
D
temperature sensor)
: Vehicle front
E
H
JMBIA1110ZZ
J
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1377ZZ
N
(bank 2) (bank 1)
: Vehicle front
O

JMBIA1112ZZ
nector nector
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1378ZZ

: Vehicle front
JMBIA1689ZZ

: Vehicle front

EC
JMBIA1832GB
JMBIA1116ZZ I
nector nector
J
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1380ZZ N

: Vehicle front

JMBIA2057ZZ
solenoid valve
JMBIA1763ZZ
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1825ZZ

: Vehicle front
JMBIA1384ZZ

EC
D
JMBIA1120ZZ

JMBIA1385ZZ
I
harness connector
: Vehicle front J
K
Component Reference
L
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) EC-228, "Description" M
Engine coolant temperature sensor EC-161, "Description"
N
Knock sensor EC-225, "Description" O
TCM EC-255, "Description" P

ELECTRIC IGNITION SYSTEM
JMBIA1834GB

Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air
Ignition timing Ignition coil
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position control (with power transistor)
TCM Gear position
Knock sensor Engine knocking
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Ignition order: 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6
The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best air-fuel ratio for every running condition of the
engine. The ignition timing data is stored in the ECM.
The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width and camshaft position sensor (PHASE) sig-
nal. Computing this information, ignition signals are transmitted to the power transistor.
During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by the ECM according to the other data stored in
the ECM.
• At starting
• During warm-up
• At idle
• At low battery voltage
The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies. The basic ignition timing is programmed
within the anti-knocking zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard system does not

operate under normal driving conditions. If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition.
The signal is transmitted to the ECM. The ECM retards the ignition timing to eliminate the knocking condition. A
EC
L
JMBIA1824ZZ
1. Intake valve timing control solenoid 2. Intake valve timing control solenoid 3. Electronic controlled engine mount M
7. Ignition coil (with power transistor) 8. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) 9. Crankshaft position sensor (POS) N
13. Refrigerant pressure sensor 14. Battery current sensor 15. Cooling fan relay-2 O
temperature sensor)
solenoid valve P

JMBIA1374ZZ
temperature sensor)
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1110ZZ
1. Ignition coil (with power transistor) 2. Fuel injector (bank 1) 3. Fuel injector (bank 2)
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1377ZZ
(bank 2) (bank 1)
: Vehicle front

EC
JMBIA1112ZZ
D
nector nector
E
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1378ZZ
I
: Vehicle front
J
JMBIA1689ZZ
M

4. Cooling fan relay-2 5. IPDM E/R N
: Vehicle front

JMBIA1832GB
JMBIA1116ZZ
nector nector
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1380ZZ

4. Tie-rod (RH) 5. Power steering pressure sensor 6. HO2S2 (bank 1) harness connector
: Vehicle front

EC
JMBIA2057ZZ
D
solenoid valve E
JMBIA1763ZZ
1. Intake valve timing control solenoid 2. Intake valve timing control solenoid 3. Power steering oil pump I
: Vehicle front J
JMBIA1825ZZ
N
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1384ZZ

1. Stop lamp switch 2. ASCD brake switch 3. Accelerator pedal position sensor
JMBIA1120ZZ
1. ASCD steering switch 2. CANCEL switch 3. RESUME/ACCELERATE switch

JMBIA1385ZZ
harness connector
: Vehicle front
Component Reference
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) EC-228, "Description"
Ignition signal EC-349, "Description"

AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL
A
EC
JMBIA1835GB
I
J

K
Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Engine speed*2
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature L

Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position IPDM E/R
↓
Battery Battery voltage*2 Air conditioner
Air conditioner relay
cut control M
Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure ↓
Compressor
Combination meter Vehicle speed*1 N
BCM 1
Air conditioner ON signal*
O
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This system improves engine operation when the air conditioner is used. P
Under the following conditions, the air conditioner is turned OFF.
• When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed.
• When cranking the engine.
• At high engine speeds.
• When the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high.
• When operating power steering during low engine speed or low vehicle speed.
• When engine speed is excessively low.
• When refrigerant pressure is excessively low or high.

JMBIA1824ZZ
temperature sensor)
solenoid valve

EC
JMBIA1374ZZ
D
temperature sensor)
: Vehicle front
E
H
JMBIA1110ZZ
J
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1377ZZ
N
(bank 2) (bank 1)
: Vehicle front
O

JMBIA1112ZZ
nector nector
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1378ZZ

: Vehicle front
JMBIA1689ZZ

: Vehicle front

EC
JMBIA1832GB
JMBIA1116ZZ I
nector nector
J
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1380ZZ N

: Vehicle front

JMBIA2057ZZ
solenoid valve
JMBIA1763ZZ
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1825ZZ

: Vehicle front
JMBIA1384ZZ

EC
D
JMBIA1120ZZ

JMBIA1385ZZ
I
harness connector
: Vehicle front J
K
Component Reference
L
Engine coolant temperature sensor EC-161, "Description" M
N

AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
JMBIA1826GB

ASCD brake switch Brake pedal operation
Stop lamp switch Brake pedal operation
ASCD steering switch ASCD steering switch operation ASCD vehicle speed Electric throttle control
Gear position control actuator
TCM
Powertrain revolution*
Combination meter Vehicle speed*
*: This signal is sent to the ECM via the CAN communication line
BASIC ASCD SYSTEM

Refer to Owner's Manual for ASCD operating instructions.
Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) allows a driver to keep vehicle at predetermined constant speed
without depressing accelerator pedal. Driver can set vehicle speed in advance between approximately 40 km/
h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH).
ECM controls throttle angle of electric throttle control actuator to regulate engine speed.
Operation status of ASCD is indicated by CRUISE lamp on combination meter. If any malfunction occurs in the
ASCD system, it automatically deactivates control.
NOTE:
Always drive vehicle in a safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws.
SET OPERATION
Press MAIN switch. (The CRUISE lamp on combination meter illuminates.)
When vehicle speed reaches a desired speed between approximately 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89
MPH), press SET/COAST switch.
ACCELERATE OPERATION
If the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch is pressed during cruise control driving, increase the vehicle speed until
the switch is released or vehicle speed reaches maximum speed controlled by the system.
And then ASCD will maintain the new set speed.
CANCEL OPERATION
When any of following conditions exist, cruise operation will be canceled.
• CANCEL switch is pressed
• More than 2 switches on ASCD steering switch are pressed at the same time (Set speed will be cleared)
• Brake pedal is depressed

• Selector lever position is changed to N, P or R
• Vehicle speed decreased to 13 km/h (8 MPH) lower than the set speed A
• TCS system is operated
• CVT control system has a malfunction. Refer to EC-290, "Description".
• Engine coolant temperature is slightly higher than the normal operating temperature
EC
When the ECM detects any of the following conditions, the ECM will cancel the cruise operation and inform
the driver by blinking indicator lamp.
• Malfunction for some self-diagnoses regarding ASCD control: CRUISE will blink quickly.
If MAIN switch is turned to OFF while ASCD is activated, all of ASCD operations will be canceled and vehicle C
speed memory will be erased.
COAST OPERATION
When the SET/COAST switch is pressed during cruise control driving, decrease vehicle set speed until the D
switch is released. And then ASCD will maintain the new set speed.
RESUME OPERATION
E
When the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch is pressed after canceling operation other than pressing the MAIN
switch, vehicle speed will return to last set speed. To resume vehicle set speed, vehicle condition must meet
following conditions.
• Brake pedal is released F
• Selector lever position is other than P and N
• Vehicle speed is greater than 40 km/h (25 MPH) and less than 144 km/h (89 MPH)
G
JMBIA1824ZZ

temperature sensor)
solenoid valve
JMBIA1374ZZ
temperature sensor)
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1110ZZ
: Vehicle front

EC
JMBIA1377ZZ
D
(bank 2) (bank 1)
: Vehicle front
E
H
JMBIA1112ZZ
1. Cooling fan motor-1 2. Cooling fan motor-1 harness con- 3. Cooling fan motor-2 harness con- I
nector nector
: Vehicle front
J
M
JMBIA1378ZZ
1. Refrigerant pressure sensor 2. Battery current sensor N

: Vehicle front
JMBIA1689ZZ


: Vehicle front
JMBIA1832GB
JMBIA1116ZZ
nector nector
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1380ZZ

: Vehicle front

EC
JMBIA2057ZZ
D
solenoid valve E
JMBIA1763ZZ
: Vehicle front J
JMBIA1825ZZ
N
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1384ZZ

JMBIA1120ZZ

JMBIA1385ZZ
harness connector
: Vehicle front
Component Reference
ASCD brake switch EC-283, "Description"
ASCD indicator EC-331, "Description"

CAN COMMUNICATION
CAN COMMUNICATION
A
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul- EC
tiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many elec-
tronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. C
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
Refer to LAN-25, "CAN System Specification Chart", about CAN communication for detail.
D

COOLING FAN CONTROL
COOLING FAN CONTROL
JMBIA1857GB

Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature IPDM E/R

↓
Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure Cooling fan
Cooling fan relay
control
Battery Battery voltage*1 ↓
Cooling fan motor
BCM Air conditioner ON signal*2
*1: The ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
*2: This signal is sent to ECM via the CAN communication line.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refrigerant
pressure, and air conditioner ON signal. The control system has 4-step control [HIGH/MIDDLE/LOW/OFF].

COOLING FAN CONTROL
Cooling Fan Operation
A
EC
H
JMBIA0179GB
Cooling Fan Relay Operation

The ECM controls cooling fan relays in the IPDM E/R via the CAN communication line. I
Cooling fan relay
Cooling fan speed
1 2 3 J
Stop (OFF) OFF OFF OFF
Low (LOW) ON OFF OFF
Middle (MID) OFF ON OFF K
High (HI) OFF ON ON

COOLING FAN CONTROL
JMBIA1824ZZ
temperature sensor)
solenoid valve

COOLING FAN CONTROL
EC
JMBIA1374ZZ
D
temperature sensor)
: Vehicle front
E
H
JMBIA1110ZZ
J
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1377ZZ
N
(bank 2) (bank 1)
: Vehicle front
O

COOLING FAN CONTROL
JMBIA1112ZZ
nector nector
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1378ZZ

: Vehicle front
JMBIA1689ZZ

: Vehicle front

COOLING FAN CONTROL
EC
JMBIA1832GB
JMBIA1116ZZ I
nector nector
J
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1380ZZ N

: Vehicle front

COOLING FAN CONTROL
JMBIA2057ZZ
solenoid valve
JMBIA1763ZZ
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1825ZZ

: Vehicle front
JMBIA1384ZZ

COOLING FAN CONTROL
EC
D
JMBIA1120ZZ

JMBIA1385ZZ
I
harness connector
: Vehicle front J
K
Component Reference
L

ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT
JMBIA1827GB

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Electronic controlled en-
Engine speed Engine mount
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) gine mount control solenoid
control
Combination meter Vehicle speed* valve
*: This signal is sent to the ECM via the CAN communication line.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The ECM controls the engine mount operation corresponding to the engine speed. The control system has a
2-step control [Soft/Hard]
Vehicle condition Engine mount control

Engine speed: Below 950 rpm Soft
Engine speed: Above 950 rpm Hard
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT LINE DRAWING

EC
L
JMBIA2161ZZ
1. Electronic controlled engine mount 2. Intake manifold collector M

: From next figure
N

JMBIA2072ZZ
1. Front electronic controlled engine mount 2. Rear electronic controlled engine mount
: To previous figure
NOTE:
Do not use soapy water or any type of solvent while installing vacuum hose.

EC
JMBIA1824ZZ
L
4. Fuel injector (bank 2) 5. Cooling fan motor-2 6. A/F sensor 1 (bank 2) M
N
temperature sensor)
O
solenoid valve
(bank 1) and spark plug (bank 1) P

JMBIA1374ZZ
temperature sensor)
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1110ZZ
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1377ZZ
(bank 2) (bank 1)
: Vehicle front

EC
JMBIA1112ZZ
D
nector nector
E
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1378ZZ
I
: Vehicle front
J
JMBIA1689ZZ
M

: Vehicle front

JMBIA1832GB
JMBIA1116ZZ
nector nector
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1380ZZ

: Vehicle front

EC
JMBIA2057ZZ
D
solenoid valve E
JMBIA1763ZZ
: Vehicle front J
JMBIA1825ZZ
N
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1384ZZ

JMBIA1120ZZ

JMBIA1385ZZ
harness connector
: Vehicle front
Component Reference
Electronic controlled engine mount control solenoid valve EC-339, "Description"

EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
A
EC
JMBIA1828GB
G
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART H

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) I
Engine speed*1
J
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas EVAP canister EVAP canister purge vol-
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
(Mixture ratio feedback signal) purge flow control ume control solenoid valve K
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position
L
*1: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. M

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
JMBIA1464GB
The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel
system. This reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister.
The fuel vapor in the sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister which contains activated carbon and the
vapor is stored there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank.
The vapor in the EVAP canister is purged by the air through the purge line to the intake manifold when the
engine is operating. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is controlled by ECM. When the
engine operates, the flow rate of vapor controlled by EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
proportionally regulated as the air flow increases.
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve also shuts off the vapor purge line during decelerating and
idling.
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING

EC
JMBIA1393ZZ
K
1. Intake manifold 2. EVAP canister purge volume control

solenoid valve L
A. From EVAP canister
: Vehicle front
M

JMBIA1829ZZ
1. EVAP canister A. To previous figure B. To/From B in this figure

: Vehicle front
NOTE:
Do not use soapy water or any type of solvent while installing vacuum hose or purge hoses.

EC
JMBIA1824ZZ
L
N
temperature sensor)
O
solenoid valve

JMBIA1374ZZ
temperature sensor)
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1110ZZ
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1377ZZ
(bank 2) (bank 1)
: Vehicle front

EC
JMBIA1112ZZ
D
nector nector
E
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1378ZZ
I
: Vehicle front
J
JMBIA1689ZZ
M

: Vehicle front

JMBIA1832GB
JMBIA1116ZZ
nector nector
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1380ZZ

: Vehicle front

EC
JMBIA2057ZZ
D
solenoid valve E
JMBIA1763ZZ
: Vehicle front J
JMBIA1825ZZ
N
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1384ZZ

JMBIA1120ZZ

JMBIA1385ZZ
harness connector
: Vehicle front
Component Reference

INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
A
EC
D
JMBIA1830GB

E

F
Engine speed and piston position G
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
Intake valve Intake valve timing control
Engine oil temperature sensor Engine oil temperature
timing control solenoid valve
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature H
I
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
N
JMBIA0060GB
This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of the intake
valve. O
The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position, camshaft position, engine speed, and engine coolant
temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the intake valve timing (IVT) control sole-
noid valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open timing of the intake P
valve to increase engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in high-speed range.

JMBIA1824ZZ
temperature sensor)
solenoid valve

EC
JMBIA1374ZZ
D
temperature sensor)
: Vehicle front
E
H
JMBIA1110ZZ
J
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1377ZZ
N
(bank 2) (bank 1)
: Vehicle front
O

JMBIA1112ZZ
nector nector
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1378ZZ

: Vehicle front
JMBIA1689ZZ

: Vehicle front

EC
JMBIA1832GB
JMBIA1116ZZ I
nector nector
J
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1380ZZ N

: Vehicle front

JMBIA2057ZZ
solenoid valve
JMBIA1763ZZ
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1825ZZ

: Vehicle front
JMBIA1384ZZ

EC
D
JMBIA1120ZZ

JMBIA1385ZZ
I
harness connector
: Vehicle front J
K
Component Reference
L
Engine oil temperature sensor EC-213, "Description" M

VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR SYSTEM
JMBIA1831GB

Engine speed*
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature VIAS control solenoid valve 1
VIAS control
VIAS control solenoid valve 2
Battery Battery voltage*
*: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
JMBIA0181GB
In the medium speed range, the ECM sends the ON signal to the VIAS control solenoid valve. This signal
introduces the intake manifold vacuum into the power valve actuator and therefore closes the power valve.

Under this condition, the pressure waves of the exhaust stroke do not disturb the pressure waves of the intake
stroke of each opposite bank. Therefore, charging efficiency is increased together with the effect of the long A
intake passage.
However, in the high speed range, the ECM sends the OFF signal to the VIAS control solenoid valve and the
power valve is opened. Under this condition, the pressure waves of intake stroke are resonant with those of
EC
each opposite bank exhaust stroke. Therefore, charging efficiency is also increased.
In addition, both valves 1 and 2 are opened or closed in other ranges mentioned above. Thus maximum
charging efficiency is obtained for the various driving conditions.
C
VACUUM HOSE DRAWING
O
JMBIA0172ZZ
1. Power valve actuator 1 2. VIAS control solenoid valve 1 3. VIAS control solenoid valve 2
P
4. Power valve actuator 2 5. Intake manifold collector

JMBIA1824ZZ
temperature sensor)
solenoid valve

EC
JMBIA1374ZZ
D
temperature sensor)
: Vehicle front
E
H
JMBIA1110ZZ
J
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1377ZZ
N
(bank 2) (bank 1)
: Vehicle front
O

JMBIA1112ZZ
nector nector
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1378ZZ

: Vehicle front
JMBIA1689ZZ

: Vehicle front

EC
JMBIA1832GB
JMBIA1116ZZ I
nector nector
J
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1380ZZ N

: Vehicle front

JMBIA2057ZZ
solenoid valve
JMBIA1763ZZ
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1825ZZ

: Vehicle front
JMBIA1384ZZ

EC
D
JMBIA1120ZZ

JMBIA1385ZZ
I
harness connector
: Vehicle front J
K
Component Reference
L
Power valve 1 and 2 EC-359, "Description"
N
VIAS control solenoid valve 2 EC-295, "Description" O

ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM
Diagnosis Description INFOID:0000000004690403
INTRODUCTION
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system, which detects malfunctions related to engine sensors or actua-
tors. The ECM also records various emission-related diagnostic information including:
Emission-related diagnostic information Diagnostic service

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Service $03 of ISO 15031-5
Freeze Frame data Service $02 of ISO 15031-5
System Readiness Test (SRT) code Service $01 of ISO 15031-5
1st Trip Diagnostic Trouble Code (1st Trip DTC) Service $07 of ISO 15031-5
1st Trip Freeze Frame data —
Test values and Test limits Service $06 of ISO 15031-5
Calibration ID Service $09 of ISO 15031-5
The above information can be checked using procedures listed in the table below.
×: Applicable —: Not applicable
Freeze 1st trip Freeze

DTC 1st trip DTC SRT code SRT status Test value
Frame data Frame data
CONSULT-III × × × × × × —
GST × × × — × × ×
ECM × ×* — — — × —
*: When DTC and 1st trip DTC simultaneously appear on the display, they cannot be clearly distinguished from each other.
The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on the instrument panel illuminates when the same malfunction is
detected in two consecutive trips (Two trip detection logic), or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode. (Refer to
EC-392, "Fail-safe".)
TWO TRIP DETECTION LOGIC
When a malfunction is detected for the 1st time, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip Freeze Frame data are stored in the
ECM memory. The MIL will not illuminate at this stage. <1st trip>
If the same malfunction is detected again during the next drive, the DTC and Freeze Frame data are stored in
the ECM memory, and the MIL illuminates. The MIL illuminates at the same time when the DTC is stored.
<2nd trip> The “trip” in the “Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is per-
formed during vehicle operation. Specific on board diagnostic items will cause the ECM to illuminate or blink
the MIL, and store DTC and Freeze Frame data, even in the 1st trip, as shown below.
MIL DTC 1st trip DTC
Items 1st trip 2nd trip 2nd trip

1st trip 2nd trip 1st trip
display-
Blinking Illuminate Blinking Illuminate displaying displaying displaying
ing
Misfire (Possible three way catalyst
damage) — DTC: P0300 - P0306 is × — — — — — × —
being detected
Misfire (Possible three way catalyst
damage) — DTC: P0300 - P0306 is — — × — — × — —
being detected
One trip detection diagnoses (Re-
— × — — × — — —
fer to EC-395, "DTC Index".)
Except above — — — × — × × —
DTC AND FREEZE FRAME DATA

DTC and 1st Trip DTC

The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic
result obtained. If the ECM memory was cleared previously, and the 1st trip DTC did not recur, the 1st trip DTC A
will not be displayed.
If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is saved in the ECM memory. The MIL will not
illuminate (two trip detection logic). If the same malfunction is not detected in the 2nd trip (meeting the required
EC
driving pattern), the 1st trip DTC is cleared from the ECM memory. If the same malfunction is detected in the
2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are saved in the ECM memory and the MIL illuminates. In other words,
the DTC is stored in the ECM memory and the MIL illuminates when the same malfunction occurs in two con-
secutive trips. If a 1st trip DTC is stored and a non-diagnostic operation is performed between the 1st and 2nd C
trips, only the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored. For malfunctions that blink or illuminate the MIL during
the 1st trip, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are stored in the ECM memory.
Procedures for clearing the DTC and the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory are described in “How to Erase D
DTC and 1st Trip DTC”.
For malfunctions in which 1st trip DTCs are displayed, refer to EC-395, "DTC Index". These items are
required by legal regulations to continuously monitor the system/component. In addition, the items monitored
non-continuously are also displayed on CONSULT-III. E
1st trip DTC is specified in Service $07 of ISO 15031-5. 1st trip DTC detection occurs without illuminating the
MIL and therefore does not warn the driver of a malfunction. However, 1st trip DTC detection will not prevent
the vehicle from being tested, for example during Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) tests. F
When a 1st trip DTC is detected, check, print out or write down and erase (1st trip) DTC and Freeze Frame
data as specified in Work Flow procedure Step 2, refer to EC-13, "Work Flow". Then perform DTC Confirma-
tion Procedure or Component Function Check to try to duplicate the malfunction. If the malfunction is dupli-
cated, the item requires repair. G
Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
The ECM records the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant tem-
perature, short-term fuel trim, long-term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, absolute throttle position, base H
fuel schedule and intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data.
The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-III or I
GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-III screen, not on the GST.
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority
for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once J
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the fol-
lowing priorities to update the data. K
Priority Items
Freeze frame data Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0306 L
1
Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175
2 Except the above items (Includes CVT related items)
3 1st trip freeze frame data M
For example, the EGR malfunction (Priority: 2) was detected and the freeze frame data was saved in the 2nd
trip. After that when the misfire (Priority: 1) is detected in another trip, the freeze frame data will be updated
from the EGR malfunction to the misfire. The 1st trip freeze frame data is updated each time a different mal- N
function is detected. There is no priority for 1st trip freeze frame data. However, once freeze frame data is
stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze data is no longer stored (because only one freeze frame data or 1st
trip freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM). If freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory and freeze O
frame data with the same priority occurs later, the first (original) freeze frame data remains unchanged in the
ECM memory.
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM mem-
ory is erased. Procedures for clearing the ECM memory are described in “How to Erase DTC and 1st Trip P
DTC”.
How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC
With CONSULT-III
CONSULT-III displays the DTC in “SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT” mode. Examples: P0340, P0850, P1148,
etc.
These DTCs are prescribed by ISO 15031-6.

(CONSULT-III also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
Time data indicates how many times the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC.
If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be [0].
If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be [1t].
With GST
GST (Generic Scan Tool) displays the DTC in Diagnostic Service $03. Examples: P0340, P0850, P1148, etc.
These DTCs are prescribed by ISO 15031-6.
1st trip DTC is displayed in Diagnostic Service $07.
No Tools
The number of blinks of the MIL in the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results) indicates the DTC.
Example: 0340, 0850, 1148, etc.
These DTCs are controlled by NISSAN.
• 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
• Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, GST and the Diagnostic Test Mode II do not indi-
cate whether the malfunction is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to nor-
mal. CONSULT-III can identify malfunction status. Therefore, using CONSULT-III (if available) is
recommended.
How to Erase DTC and 1st Trip DTC
With CONSULT-III
NOTE:
• If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10
seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
• If the DTC is not for CVT related items (see EC-395), skip step 1.
1. Erase DTC in TCM. Refer to TM-39, "Diagnosis Description".
2. Select “ENGINE” with CONSULT-III.
3. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
4. Touch “ERASE”. (DTC in ECM will be erased.)
WITH GST
NOTE:
1. Select Service $04 with GST (Generic Scan Tool).
No Tools
NOTE:
1. Erase DTC in ECM. Refer to How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results).
• If the battery is disconnected, the emission-related diagnostic information will be cleared within 24
hours.
• The following data are cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
- Diagnostic trouble codes
- 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
- Freeze frame data
- 1st trip freeze frame data
- System readiness test (SRT) codes
- Test values
Actual work procedures are explained using a DTC as an example. Be careful so that not only the DTC, but all
of the data listed above, are cleared from the ECM memory during work procedures.
SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE
System Readiness Test (SRT) code is specified in Service $01 of ISO 15031-5.
As part of an enhanced emissions test for Inspection & Maintenance (I/M), certain states require the status of
SRT be used to indicate whether the ECM has completed self-diagnosis of major emission systems and com-
ponents. Completion must be verified in order for the emissions inspection to proceed.
If a vehicle is rejected for a State emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, use
the information in this Service Manual to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
In most cases the ECM will automatically complete its self-diagnosis cycle during normal usage, and the SRT
status will indicate “CMPLT” for each application system. Once set as “CMPLT”, the SRT status remains
“CMPLT” until the self-diagnosis memory is erased.

Occasionally, certain portions of the self-diagnostic test may not be completed as a result of the customer's
normal driving pattern; the SRT will indicate “INCMP” for these items. A
NOTE:
The SRT will also indicate “INCMP” if the self-diagnosis memory is erased for any reason or if the ECM mem-
ory power supply is interrupted for several hours.
EC
If, during the state emissions inspection, the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items, the inspector will con-
tinue with the emissions test. However, if the SRT indicates “INCMP” for one or more of the SRT items the
vehicle is returned to the customer untested.
NOTE: C
If MIL is ON during the state emissions inspection, the vehicle is also returned to the customer untested even
though the SRT indicates “CMPLT” for all test items. Therefore, it is important to check SRT (“CMPLT”) and
DTC (No DTCs) before the inspection. D
SRT Item
The table below shows required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”.
E
SRT item Performance Corresponding
Required self-diagnostic items to set the SRT to “CMPLT”
(CONSULT-III indication) Priority* DTC No.
CATALYST 2 Three way catalyst function P0420, P0430
F
HO2S 2 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 P0133, P0153
Heated oxygen sensor 2 P0137, P0157
Heated oxygen sensor 2 P0138, P0158 G
Heated oxygen sensor 2 P0139, P0159
*: If completion of several SRTs is required, perform driving patterns (DTC confirmation procedure), one by one based on the priority for
models with CONSULT-III.
H
SRT Set Timing

SRT is set as “CMPLT” after self-diagnosis has been performed one or more times. Completion of SRT is
I
done regardless of whether the result is OK or NG. The set timing is different between OK and NG results and
is shown in the table below.
Example J
Self-diagnosis result Ignition cycle
Diagnosis
← ON → OFF ← ON → OFF ← ON → OFF ← ON →
All OK Case 1 P0400 OK (1) — (1) OK (2) — (2) K
P0402 OK (1) — (1) — (1) OK (2)
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2) L
SRT of EGR “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT” “CMPLT”
Case 2 P0400 OK (1) — (1) — (1) — (1)
P0402 — (0) — (0) OK (1) — (1) M
P1402 OK (1) OK (2) — (2) — (2)
SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT” “CMPLT”
N
NG exists Case 3 P0400 OK OK — —
P0402 — — — —
NG O
P1402 NG — NG (Consecutive
NG)
(1st trip) DTC P
1st trip DTC — 1st trip DTC
DTC (= MIL ON)
SRT of EGR “INCMP” “INCMP” “INCMP” “CMPLT”
OK: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is OK.
NG: Self-diagnosis is carried out and the result is NG.
—: Self-diagnosis is not carried out.
When all SRT related self-diagnoses show OK results in a single cycle (Ignition OFF-ON-OFF), the SRT will
indicate “CMPLT”. → Case 1 above

When all SRT related self-diagnoses show OK results through several different cycles, the SRT will indicate
“CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have at least one OK result. → Case 2 above
If one or more SRT related self-diagnoses show NG results in 2 consecutive cycles, the SRT will also indicate
“CMPLT”. → Case 3 above
The table above shows that the minimum number of cycles for setting SRT as “INCMP” is the number one (1)
for each self-diagnosis (Case 1 & 2) or the number two (2) for one of self-diagnoses (Case 3). However, in
preparation for the state emissions inspection, it is unnecessary for each self-diagnosis to be executed twice
(Case 3) for the following reasons:
• The SRT will indicate “CMPLT” at the time the respective self-diagnoses have one (1) OK result.
• The emissions inspection requires “CMPLT” of the SRT only with OK self-diagnosis results.
• During SRT driving pattern, the 1st trip DTC (NG) is detected prior to “CMPLT” of SRT and the self-diagnosis
memory must be erased from the ECM after repair.
• If the 1st trip DTC is erased, all the SRT will indicate “INCMP”.
NOTE:
SRT can be set as “CMPLT” together with the DTC(s). Therefore, DTC check must always be carried out
prior to the state emission inspection even though the SRT indicates “CMPLT”.
SRT Service Procedure
If a vehicle has failed the state emissions inspection due to one or more SRT items indicating “INCMP”, review
the flowchart diagnostic sequence on the next figure.
JMBIA1575GB

How to Display SRT Status
WITH CONSULT-III A
Selecting “SRT STATUS” in “DTC CONFIRMATION” mode with CONSULT-III.
For items whose SRT codes are set, “CMPLT” is displayed on the CONSULT-III screen; for items whose SRT
codes are not set, “INCMP” is displayed. EC
NOTE:
Though displayed on the CONSULT-III screen, “HO2S HTR” is not SRT item.
WITH GST
Selecting Service $01 with GST (Generic Scan Tool) C
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL)

Description D
The MIL is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MIL will illuminate when the ignition switch is turned ON
without the engine running. This is a bulb check. E
If the MIL does not illuminate, check MIL circuit. Refer to EC-
354, "Component Function Check".
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should turn off. F
If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has
detected an engine system malfunction.
G
SAT652J
On Board Diagnostic System Function

The on board diagnostic system has the following three functions. H
Diagnostic Test KEY and ENG. Function Explanation of Function

Mode Status I
Mode I Ignition switch in BULB CHECK This function checks the MIL bulb for damage (blown, open
ON position circuit, etc.).
If the MIL does not illuminate, check MIL circuit.
J
Engine stopped
K
Engine running MALFUNCTION When a malfunction is detected twice in two consecutive L

WARNING driving cycles (two trip detection logic), the MIL will illumi-
nate to inform the driver that a malfunction has been detect-
ed.
The following malfunctions will illuminate or blink the MIL in
M
the 1st trip.
• Misfire (Possible three way catalyst damage)
• One trip detection diagnoses N
Mode II Ignition switch in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC This function allows DTCs and 1st trip DTCs to be read.
ON position RESULTS
Engine stopped
P
Diagnostic Test Mode I — Bulb Check

In this mode, the MIL on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check MIL circuit. Refer to
EC-354, "Component Function Check".
Diagnostic Test Mode I — Malfunction Warning

MIL Condition
ON When the malfunction is detected.
OFF No malfunction.
This DTC number is clarified in Diagnostic Test Mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS)
Diagnostic Test Mode II — Self-diagnostic Results

In this mode, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are indicated by the number of blinks of the MIL as shown below.
The DTC and 1st trip DTC are displayed at the same time. If the MIL does not illuminate in diagnostic test
mode I (Malfunction warning), all displayed items are 1st trip DTCs. If only one code is displayed when the MIL
illuminates in diagnostic test mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS), it is a DTC; if two or more codes are
displayed, they may be either DTCs or 1st trip DTCs. DTC No. is same as that of 1st trip DTC. These uniden-
tified codes can be identified by using the CONSULT-III or GST. A DTC will be used as an example for how to
read a code.
JMBIA1140GB
A particular trouble code can be identified by the number of four-digit numeral blinks as per the following.
Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
Blinks 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 12 13 14 15 16
The length of time the 1,000th-digit numeral blinks on and off is 1.2 seconds consisting of an ON (0.6-sec-
onds) - OFF (0.6-seconds) cycle.
The 100th-digit numeral and lower digit numerals consist of a 0.3-seconds ON and 0.3-seconds OFF cycle.
A change from one digit numeral to another occurs at an interval of 1.0-second OFF. In other words, the later
numeral appears on the display 1.3 seconds after the former numeral has disappeared.
A change from one trouble code to another occurs at an interval of 1.8-seconds OFF.
In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their DTC numbers. The DTC 0000 refers to no mal-
function. (See EC-395, "DTC Index")
How to Switch Diagnostic Test Mode
NOTE:

a malfunction. A
• ECM always returns to Diagnostic Test Mode I after the ignition switch is turned OFF.
HOW TO SET DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS)
EC
- Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
3. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it depressed for approx. 10 seconds until the C
MIL starts blinking.
4. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). D
NOTE:
Wait until the same DTC (or 1st trip DTC) appears to completely confirm all DTCs.
G
PBIB0092E
HOW TO ERASE DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS)

1. Set ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). Refer to “How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II H
(Self-diagnostic Results)”.
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it depressed for more than 10 seconds.
The emission-related diagnostic information has been erased from the backup memory in the ECM.
I
3. Fully release the accelerator pedal, and confirm the DTC 0000 is displayed.
• If the battery is disconnected, the DTC will be lost from the backup memory within 24 hours.
• Do not erase the stored memory before starting trouble diagnoses.
J
OBD System Operation Chart
Relationship Between MIL, 1st Trip DTC, DTC, and Detectable Items
• When a malfunction is detected for the 1st time, the 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip freeze frame data are K
stored in the ECM memory.
• When the same malfunction is detected in two consecutive trips, the DTC and the freeze frame data are
stored in the ECM memory, and the MIL will come on.
L
• The MIL will turn off after the vehicle is driven 3 times (driving pattern B) with no malfunction. A drive is
counted only when the recorded driving pattern is met (as stored in the ECM). If another malfunction occurs
while counting, the counter will reset.
• The DTC and the freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 40 times (driving pattern A) with- M
out the same malfunction recurring (except for Misfire and Fuel Injection System). For Misfire and Fuel Injec-
tion System, the DTC and freeze frame data will be stored until the vehicle is driven 80 times (driving pattern
C) without the same malfunction recurring. The “TIME” in “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS” mode of CON-
N
SULT-III will count the number of times the vehicle is driven.
• The 1st trip DTC is not displayed when the self-diagnosis results in OK for the 2nd trip.
Summary Chart
O
Items Fuel Injection System Misfire Other
MIL (turns off) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B) 3 (pattern B)
P
DTC, Freeze Frame Data (no
80 (pattern C) 80 (pattern C) 40 (pattern A)
display)
1st Trip DTC (clear) 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern C), *1 1 (pattern B)
1st Trip Freeze Frame Data
*1, *2 *1, *2 1 (pattern B)
(clear)

For details about patterns B and C under “Fuel Injection System” and “Misfire”, see “EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR
“MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”.
For details about patterns A and B under Other, see “EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY
DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM”.
*1: Clear timing is at the moment OK is detected.
*2: Clear timing is when the same malfunction is detected in the 2nd trip.
Relationship Between MIL, DTC, 1st Trip DTC and Driving Patterns for “Misfire <Exhaust Quality Deterioration>”,
“Fuel Injection System”
JMBIA1417GB
*1: When the same malfunction is de- *2: MIL will turn off after vehicle is driven *3: When the same malfunction is de-
tected in two consecutive trips, MIL 3 times (pattern B) without any mal- tected in two consecutive trips, the
will illuminate. functions. DTC and the freeze frame data will be
stored in ECM.

*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data *5: When a malfunction is detected for *6: The 1st trip DTC and the 1st trip
will not be displayed any longer after the 1st time, the 1st trip DTC and the freeze frame data will be cleared at A
vehicle is driven 80 times (pattern C) 1st trip freeze frame data will be the moment OK is detected.
without the same malfunction. (The stored in ECM.
DTC and the freeze frame data still
remain in ECM.) EC
*7: When the same malfunction is de- *8: 1st trip DTC will be cleared when ve-
tected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip hicle is driven once (pattern C) with-
freeze frame data will be cleared. out the same malfunction after DTC C
is stored in ECM.
Explanation for Driving Patterns for “Misfire <Exhaust Quality Deterioration>”, “Fuel Injection System”
<Driving Pattern B> D
Driving pattern B means the vehicle operation as per the following:
All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system.
• The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern.
E
• The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunction.
• The MIL will turn off when the B counter reaches 3. (*2 in “OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART”)
<Driving Pattern C>
Driving pattern C means operating vehicle as per the following: F
The following conditions should be satisfied at the same time:
Engine speed: (Engine speed in the freeze frame data) ± 375 rpm
Calculated load value: (Calculated load value in the freeze frame data) x (1 ± 0.1) [%]
G
Engine coolant temperature (T) condition:
• When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F), T should be lower than 70°C (158°F).
• When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F), T should be higher than or equal to
70°C (158°F). H
Example:
If the stored freeze frame data is as per the following:
Engine speed: 850 rpm, Calculated load value: 30%, Engine coolant temperature: 80°C (176°F) I
To be satisfied with driving pattern C, the vehicle should run under the following conditions:
Engine speed: 475 - 1,225 rpm, Calculated load value: 27 - 33%, Engine coolant temperature: more than 70°C
(158°F)
• The C counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of vehicle conditions above. J
• The C counter will be counted up when vehicle conditions above are satisfied without the same malfunction.
• The DTC will not be displayed after C counter reaches 80.
• The 1st trip DTC will be cleared when C counter is counted once without the same malfunction after DTC is K
stored in ECM.
Relationship Between MIL, DTC, 1st Trip DTC and Driving Patterns Except For “Misfire <Exhaust Quality Deteriora-
tion>”, “Fuel Injection System” L

JMBIA1418GB
*1: When the same malfunction is de- *2: MIL will turn off after vehicle is driven *3: When the same malfunction is de-
tected in two consecutive trips, MIL 3 times (pattern B) without any mal- tected in two consecutive trips, the
will illuminate. functions. DTC and the freeze frame data will be
stored in ECM.

*4: The DTC and the freeze frame data *5: When a malfunction is detected for *6: 1st trip DTC will be cleared after vehi-
will not be displayed any longer after the 1st time, the 1st trip DTC and the cle is driven once (pattern B) without A
vehicle is driven 40 times (pattern A) 1st trip freeze frame data will be the same malfunction.
without the same malfunction. stored in ECM.
(The DTC and the freeze frame data
still remain in ECM.) EC
*7: When the same malfunction is de-
tected in the 2nd trip, the 1st trip
freeze frame data will be cleared. C
Explanation for Driving Patterns Except for “Misfire <Exhaust Quality Deterioration>”, “Fuel Injection System”
<Driving Pattern A>
D
JMBIA1920GB I
• The A counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected regardless of (1) - (4).
• The A counter will be counted up when (1) - (4) are satisfied without the same malfunction.
• The DTC will not be displayed after the A counter reaches 40.
J
<Driving Pattern B>
Driving pattern B means operating vehicle as per the following:
All components and systems should be monitored at least once by the OBD system.
• The B counter will be cleared when the malfunction is detected once regardless of the driving pattern. K
• The B counter will be counted up when driving pattern B is satisfied without any malfunctions.
• The MIL will turn off when the B counter reaches 3 (*2 in OBD SYSTEM OPERATION CHART).
CONSULT-III Function INFOID:0000000004690404
L
FUNCTION
M
Diagnostic test mode Function
This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the in-
Work Support N
dications on the CONSULT-III unit.
Self-diagnostic results such as 1st trip DTC, DTCs and 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data
Self Diagnostic Result
can be read and erased quickly.*
Data Monitor Input/Output data in the ECM can be read. O
Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-III drives some actuators apart from the ECM and also shifts
Active Test
some parameters in a specified range.
DTC & SRT Confirmation The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/results can be confirmed.
P
Function Test This mode is used to inform customers when the vehicle requires periodic maintenance.
ECU Part Number ECM part number can be read.
*: The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
• Diagnostic trouble codes
• 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
• Freeze frame data

• 1st trip freeze frame data
• System readiness test (SRT) codes
• Test values
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL SYSTEMS APPLICATION
DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE

SELF-DIAGNOSTIC DTC & SRT
RESULTS CONFIRMATION
Item DATA
WORK ACTIVE DTC
FREEZE MONI-
SUPPORT TEST SRT STA- WORK
DTC*1 FRAME TOR
TUS SUP-
DATA*2 PORT
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) × × ×
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) × × ×
Mass air flow sensor × ×
Engine coolant temperature sensor × × × ×
Engine oil temperature sensor × ×
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 × × × ×
Heated oxygen sensor 2 × × × ×
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS
Vehicle speed signal × × ×

Accelerator pedal position sensor × ×
Throttle position sensor × × ×
Intake air temperature sensor × × ×
Knock sensor ×
INPUT
Refrigerant pressure sensor ×

Closed throttle position switch (accel-
×
erator pedal position sensor signal)
Air conditioner switch ×
Park/neutral position (PNP) signal × ×
Stop lamp switch × ×
Power steering pressure sensor × ×
Battery voltage ×
Load signal ×
Primary speed sensor × ×
Battery current sensor × ×
ASCD steering switch × ×
ASCD brake switch × ×

A
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC DTC & SRT
RESULTS CONFIRMATION
Item DATA
WORK ACTIVE DTC
FREEZE MONI-
SUPPORT TEST SRT STA- WORK EC
DTC*1 FRAME TOR
TUS SUP-
DATA*2 PORT
Fuel injector × × C
Power transistor (Ignition timing) × ×
Throttle control motor relay × ×
D
Throttle control motor ×
EVAP canister purge volume control

× × × ×
solenoid valve
E
Air conditioner relay ×
Fuel pump relay × × ×
OUTPUT
Cooling fan relay × × × F

Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater × × ×*3
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater × × ×*3

G
Intake valve timing control solenoid
× × ×
valve
VIAS control solenoid valve 1 × × × H
VIAS control solenoid valve 2 × × ×
Electronic controlled engine mount × ×
Alternator × × I
Calculated load value × ×
X: Applicable
J
*1: This item includes 1st trip DTCs.
*2: This mode includes 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data. The items appear on CONSULT-III screen in freeze frame data
mode only if a 1st trip DTC or DTC is detected. For details, refer to EC-106, "Diagnosis Description".
*3: Always “CMPLT” is displayed.
K
WORK SUPPORT MODE

Work Item L
WORK ITEM CONDITION USAGE

FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE • FUEL PUMP WILL STOP BY TOUCHING “START” DUR- When releasing fuel pressure from M
ING IDLING. fuel line
CRANK A FEW TIMES AFTER ENGINE STALLS.
IDLE AIR VOL LEARN • THE IDLE AIR VOLUME THAT KEEPS THE ENGINE When learning the idle air volume N
WITHIN THE SPECIFIED RANGE IS MEMORIZED IN
ECM.
SELF-LEARNING CONT • THE COEFFICIENT OF SELF-LEARNING CONTROL When clearing mixture ratio self- O
MIXTURE RATIO RETURNS TO THE ORIGINAL COEF- learning value
FICIENT.
TARGET IDLE RPM ADJ* • IDLE CONDITION When setting target idle speed
P
TARGET IGN TIM ADJ* • IDLE CONDITION When adjusting target ignition tim-
ing
*: This function is not necessary in the usual service procedure.
SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE

Self Diagnostic Item
Regarding items of DTC and 1st trip DTC, refer to EC-395, "DTC Index".

Freeze frame data item* Description

DIAG TROUBLE CODE • The engine control component part/control system has a trouble code that is displayed as PXXXX. (Refer
[PXXXX] to EC-395, "DTC Index".)
FUEL SYS-B1 • “Fuel injection system status” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
• One of in the following mode is displayed.
Mode2: Open loop due to detected system malfunction
FUEL SYS-B2 Mode3: Open loop due to driving conditions (power enrichment, deceleration enleanment)
Mode4: Closed loop - using oxygen sensor(s) as feedback for fuel control
Mode5: Open loop - has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop
CAL/LD VALUE [%] • The calculated load value at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
COOLANT TEMP [°C] or
• The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[°F]
L-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] • “Long-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
• The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule
L-FUEL TRM-B2 [%] than short-term fuel trim.
S-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] • “Short-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
• The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base fuel
S-FUEL TRM-B2 [%] schedule.
ENGINE SPEED [rpm] • The engine speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
VEHICL SPEED
• The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[km/h] or [mph]
ABSOL TH·P/S [%] • The throttle valve opening angle at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
B/FUEL SCHDL [msec] • The base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
INT/A TEMP SE [°C] or
• The intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[°F]
INT MANI PRES [kPa]
• These items are displayed but are not applicable to this model.
COMBUST CONDITION
*: The items are the same as those of 1st trip freeze frame data.
DATA MONITOR MODE

Monitored Item
×: Applicable
Monitored item Unit Description Remarks
• Accuracy becomes poor if engine
• Indicates the engine speed computed from the speed drops below the idle rpm.
ENG SPEED rpm signal of the crankshaft position sensor (POS) • If the signal is interrupted while the
and camshaft position sensor (PHASE). engine is running, an abnormal value
may be indicated.
• When the engine is stopped, a certain
• The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor is value is indicated.
MAS A/F SE-B1 V
displayed. • When engine is running, specification
range is indicated in “SPEC”.
• “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel injection
• When engine is running, specification
B/FUEL SCHDL msec pulse width programmed into ECM, prior to any
learned on board correction.
A/F ALPHA-B1 • When the engine is stopped, a certain
value is indicated.
• The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feedback cor- • This data also includes the data for
%
A/F ALPHA-B2 rection factor per cycle is indicated. the air-fuel ratio learning control.

A
• When the engine coolant temperature
• The engine coolant temperature (determined by sensor is open or short-circuited,
COOLAN TEMP/S °C or °F the signal voltage of the engine coolant tempera- ECM enters fail-safe mode. The en-
ture sensor) is displayed. gine coolant temperature determined EC
by the ECM is displayed.
A/F SEN1 (B1) • The A/F signal computed from the input signal of
V
A/F SEN1 (B2) the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is displayed. C
HO2S2 (B1) • The signal voltage of the heated oxygen sensor 2
V
HO2S2 (B2) is displayed.
D
HO2S2 MNTR(B1) • Display of heated oxygen sensor 2 signal:
RICH: means the amount of oxygen after three
RICH/LEAN way catalyst is relatively small.
HO2S2 MNTR(B2) value is indicated.
LEAN: means the amount of oxygen after three E
way catalyst is relatively large.
• The vehicle speed computed from the vehicle
VHCL SPEED SE km/h or mph speed signal sent from combination meter is dis-
played.
F
BATTERY VOLT V • The power supply voltage of ECM is displayed.
ACCEL SEN 1 • ACCEL SEN 2 signal is converted by
• The accelerator pedal position sensor signal volt- G
V ECM internally. Thus, it differs from
ACCEL SEN 2 age is displayed.
ECM terminal voltage signal.
TP SEN 1-B1 • TP SEN 2-B1 signal is converted by
• The throttle position sensor signal voltage is dis- H
TP SEN 2-B1 played.
• The intake air temperature (determined by the
INT/A TEMP SE °C or °F signal voltage of the intake air temperature sen- I
sor) is indicated.
• Indicates start signal status [ON/OFF] computed • After starting the engine, [OFF] is dis-
START SIGNAL ON/OFF by the ECM according to the signals of engine played regardless of the starter sig- J
speed and battery voltage. nal.
• Indicates idle position [ON/OFF] computed by
CLSD THL POS ON/OFF ECM according to the accelerator pedal position
sensor signal. K
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air condition-
AIR COND SIG ON/OFF er switch as determined by the air conditioner sig-
nal. L
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the park/neu-
P/N POSI SW ON/OFF
tral position (PNP) signal.
• [ON/OFF] condition of the power steering system M
PW/ST SIGNAL ON/OFF (determined by the signal voltage of the power
steering pressure sensor) is indicated.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the electrical N
load signal.
ON: Rear window defogger switch is ON and/or
LOAD SIGNAL ON/OFF
lighting switch is in 2nd position.
OFF: Both rear window defogger switch and light- O
ing switch are OFF.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ignition switch
IGNITION SW ON/OFF
signal. P
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the heater fan
HEATER FAN SW ON/OFF
switch signal.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the stop lamp
BRAKE SW ON/OFF
switch signal.
INJ PULSE-B1 • Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse width
msec compensated by ECM according to the input sig-
INJ PULSE-B2 computed value is indicated.
nals.

• Indicates the ignition timing computed by ECM • When the engine is stopped, a certain
IGN TIMING BTDC
according to the input signals. value is indicated.
• “Calculated load value” indicates the value of the
CAL/LD VALUE %
current air flow divided by peak air flow.
• Indicates the mass air flow computed by ECM ac-
MASS AIRFLOW g·m/s cording to the signal voltage of the mass air flow
sensor.
• Indicates the EVAP canister purge volume con-
trol solenoid valve control value computed by the
PURG VOL C/V % ECM according to the input signals.
• The opening becomes larger as the value in-
creases.
INT/V TIM (B1) • Indicates [°CA] of intake camshaft advance an-
°CA
INT/V TIM (B2) gle.
INT/V SOL-B1 • The control value of the intake valve timing con-
trol solenoid valve (determined by ECM accord-
ing to the input signals) is indicated.
INT/V SOL-B2 %
• The advance angle becomes larger as the value
increases.
• The control condition of the VIAS control solenoid
valve 1 (determined by ECM according to the in-
put signals) is indicated.
VIAS S/V-1 ON/OFF
ON: VIAS control solenoid valve 1 is operating.
OFF: VIAS control solenoid valve 1 is not operat-
ing.
VIAS S/V-2 ON/OFF
ing.
• The air conditioner relay control condition (deter-
AIR COND RLY ON/OFF mined by ECM according to the input signals) is
indicated.
• The control condition of the electronic controlled
engine mount (determined by ECM according to
ENGINE MOUNT IDLE/TRVL the input signals) is indicated.
IDLE: Engine speed is below 950 rpm
TRVL: Engine speed is above 950 rpm
• Indicates the fuel pump relay control condition
FUEL PUMP RLY ON/OFF determined by ECM according to the input sig-
nals.
• The control condition of the EVAP canister vent
control valve (determined by ECM according to
VENT CONT/V* ON/OFF the input signals) is indicated.
ON: Closed
OFF: Open
• Indicates the throttle control motor relay control
THRTL RELAY ON/OFF condition determined by the ECM according to
the input signals.
• The control condition of the cooling fan (deter-
mined by ECM according to the input signals) is
indicated.
HI/MID/LOW/
COOLING FAN HI: High speed operation
OFF
MID: Middle speed operation
LOW: Low speed operation
OFF: Stop

A
HO2S2 HTR (B1) • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated oxygen
ON/OFF sensor 2 heater determined by ECM according to
HO2S2 HTR (B2) the input signals.
• Indicates the engine speed computed from the EC
I/P PULLY SPD rpm
turbine revolution sensor signal.
VEHICLE SPEED km/h or mph
speed signal sent from TCM is displayed. C
• Displays the condition of idle air volume learning
YET: Idle Air Volume Learning has not been per-
IDL A/V LEARN YET/CMPLT formed yet. D
CMPLT: Idle Air Volume Learning has already
been performed successfully.
• The engine oil temperature (determined by the
ENG OIL TEMP °C or °F signal voltage of the engine oil temperature sen- E
sor) is displayed.
TRVL AFTER MIL km or mile • Distance traveled while MIL is activated.
A/F S1 HTR(B1) • Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater control value
F
computed by ECM according to the input signals.
%
A/F S1 HTR(B2) • The current flow to the heater becomes larger as
the value increases. G
• The signal voltage from the refrigerant pressure
AC PRESS SEN V
sensor is displayed.
• The vehicle speed computed from the vehicle H
played.
SET VHCL SPD km/h or mph • The preset vehicle speed is displayed.
I
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from MAIN switch
MAIN SW ON/OFF
signal.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from CANCEL J
CANCEL SW ON/OFF
switch signal.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from RESUME/AC-
RESUME/ACC SW ON/OFF
CELERATE switch signal.
K
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from SET/COAST
SET SW ON/OFF
switch signal.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ASCD brake L
BRAKE SW1 ON/OFF
switch signal.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of stop lamp switch
BRAKE SW2 ON/OFF
signal.
M
• Indicates the vehicle cruise condition.
NON: Vehicle speed is maintained at the ASCD
set speed.
VHCL SPD CUT NON/CUT
CUT: Vehicle speed decreased to excessively N
low compared with the ASCD set speed, and
ASCD operation is cut off.
O
LO SPEED CUT NON/CUT set speed.
CUT: Vehicle speed decreased to excessively
low, and ASCD operation is cut off. P
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of CVT O/D ac-
AT OD MONITOR ON/OFF
cording to the input signal from the TCM.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of CVT O/D cancel
AT OD CANCEL ON/OFF
request signal.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of CRUISE lamp
CRUISE LAMP ON/OFF determined by the ECM according to the input
signals.

• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of SET lamp deter-
SET LAMP ON/OFF
mined by the ECM according to the input signals.
• The signal voltage of battery current sensor is
BAT CUR SEN mV
displayed.
• The control condition of the power generation
voltage variable control (determined by ECM ac-
cording to the input signals) is indicated.
ALT DUTY SIG ON/OFF ON: Power generation voltage variable control is
active.
OFF: Power generation voltage variable control
is inactive.
A/F ADJ-B1 • Indicates the correction of a factor stored in ECM.
The factor is calculated from the difference be-
— tween the target air-fuel ratio stored in ECM and
A/F ADJ-B2 the air-fuel ratio calculated from A/F sensor 1 sig-
nal.
• Indicates the duty ratio of the power generation
ALT DUTY % command value. The ratio is calculated by ECM
based on the battery current sensor signal.
*: This item is not used on this vehicle.
NOTE:
Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.
ACTIVE TEST MODE

Test Item
TEST ITEM CONDITION JUDGMENT CHECK ITEM (REMEDY)

• Engine: Return to the original
• Harness and connectors
FUEL INJEC- non-standard condition If malfunctioning symptom disap-
• Fuel injector
TION • Change the amount of fuel injec- pears, see CHECK ITEM.
• Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
tion using CONSULT-III.
non-standard condition
IGNITION TIM- If malfunctioning symptom disap-
• Timing light: Set • Perform Idle Air Volume Learning.
ING pears, see CHECK ITEM.
• Retard the ignition timing using
CONSULT-III.
• Engine: After warming up, idle the • Harness and connectors
engine. • Compression
POWER BAL- • A/C switch OFF • Fuel injector
Engine runs rough or stops.
ANCE • Selector lever position: P or N • Power transistor
• Cut off each injector signal one at • Spark plug
a time using CONSULT-III. • Ignition coil
• Ignition switch: ON
1 • Turn the cooling fan “HI”, “MID”,
COOLING FAN* Cooling fan moves and stops. • Cooling fan motor
“LOW” and “OFF” using CON-
• IPDM E/R
SULT-III.
• Engine: Return to the original • Harness and connectors
ENG COOLANT non-standard condition If malfunctioning symptom disap- • Engine coolant temperature sen-
TEMP • Change the engine coolant tem- pears, see CHECK ITEM. sor
perature using CONSULT-III. • Fuel injector
• Ignition switch: ON (Engine
stopped)
FUEL PUMP RE- Fuel pump relay makes the operat- • Harness and connectors
• Turn the fuel pump relay “ON”
LAY ing sound. • Fuel pump relay
and “OFF” using CONSULT-III
and listen to operating sound.

A
• Turn solenoid valve “ON” and Solenoid valve makes the operating • Harness and connectors
VIAS S/V-1
“OFF” using CONSULT-III and lis- sound. • Solenoid valve
ten to operating sound. EC
VIAS S/V-2
ten to operating sound.
C
ENGINE • Turn electronic controlled engine Electronic controlled engine mount • Harness and connectors
MOUNTING mount “IDLE” and “TRVL” with makes the operating sound. • Electronic controlled engine mount D
CONSULT-III.
• Engine: After warming up, run en-
gine at 1,500 rpm. E
PURG VOL • Change the EVAP canister purge Engine speed changes according to • Harness and connectors
CONT/V volume control solenoid valve the opening percent. • Solenoid valve
opening percent using CON-
SULT-III. F
VENT CON- stopped)
Solenoid valve makes an operating • Harness and connectors
• Turn solenoid valve “ON” and G
TROL/V*2 “OFF” with the CONSULT-III and
sound. • Solenoid valve
listen to operating sound.
INT V/T ASSIGN trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see
• Harness and connectors H
• Intake valve timing control sole-
ANGLE • Change intake valve timing using CHECK ITEM.
noid valve
CONSULT-III.
• Engine: Idle • Harness and connectors I
ALTERNATOR
• Change duty ratio using CON- Battery voltage changes. • IPDM E/R
DUTY
SULT-III. • Alternator
*1: Leaving cooling fan OFF with CONSULT-III while engine is running may cause the engine to overheat. J
*2: This item is not used on this vehicle.
DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE

K
SRT STATUS Mode
For details, refer to EC-106, "Diagnosis Description".
SRT WORK SUPPORT Mode L
This mode enables a technician to drive a vehicle to set the SRT while monitoring the SRT status.
DTC WORK SUPPORT Mode
M
Test mode Test item Corresponding DTC No. Reference page
A/F SEN1(B1) P1278/P1279 P0133 EC-177
A/F SEN1(B1) P1276 P0130 EC-167
N
A/F SEN1
A/F SEN1(B2) P1288/P1289 P0153 EC-177
A/F SEN1(B2) P1286 P0150 EC-167
O
HO2S2(B1) P1146 P0138 EC-189
HO2S2(B1) P1147 P0137 EC-182
HO2S2(B1) P0139 P0139 EC-198 P
HO2S2
HO2S2(B2) P1166 P0158 EC-189
HO2S2(B2) P1167 P0157 EC-182
HO2S2(B2) P0159 P0159 EC-198

Diagnosis Tool Function INFOID:0000000004690405
DESCRIPTION
Generic Scan Tool (OBD II scan tool) complying with ISO 15031-5
has several functions explained below.
ISO15765-4 is used as the protocol.
The name “GST” or “Generic Scan Tool” is used in this service man-
ual.
SEF139P
FUNCTION
Diagnostic Service Function

This diagnostic service gains access to current emission-related data values, including an-
Service $01 READINESS TESTS
alog inputs and outputs, digital inputs and outputs, and system status information.
This diagnostic service gains access to emission-related data value that were stored by
Service $02 (FREEZE DATA)
ECM during the freeze frame. For details, refer to EC-395, "DTC Index".
This diagnostic service gains access to emission-related power train trouble codes which
Service $03 DTCs
were stored by ECM.
This diagnostic service can clear all emission-related diagnostic information. This in-
cludes:
• Clear number of diagnostic trouble codes (Service $01)
• Clear diagnostic trouble codes (Service $03)
Service $04 CLEAR DIAG INFO
• Clear trouble code for freeze frame data (Service $01)
• Clear freeze frame data (Service $02)
• Reset status of system monitoring test (Service $01)
• Clear on board monitoring test results (Service $06 and $07)
This diagnostic service accesses the results of on board diagnostic monitoring tests of
Service $06 (ON BOARD TESTS)
specific components/systems that are not continuously monitored.
This diagnostic service enables the off board test drive to obtain test results for emission-
Service $07 (ON BOARD TESTS) related powertrain components/systems that are continuously monitored during normal
driving conditions.
Service $08 — This diagnostic service is not applicable on this vehicle.
This diagnostic service enables the off-board test device to request specific vehicle infor-
Service $09 (CALIBRATION ID)
mation such as Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and Calibration IDs.
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
2. Connect “GST” to data link connector (1), which is located under
dash panel.
JMBIA1123ZZ

4. Enter the program according to instruction on the screen or in
the operation manual. A
(*: Regarding GST screens in this section, sample screens are
shown.)
EC
SEF398S
D
5. Perform each diagnostic mode according to each service proce-
dure.
For further information, see the GST Operation Manual of
E
the tool maker.
G
SEF416S

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
< COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS > [VQ35DE (TYPE 1)]
COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS
Description INFOID:0000000004690406
The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is displayed in “SPEC” in “DATA MONI-
TOR” mode of CONSULT-III during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When the value in “SPEC”
in “DATA MONITOR” mode is within the SP value, the Engine Control System is confirmed OK. When the
value in “SPEC” in “DATA MONITOR” mode is NOT within the SP value, the Engine Control System may have
one or more malfunctions.
The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not illuminate
the MIL.
The SP value will be displayed for the following three items:
• B/FUEL SCHDL (The fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned on board correc-
tion)
• A/F ALPHA-B1/B2 (The mean value of air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle)
• MAS A/F SE-B1 (The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor)
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000004690407
1.START
• Vehicle driven distance: More than 5,000 km (3,107 miles)
• Barometric pressure: 98.3 - 104.3 kPa (0.983 - 1.043 bar, 1.003 - 1.064 kg/cm2, 14.25 - 15.12 psi)
• Atmospheric temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
- After the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle until “ATF TEMP SEN” in
“DATA MONITOR” mode of “CVT” system indicates less than 0.9 V.
• Electrical load: Not applied
- Rear window defogger switch, air conditioner switch lighting switch are OFF. Steering wheel is straight
ahead.
• Engine speed: Idle
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
NOTE:
Perform “SPEC” in “DATA MONITOR” mode in maximum scale display.
1. Perform EC-17, "BASIC INSPECTION : Special Repair Requirement".
2. Select “B/FUEL SCHDL”, “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” and “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “SPEC” of “DATA
MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Check that monitor items are within the SP value.
Is the measurement value within the SP value?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Go to EC-129, "Diagnosis Procedure".

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004690408
A
OVERALL SEQUENCE
EC
P
JMBIA1468GB

PBIB3214E
DETAILED PROCEDURE
1.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
2. Confirm that the testing conditions are met. Refer to EC-128, "Component Function Check".
3. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and check that each
indication is within the SP value.

NOTE:
Check “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” for approximately 1 minute because they may fluctuate. It is NG A
if the indication is out of the SP value even a little.
YES >> GO TO 17. EC
NO-1 >> Less than the SP value: GO TO 2.
NO-2 >> More than the SP value: GO TO 3.
2.CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL” C
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and check that the indication is within the SP
value.
Is the measurement value within the SP value? D
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> More than the SP value: GO TO 19.
E
3.CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL”
value. F
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO-1 >> More than the SP value: GO TO 6. G
1. Stop the engine. H
2. Disconnect PCV hose, and then plug it.
3. Start engine.
4. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and check that each I
YES >> GO TO 5. J
NO >> GO TO 6.
5.CHANGE ENGINE OIL
1. Stop the engine. K
2. Change engine oil.
NOTE:
This symptom may occur when a large amount of gasoline is mixed with engine oil because of driving L
conditions (such as when engine oil temperature does not rise enough since a journey distance is too
short during winter). The symptom will not be detected after changing engine oil or changing driving con-
ditions.
M
>> INSPECTION END

6.CHECK FUEL PRESSURE N
Check fuel pressure. (Refer to EC-418, "Inspection".)
O
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO-1 >> Fuel pressure is too high: Replace “fuel filter and fuel pump assembly” and then. GO TO 8.
NO-2 >> Fuel pressure is too low: GO TO 7.
P
Check fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging.
YES >> Replace “fuel filter and fuel pump assembly” and then GO TO 8.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part and then GO TO 8.
1. Start engine.
NO >> GO TO 9.
9.PERFORM POWER BALANCE TEST
1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
2. Check that each cylinder produces a momentary engine speed drop.
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> GO TO 10.
Check the following below.
• Ignition coil and its circuit (Refer to EC-349, "Component Function Check".)
• Fuel injector and its circuit (Refer to EC-342, "Component Function Check".)
• Intake air leakage
• Low compression pressure (Refer to EM-23, "Inspection".)
YES >> Replace fuel injector and then GO TO 11.
1. Start engine.
NO >> GO TO 12.
12.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 FUNCTION
Perform all DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE related with A/F sensor 1.
• For DTC P0130, P0150, refer to EC-167, "DTC Logic".
• For DTC P2A00, P2A03, refer to EC-325, "DTC Logic".
Are any DTCs detected?
YES >> GO TO 15.
NO >> GO TO 13.
13.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT
Perform Diagnostic Procedure according to corresponding DTC.
>> GO TO 14.
1. Start engine.
NO >> GO TO 15.
15.DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT ECM HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Stop the engine.

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check pin terminal and connector for damage, and then reconnect it.
A
>> GO TO 16.
16.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” EC
1. Start engine.
C
NO >> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-407, "Symptom Table". D
value. E
NO-1 >> More than the SP value: GO TO 18. F
G
1. Check for the cause of large engine friction. Refer to the following.
- Engine oil level is too high
- Engine oil viscosity
- Belt tension of power steering, alternator, A/C compressor, etc. is excessive H
- Noise from engine
- Noise from transmission, etc.
2. Check for the cause of insufficient combustion. Refer to the following. I
- Valve clearance malfunction
- Intake valve timing control function malfunction
- Camshaft sprocket installation malfunction, etc.
J
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 30.

19.CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM K
Check for the cause of uneven air flow through mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following.
• Crushed air ducts
• Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element L
• Uneven dirt of air cleaner element
• Improper specification of intake air system
Is the inspection result normal? M
YES >> GO TO 21.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 20.
20.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”, AND “B/FUEL SCHDL” N
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”, and “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and
check that each indication is within the SP value.
Is the measurement value within the SP value? O
NO >> “B/FUEL SCHDL” is more, “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” are less than the SP value: GO TO
21. P
21.DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Stop the engine.
2. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Check pin terminal and connector for damage and
then reconnect it again.
>> GO TO 22.


1. Start engine.
YES >> Detect malfunctioning part of mass air flow sensor circuit and repair it. Refer to EC-154, "Diagno-
sis Procedure". Then GO TO 29.
NO >> GO TO 23.
23.CHECK “MAS A/F SE-B1”
Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and check that the indication is within the SP
value.
YES >> GO TO 24.
NO >> More than the SP value: Replace mass air flow sensor, and then GO TO 29.
24.REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
2. Refer to EC-20, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Require-
ment".
>> GO TO 29.
25.CHECK INTAKE SYSTEM
• Malfunctioning seal in air cleaner element
• Uneven dirt in air cleaner element
• Improper specification in intake air system
YES >> GO TO 27.
value.
NO >> Less than the SP value: GO TO 27.
Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and check that the indication is within the SP
value.
YES >> GO TO 28.
NO >> Less than the SP value: Replace mass air flow sensor, and then GO TO 30.
Check for the cause of air leakage after the mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following.
• Disconnection, looseness, and cracks in air duct
• Looseness of oil filler cap
• Disconnection of oil level gauge
• Open stuck, breakage, hose disconnection, or cracks in PCV valve
• Disconnection or cracks in EVAP purge hose, stuck open EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve
• Malfunctioning seal in rocker cover gasket
• Disconnection, looseness, or cracks in hoses, such as a vacuum hose, connecting to intake air system parts

• Malfunctioning seal in intake air system, etc.
A
>> GO TO 30.
29.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”, AND “B/FUEL SCHDL” EC
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2”, and “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and
check that each indication is within the SP value.
Is the measurement value within the SP value? C
NO >> Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-407, "Symptom Table".
30.CHECK “B/FUEL SCHDL” D
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and then check that the indication is within
the SP value.
Is the measurement value within the SP value? E
F

POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION

2. Check ground connection E38. Refer to Ground Inspection in GI-38, "Circuit Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace ground connection.
2.CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Check the continuity between ECM harness connector and ground.
ECM
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
12
F7
16
107
Ground Existed
108
E16
111
112
3. Also check harness for short to power.
is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
Check the following.
• Harness connectors F121, E7
• Harness for open or short between ECM and ground
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.

4.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Reconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and then ON.
3. Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals.
ECM
+ – Voltage
Connector
Terminal Terminal
E16 93 112 Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
• IPDM E/R connector E10
• 10 A fuse (No. 44)
• Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R

>> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. A
6.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals. EC
ECM
+ – Condition Voltage C
Connector
Terminal Terminal
After turning ignition switch OFF, battery
Ignition switch D
E16 105 112 voltage will exist for a few seconds, then
ON → OFF
drop to approximately 0 V.
YES >> GO TO 7. E
NO >> GO TO 9.
7.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III F
2. Check the voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground.
G
IPDM E/R
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
49 H
F12 Ground Battery voltage
53
I
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Replace IPDM E/R.
8.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT J
Refer to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident".
>> INSPECTION END K
9.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV

1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. L
ECM M
+ – Voltage
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
N
F7 24 E16 112 Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 12. O
NO >> GO TO 10.
10.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V
1. Disconnect ECM harness connector. P
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector.
3. Check the continuity between ECM harness connector and IPDM E/R harness connector.
ECM IPDM E/R

Continuity
F7 24 F12 69 Existed

4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power.
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
11.CHECK 15 A FUSE
1. Disconnect 15 A fuse (No. 50) from IPDM E/R.
2. Check 15 A fuse.
YES >> GO TO 13.
NO >> Replace 15 A fuse.
12.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-VI
ECM IPDM E/R

Continuity
E16 105 E10 10 Existed
YES >> GO TO 13.
13.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connectors.

U1000, U1001 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004690411
D
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

E
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause
When ECM is not transmitting or receiving CAN com-
U1000 munication signal of OBD (emission related diagnosis)
• Harness or connectors F
for 2 seconds or more.
CAN communication line (CAN communication line is open or
When ECM is not transmitting or receiving CAN com- shorted.)
U1001 munication signal other than OBD (emission related
diagnosis) for 2 seconds or more. G
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE

1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE H
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected? I
YES >> EC-139, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> INSPECTION END
J
Go to LAN-16, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".

K

P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
If DTC P0011 or P0021 is displayed with DTC P0075 or P0081, first perform the trouble diagnosis for
DTC P0075, P0081. Refer to EC-150, "DTC Logic".
Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. DTC detecting condition Possible cause
name
Intake valve timing • Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
P0011 control performance • Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
(bank 1) • Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
There is a gap between angle of target and • Accumulation of debris to the signal pick-up
Intake valve timing phase-control angle degree. portion of the camshaft
P0021 control performance • Timing chain installation
(bank 2) • Foreign matter caught in the oil groove for in-
take valve timing control

1.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10 V and 16 V at
idle.
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-I
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
2. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.
3. Maintain the following conditions for at least 6 consecutive seconds. Hold the accelerator pedal as steady
as possible.
VHCL SPEED SE 100 - 120 km/h (63 - 75 mph)

ENG SPEED 1,200 - 2,000 rpm
COOLAN TEMP/S More than 60°C (140°F)
B/FUEL SCHDL More than 7.3 msec
Selector lever D position
CAUTION:
Always drive at a safe speed.
4. Stop vehicle with engine running and let engine idle for 10 seconds.
5. Check 1st trip DTC.
With GST
Follow the procedure “With CONSULT-III” above.
Is 1st trip DTC detected?
YES >> Go to EC-141, "Diagnosis Procedure"
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-II
With CONSULT-III
1. Maintain the following conditions for at least 20 consecutive seconds.

ENG SPEED 1,200 - 3,175 rpm (A constant rotation is maintained.) A

Selector lever 1st or 2nd position
EC
Driving vehicle uphill
Driving location (Increased engine load will help maintain the driving conditions re-
quired for this test.)
C
CAUTION:
With GST D
YES >> Go to EC-141, "Diagnosis Procedure" E
F
1.CHECK OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP
1. Start engine. G
2. Check oil pressure warning lamp and confirm it is not illumi-
nated.
Is oil pressure warming lamp illuminated? H
YES >> Go to LU-7, "Inspection".
NO >> GO TO 2.
I
J
PBIA8559J
2.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

K
Refer to EC-142, "Component Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 3. L
NO >> Replace malfunctioning intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
3.CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)
Refer to EC-231, "Component Inspection". M
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS). N
4.CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)
Refer to EC-234, "Component Inspection". O
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning camshaft position sensor (PHASE). P
5.CHECK CAMSHAFT (INTAKE)

• Accumulation of debris on the signal plate of camshaft rear end
• Chipping signal plate of camshaft rear end
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Remove debris and clean the signal plate of camshaft
rear end or replace camshaft.
JMBIA0058ZZ

Check service records for any recent repairs that may cause timing chain misalignment.
Are there any service records that may cause timing chain misalignment?
YES >> Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-54, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK LUBRICATION CIRCUIT
Refer to EM-54, "Removal and Installation".
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Clean lubrication line.
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection INFOID:0000000004690415
1.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE-I

1. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.
2. Check resistance between intake valve timing control solenoid valve terminals as per the following.
Terminals Resistance
1 and 2 7.0 - 7.5 Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]
∞Ω
1 or 2 and ground
(Continuity should not exist)
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE-II
1. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve.
2. Provide 12 V DC between intake valve timing control solenoid
valve terminals 1 and 2, and then interrupt it. Check that the
plunger moves as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Never apply 12 V DC continuously for 5 seconds or more.
Doing so may result in damage to the coil in intake valve
timing control solenoid valve.
NOTE:
Always replace O-ring when intake valve timing control
solenoid valve is removed.
Is the inspection result normal? JMBIA0079ZZ

A
EC

P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Engine speed Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
heater control heater
The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the A/F sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine operating
condition to keep the temperature of A/F sensor 1 element within the specified range.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
The current amperage in the A/F sensor 1 heater • Harness or connectors
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor
circuit is out of the normal range. (The A/F sensor 1 heater circuit is
P0031 1 heater (bank 1) control
(An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM open or shorted.)
circuit low
via the A/F sensor 1 heater.) • A/F sensor 1 heater
(An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM shorted.)
circuit high
(An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM open or shorted.)
circuit low
(An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM shorted.)
circuit high

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11 V at idle.
>> GO TO 2.
1. Start engine and let it idle for at least 10 seconds.
YES >> Go to EC-144, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NG >> INSPECTION END


YES >> GO TO 2. A
2.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
EC
1. Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between A/F sensor 1 harness connector and ground.
C
A/F sensor 1
DTC Ground Voltage
Bank Connector Terminal
D
P0031, P0032 1 F27 4
Ground Battery voltage
P0051, P0052 2 F64 4
Is the inspection result normal? E
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART F

• IPDM E/R harness connector F12 G
• 15 A fuse (No. 46)
• Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse
H
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors.
4.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. I
3. Check harness continuity between A/F sensor 1 harness connector and ECM harness connector.
J
A/F sensor 1 ECM
DTC Continuity
Bank Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
K
P0031, P0032 1 F27 3 4
F7 Existed
P0051, P0052 2 F64 3 8
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. L
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. M
5.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
N
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 6.
O
6.REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
Replace malfunctioning air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
CAUTION: P
• Discard any A/F sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
• Before installing new A/F sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner [commercial service tool (J-43897-18 or J-43897 12)] and approved anti-seize lubricant (com-
mercial service tool).
>> INSPECTION END


Perform GI-36, "Intermittent Incident".
>> INSPECTION END

1.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1

Check resistance between A/F sensor terminals as per the following.
Terminal No. Resistance

3 and 4 1.8 - 2.44 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
3 and 1, 2 ∞Ω
4 and 1, 2 (Continuity should not exist)

NO >> GO TO 2.
CAUTION:
• Discard any (A/F) sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a
• Before installing new (A/F) sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Heated Oxygen Sensor
Thread Cleaner [commercial service tool (J-43897-18 or J-43897 12)] and approved anti-seize lubri-
cant (commercial service tool).
>> INSPECTION END

P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
A
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION EC

Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) C
Engine speed
Heated oxygen sensor 2
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature heater control
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air D
The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater corresponding to the engine speed,
amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature.
E
OPERATION
Engine speed Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater

F
Above 3,600 rpm OFF
Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.
• Engine: After warming up G
ON
• Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1
minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004690421 H
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

I
The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor • Harness or connectors
2 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater J
P0037 heater (bank 1) control
(An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM circuit is open or shorted.)
circuit low
via the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater.) • Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
Heated oxygen sensor 2 K
2 heater circuit is out of the normal range. (The heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
(An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM circuit is shorted.)
circuit high
The current amperage in the heated oxygen sensor • Harness or connectors L
(An excessively low voltage signal is sent to ECM circuit is open or shorted.)
circuit low
M
(An excessively high voltage signal is sent to ECM circuit is shorted.)
circuit high
via the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater.) • Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater N

1.PRECONDITIONING O
TESTING CONDITION: P
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10.5 V and 16 V at
idle.
>> GO TO 2.

P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load.
4. Let engine idle for 1 minute.

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HO2S2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 (HO2S2) harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between HO2S2 harness connector and ground.
HO2S2
DTC Ground Voltage
P0037, P0038 1 F70 2
P0057, P0058 2 F71 2
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
• IPDM E/R connector F12
• 15 A fuse (No. 46)
• Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 and IPDM E/R
>> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
4.CHECK HO2S2 OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check the continuity between HO2S2 harness connector and ECM harness connector.
HO2S2 ECM
DTC Continuity
P0037, P0038 1 F70 3 13
F7 Existed
P0057, P0058 2 F71 3 17
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER

P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER
YES >> GO TO 7. A
NO >> GO TO 6.
6.REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
EC
Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2.
CAUTION:
• Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. C
• Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread
Cleaner [commercial service tool (J-43897-18 or J-43897-12)] and approved anti-seize lubricant
(commercial service tool). D
>> INSPECTION END

7.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT E

F
>> INSPECTION END
G
Check resistance between HO2S2 terminals as per the following.
H
Terminal No. Resistance

2 and 3 3.4 - 4.4 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)] I
1 and 2, 3, 4 ∞Ω
4 and 1, 2, 3 (Continuity should not exist)
J
NO >> GO TO 2.
K
CAUTION: L
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
Cleaner [commercial service tool (J-43897-18 or J-43897-12)] and approved anti-seize lubricant M
(commercial service tool).
>> INSPECTION END N

P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF

pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM.
The intake valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil
amount and direction of flow through intake valve timing control unit
or stops oil flow.
The longer pulse width advances valve angle.
The shorter pulse width retards valve angle.
When ON and OFF pulse widths become equal, the solenoid valve
stops oil pressure flow to fix the intake valve angle at the control
position.
PBIB1842E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Intake valve timing control so- • Harness or connectors
P0075 An improper voltage is sent to the ECM
lenoid valve (bank 1) circuit (Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
through intake valve timing control solenoid
Intake valve timing control so- circuit is open or shorted.)
P0081 valve.
lenoid valve (bank 2) circuit • Intake valve timing control solenoid valve

1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
1. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds.
1.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect intake valve timing (IVT) control solenoid valve harness connector.
4. Check the voltage between intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector and ground with
CONSULT-III or tester.
IVT control solenoid valve

DTC Ground Voltage
P0075 1 F81 2
P0081 2 F82 2
YES >> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN A
AND SHORT
EC
3. Check the continuity between intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector and ECM har-
ness connector.
C
IVT control solenoid valve ECM
DTC Continuity
D
P0075 1 F81 1 78
F8 Existed
P0081 2 F82 1 75
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. E
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. F
Refer to EC-151, "Component Inspection". G
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning intake valve timing control solenoid valve. H
I
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection INFOID:0000000004690427 J

1. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector. K
L
1 and 2 7.0 - 7.5 Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]
∞Ω
1 or 2 and ground M
YES >> GO TO 2. N
1. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve. O

CAUTION:
NOTE:


P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR
A
The mass air flow sensor (1) is placed in the stream of intake air. It EC
measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire
intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the
hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is
reduced as the intake air flows around it. The greater air flow, the C
greater the heat loss.
Therefore, the electric current supplied to hot wire is changed to
maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The D
ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change.
PBIA9559J E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC F
Trouble diagnosis
name G
• Harness or connectors
Mass air flow sensor An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
P0102
circuit low input to ECM. • Intake air leakage H
• Mass air flow sensor
Mass air flow sensor An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
P0103 (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
circuit high input sent to ECM. I

1.PRECONDITIONING J
K
Which DTC is detected?
P0102 >> GO TO 2.
P0103 >> GO TO 3.
L
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0102
1. Start engine and wait at least 5 seconds.
2. Check DTC. M
Is DTC detected?
NO >> INSPECTION END N
3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0103-I
2. Check DTC. O
Is DTC detected?
NO >> GO TO 4. P
4.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0103-II

2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?

1.INSPECTION START
Confirm the detected DTC.
P0102 >> GO TO 2.
P0103 >> GO TO 3.
Check the following for connection.
• Air duct
• Vacuum hoses
• Intake air passage between air duct to intake manifold
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Reconnect the parts.
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect mass air flow (MAF) sensor harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between MAF sensor harness connector and ground.
MAF sensor
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
F4 5 Ground Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
• Harness connectors E7, F121
• Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM
• Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and IPDM E/R
6.CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check the continuity between MAF sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.
MAF sensor ECM

Continuity
F4 4 F8 56 Existed

YES >> GO TO 7. A
7.CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
EC
MAF sensor ECM C

Continuity
F4 3 F8 58 Existed
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. D
YES >> GO TO 8.
E
8.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Refer to EC-155, "Component Inspection". F
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> Replace mass air flow sensor. G
Refer to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident". H
>> INSPECTION END

I
1.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR-I

J
With CONSULT-III
1. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
3. Connect CONSULT-III and select “DATA MONITOR” mode. K
4. Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” and check indication under the following conditions.
Monitor item Condition MAS A/F SE-B1 (V) L

Ignition switch ON (Engine stopped.) Approx. 0.4
MAS A/F SE-B1 Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 0.9 - 1.2
M
Idle to approximately 4,000 rpm 0.9 - 1.2 to Approx. 2.4*
*: Check for linear voltage rise in response to engine being increased to approximately 4,000 rpm.
Without CONSULT-III N
3. Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals under the following conditions.
O
ECM P
+ – Condition Voltage (V)
Connector
Terminal Terminal
58 56
F8 (MAF sen- (Sensor Idle (Engine is warmed-up to normal operating temperature.) 0.9 - 1.2
sor signal) ground)

NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FOR THE CAUSE OF UNEVEN AIR FLOW THROUGH MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
• Malfunctioning seal of air cleaner element
• Improper specification of intake air system parts
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR-II
With CONSULT-III
1. Repair or replace malfunctioning part.
3. Connect CONSULT-III and select “DATA MONITOR” mode.
Monitor item Condition MAS A/F SE-B1 (V)

Without CONSULT-III
ECM
Connector
Terminal Terminal
58 56
sor signal) ground)
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR-III
With CONSULT-III
2. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector and reconnect it again.

Monitor item Condition MAS A/F SE-B1 (V) A

EC
Without CONSULT-III C
4. Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals under the following conditions. D
E
ECM
Connector
Terminal Terminal F
58 56
sor signal) ground)
G
Is the inspection result normal? H
NO >> Clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
I

P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR
The intake air temperature sensor is built-into the mass air flow sen-
sor (1). The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a
signal to the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases in response to the rise in temperature.
PBIA9559J
<Reference data>
Intake air temperature

Voltage* (V) Resistance (kΩ)
[°C (°F)]
25 (77) 3.3 1.800 - 2.200
80 (176) 1.2 0.283 - 0.359
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminals 50
(Intake air temperature sensor) and 56 (Sensor ground).
SEF012P
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Trouble diagnosis
name
Intake air tempera-
An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
P0112 ture sensor circuit
sent to ECM. • Harness or connectors
low input
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
Intake air tempera- • Intake air temperature sensor
An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
sent to ECM.
high input

1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.

A
2. Check ground connection E38. Refer to Ground Inspection in GI-38, "Circuit Inspection". EC
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace ground connection. C
2.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor) harness connector. D
3. Check the voltage between mass air flow sensor harness connector and ground.
E
MAF sensor
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
F4 2 Ground Approx. 5 V F
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. G
3.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. H
3. Check harness continuity between mass air flow sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.
I
MAF sensor ECM
Continuity
F4 1 F8 56 Existed J
K
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR L
YES >> GO TO 5. M
NO >> Replace mass air flow sensor (with intake air temperature sensor).
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT N
>> INSPECTION END O

1.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR P

3. Check resistance between mass air flow sensor terminals as per the following.

Terminal Condition Resistance (kΩ)

1 and 2 Temperature [°C (°F)] 25 (77) 1.800 - 2.200

P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR
A
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine EC

coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the
ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the ther- C
mistor decreases as temperature increases.
SEF594K E
<Reference data>
F
Engine coolant temperature
[°C (°F)]
–10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4 G
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
H
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
SEF012P
(Engine coolant temperature sensor) and 52 (Sensor ground).
I
DTC DETECTION LOGIC J
Trouble Diagnosis
DTC No. DTC detecting condition Possible Cause
Name K
Engine coolant tem-
P0117 perature sensor cir-
cuit low input
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) L
Engine coolant tem- • Engine coolant temperature sensor
sent to ECM.
cuit high input
M
1.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at N
O
>> GO TO 2.
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?


YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ECT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between ECT sensor harness connector and ground.
ECT sensor
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
F80 1 Ground Approx. 5 V
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK ECT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check the continuity between ECT sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.
ECT sensor ECM

Continuity
F80 2 F8 52 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor.
>> INSPECTION END


2. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
3. Remove engine coolant temperature sensor.

4. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor
terminals as per the following. A
Terminals Condition Resistance (kΩ)

20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 EC
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260
C
YES >> INSPECTION END JMBIA0080ZZ
NO >> Replace engine coolant temperature sensor. D

P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor,

throttle position sensor, etc. The throttle position sensor responds to
the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a
kind of potentiometer which transform the throttle valve position into
output voltage, and emit the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM
judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from these sig-
nals and controls the throttle valve opening angle in response to
driving conditions via the throttle control motor.
PBIB0145E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
If DTC P0122 or P0123 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643.
Refer to EC-253, "DTC Logic".
Throttle position sensor An excessively low voltage from the Throttle • Harness or connectors
P0122
2 circuit low input position sensor 2 is sent to ECM. [Throttle position (TP) sensor 2 circuit is
open or shorted.]
Throttle position sensor An excessively high voltage from the Throttle • Electric throttle control actuator
P0123
2 circuit high input position sensor 2 is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 2)

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
1. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second.
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector.

3. Check the voltage between electric throttle control actuator harness connector and ground. A
Electric throttle control actuator

Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal EC
Is the inspection result normal? C
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT D
3. Check the continuity between electric throttle control actuator harness connector and ECM harness con- E
nector.
Electric throttle control actuator ECM F

Continuity
F29 4 F8 36 Existed
G
YES >> GO TO 4. H
4.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check the continuity between electric throttle control actuator harness connector and ECM harness con- I
nector.
Electric throttle control actuator ECM J

Continuity
F29 3 F8 38 Existed
K
YES >> GO TO 5. L
5.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
M
YES >> GO TO 7. N
NO >> GO TO 6.
6.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
1. Replace electric throttle control actuator. O
2. Refer to EC-166, "Special Repair Requirement".
>> INSPECTION END P

>> INSPECTION END


5. Set selector lever position to D.
ECM
+ – Condition Voltage
Connector
Terminal Terminal
37 (TP sensor 1 Fully released More than 0.36 V

signal) Fully depressed Less than 4.75 V
36
F8 Accelerator pedal
(Sensor ground) Fully released Less than 4.75 V
38 (TP sensor 2
signal) Fully depressed More than 0.36 V
NO >> GO TO 2.
1. Replace electric throttle control actuator.
2. Go to EC-166, "Special Repair Requirement".
>> INSPECTION END

Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000004690444

Refer to EC-22, "THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement"
>> GO TO 2.
Refer to EC-22, "IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement"
>> END

P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1
A
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar one-cell limit current sen- EC
sor. The sensor element of the A/F sensor 1 is composed an elec-
trode layer, which transports ions. It has a heater in the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement = 1, but also in the
lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor C
outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a wide range.
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion layer at
the sensor cell. An electrode layer is applied voltage, and this current D
relative oxygen density in lean. Also this current relative hydrocar-
bon density in rich.
JMBIA0112GB E
Therefore, the A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air fuel ratio by this
electrode layer of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the F
sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of approxi-
mately 800°C (1,472°F).
G
PBIB3354E

I
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

To judge malfunctions, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 sig- J
nal fluctuates according to fuel feedback control.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause K
The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F
A) sensor 1 signal is constantly in a range other
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 than approx. 2.2 V.
P0130 L
(bank 1) circuit
The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F • Harness or connectors
B)
sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 2.2 V. (The sensor circuit is open or
The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F shorted.) M
A) sensor 1 signal is constantly in a range other • A/F sensor 1
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 than approx. 2.2 V.
P0150
(bank 2) circuit
The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F
B) N
sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 2.2 V.

1.PRECONDITIONING O
TESTING CONDITION: P
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A

2. Let engine idle for 2 minutes.
NO-1 >> With CONSULT-III: GO TO 3.
NO-2 >> With GST: GO TO 7.
3.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 FUNCTION
2. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Check “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” indication.
Does the indication fluctuate around 2.2 V?
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B-I
1. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1) P1276” (for DTC P0130) or “A/F SEN1 (B2) P1286” (for DTC P0150) of “A/F
SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
2. Touch “START”.
3. When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-III screen.

VHCL SPEED SE More than 64 km/h (40 mph)
B/FUEL SCHDL 1.0 - 8.0 msec
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 20 seconds, retry from step 2.
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
Is “TESTING” displayed on CONSULT-III screen?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Check A/F sensor 1 function again. GO TO 3.
5.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B-II
Release accelerator pedal fully.
NOTE:
Never apply brake when releasing the accelerator pedal.
Which does “TESTING” change to?
COMPLETED>>GO TO 6.
OUT OF CONDITION>>Retry DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE. GO TO 4.
6.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B-III
Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULT”.
Which is displayed on CONSULT-III screen?
OK >> INSPECTION END
NG >> Go to EC-169, "Diagnosis Procedure".
7.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK FOR MALFUNCTION B
Perform component function check. Refer to EC-169, "Component Function Check".
NOTE:
Use component function check to check the overall function of the A/F sensor 1 circuit. During this check, a
1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.

A
1.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK
With GST
EC
2. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in the suitable gear position.
3. Shift the selector lever to the D position, then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed
decreases to 50 km/h (31 MPH). C
CAUTION:
NOTE: D
Never apply brake when releasing the accelerator pedal.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for 5 times.
5. Stop the vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF.
6. Wait at least 10 seconds and restart engine. E
8. Stop the vehicle.
9. Check 1st trip DTC. F
NO >> INSPECTION END G
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION H

I
YES >> GO TO 2.
J
1. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. K
A/F sensor 1 L
DTC Ground Voltage
P0130 1 F27 4
Ground Battery voltage M
P0150 2 F64 4
YES >> GO TO 4. N
NO >> GO TO 3.
Check the following. O
• IPDM E/R harness connector F12
• 15 A fuse (No. 46)
• Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and IPDM E/R P

4.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check the continuity between A/F sensor 1 harness connector and ECM harness connector.

A/F sensor 1 ECM

DTC Continuity
1 45
P0130 1 F27
2 49
F8 Existed
1 53
P0150 2 F64
2 57
4. Check the continuity between A/F sensor 1 harness connector and ground, or ECM harness connector
and ground.
A/F sensor 1
DTC Ground Continuity
1
P0130 1 F27
2
Ground Not existed
1
P0150 2 F64
2
ECM
Connector Terminal
45
P0130
49
F8 Ground Not existed
53
P0150
57
YES >> GO TO 5.
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part.
CAUTION:
>> INSPECTION END

A
JMBIA0112GB E
mately 800°C (1,472°F).
G
PBIB3354E

I
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 J
signal is not inordinately low.
P0131 • Harness or connectors
(bank 1) circuit low voltage • The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 F sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 0 V. L
P0151 • A/F sensor 1
(bank 2) circuit low voltage

M
1.PRECONDITIONING
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. N
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5 V at idle.
O
>> GO TO 2.
P
With CONSULT-III
With GST
Is the indication constantly approx. 0 V?

NO >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then restart engine.
2. Drive and accelerate vehicle to more than 40 km/h (25 MPH) within 20 seconds after restarting engine.
CAUTION:
3. Maintain the following conditions for approximately 20 consecutive seconds.

Selector lever Suitable position
NOTE:
• Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during cruising.
• If this procedure is not completed within 1 minute after restarting engine at step 1, return to step
1.
With GST

YES >> GO TO 2.
A/F sensor 1
DTC Ground Voltage
P0131 1 F27 4
P0151 2 F64 4
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
• 15 A fuse (No. 46)
• Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and IPDM E/R

4.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A
EC
A/F sensor 1 ECM

DTC Continuity
Bank Connector Terminal Connector Terminal C
1 45
P0131 1 F27
2 49
F8 Existed D
1 53
P0151 2 F64
2 57
4. Check the continuity between A/F sensor 1 harness connector and ground, or ECM harness connector E
and ground.
A/F sensor 1 F
1
P0131 1 F27
2 G
Ground Not existed
1
P0151 2 F64
2
H
ECM
Connector Terminal I
45
P0131
49
F8 Ground Not existed J
53
P0151
57
5. Also check harness for short to power. K
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. L
Perform GI-36, "Intermittent Incident". M
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part. N
CAUTION: O
• Before installing new A/F sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread P
>> INSPECTION END

The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar one-cell limit current sen-
lean and rich range. Together with its control electronics, the sensor
the sensor cell. An electrode layer is applied voltage, and this current
JMBIA0112GB
electrode layer of current. In addition, a heater is integrated in the
mately 800°C (1,472°F).
PBIB3354E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1
signal is not inordinately high.
(bank 1) circuit high voltage • The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 5 V.
(bank 2) circuit high voltage

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
With GST

NO >> GO TO 3. A
With CONSULT-III EC
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. C
3. Maintain the following conditions for approximately 20 consecutive seconds.
ENG SPEED 1,000 - 3,200 rpm D

E
NOTE:
• Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during cruising. F
1.
With GST G
H
I

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. J
YES >> GO TO 2. K
L
M
A/F sensor 1
DTC Ground Voltage
N
P0132 1 F27 4
P0152 2 F64 4
Is the inspection result normal? O
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART P

• 15 A fuse (No. 46)

A/F sensor 1 ECM

DTC Continuity
1 45
P0132 1 F27
2 49
F8 Existed
1 53
P0152 2 F64
2 57
and ground.
A/F sensor 1
1
P0132 1 F27
2
Ground Not existed
1
P0152 2 F64
2
ECM
Connector Terminal
45
P0132
49
53
P0152
57
YES >> GO TO 5.
YES >> GO TO 6.
CAUTION:
>> INSPECTION END

A
JMBIA0112GB E
mately 800°C (1,472°F).
G
PBIB3354E

I
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

To judge the malfunction of A/F sensor 1, this diagnosis measures response time of the A/F signal computed J
by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal. The time is compensated by engine operating (speed and load), fuel
feedback control constant, and the A/F sensor 1 temperature index. Judgment is based on whether the com-
pensated time (the A/F signal cycling time index) is inordinately long or not. K
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 • Harness or connectors L
P0133 (bank 1) circuit slow re- (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
sponse • A/F sensor 1
• A/F sensor 1 heater
• The response of the A/F signal computed by M
• Fuel pressure
ECM from A/F sensor 1 signal takes more than
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 • Fuel injector
the specified time.
P0153 (bank 2) circuit slow re- • Intake air leakage
sponse • Exhaust gas leakage
• PCV N

O
1.PRECONDITIONING
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. P
TESTING CONDITION:
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 5.
With CONSULT-III
5. Select “A/F SEN1(B1) P1278/P1279” (for DTC P0133) or “A/F SEN1(B2) P1288/P1289” (for DTC P0153)
of “A/F SEN1” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
Is COMPLETED displayed?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
Check that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULT”.
Is OK displayed?
4.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-III
1. After perform the following procedure, “TESTING” will be displayed on the CONSULT-III screen.
- Increase the engine speed up to between 4,000 and 5,000 rpm and maintain that speed for 10 seconds.
- Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for approximately 10 seconds.
If “TESTING” is not displayed after 10 seconds, go to EC-128, "Component Function Check".
2. Wait for approximately 20 seconds at idle under the condition that “TESTING” is displayed on the CON-
SULT-III screen.
3. Check that “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”.
If “TESTING” changed to “OUT OF CONDITION”, go to EC-128, "Component Function Check".
4. Check that “OK” is displayed after touching “SELF-DIAG RESULT”.
Is OK displayed?
5.CHECK MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE
With GST
2. Select Service $01 with GST.
3. Calculate the total value of “Short-term fuel trim” and “Long-term fuel trim” indications.
Is the total percentage within ±15%?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 6.
• Exhaust gas leakage
• Incorrect fuel pressure
• Lack of fuel
• Fuel injector
• Incorrect PCV hose connection
• PCV valve
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part.

7.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-IV

4. Increase the engine speed up to between 4,000 and 5,000 rpm and maintain that speed for 10 seconds.
5. Fully release accelerator pedal and then let engine idle for approximately 1 minute. A
YES >> Go to EC-179, "Diagnosis Procedure". EC
C
D
YES >> GO TO 2. E
2.RETIGHTEN A/F SENSOR 1
Loosen and retighten the A/F sensor 1. Refer to EM-34, "Removal and Installation". F
>> GO TO 3.
G
3.CHECK EXHAUST GAS LEAKAGE
1. Start engine and run it at idle.
2. Listen for an exhaust gas leakage before three way catalyst (manifold). H
PBIB1216E
K
Is exhaust gas leakage detected?
YES >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part.
NO >> GO TO 4. L
4.CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAKAGE
Listen for an intake air leakage after the mass air flow sensor.
Is intake air leakage detected? M
NO >> GO TO 5.
N
5.CLEAR MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE
1. Clear the mixture ratio self-learning value. Refer to EC-24, "MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE
CLEAR : Special Repair Requirement". O
2. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed.
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171, P0172, P0174 or P0175 detected? Is it difficult to start engine?
P
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-205, "DTC Logic"
or EC-209, "DTC Logic".
NO >> GO TO 6.

A/F sensor 1
DTC Ground Voltage
P0133 1 F27 4
P0153 2 F64 4
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 7.
• 15 A fuse (No. 46)

A/F sensor 1 ECM

DTC Continuity
1 45
P0133 1 F27
2 49
F8 Existed
1 53
P0153 2 F64
2 57
and ground.
A/F sensor 1
1
P0133 1 F27
2
Ground Not existed
1
P0153 2 F64
2
ECM
Connector Terminal
45
P0133
49
53
P0153
57
YES >> GO TO 9.

9.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER A

YES >> GO TO 10. EC
NO >> GO TO 13.
C
YES >> GO TO 11. D
NO >> Replace mass air flow sensor.
11.CHECK PCV VALVE
Refer to EC-355, "Component Inspection". E
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> Repair or replace PCV valve. F
Perform GI-36, "Intermittent Incident". G
YES >> GO TO 13.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part. H
CAUTION: I
• Before installing new A/F sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread J
K
>> INSPECTION END

P0137, P0157 HO2S2
P0137, P0157 HO2S2
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),

monitors the oxygen level in the exhaust gas on each bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the sig-
nal from the heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates volt-
age from approximately 1 V in richer conditions to 0 V in leaner con-
ditions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for
engine control operation.
SEF327R
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time
between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1. The oxy-
gen storage capacity of the three way catalyst 1 causes the longer
switching time. To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor
2, ECM monitors whether the maximum voltage of the sensor is suf-
ficiently high during various driving conditions such as fuel cut.
SEF259VA
Heated oxygen sensor 2 • Harness or connectors
P0137 (bank 1) circuit low volt- (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
age The maximum voltage from the sensor does not • Heated oxygen sensor 2
Heated oxygen sensor 2 reach the specified voltage. • Fuel pressure
P0157 (bank 2) circuit low volt- • Fuel injector
age • Intake air leakage

1.INSPECTION START
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 11.
2.PRECONDITIONING
• If DTC confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at
• “COMPLETED” will appear on CONSULT-III screen when all tests “COND1”, “COND2” and “COND3” are
completed.
TESTING CONDITION:
• For the best results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F).
• Never stop engine during this procedure. If the engine is stopped, retry procedure from PERFORM
PROCEDURE FOR COND1-II.

P0137, P0157 HO2S2
>> GO TO 3.
3.PERFORM PROCEDURE FOR COND1-I A
Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature.

EC
>> GO TO 4.
4.PERFORM PROCEDURE FOR COND1-II
C
Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
>> GO TO 5. D
5.PERFORM PROCEDURE FOR COND1-III
2. Let engine idle for 1 minute. E
3. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1147” (for DTC P0137) or “HO2S2 (B2) P1167” (for DTC P0157) of “HO2S2” in
“DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
4. Touch “START”. F
5. Let engine idle for at least 30 seconds.
6. Rev engine up to 2,000 rpm two or three times quickly under no load.
Is “COMPLETED” appears on CONSULT-III screen?
G
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> GO TO 6.
6.PERFORM PROCEDURE FOR COND1-IV H
When the following conditions are met, “TESTING” will be displayed at “COND1” on the CONSULT-III screen.
Maintain the conditions continuously until “TESTING” changes to “COMPLETED”
I
ENG SPEED More than 1,000 rpm
J
COOLAN TEMP/S 70 - 105°C
CAUTION: K
Which displayed on CONSULT-III screen?
“COND1: OUT OF CONDITION”>>GO TO 4. L
“COND1: COMPLETED”, “COND2: INCOMPLETE”>>GO TO 7.
“COND1: COMPLETED”, “COND2: COMPLETED”>>GO TO 8.
7.PERFORM PROCEDURE FOR COND2 M
While driving, release accelerator pedal completed from the above condition (PERFORM PROCEDURE FOR
COND1-III) until “INCOMPLETE” at “COND2” on CONSULT-III screen has turned to “COMPLETED” (It will
take approximately 4 seconds). N
CAUTION:
Which displayed on CONSULT-III screen? O
8.PERFORM PROCEDURE FOR COND3-I P
Stop vehicle and let it idle until “INCOMPLETE” of “COND3” on CONSULT-III screen has turned to “COM-
PLETED”
>> GO TO 9.

P0137, P0157 HO2S2
Touch SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
“OK” >> INSPECTION END.
“NG” >> Go to EC-185, "Diagnosis Procedure".
“CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED”>>GO TO 10.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and leave the vehicle in a cool place (soak the vehicle).
2. Turn ignition switch ON and select “COOLAN TEMP/S” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Start engine and warm it up while monitoring “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication on CONSULT-III.
4. When “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches 70°C (158°F).
>> GO TO 5.
NOTE:
Use component function check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this
check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
YES >> INSPECTION END.
1.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK-I

Without CONSULT-III
ECM
DTC Connec- + – Condition Voltage
tor Terminal Terminal
33
P0137 [HO2S2 (bank 1)
signal] 35
Revving up to 4,000 rpm under no The voltage should be above 0.68 V
F8 (Sensor
34 load at least 10 times at least once during this procedure.
ground)
P0157 [HO2S2 (bank 2)
signal]
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK-II
Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals under the following conditions.

P0137, P0157 HO2S2
ECM A
EC
33
P0137 [HO2S2 (bank 1)
signal] 35
Keeping engine at idle for 10 min- The voltage should be above 0.68 V
F8 (Sensor C
34 utes at least once during this procedure.
ground)
P0157 [HO2S2 (bank 2)
signal]
Is the inspection result normal? D
NO >> GO TO 3.
E
3.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK-III
F
ECM
tor Terminal Terminal G
33
P0137 [HO2S2 (bank 1)
signal] 35 H
Coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) The voltage should be above 0.68 V
F8 (Sensor
34 with selector lever in the D position at least once during this procedure.
ground)
P0157 [HO2S2 (bank 2)
signal] I
NO >> Go to EC-185, "Diagnosis Procedure". J
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION K

2. Check ground connection E38. Refer to Ground Inspection in GI-38, "Circuit Inspection". L
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace ground connection. M
CLEAR : Special Repair Requirement". N
Is the 1st trip DTC P0171 or P0174 detected? Is it difficult to start engine?
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171 or P0174. Refer to EC-205, "DTC Logic". O
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
P
2. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector.
4. Check the continuity between heated oxygen sensor 2 (HO2S2) harness connector and ECM harness
connector.

P0137, P0157 HO2S2
HO2S2 ECM
DTC Continuity
P0137 1 F70 1
F8 35 Existed
P0157 2 F71 1
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
HO2S2 ECM
DTC Continuity
P0137 1 F70 4 33
F8 Existed
P0157 2 F71 4 34
2. Check the continuity between HO2S2 harness connector and ground, or ECM harness connector and
ground.
HO2S2
P0137 1 F70 4
Ground Not existed
P0157 2 F71 4
ECM
Connector Terminal
P0137 33
P0157 34
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 6.
CAUTION:
>> INSPECTION END

P0137, P0157 HO2S2
A
>> INSPECTION END
EC
1.INSPECTION START
Will CONSULT-III be used? C
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3. D
With CONSULT-III E
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. F
6. Select “FUEL INJECTION” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode, and select “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” as the monitor item
with CONSULT-III. G
7. Check “HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” at idle speed when adjusting “FUEL INJECTION” to ± 25%.
J
PBIB3458E
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be above 0.68 V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is + 25%.
“HO2S2 (B1)/(B2)” should be below 0.18 V at least once when the “FUEL INJECTION” is − 25%.
Is the inspection result normal? K
NO >> GO TO 6.
L
3.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2-I
Without CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. M
5. Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals under the following conditions. N
ECM
O
Connector
Terminal Terminal
33 P
[HO2S2 (bank 1) The voltage should be above 0.68 V at
signal] 35
Revving up to 4,000 rpm under no load at least once during this procedure.
F8 (Sensor
34 least 10 times The voltage should be below 0.18 V at
ground)
[HO2S2 (bank 2) least once during this procedure.
signal]

P0137, P0157 HO2S2
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2-II
ECM
Connector
Terminal Terminal
33
signal] 35
least once during this procedure.
F8 (Sensor Keeping engine at idle for 10 minutes
34 The voltage should be below 0.18 V at
ground)
signal]
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2-III
ECM
Connector
Terminal Terminal
33
signal] 35
Coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) with se- least once during this procedure.
F8 (Sensor
34 lector lever in the D position The voltage should be below 0.18 V at
ground)
signal]
NO >> GO TO 6.
CAUTION:
>> INSPECTION END

P0138, P0158 HO2S2
P0138, P0158 HO2S2
A
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold), EC

nal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. C
ditions. D
SEF327R E

The heated oxygen sensor 2 has a much longer switching time between rich and lean than the air fuel ratio (A/
F) sensor 1. The oxygen storage capacity of the three way catalyst 1 causes the longer switching time.
MALFUNCTION A G
To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors
whether the voltage is unusually high during various driving condi-
tions such as fuel cut.
H
J
PBIB1848E
MALFUNCTION B K
To judge the malfunctions of heated oxygen sensor 2, ECM monitors
whether the minimum voltage of sensor is sufficiently low during var-
ious driving conditions such as fuel cut.
L
N
PBIB2376E
O
An excessively high voltage from the sen-
A) (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
sor is sent to ECM.
• Heated oxygen sensor 2
P0138 (bank 1) circuit high volt- • Harness or connectors P
age (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
The minimum voltage from the sensor is
B) • Heated oxygen sensor 2
not reached to the specified voltage.
• Fuel pressure
• Fuel injector

P0138, P0158 HO2S2
An excessively high voltage from the sen-
A) (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
sor is sent to ECM.
• Heated oxygen sensor 2
P0158 (bank 2) circuit high volt- • Harness or connectors
age (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
The minimum voltage from the sensor is
B) • Heated oxygen sensor 2
not reached to the specified voltage.
• Fuel pressure
• Fuel injector

1.PRECONDITIONING OF DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A
>> GO TO 2.
3. Restart engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no
load.
4. Let engine idle for 2 minutes.
NO-1 >> With CONSULT-III: GO TO 3.
NO-2 >> Without CONSULT-III: GO TO 12.
3.PRECONDITIONING OF DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
“COMPLETED” will appear on CONSULT-III screen when all tests “COND1”, “COND2” and “COND3” are
completed.
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 4.
4.PERFORM PROCEDURE FOR COND1-I
>> GO TO 5.
>> GO TO 6.
3. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P1146” (for DTC P0138) or “HO2S2 (B2) P1166” (for DTC P0158) of “HO2S2” in
“DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.

P0138, P0158 HO2S2
YES >> GO TO 8. A
NO >> GO TO 7.
7.PERFORM PROCEDURE FOR COND1-IV
EC
C
COOLAN TEMP/S 70 - 105°C D
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. E
“COND1: OUT OF CONDITION”>>GO TO 5.
“COND1: COMPLETED”, “COND2: INCOMPLETE”>>GO TO 8. F
8.PERFORM PROCEDURE FOR COND2 G
take approximately 4 seconds).
H
CAUTION:
I
9.PERFORM PROCEDURE FOR COND3-I J
PLETED”
K
>> GO TO 10.
L
“OK” >> INSPECTION END. M
11.PERFORM PROCEDURE FOR COND3-III N
3. Start engine and warm it up while monitoring “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication on CONSULT-III. O
>> GO TO 6. P
NOTE:

P0138, P0158 HO2S2

Without CONSULT-III
ECM
33
P0138 [HO2S2 (bank 1)
signal] 35
Revving up to 4,000 rpm under no The voltage should be below 0.18 V
F8 (Sensor
34 load at least 10 times at least once during this procedure.
ground)
P0158 [HO2S2 (bank 2)
signal]
NO >> GO TO 2.
ECM
33
P0138 [HO2S2 (bank 1)
signal] 35
Keeping engine speed at idle for 10 The voltage should be below 0.18 V
F8 (Sensor
34 minutes at least once during this procedure.
ground)
P0158 [HO2S2 (bank 2)
signal]
NO >> GO TO 3.
ECM
33
P0138 [HO2S2 (bank 1)
signal] 35
Coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) The voltage should be below 0.18 V
F8 (Sensor
34 with selector lever in the D position at least once during this procedure.
ground)
P0158 [HO2S2 (bank 2)
signal]

P0138, P0158 HO2S2
YES >> INSPECTION END A
EC
1.INSPECTION START
Confirm the detected malfunction (A or B). Refer to EC-189, "DTC Logic". C
Which malfunction is detected?
A >> GO TO 2.
B >> GO TO 9. D
2. Check ground connection E38. Refer to Ground Inspection in GI-38, "Circuit Inspection". E
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace ground connection. F
3.CHECK HO2S2 CONNECTOR FOR WATER
1. Disconnect heated oxygen sensor 2 harness connector. G
2. Check that water is not inside connectors.
YES >> GO TO 4. H
I
connector.
J
HO2S2 ECM
DTC Continuity
K
P0138 1 F70 1
F8 35 Existed
P0158 2 F71 1
YES >> GO TO 5.
1. Check the continuity between HO2S2 harness connector and ECM harness connector. N
HO2S2 ECM
DTC Continuity
Bank Connector Terminal Connector Terminal O
P0138 1 F70 4 33
F8 Existed
P0158 2 F71 4 34
P
ground.

P0138, P0158 HO2S2
HO2S2
P0138 1 F70 4
Ground Not existed
P0158 2 F71 4
ECM
Connector Terminal
P0138 33
P0158 34
YES >> GO TO 6.
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 7.
CAUTION:
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

YES >> GO TO 10.
CLEAR : Special Repair Requirement".
Is the 1st trip DTC P0172 or P0175 detected? Is it difficult to start engine?
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-209, "DTC Logic".
NO >> GO TO 11.

P0138, P0158 HO2S2
4. Check the continuity between HO2S2 harness connector and ECM harness connector. A
HO2S2 ECM
DTC Continuity
Bank Connector Terminal Connector Terminal EC
P0138 1 F70 1
F8 35 Existed
P0158 2 F71 1
C
YES >> GO TO 12. D
E
HO2S2 ECM
DTC Continuity F
P0138 1 F70 4 33
F8 Existed
P0158 2 F71 4 34 G
ground.
H
HO2S2
I
P0138 1 F70 4
Ground Not existed
P0158 2 F71 4
J
ECM
Connector Terminal
K
P0138 33
P0158 34
3. Also check harness for short to power. L
YES >> GO TO 13.
Refer to EC-196, "Component Inspection". N
YES >> GO TO 15.
NO >> GO TO 14. O
CAUTION: P
>> INSPECTION END

P0138, P0158 HO2S2

>> INSPECTION END

1.INSPECTION START
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III
with CONSULT-III.
PBIB3458E
NO >> GO TO 6.
Without CONSULT-III
ECM
Connector
Terminal Terminal
33
signal] 35
F8 (Sensor
ground)
signal]

P0138, P0158 HO2S2
YES >> INSPECTION END A
NO >> GO TO 4.
EC
ECM C
Connector
Terminal Terminal
33 D
signal] 35
34 The voltage should be below 0.18 V at E
ground)
signal]
Is the inspection result normal? F
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2-III G
H
ECM
Connector
Terminal Terminal I
33
signal] 35
Coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) with se- least once during this procedure. J
F8 (Sensor
ground)
signal]
K
NO >> GO TO 6. L
CAUTION: M
• Before installing new oxygen sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread N
O
>> INSPECTION END

P0139, P0159 HO2S2
P0139, P0159 HO2S2
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold),

nal from the heated oxygen sensor 2.
ditions.
SEF327R
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

gen storage capacity of the three way catalyst 1 causes the longer
2, ECM monitors whether the switching response of the sensor's
voltage is faster than specified during various driving conditions such
as fuel cut.
SEF302U
Heated oxygen sensor 2 • Harness or connectors
sponse It takes more time for the sensor to respond be- • Heated oxygen sensor 2
Heated oxygen sensor 2 tween rich and lean than the specified time. • Fuel pressure
P0159 (bank 2) circuit slow re- • Fuel injector
sponse • Intake air leakage

1.INSPECTION START
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 11.
2.PRECONDITIONING
completed.
TESTING CONDITION:
• For the best results, perform “DTC WORK SUPPORT” at a temperature of 0 to 30 °C (32 to 86 °F).

P0139, P0159 HO2S2
>> GO TO 3.
3.PERFORM PROCEDURE FOR COND1-I A

EC
>> GO TO 4.
C
>> GO TO 5. D
2. Let engine idle for 1 minute. E
3. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P0139” or “HO2S2 (B2) P0159” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with
CONSULT-III.
4. Touch “START”. F
G
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> GO TO 6.
6.PERFORM PROCEDURE FOR COND1-IV H
I
J
CAUTION: K
“COND1: OUT OF CONDITION”>>GO TO 4. L
7.PERFORM PROCEDURE FOR COND2 M
take approximately 4 seconds). N
CAUTION:
Which displayed on CONSULT-III screen? O
8.PERFORM PROCEDURE FOR COND3-I P
PLETED”
>> GO TO 9.

P0139, P0159 HO2S2
>> GO TO 5.
NOTE:

Without CONSULT-III
ECM
33
P0139 [HO2S2 (bank 1)
signal] 35 A change of voltage should be more
Revving up to 4,000 rpm under no
F8 (Sensor than 0.12 V for 1 second during this
34 load at least 10 times
ground) procedure.
P0159 [HO2S2 (bank 2)
signal]
NO >> GO TO 2.
.

P0139, P0159 HO2S2
ECM A
EC
33
P0139 [HO2S2 (bank 1)
F8 (Sensor Keeping engine at idle for 10 minutes than 0.12 V for 1 second during this C
34 ground) procedure.
P0159 [HO2S2 (bank 2)
signal]
NO >> GO TO 3.
E
F
ECM
tor Terminal Terminal G
33
P0139 [HO2S2 (bank 1)
signal] 35 A change of voltage should be more H
Coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH)
34 with selector lever in the D position
ground) procedure.
P0159 [HO2S2 (bank 2)
signal] I
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION K

2. Check ground connection E38. Refer to Ground Inspection in GI-38, "Circuit Inspection". L
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace ground connection. M
CLEAR : Special Repair Requirement". N
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC P0171, P0174 or P0172, P0175. Refer to EC-205, "DTC Logic" O
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK HO2S2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT P
connector.

P0139, P0159 HO2S2
HO2S2 ECM
DTC Continuity
P0139 1 F70 1
F8 35 Existed
P0159 2 F71 1
YES >> GO TO 4.
HO2S2 ECM
DTC Continuity
P0139 1 F70 4 33
F8 Existed
P0159 2 F71 4 34
ground.
HO2S2
P0139 1 F70 4
Ground Not existed
P0159 2 F71 4
ECM
Connector Terminal
P0139 33
P0159 34
YES >> GO TO 5.
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 6.
CAUTION:
>> INSPECTION END

P0139, P0159 HO2S2
A
>> INSPECTION END
EC
1.INSPECTION START
Will CONSULT-III be used? C
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3. D
With CONSULT-III E
4. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. F
with CONSULT-III. G
J
PBIB3458E
NO >> GO TO 6.
L
Without CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. M
5. Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals under the following conditions. N
ECM
O
Connector
Terminal Terminal
33 P
signal] 35
F8 (Sensor
ground)
signal]

P0139, P0159 HO2S2
NO >> GO TO 4.
ECM
Connector
Terminal Terminal
33
signal] 35
ground)
signal]
NO >> GO TO 5.
ECM
Connector
Terminal Terminal
33
signal] 35
F8 (Sensor
ground)
signal]
NO >> GO TO 6.
CAUTION:
>> INSPECTION END

P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION
A
DTC DETECTION LOGIC EC

With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from A/F sensor 1. The ECM calculates
the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios. C
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (the actual mixture ratio is too lean), the
ECM judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and illuminates the MIL (2 trip detection
logic).
D
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
A/F sensor 1 Fuel injection control Fuel injector E
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
F
Fuel injection system too • Intake air leakage
P0171
lean (bank 1) • A/F sensor 1
• Fuel injector
• Fuel injection system does not operate properly.
• Exhaust gas leakage G
• The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too
Fuel injection system too • Incorrect fuel pressure
P0174 large. (The mixture ratio is too lean.)
lean (bank 2) • Lack of fuel
• Incorrect PCV hose connection H

1.PRECONDITIONING I
J
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-I K
2. Start engine. L
Is it difficult to start engine?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4. M
3.RESTART ENGINE
If it is difficult to start engine, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too.
Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. N
NOTE:
• When depressing accelerator pedal three-fourths (3/4) or more, the control system does not start the
engine. Do not depress accelerator pedal too much. O
Does engine start?
NO >> Check exhaust and intake air leakage visually. P
1. Keep engine idle for at least 10 minutes.
NO >> GO TO 5.


2. Start engine and drive the vehicle under similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 minutes.
Refer to the table below.
Hold the accelerator pedal as steady as possible.
Similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data mean that the following conditions should be satisfied at
the same time.
Engine speed Engine speed in the freeze frame data ± 400 rpm
Vehicle speed Vehicle speed in the freeze frame data ± 10 km/h (6 MPH)
Basic fuel schedule Basic fuel schedule in freeze frame data × (1 ± 0.1)
When the freeze frame data shows lower than 70°C (158°F),
T should be lower than 70°C (158°F).
Engine coolant temperature (T) condition
When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F),
T should be higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F).

2. Listen for an exhaust gas leakage before three way catalyst (manifold).
PBIB1216E

NO >> GO TO 2.
1. Listen for an intake air leakage after the mass air flow sensor.
2. Check PCV hose connection.
Is intake air leakage detected?
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect corresponding A/F sensor 1 harness connector.

A/F sensor 1 ECM A

DTC Continuity
1 45
P0171 1 F27 EC
2 49
F8 Existed
1 53
P0174 2 F64
2 57 C
and ground.
D
A/F sensor 1
E
1
P0171 1 F27
2
Ground Not existed
1 F
P0174 2 F64
2
G
ECM
Connector Terminal
45 H
P0171
49
53
P0174 I
57
Is the inspection result normal? J
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK FUEL PRESSURE K
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to EC-418, "Inspection".
2. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-418, "Inspection".
L
2
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.50 bar, 3.57 kg/cm , 51 psi)
M
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART N
YES >> Replace “fuel filter and fuel pump assembly”. O
6.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR P
With CONSULT-III
1. Install all removed parts.
2. Check “MASS AIR FLOW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
For specification, refer to EC-421, "Mass Air Flow Sensor".
With GST
2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in Service $01 with GST.

Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Check connectors for rusted terminals or loose connections in the mass air flow sensor circuit or
ground. Refer to EC-154, "Diagnosis Procedure".
7.CHECK FUNCTION OF FUEL INJECTOR
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
2. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Check that each circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop.
With GST
1. Let engine idle.
2. Listen to each fuel injector operating sound.
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Perform trouble diagnosis for FUEL INJECTOR, refer to
EC-342, "Diagnosis Procedure".
PBIB3332E
8.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR

2. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle.
3. Disconnect all fuel injector harness connectors.
4. Remove fuel tube assembly. Refer to EM-45, "Removal and Installation".
Keep fuel hose and all fuel injectors connected to fuel tube.
5. For DTC P0171, reconnect fuel injector harness connectors on bank 1.
For DTC P0174, reconnect fuel injector harness connectors on bank 2.
6. Disconnect all ignition coil harness connectors.
7. Prepare pans or saucers under each fuel injector.
8. Crank engine for approximately 3 seconds.
For DTC P0171, check that fuel sprays out from fuel injectors on bank 1.
For DTC P0174, check that fuel sprays out from fuel injectors on bank 2.
Fuel should be sprayed evenly for each fuel injector.

YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> Replace fuel injectors from which fuel does not spray out. Always replace O-ring with new ones.
>> INSPECTION END

A

With the Air/Fuel Mixture Ratio Self-Learning Control, the actual mixture ratio can be brought closely to the
theoretical mixture ratio based on the mixture ratio feedback signal from A/F sensor 1. The ECM calculates
the necessary compensation to correct the offset between the actual and the theoretical ratios. C
In case the amount of the compensation value is extremely large (the actual mixture ratio is too rich), the ECM
judges the condition as the fuel injection system malfunction and illuminates the MIL (2 trip detection logic).
Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator D

Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
A/F sensor 1 Fuel injection control Fuel injector
(Mixture ratio feedback signal)
E
Fuel injection system too • A/F sensor 1 F
P0172
rich (bank 1) • Fuel injection system does not operate properly. • Fuel injector
• The amount of mixture ratio compensation is too • Exhaust gas leakage
Fuel injection system too large. (The mixture ratio is too rich.) • Incorrect fuel pressure
P0175
rich (bank 2) • Mass air flow sensor G
1.PRECONDITIONING H
I
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-I J
2. Start engine.
K
Is it difficult to start engine?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4. L
3.RESTART ENGINE
If it is difficult to start engine, the fuel injection system has a malfunction, too.
Crank engine while depressing accelerator pedal. M
NOTE:
• When depressing accelerator pedal three-fourths (3/4) or more, the control system does not start the
engine. Do not depress accelerator pedal too much. N
Does engine start?
NO >> Remove spark plugs and check for fouling, etc. O
1. Keep engine idle for at least 10 minutes.
2. Check 1st trip DTC. P
NO >> GO TO 5.

2. Start engine and drive the vehicle under similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for 10 minutes.
Refer to the table below.
the same time.
T should be lower than 70°C (158°F).
Engine coolant temperature (T) condition
When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F),

2. Listen for an exhaust gas leakage before three way catalyst (manifold).
PBIB1216E

NO >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3.
A/F sensor 1 ECM

DTC Continuity
1 45
P0172 1 F27
2 49
F8 Existed
1 53
P0175 2 F64
2 57

and ground. A
A/F sensor 1
Bank Connector Terminal EC
1
P0172 1 F27
2
Ground Not existed C
1
P0175 2 F64
2
D
ECM
Connector Terminal
E
45
P0172
49
53 F
P0175
57
G
YES >> GO TO 4.
H
4.CHECK FUEL PRESSURE
2. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-418, "Inspection". I
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.50 bar, 3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi)

YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace “fuel filter and fuel pump assembly”.
K
With CONSULT-III
1. Install all removed parts. L
With GST
M
2. Check mass air flow sensor signal in “Service $01” with GST.
Is the measurement value within the specification? N
YES >> GO TO 6.
ground. Refer to EC-154, "Diagnosis Procedure". O
With CONSULT-III P
1. Start engine.
With GST
1. Let engine idle.

YES >> GO TO 7.
PBIB3332E

1. Remove fuel injector assembly. Refer to EM-45, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm that the engine is cooled down and there are no fire hazards near the vehicle.
3. Disconnect all fuel injector harness connectors.
5. Prepare pans or saucers under each fuel injector.
6. Crank engine for approximately 3 seconds.
Check the fuel does not drip from fuel injector.
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Replace the fuel injectors from which fuel is dripping. Always replace O-ring with new one.
>> INSPECTION END

P0197, P0198 EOT SENSOR
A
The engine oil temperature sensor is used to detect the engine oil EC
temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM.
The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine oil tempera-
ture input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the
change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor C
decreases as temperature increases.
SEF594K E
<Reference data>
F
Engine oil temperature
[°C (°F)]
–10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4 G
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
H
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
110 (230) 0.6 0.143 - 0.153
SEF012P
*: These data are reference values and are measured between ECM terminals 54 I
(Engine oil temperature sensor) and 52 (Sensor ground).
J
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Trouble Diagnosis K
Name
Engine oil tempera-
P0197 ture sensor circuit low L
input
Engine oil tempera- • Engine oil temperature sensor
sent to ECM. M
high input

1.PRECONDITIONING N
O
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE P


YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK EOT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect engine oil temperature (EOT) sensor harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between EOT sensor harness connector and ground.
EOT sensor
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK EOT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check the continuity between EOT sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.
EOT sensor ECM

Continuity
F66 2 F8 52 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace engine oil temperature sensor.
>> INSPECTION END

1.CHECK ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR

2. Disconnect engine oil temperature sensor harness connector.
3. Remove engine oil temperature sensor.

4. Check resistance between engine oil temperature sensor termi-
nals by heating with hot water as shown in the figure. A
Terminals Condition Resistance

20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 kΩ EC
1 and 2 Temperature [°C (°F)] 50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00 kΩ
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260 kΩ
C
NO >> Replace engine oil temperature sensor. D


PBIB0145E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
Throttle position sensor An excessively low voltage from the Throttle • Harness or connectors
P0222
1 circuit low input position sensor 1 is sent to ECM. [Throttle position (TP) sensor 1 circuit is
open or shorted.]
Throttle position sensor An excessively high voltage from the Throttle • Electric throttle control actuator
P0223
1 circuit high input position sensor 1 is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 1)

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I


Ground Voltage
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT D
3. Check the continuity between electric throttle control actuator and ECM harness connector. E
Electric throttle control actuator ECM

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal F
F29 4 F8 36 Existed
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. G
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. H
1. Check the continuity between electric throttle control actuator and ECM harness connector.
I
Continuity
J
F29 2 F8 37 Existed
YES >> GO TO 5.
L
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 6.
6.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR N
O
>> INSPECTION END
7.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT P
>> INSPECTION END


ECM
Connector
Terminal Terminal

36
38 (TP sensor 2
NO >> GO TO 2.
>> INSPECTION END


>> GO TO 2.
>> END

P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, P0306 MISFIRE
P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, P0306 MISFIRE
A

When a misfire occurs, engine speed will fluctuate. If the engine speed fluctuates enough to cause the crank-
shaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) signal to vary, ECM can determine that a misfire is occurring.
C
Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Engine speed On board diagnosis of misfire
The misfire detection logic consists of the following two conditions. D
1. One Trip Detection Logic (Three Way Catalyst Damage)
On the 1st trip, when a misfire condition occurs that can damage the three way catalyst (TWC) due to
overheating, the MIL will blink. E
When a misfire condition occurs, the ECM monitors the CKP sensor signal every 200 engine revolutions
for a change.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will turn off.
F
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC on a second trip, the MIL will blink.
When the misfire condition decreases to a level that will not damage the TWC, the MIL will remain on.
If another misfire condition occurs that can damage the TWC, the MIL will begin to blink again.
2. Two Trip Detection Logic (Exhaust quality deterioration) G
For misfire conditions that will not damage the TWC (but will affect vehicle emissions), the MIL will only
illuminate when the misfire is detected on a second trip. During this condition, the ECM monitors the CKP
sensor signal every 1,000 engine revolutions. H
A misfire malfunction can be detected in any one cylinder or in multiple cylinders.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause I
P0300 Multiple cylinder misfires detected Multiple cylinders misfire. • Improper spark plug
• Insufficient compression
P0301 No. 1 cylinder misfire detected No. 1 cylinder misfires.
• Incorrect fuel pressure J
P0302 No. 2 cylinder misfire detected No. 2 cylinder misfires. • The fuel injector circuit is open or shorted
• Fuel injector
P0304 No. 4 cylinder misfire detected No. 4 cylinder misfires. • The ignition signal circuit is open or shorted K
P0305 No. 5 cylinder misfire detected No. 5 cylinder misfires. • Lack of fuel
• Signal plate
• A/F sensor 1
• Incorrect PCV hose connection L

1.PRECONDITIONING M
N
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE-I O
3. Restart engine and let it idle for approximately 15 minutes. P
NO >> GO TO 3.

P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, P0306 MISFIRE
2. Start engine and drive the vehicle under similar conditions to (1st trip) Freeze Frame Data for a certain
time. Refer to the table below.
the same time.
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle in safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws when
driving.
Engine coolant temperature (T) T should be lower than 70°C (158°F).
condition When the freeze frame data shows higher than or equal to 70°C (158°F),
Driving time varies according to the engine speed in the freeze frame data.
Engine speed Time

Around 1,000 rpm Approximately 10 minutes
Around 2,000 rpm Approximately 5 minutes
More than 3,000 rpm Approximately 3.5 minutes
1.CHECK FOR INTAKE AIR LEAKAGE AND PCV HOSE

1. Start engine and run it at idle speed.
2. Listen for the sound of the intake air leakage.
3. Check PCV hose connection.
YES >> Discover air leakage location and repair.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FOR EXHAUST SYSTEM CLOGGING
Stop engine and visually check exhaust tube, three way catalyst and muffler for dents.
YES-1 >> With CONSULT-III: GO TO 3.
YES-2 >> Without CONSULT-III: GO TO 4.
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> GO TO 4.

P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, P0306 MISFIRE
2. Listen to each fuel injector operation.
A
Clicking sound should be heard.
YES >> GO TO 5. EC
C
PBIB3332E
5.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-I D
CAUTION:
Perform the following procedure in a place with no combustible objects and good ventilation.
E
2. Remove fuel pump fuse in IPDM E/R to release fuel pressure.
NOTE:
Do not use CONSULT-III to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the following pro- F
cedure.
3. Start engine.
4. After engine stalls, crank it 2 or 3 times to release all fuel pressure. G
6. Remove all ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical discharge from the ignition coils.
7. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be checked.
8. Crank engine for 5 seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder. H
9. Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil.
10. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm (0.52 -
0.66 in) between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal I
portion as shown in the figure.
11. Crank engine for approximately 3 seconds, and check whether
spark is generated between the spark plug and the grounded
metal portion. J
Spark should be generated.

K
CAUTION:
• During the operation, always stay 0.5 m (19.7 in) or more
away from the spark plug and the ignition coil. Be careful JMBIA0066GB
not to get an electrical shock while checking, because the L

electrical discharge voltage becomes 20 kV or more.
• It might damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm (0.66 in) is made.
NOTE: M
When the gap is less than 13 mm (0.52 in), a spark might be generated even if the coil is a malfunc-
tioning.
N
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-II O
2. Disconnect spark plug and connect a non-malfunctioning spark plug.
3. Crank engine for approximately 3 seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark P
plug and the grounded metal portion.

YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuits. Refer to EC-349, "Diagnosis Procedure".

P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, P0306 MISFIRE
7.CHECK SPARK PLUG

Check the initial spark plug for fouling, etc.
YES >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For
spark plug type, refer to EM-132, "Spark Plug".
NO >> Repair or clean spark plug. Then GO TO 8.
SEF156I
8.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-III

1. Reconnect the initial spark plugs.
2. Crank engine for approximately 3 seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark
plug and the grounded portion.

NO >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to EM-132, "Spark
Plug".
9.CHECK COMPRESSION PRESSURE
Check compression pressure. Refer to EM-23, "Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> Check pistons, piston rings, valves, valve seats and cylinder head gaskets.
3. Install fuel pressure gauge and check fuel pressure. Refer to EC-418, "Inspection".
At idle: Approximately 350 kPa (3.50 bar, 3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi)

YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> GO TO 11.
YES >> Replace “fuel filter and fuel pump assembly”.
Check idle speed and ignition timing.
For procedure, refer to EC-17, "BASIC INSPECTION : Special Repair Requirement".
For specification, refer to EC-421, "Idle Speed" and EC-421, "Ignition Timing".
YES >> GO TO 13.
NO >> Follow the EC-17, "BASIC INSPECTION : Special Repair Requirement".

P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, P0306 MISFIRE
3. Disconnect ECM harness connector. A
A/F sensor 1 ECM EC

Continuity
1 45
1 F27 C
2 49
F8 Existed
1 53
2 F64
2 57 D
and ground.
E
A/F sensor 1
Ground Continuity
1
F
1 F27
2
Ground Not existed
1 G
2 F64
2
ECM H
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
45
I
49
53
57 J
K
YES >> GO TO 14.
14.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER L
YES >> GO TO 15. M
NO >> Replace malfunctioning A/F sensor 1.
15.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR N
With CONSULT-III
2. For specification, refer to EC-421, "Mass Air Flow Sensor".
O
With GST
1. Check mass air flow sensor signal in Service $01 with GST.
2. For specification, refer to EC-421, "Mass Air Flow Sensor".
Is the measurement value within the specification? P
YES >> GO TO 16.
ground. Refer to EC-154, "Diagnosis Procedure".
16.CHECK SYMPTOM TABLE
Check items on the rough idle symptom in EC-407, "Symptom Table".

P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304, P0305, P0306 MISFIRE
YES >> GO TO 17.
17.ERASE THE 1ST TRIP DTC
Some tests may cause a 1st trip DTC to be set.
Erase the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory after performing the tests. Refer to EC-106, "Diagnosis Descrip-
tion".
>> GO TO 18.
>> INSPECTION END

P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS
P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS
A
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A EC
knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is converted into a
voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000004690489 C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

D
Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. DTC detected condition Possible cause
name
Knock sensor (bank 1) An excessively low voltage from the sensor is E
P0327
circuit low input sent to ECM.
Knock sensor (bank 1) An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
circuit high input sent to ECM.
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) F
Knock sensor (bank 2) An excessively low voltage from the sensor is • Knock sensor
P0332
P0333 G

H
1.PRECONDITIONING
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. I
TESTING CONDITION:
J
>> GO TO 2.
1. Start engine and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed. K
YES >> Go to EC-225, "Diagnosis Procedure". L
M
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. N
YES >> GO TO 2. O
2.CHECK KNOCK SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector. P
2. Check the continuity between knock sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.

P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS
Knock sensor ECM

DTC Continuity
P0327, P0328 1 F201 2
F8 67 Existed
P0332, P0333 2 F202 2
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
• Harness connectors F200, F78
• Harness for open or short between knock sensor and ECM
4.CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
Knock sensor ECM

DTC Continuity
P0327, P0328 1 F201 1 61
F8 Existed
P0332, P0333 2 F202 1 62
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
6.CHECK KNOCK SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning knock sensor.
>> INSPECTION END


2. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector.
3. Check resistance between knock sensor terminal as per the following.
NOTE:

P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ.
A
1 and 2 Approx. 532 - 588 kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)]
EC
CAUTION:
Never use any knock sensors that have been dropped or physically damaged. Use only new ones.
C
D

P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan facing
the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of
the engine revolution.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth
cause the gap with the sensor to change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to
change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor
changes.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of
JMBIA0062ZZ
ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure.
JMBIA0001GB
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
• The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal [Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS)
is not detected by the ECM during the first circuit is open or shorted.]
few seconds of engine cranking. [Accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor
• The proper pulse signal from the crankshaft 2 circuit is shorted.]
Crankshaft position sensor
P0335 position sensor (POS) is not sent to ECM (Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is
(POS) circuit
while the engine is running. shorted.)
• The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal • CKP sensor (POS)
is not in the normal pattern during engine • APP sensor
running. • Refrigerant pressure sensor
• Signal plate

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 10.5 V with igni-
tion switch ON.
>> GO TO 2.
If engine does not start, crank engine for at least 2 seconds.

YES >> Go to EC-229, "Diagnosis Procedure". A
EC
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. C
YES >> GO TO 2. D
2.CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Disconnect crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) harness connector. E
3. Check the voltage between CKP sensor (POS) harness connector and ground.
F
CKP sensor (POS)
Ground Voltage (V)
Connector Terminal
G
F20 1 Ground Approx. 5
YES >> GO TO 8. H
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON. I
3. Check the continuity between CKP sensor (POS) harness connector and ECM harness connector.
J
CKP sensor (POS) ECM
Continuity
K
F20 1 F8 76 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4. L
NO >> Repair open circuit.
4.CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals. M
ECM Sensor
N
Connector Terminal Name Connector Terminal
72 Refrigerant pressure sensor E300 1
F8
76 CKP sensor (POS) F20 1 O
E16 87 APP sensor E110 5
P
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
5.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-356, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES >> GO TO 6.

NO >> Replace refrigerant pressure sensor.
6.CHECK APP SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> GO TO 7.
7.REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
1. Replace accelerator pedal assembly.
>> INSPECTION END

8.CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

Continuity
F20 2 F8 60 Existed
YES >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

Continuity
F20 3 F8 65 Existed
YES >> GO TO 10.
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS).
11.CHECK GEAR TOOTH
Visually check for chipping signal plate gear tooth.
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> Replace the signal plate.
>> INSPECTION END

A
1.CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)-I
1. Loosen the fixing bolt of the sensor.
2. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector. EC
3. Remove the sensor.
4. Visually check the sensor for chipping.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace crankshaft position sensor (POS)
D
JMBIA0063ZZ
2.CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)-II F
Check resistance crankshaft position sensor (POS) terminals as per the following.
G
Terminal No. (Polarity) Resistance
1 (+) - 2 (-)
1 (+) - 3 (-) Except 0 or ∞ Ω [at 25°C (77°F)] H
2 (+) - 3 (-)
I
J

P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the retraction of

camshaft (INT) to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft position
sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position.
When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoper-
ative, the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various con-
trols of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification
signals.
When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause
the gap with the sensor to change.
JMBIA0064ZZ
change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
JMBIA0001GB
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
Camshaft position sen- • Harness or connectors
• The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM for
P0340 sor (PHASE) (bank 1) (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
the first few seconds during engine cranking.
circuit • Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
• The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM
• Camshaft (INT)
Camshaft position sen- during engine running.
• Starter motor (Refer to STR-5.)
P0345 sor (PHASE) (bank 2) • The cylinder No. signal is not in the normal
• Starting system circuit (Refer to STR-5.)
circuit pattern during engine running.
• Dead (Weak) battery

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
tion switch ON.
>> GO TO 2.

YES >> Go to EC-233, "Diagnosis Procedure". A
NO >> GO TO 3.
EC
1. Maintaining engine speed at more than 800 rpm for at least 5 seconds.
C
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004690498 D
1.CHECK STARTING SYSTEM

Turn ignition switch to START position. E
Does the engine turn over? Does the starter motor operate?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Check starting system. (Refer to STR-2, "Work Flow".) F
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. G
YES >> GO TO 3. H
3.CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR (PHASE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
I
1. Disconnect camshaft position (CMP) sensor (PHASE) harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between CMP sensor (PHASE) harness connector and ground.
J
CMP sensor (PHASE)
DTC Ground Voltage (V)
K
P0340 1 F26 1
Ground Approx. 5
P0345 2 F69 1
Is the inspection result normal? L
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT M

3. Check the continuity between CMP sensor (PHASE) harness connector and ECM harness connector. N
CMP sensor (PHASE) ECM

DTC Continuity O
P0340 1 F26 2 64
F8 Existed
P0345 2 F69 2 68 P
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

1. Check the continuity between CMP sensor (PHASE) harness connector and ECM harness connector.

DTC Continuity
P0340 1 F26 3 70
F8 Existed
P0345 2 F69 3 69
YES >> GO TO 6.
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning camshaft position sensor (PHASE).
7.CHECK CAMSHAFT (INT)
• Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft rear end
YES >> GO TO 8.
JMBIA0058ZZ

>> INSPECTION END

1.CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)-I

3. Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness connector.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning camshaft position sensor
(PHASE).
JMBIA0065ZZ
2.CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)-II

Check resistance camshaft position sensor (PHASE) terminals as per the following.

Terminal No. (Polarity) Resistance A

1 (+) - 2 (-)
1 (+) - 3 (-) Except 0 or ∞ Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
EC
2 (+) - 3 (-)
YES >> INSPECTION END C

P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

The ECM monitors the switching frequency ratio of air fuel ratio (A/F)
sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor 2.
A three way catalyst (manifold) with high oxygen storage capacity
will indicate a low switching frequency of heated oxygen sensor 2.
As oxygen storage capacity decreases, the heated oxygen sensor 2
switching frequency will increase.
When the frequency ratio of A/F sensor 1 and heated oxygen sensor
2 approaches a specified limit value, the three way catalyst (mani-
fold) malfunction is diagnosed.
PBIB2055E
Catalyst system efficiency • Three way catalyst (manifold)
P0420
below threshold (bank 1) • Exhaust tube
• Three way catalyst (manifold) does not operate
properly.
• Fuel injector
Catalyst system efficiency • Three way catalyst (manifold) does not have
P0430 • Fuel injector leakage
below threshold (bank 2) enough oxygen storage capacity.
• Spark plug
• Improper ignition timing

1.INSPECTION START
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 7.
2.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
Do not maintain engine speed for more than the specified minutes below.
>> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III
6. Check that “COOLAN TEMP/S” indicates more than 70°C (158°F).
If not, warm up engine and go to next step when “COOLAN TEMP/S” indication reaches 70°C (158°F).
7. Open engine hood.
8. Select “DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION” then “SRT WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
9. Rev engine between 2,000 and 3,000 rpm and hold it for 3 consecutive minutes then release the acceler-
ator pedal completely.
10. Check the indication of “CATALYST”.
Which is displayed on CONSULT-III screen?

CMPLT >> GO TO 6.
INCMP >> GO TO 4. A
1. Wait 5 seconds at idle.
2. Rev engine between 2,000 and 3,000 rpm and maintain it until “INCMP” of “CATALYST” changes to EC
“CMPLT” (It will take approximately 5 minutes).
Does the indication change to “CMPLT”?
C
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE AGAIN D
1. Stop engine and cool it down to less than 70°C (158°F).
2. Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE again.
E
>> GO TO 3.
F
Check 1st trip DTC.
YES >> Go to EC-238, "Diagnosis Procedure". G
Perform component function check. Refer to EC-237, "Component Function Check". H
NOTE:
Use component function check to check the overall function of the three way catalyst (manifold). During this
check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. I
1.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK K
Without CONSULT-III
L
5. Open engine hood. M
ECM N
DTC Connec- + – Condition Voltage (V)
O
33
P0420 [HO2S2 (bank 1) The voltage fluctuation cycle takes
signal] 35
Keeping engine speed at 2,500 rpm more than 5 seconds.
F8 (Sensor
34 constant under no load • 1 cycle: 0.6 - 1.0 → 0 - 0.3 → 0.6 - P
ground)
P0430 [HO2S2 (bank 2) 1.0
signal]

1.CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM

Visually check exhaust tubes and muffler for dents.
YES >> GO TO 2.
2. Listen for an exhaust gas leakage before the three way catalyst (manifold).
PBIB1216E

NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK INTAKE AIR LEAKAGE
NO >> GO TO 4.
Check idle speed and ignition timing.
For procedure, refer to EC-17, "BASIC INSPECTION : Special Repair Requirement".
For specification, refer to EC-421, "Idle Speed" and EC-421, "Ignition Timing".
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Follow the EC-17, "BASIC INSPECTION : Special Repair Requirement".
5.CHECK FUEL INJECTORS
1. Stop engine and then turn ignition switch ON.
ECM
+ – Voltage
1
3
29
F7 E16 112 Battery voltage
30
31
32
YES >> GO TO 6.

NO >> Perform EC-342, "Diagnosis Procedure".
6.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-I A
CAUTION:
EC
NOTE:
Do not use CONSULT-III to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the following pro- C
cedure.
3. Start engine.
4. After engine stalls, crank it 2 or 3 times to release all fuel pressure.
D
8. Crank engine for 5 seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder. E
0.66 in) between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal F
metal portion. G

CAUTION: H
not to get an electrical shock while checking, because the I

electrical discharge voltage becomes 20 kV or more.
NOTE:
J
tioning.
K
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-II L
2. Disconnect spark plug and connect a non-malfunctioning spark plug.
3. Crank engine for approximately 3 seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark M
plug and the grounded metal portion.

N
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Check ignition coil, power transistor and their circuit. Refer to EC-349, "Diagnosis Procedure". O
8.CHECK SPARK PLUG
P

Check the initial spark plug for fouling, etc.
YES >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For
spark plug type, refer to EM-132, "Spark Plug".
NO >> Repair or clean spark plug. Then GO TO 9.
SEF156I
9.CHECK FUNCTION OF IGNITION COIL-III

1. Reconnect the initial spark plugs.
2. Crank engine for approximately 3 seconds, and recheck whether spark is generated between the spark
plug and the grounded portion.

NO >> Replace spark plug(s) with standard type one(s). For spark plug type, refer to EM-132, "Spark
Plug".
2. Remove fuel injector assembly.
Refer to EM-45, "Removal and Installation".
4. Reconnect all fuel injector harness connectors disconnected.
6. Check that fuel does not drip from fuel injector.
Does fuel drip from fuel injector?
YES >> Replace the fuel injector(s) from which fuel is dripping.
NO >> GO TO 11.
Is the inspection result norma?
YES >> Replace three way catalyst assembly.
NO >> Repair or replace harness or connector.

P0444 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
A
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is used to EC

control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve is moved by ON/OFF
pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse, the greater the
amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve. C
PBIB3489E E
• Harness or connectors G
EVAP canister purge volume (The solenoid valve circuit is open or
An excessively low voltage signal is sent
P0444 control solenoid valve circuit shorted.)
to ECM via the valve
open • EVAP canister purge volume control H
solenoid valve

I
1.CONDITIONING
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. J
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11 V at idle.
K
>> GO TO 2.
1. Start engine and let it idle for at least 13 seconds. L
YES >> Go to EC-241, "Diagnosis Procedure". M
N
1.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. O
2. Disconnect EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector.
4. Check the voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector and
ground. P

solenoid valve Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal

YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
• Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
• Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM
3.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check the continuity between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector and
ECM harness connector.
EVAP canister purge volume con-

ECM
trol solenoid valve Continuity
F30 2 F7 25 Existed
4.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT-III
2. Start engine.
3. Perform “PURG VOL C/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III. Check that engine speed varies
according to the valve opening.
Does engine speed vary according to the valve opening?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
>> INSPECTION END


With CONSULT-III

3. Disconnect EVAP purge hoses connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
4. Turn ignition switch ON. A
5. Select “PURG VOL C/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
6. Touch “Qd” and “Qu” on CONSULT-III screen to adjust “PURG
VOL C/V” opening and check air passage continuity of EVAP
EC
canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following
conditions.
C
Condition Air passage continuity
(PURG VOL C/V value) between (A) and (B)
100% Existed
D
0% Not existed
PBIB2058E
E
Without CONSULT-III
3. Disconnect EVAP purge hoses connected to EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve. F
4. Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
G
Air passage continuity
Condition
between (A) and (B)
12 V direct current supply between H
Existed
terminals 1 and 2
No supply Not existed
Is the inspection result normal? I
YES >> INSPECTION END PBIB2059E
NO >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid

valve J

P0500 VSS
P0500 VSS
The vehicle speed signal is sent to the combination meter from the “ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit)” via the CAN communication line. The combination meter then sends a signal to the ECM via the CAN
communication line.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
• If DTC P0500 is displayed with DTC U1000 or U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC
U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-139, "DTC Logic".
• If DTC P0500 is displayed with DTC P0607, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0607. Refer
to EC-252, "DTC Logic".
(The CAN communication line is open or shorted.)
The vehicle speed signal sent to ECM • Harness or connectors
P0500 Vehicle speed sensor is almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) even when (The vehicle speed signal circuit is open or shorted.)
vehicle is being driven. • Wheel sensor
• Combination meter
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

1.INSPECTION START
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 5.
2.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
NOTE:
This procedure may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a
road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine (ESP switch OFF).
2. Read “VHCL SPEED SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. The vehicle speed on CON-
SULT-III should exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear position.
YES >> GO TO 4.
1. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
2. Warm engine up to normal operating temperature.
CAUTION:

P0500 VSS
ENG SPEED 1,400 - 6,000 rpm A

EC
Selector lever Except P or N position
PW/ST SIGNAL OFF
4. Check 1st trip DTC. C
NO >> INSPECTION END D
Perform Component Function Check. Refer to EC-245, "Component Function Check". E
Use Component Function Check to check the overall function of the vehicle speed signal circuit. During this
F
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000004690509 G

H
With GST
1. Lift up drive wheels.
2. Start engine.
3. Read vehicle speed signal in Service $01 with GST. I
The vehicle speed signal on GST should be able to exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with
suitable gear position.
K
1.CHECK DTC WITH “ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)”
L
Refer to BRC-29, "CONSULT-III Function".
YES >> GO TO 2. M
2.CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION
Refer to MWI-32, "CONSULT-III Function (METER/M&A)". N
>> INSPECTION END

O

P0550 PSP SENSOR
P0550 PSP SENSOR
Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power steering high-pressure tube and detects a
power steering load.
This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering load into output voltage, and emits the
voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator and adjusts the throttle valve
opening angle to increase the engine speed and adjusts the idle speed for the increased load.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
If DTC P0550 is displayed with DTC P0643, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0643. Refer to
EC-253, "DTC Logic".
Power steering pressure An excessively low or high voltage from the
sensor circuit sensor is sent to ECM.
• Power steering pressure sensor

1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK PSP SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect power steering pressure (PSP) sensor harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between PSP sensor harness connector and ground.
PSP sensor
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.

P0550 PSP SENSOR
3.CHECK PSP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A

3. Check the continuity between PSP sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.
EC
PSP sensor ECM

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal C
F62 1 F8 48 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair open circuit, short to ground short to power in harness or connectors.
E
4.CHECK PSP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
F
PSP sensor ECM
Continuity
F62 2 F8 41 Existed
G

YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK PSP SENSOR I
J
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Replace PSP sensor.
6.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT K
>> INSPECTION END L
M
1.CHECK POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR
2. Start engine and let it idle. N
3. Check the voltage between ECM terminals under the following conditions.
ECM O
Connector
Terminal Terminal
41 Steering wheel: Being turned. 0.5 - 4.5 V P
48
F8 (Power steering pressure
(Sensor ground) Steering wheel: Not being turned. 0.4 - 0.8 V
sensor signal)
NO >> Replace power steering pressure sensor.

P0603 ECM POWER SUPPLY
Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch
is turned OFF for the ECM memory function of the DTC memory, the
air-fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the idle air vol-
ume learning value memory, etc.
PBIA9222J
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
ECM power supply cir- ECM back up RAM system does not function [ECM power supply (back up) circuit is
P0603
cuit properly. open or shorted.]
• ECM

1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn it ON.
1.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY

ECM
+ – Voltage

YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2. A
EC
• 15 A fuse (No. 50)
• Harness for open or short between ECM and battery
C
3.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT D
YES >> GO TO 4. E
F
2. Erase DTC.
3. Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE.
See EC-248, "DTC Logic". G
Is the 1st trip DTC P0603 displayed again?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> INSPECTION END H
5.REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM. I
2. Go to EC-20, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Require-
ment".
J
>> INSPECTION END

P0605 ECM
P0605 ECM
The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal

input and output and for power supply. The ECM controls the engine.
PBIA9222J
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
A) ECM calculation function is malfunctioning.
P0605 Engine control module B) ECM EEP-ROM system is malfunctioning. • ECM
C) ECM self shut-off function is malfunctioning.

1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C
3. Repeat step 2 for 32 times.

P0605 ECM
A
1.INSPECTION START
2. Erase DTC. EC
See EC-250, "DTC Logic".
Is the 1st trip DTC P0605 displayed again? C
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE ECM D
1. Replace ECM.
E
ment".
>> INSPECTION END

F

P0607 ECM
P0607 ECM
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
When detecting error during the initial diagno-
P0607 CAN communication bus • ECM
sis of CAN controller of ECM.

2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
1.INSPECTION START
2. Erase DTC.
4. Check DTC.
Is the DTC P0607 displayed again?
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> INSPECTION END
2.REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
ment".
>> INSPECTION END

P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
A
Trouble diagnosis
name C
[Accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor 1 circuit
is shorted.] D
[Throttle position (TP) sensor circuit is shorted.]
[Camshaft position (CMP) sensor (PHASE) circuit
is shorted.)
P0643
Sensor power supply ECM detects that the voltage of power [Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor circuit is E
circuit short source for sensor is excessively low or high. shorted.]
(Battery current sensor circuit is shorted.)
• APP sensor
• TP sensor F
• CMP sensor (PHASE)
• PSP sensor
• Battery current sensor
G
1.PRECONDITIONING H
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8 V at idle. I
>> GO TO 2.
J
2. Check DTC K
Is DTC detected?
NO >> INSPECTION END L
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION M

N
YES >> GO TO 2.
O
2.CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch ON. P
3. Check the voltage between APP sensor harness connector and ground.
APP sensor
Ground Voltage (V)
Connector Terminal
E110 4 Ground Approx. 5

YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 3.
Check harness for short to power and short to ground, between the following terminals.
ECM Sensor
47 TP sensor F29 1
51 Battery current sensor F76 1
F8 55 PSP sensor F62 3
59 CMP sensor (PHASE) (bank 1) F26 1
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK COMPONENTS
• Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) (Refer to EC-234, "Component Inspection".)
• Battery current sensor (Refer to EC-269, "Component Inspection".)
• Power steering pressure sensor (Refer to EC-247, "Component Inspection".)
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning component.
5.CHECK TP SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> GO TO 6.
>> INSPECTION END

7.CHECK APP SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> GO TO 8.
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

P0850 PNP SWITCH
P0850 PNP SWITCH
A
When the selector lever position is P or N, park/neutral position (PNP) signal from the TCM is sent to ECM. EC
DTC DETECTION LOGIC C
D
The signal of the park/neutral position (PNP)
Park/neutral position [The park/neutral position (PNP) signal
P0850 signal does not change during driving after the
switch circuit is open or shorted.]
engine is started.
• TCM E

1.INSPECTION START F
G
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 5.
2.PRECONDITIONING H
I
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK PNP SIGNAL
J
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Then check the “P/N POSI SW” sig-
nal under the following conditions. K
Position (Selector lever) Known-good signal

L
N or P position ON
Except above position OFF
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE N

3. Maintain the following conditions for at least 50 consecutive seconds. O
CAUTION:
P

P0850 PNP SWITCH
NOTE:
Use component function check to check the overall function of the park/neutral position (PNP) signal circuit.
During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.

ECM
Connector
Terminal Terminal
P or N Battery voltage
E16 102 112 Selector lever position
Except above Approx. 0 V
1.CHECK DTC WITH TCM

Refer to EC-395, "DTC Index".
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK PNP SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
2. Disconnect TCM harness connector.
4. Check the continuity between TCM harness connector and IPDM E/R harness connector.
TCM IPDM E/R

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK PNP SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II
1. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connectors.

P0850 PNP SWITCH
A
ECM IPDM E/R
Continuity
EC
YES >> GO TO 4.
E
F

P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT
The malfunction information related to TCS is transferred via the CAN communication line from “ABS actuator
and electric unit (control unit)” to ECM.
Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for “ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)” but also for ECM after TCS related repair.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

Freeze frame data is not stored in the ECM for this self-diagnosis.
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control
ECM receives malfunction information from
P1211 TCS control unit unit)
“ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)”.
• TCS related parts

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
YES >> EC-258, "Diagnosis Procedure"
Go to BRC-5, "Work Flow".

P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE
A
This CAN communication line is used to control the smooth engine operation during the TCS operation. Pulse EC
signals are exchanged between ECM and “ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)”.
C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC D

NOTE:
E
F
ECM cannot receive the information from G
(The CAN communication line is open or shorted.)
P1212 TCS communication line “ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit)” continuously.
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE H
1.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at I
TESTING CONDITION:
J
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE K
Is 1st trip DTC detected? L
M

N

P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, engine coolant temperature will
rise.
When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction is
indicated.
• Cooling fan does not operate properly (Over-
(The cooling fan circuit is open or shorted.)
heat).
• IPDM E/R (Cooling fan relays)
• Cooling fan system does not operate proper-
• Cooling fan motor
Engine over temperature ly (Overheat).
P1217 • Radiator hose
(Overheat) • Engine coolant was not added to the system
• Radiator
using the proper filling method.
• Radiator cap
• Engine coolant is not within the specified
• Water pump
range.
• Thermostat
CAUTION:
When a malfunction is indicated, always replace the coolant. Refer to CO-8, "Draining". Also, replace
the engine oil. Refer to LU-8, "Draining".
1. Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute. Always use
coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-9, "Engine Coolant Mixture Ratio".
2. After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow noise is emitted.
NOTE:
Use component function check to check the overall function of the cooling fan. During this check, a DTC might
not be confirmed.

WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pres-
sure fluid escaping from the radiator.
Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up
pressure to escape. Then turn the cap all the way off.

Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level. A
Is the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator below the
proper range?
NO >> GO TO 2.
SEF621W
2.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK-II D
Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not.

Did customer fill the coolant? E
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK-III F
With CONSULT-III
2. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III. G
3. Check that cooling fan motors-1 and -2 operate at each speed (LOW/MID/HI).
Without CONSULT-III
Perform IPDM E/R auto active test and check cooling fan motors operation, refer to PCS-11, "Diagnosis H
Description".
YES >> INSPECTION END I
J
1.CHECK COOLING FAN OPERATION
With CONSULT-III K
2. Perform “COOLING FAN” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Check that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at each speed (LOW/MID/HI).
L
Without CONSULT-III
1. Perform IPDM E/R auto active test and check cooling fan motors operation, refer to PCS-11, "Diagnosis
Description".
2. Check that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at each speed (Low/Middle/High). M
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Go to EC-332, "Diagnosis Procedure". N
2.CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKAGE-I

Check cooling system for leakage. Refer to CO-8, "Inspection". O
Is leakage detected?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4. P
3.CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKAGE-II
Check the following for leakage.
• Hose
• Radiator
• Water pump

4.CHECK RADIATOR CAP
Check radiator cap. Refer to CO-12, "RADIATOR CAP : Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace radiator cap.
5.CHECK THERMOSTAT
Check thermostat. Refer to CO-24, "Inspection".
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Replace thermostat
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK MAIN 12 CAUSES
If the cause cannot be isolated, check the following.
Engine Step Inspection item Equipment Standard Reference page

OFF 1 • Blocked radiator • Visual No blocking —
• Blocked condenser
• Blocked radiator grille
• Blocked bumper
2 • Coolant mixture • Coolant tester MA-8, "Fluids and Lubricants"
3 • Coolant level • Visual Coolant up to MAX level in CO-8, "Inspection"
reservoir tank and radiator
filler neck
4 • Radiator cap • Pressure tester CO-12, "RADIATOR CAP : Inspection"
ON*2 5 • Coolant leakage • Visual No leakage CO-8, "Inspection"
ON*2 6 • Thermostat • Touch the upper and Both hoses should be hot CO-24, "Inspection"
lower radiator hoses
ON*1 7 • Cooling fan • CONSULT-III Operating EC-332, "Component

Function Check"
OFF 8 • Combustion gas leak- • Color checker chemical Negative —
age tester 4 Gas analyzer
ON*3 9 • Coolant temperature • Visual Gauge less than 3/4 when —

gauge driving
• Coolant overflow to res- • Visual No overflow during driving CO-8, "Inspection"
ervoir tank and idling
OFF*4 10 • Coolant return from res- • Visual Should be initial level in CO-8, "Inspection"
ervoir tank to radiator reservoir tank
OFF 11 • Cylinder head • Straight gauge feeler 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maxi- EM-104, "Inspection"
gauge mum distortion (warping)
12 • Cylinder block and pis- • Visual No scuffing on cylinder EM-116, "Inspection"
tons walls or piston
*1: Turn the ignition switch ON.
*2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes.
*3: Drive at 90 km/h (56 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes.
*4: After 60 minutes of cool down time.
For more information, refer to CO-3, "Troubleshooting Chart".

>> INSPECTION END A
EC

P1225 TP SENSOR
P1225 TP SENSOR

PBIB0145E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Closed throttle position Closed throttle position learning value is exces- • Electric throttle control actuator
P1225
learning performance sively low. (Throttle position sensor 1 and 2)

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
1.CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY

2. Remove the intake air duct.

P1225 TP SENSOR
3. Check if foreign matter is caught between the throttle valve (1)
and the housing. A
- Electric throttle control actuator (2)
- : Vehicle front
Is the inspection result normal? EC
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle
control actuator inside. C
JMBIA1132ZZ
2.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR D

E
>> INSPECTION END

F

G
>> GO TO 2. H
I
>> END
J

P1226 TP SENSOR
P1226 TP SENSOR

PBIB0145E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Closed throttle position Closed throttle position learning is not performed • Electric throttle control actuator
P1226
learning performance successfully, repeatedly. (Throttle position sensor 1 and 2)

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.


P1226 TP SENSOR
and the housing. A
- : Vehicle front
YES >> GO TO 2.
control actuator inside. C
JMBIA1132ZZ
2.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR D

E
>> INSPECTION END

F

G
>> GO TO 2. H
I
>> END
J

P1550 BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR
The power generation voltage variable control enables fuel consumption to be decreased by reducing the
engine load which is caused by the power generation of the generator. The battery current sensor is installed
to the battery cable at the negative terminal. The sensor measures the charging/discharging current of the bat-
tery. Based on the sensor signal, ECM judges whether or not the power generation voltage variable control is
performed. When performing the power generation voltage variable control, ECM calculates the target power
generation voltage based on the sensor signal. And ECM sends the calculated value as the power generation
command value to IPDM E/R. For the details of the power generation voltage variable control, refer to CHG-5,
"System Description".
CAUTION:
Never connect the electrical component or the ground wire directly to the battery terminal. The con-
nection causes the malfunction of the power generation voltage variable control, and then battery dis-
charge may occur.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
The output voltage of the battery current • Harness or connectors
Battery current sensor circuit
P1550 sensor remains within the specified (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
range/performance
range while engine is running. • Battery current sensor

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect battery current sensor harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between battery current sensor harness connector and ground.

Battery current sensor A

Ground Voltage (V)
Connector Terminal
EC
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. C
3.CHECK BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. D
3. Check the continuity between battery current sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.
Battery current sensor ECM E

Continuity
F76 2 F8 44 Existed
F
YES >> GO TO 4. G
4.CHECK BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
H
Battery current sensor ECM

Continuity I
F76 3 F8 42 Existed
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. J
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. K
5.CHECK BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR

Refer to EC-269, "Component Inspection". L
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Replace battery negative cable assembly. M
N
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection INFOID:0000000004690550 O

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. P
2. Reconnect harness connectors disconnected.

3. Disconnect battery negative cable (1).
- : Vehicle front
- : To body ground
4. Install jumper cable (A) between battery negative terminal and
body ground.
6. Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals
under the following conditions.
ECM
ALBIA0076ZZ
+ – Voltage (V)
Connector
Terminal Terminal
42
44
F8 (Battery current Approx. 2.5
(Sensor ground)
sensor signal)
Before measuring the terminal voltage, confirm that the battery is fully charged. Refer to PG-3, "How to Handle Battery".
NO >> Replace battery negative cable assembly.

P1551, P1552 BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR
A
The power generation voltage variable control enables fuel consumption to be decreased by reducing the EC
performed. When performing the power generation voltage variable control, ECM calculates the target power C
"System Description". D
CAUTION:
charge may occur. E
F
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
G
H
Battery current sensor circuit An excessively low voltage from the sen-
low input sor is sent to ECM.
Battery current sensor circuit An excessively high voltage from the sen- • Battery current sensor
P1552 I
high input sor is sent to ECM.

1.PRECONDITIONING J
TESTING CONDITION: K
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8 V with ignition
switch ON
L
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE M
Is 1st trip DTC detected? N
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004690553 O

YES >> GO TO 2.

Battery current sensor

Ground Voltage (V)
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.

Continuity
F76 2 F8 44 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.

Continuity
F76 3 F8 42 Existed
YES >> GO TO 5.
YES >> GO TO 6.
>> INSPECTION END



- : Vehicle front A
- : To body ground
body ground. EC
C
ECM
ALBIA0076ZZ
+ – Voltage (V) D
Connector
Terminal Terminal
42
44
F8 (Battery current Approx. 2.5 E
(Sensor ground)
sensor signal)
G

CAUTION:
charge may occur.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
The signal voltage transmitted from the • Harness or connectors
Battery current sensor perfor-
P1553 sensor to ECM is higher than the amount (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
mance
of the maximum power generation. • Battery current sensor

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.

YES >> GO TO 2.

Battery current sensor A

Ground Voltage (V)
Connector Terminal
EC
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. C
Battery current sensor ECM E

Continuity
F76 2 F8 44 Existed
F
YES >> GO TO 4. G
H

Continuity I
F76 3 F8 42 Existed
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. J
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. K

Refer to EC-275, "Component Inspection". L
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Replace battery negative cable assembly. M
N
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection INFOID:0000000004690558 O


- : Vehicle front
- : To body ground
body ground.
ECM
ALBIA0076ZZ
+ – Voltage (V)
Connector
Terminal Terminal
42
44
(Sensor ground)
sensor signal)

A
CAUTION:
charge may occur. E
F
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
G
H
P1554 sensor is lower than the specified value (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
mance
while the battery voltage is high enough. • Battery current sensor
I
Perform component function check. Refer to EC-277, "Component Function Check". J
NOTE:
Use component function check to check the overall function of the battery current sensor circuit. During this
check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed. K
NO >> Go to EC-278, "Diagnosis Procedure". L
1.PRECONDITIONING M
TESTING CONDITION:
• Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 12.8 V at idle.
N
• Before performing the following procedure, confirm that all load switches and A/C switch are turned
OFF.
O
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III P
2. Select “BAT CUR SEN” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Check “BAT CUR SEN” indication for 10 seconds.
“BAT CUR SEN” should be above 2,300 mV at least once.
Without CONSULT-III
2. Check voltage between ECM harness connector terminals under the following conditions.

ECM
+ – Voltage (V)
Connector
Terminal Terminal
42
44
F8 (Battery current Above 2.3 at least once
(Sensor ground)
sensor signal)
NO >> Go to EC-278, "Diagnosis Procedure"

YES >> GO TO 2.

Ground Voltage (V)
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.

Continuity
F76 2 F8 44 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.

Continuity
F76 3 F8 42 Existed

YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. A
EC
YES >> GO TO 6.
C
D
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000004690563 E

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. F
- : Vehicle front G
- : To body ground
body ground.
H
I
ECM
ALBIA0076ZZ
+ – Voltage (V)
Connector J
Terminal Terminal
42
44
sensor signal)
(Sensor ground) K
M

P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH
ASCD steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for each button. ECM reads voltage variation
of switch, and determines which button is operated.
Refer to EC-56, "System Diagram" for the ASCD function.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
Trouble diagnosis
name
• An excessively high voltage signal from the
ASCD steering switch is sent to ECM.
• ECM detects that input signal from the
(The switch circuit is open or shorted.)
P1564 ASCD steering switch ASCD steering switch is out of the specified
• ASCD steering switch
range.
• ECM
• ECM detects that the ASCD steering switch
is stuck ON.

1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
2. Press MAIN switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Press CANCEL switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Press RESUME/ACCELERATE switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 sec-
onds.
5. Press SET/COAST switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
6. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “MAIN SW”, “CANCEL SW”, “RESUME/ACC SW” and “SET SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-III.

3. Check each item indication under the following conditions.
A
Monitor item Condition Indication
Pressed ON
MAIN SW MAIN switch EC
Released OFF
Pressed ON
CANCEL SW CANCEL switch
Released OFF C
RESUME/ACCEL- Pressed ON
RESUME/ACC SW
ERATE switch Released OFF
Pressed ON
D
SET SW SET/COAST switch
Released OFF
Without CONSULT-III E
F
ECM
Con- + – Condition Voltage (V)

nector Terminal Terminal G
MAIN switch: Pressed Approx. 0
CANCEL switch: Pressed Approx. 1
85 92 H
E16 (ASCD steering switch (ASCD steering switch SET/COAST switch: Pressed Approx. 2
signal) ground)
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Pressed Approx. 3
All ASCD steering switches: Released Approx. 4 I
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 3. J
3.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. K
3. Disconnect combination switch harness connector.
4. Check the continuity between combination switch and ECM harness connector.
L
Combination switch ECM

Continuity
Terminal Connector Terminal M
16 E16 92 Existed
Is the inspection result normal? N
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 4.
O
• Harness connectors M11, E105 P
• Combination switch (spiral cable)
• Harness for open and short between ECM and combination switch
5.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT


Continuity
Terminal Connector Terminal
13 E16 85 Existed
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 6.
• Harness connectors M11, E105
7.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Replace ASCD steering switch.
>> INSPECTION END


2. Disconnect combination switch (spiral cable) harness connector.
3. Check resistance between combination switch harness connector terminals as per the following.
Combination switch
Condition Resistance (Ω)
Connector Terminals
M303 13 and 16 SET/COAST switch: Pressed Approx. 660
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Pressed Approx. 1,480
All ASCD steering switches: Released Approx. 4,000
NO >> Replace ASCD steering switch

P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
A
When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. EC
ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by those two types of input (ON/OFF signal).
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE: D
• This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. When malfunction A is detected, DTC is not
E
stored in ECM memory. And in that case, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip freeze frame data are displayed.
1st trip DTC is erased when ignition switch is turned OFF. And even when malfunction A is detected
in two consecutive trips, DTC is not stored in ECM memory.
F
Trouble diagnosis
name
When the vehicle speed is above 30 km/h • Harness or connectors G
(19 MPH), ON signals from the stop lamp (The stop lamp switch circuit is shorted.)
A)
switch and the ASCD brake switch are sent • Harness or connectors
to the ECM at the same time. (The ASCD brake switch circuit is shorted.)
P1572 ASCD brake switch • Stop lamp switch H
ASCD brake switch signal is not sent to • ASCD brake switch
B) ECM for extremely long time while the ve- • Incorrect stop lamp switch installation
hicle is being driven. • Incorrect ASCD brake switch installation
• ECM I

1.PRECONDITIONING J
NOTE: K
The procedure for malfunction B is not described. It takes an extremely long time to complete the procedure
for malfunction B. By performing the procedure for malfunction A, the condition that causes malfunction B can
be detected. L
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. N
3. Press MAIN switch and check that CRUISE lamp illuminates.
4. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following conditions.
CAUTION: O
NOTE:
This procedure may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle.
P
If a road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.

With GST

NO >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III
CAUTION:
NOTE:

Depress the brake pedal for more than 5
Driving location seconds so as not to come off from the
above-mentioned vehicle speed.
With GST
1.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I

With CONSULT-III
2. Select “BRAKE SW1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions.

Slightly depressed OFF
BRAKE SW1 Brake pedal
Fully released ON
Without CONSULT-III
ECM
Connector
Terminal Terminal
110 Slightly depressed Approx. 0 V

E16 112 Brake pedal
(ASCD brake switch signal) Fully released Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3.
2.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II
With CONSULT-III
Check “BRAKE SW2” indication in “DATA MONITOR” mode.

Monitor item Condition Indication A

Slightly depressed ON
Fully released OFF
EC
Without CONSULT-III
Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals.
C
ECM
+ – Condition Voltage D
Connector
Terminal Terminal
106 Slightly depressed Battery voltage

E16 112 Brake pedal E
(Stop lamp switch signal) Fully released Approx. 0 V
YES >> GO TO 12. F
NO >> GO TO 7.
3.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. G
2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
4. Check the voltage between ASCD brake switch harness connector and ground. H
ASCD brake switch

Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal I
E49 1 Ground Battery voltage
J
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART K
• Fuse block (J/B) connector E103
• 10 A fuse (No. 3) L
• Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse
>> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. M
5.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. N
3. Check the continuity between ASCD brake switch harness connector and ECM harness connector.
ASCD brake switch ECM O

Continuity
P
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Refer to EC-287, "Component Inspection (ASCD Brake Switch)".

YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> Replace ASCD brake switch.
7.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between stop lamp switch harness connector and ground.
Stop lamp switch

Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> GO TO 8.
• 10 A fuse (No. 7)
• Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and battery
9.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check the continuity between stop lamp switch harness connector and ECM harness connector.
Stop lamp switch ECM

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> GO TO 10.
• Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and ECM
11.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
Refer to EC-287, "Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch)".
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> Replace stop lamp switch.
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection (ASCD Brake Switch) INFOID:0000000004690571
A
1.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH-I
2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. EC
3. Check the continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals under the following conditions.
Terminals Condition Continuity C

Fully released Existed
1 and 2 Brake pedal
Slightly depressed Not existed
D
NO >> GO TO 2. E
2.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH-II
1. Adjust ASCD brake switch installation. Refer to BR-49, "Inspection and Adjustment".
2. Check the continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals under the following conditions. F
Terminals Condition Continuity

G
1 and 2 Brake pedal
I
Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch) INFOID:0000000004690572
1.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH-I J

3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals under the following conditions.
K

Fully released Not existed L
1 and 2 Brake pedal
Slightly depressed Existed
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH-II N
1. Adjust stop lamp switch installation. Refer to BR-49, "Inspection and Adjustment".
O
Fully released Not existed
1 and 2 Brake pedal
Slightly depressed Existed P

P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
The ECM receives two vehicle speed signals via the CAN communication line. One is sent from combination
meter, and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses these signals for ASCD con-
trol. Refer to EC-56, "System Diagram" for ASCD functions.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
• If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
U1001. Refer to EC-139, "DTC Logic".
Trouble diagnosis
name
(The CAN communication line is open or
shorted.)
ASCD vehicle speed The difference between the two vehicle speed • Combination meter
P1574
sensor signals is out of the specified range. • ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
• Wheel sensor
• TCM
• ECM

1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
2. Drive the vehicle at more than 40 km/h (25 MPH).
CAUTION:
NOTE:
3. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?

Check DTC with TCM. Refer to TM-39, "Diagnosis Description".
YES >> GO TO 2.

NO >> Perform trouble shooting relevant to DTC indicated.
2.CHECK DTC WITH “ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)” A

YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION C
Refer to MWI-32, "CONSULT-III Function (METER/M&A)".
D
>> INSPECTION END

P1700 CVT CONTROL SYSTEM
This DTC is displayed with other DTC regarding TCM. Perform the trouble diagnosis for corresponding DTC.
Refer to EC-395, "DTC Index". When this DTC is detected, the ASCD control is canceled.

P1715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR (PRIMARY SPEED SENSOR)
A
ECM receives primary speed sensor signal from TCM via the CAN communication line. ECM uses this signal EC
for engine control.
C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC P1715 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001 first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, D
E
• If DTC P1715 is displayed with DTC P0340, P0345, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0340,
P0345. Refer to EC-232, "DTC Logic".
to EC-250, "DTC Logic". F
G
Primary speed sensor signal is different
Input speed sensor (The CAN communication line is open or shorted.) H
from the theoretical value calculated by
P1715 (Primary speed sensor) • Harness or connectors
ECM from secondary sensor signal and
(TCM output) (Primary speed sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
engine rpm signal.
• TCM
I
1.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at J
K
>> GO TO 2.
1. Start engine. L
2. Drive vehicle at a speed of more than 50 km/h (31 MPH) for at least 5 seconds.
Is 1st trip DTC detected? M
N

O
Check DTC with TCM. Refer to TM-134, "DTC Index".
YES >> GO TO 2. P
2.REPLACE TCM
Replace TCM. Refer to TM-168, "Removal and Installation".
>> INSPECTION END

P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 1
The VIAS control solenoid valve 1 cuts the intake manifold vacuum signal for power valve 1 control. It
responds to ON/OFF signals from the ECM. When the solenoid is OFF, the vacuum signal from the intake
manifold is cut. When the ECM sends an ON signal the coil pulls the plunger downward and sends the vac-
uum signal to the power valve actuator 1.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
An excessively low or high voltage signal
VIAS control solenoid valve 1 (The solenoid valve 1 circuit is open or
P1800 is sent to ECM via the VIAS control sole-
circuit shorted.)
noid valve 1.
• VIAS control solenoid valve 1

1.CONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
1.CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect VIAS control solenoid valve 1 harness connector.
4. Check the voltage between VIAS control solenoid valve 1 harness connector and ground.

Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 1 OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check the continuity between VIAS control solenoid valve 1 harness connector and ECM harness con-
nector.

VIAS control solenoid valve 1 ECM A

Continuity
F74 2 F7 27 Existed
EC
YES >> GO TO 3. C
3.CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 1
D
YES >> GO TO 4. E
NO >> Replace VIAS control solenoid valve 1.
Refer to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident". F
>> INSPECTION END

G
1.CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 1 H

With CONSULT-III
2. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. I
3. Disconnect vacuum hoses connected to VIAS control solenoid valve 1.
5. Select “VIAS S/V-1” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
6. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the J
Condition Air passage continuity Air passage continuity K

(VIAS S/V-1) between (A) and (B) between (A) and (C)
ON Existed Not existed
L
OFF Not existed Existed
M
JMBIA0180ZZ
Without CONSULT-III
3. Disconnect vacuum hoses connected to VIAS volume control solenoid valve 1.
4. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the O
Air passage continuity Air passage continuity P

Condition
between (A) and (B) between (A) and (C)
12 V direct current supply be-
Existed Not existed
tween terminals 1 and 2
No supply Not existed Existed

NO >> Replace VIAS control solenoid valve 1

A
The VIAS control solenoid valve 2 cuts the intake manifold vacuum signal for power valve 2 control. It EC
C
• Harness or connectors E
P1801 is sent to ECM via the VIAS control sole-
circuit shorted.)
noid valve 2.
F
1.CONDITIONING
G
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11 V at idle. H
>> GO TO 2.
I
2. Check 1st trip DTC. J
NO >> INSPECTION END K
1.CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT L

3. Turn ignition switch ON. M
VIAS control solenoid valve 2 N

Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
O
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. P
nector.

VIAS control solenoid valve 2 ECM

Continuity
F75 2 F7 26 Existed
YES >> GO TO 3.
YES >> GO TO 4.
>> INSPECTION END


With CONSULT-III
6. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the
Condition Air passage continuity Air passage continuity

(VIAS S/V-2) between (A) and (B) between (A) and (C)
JMBIA0180ZZ
Without CONSULT-III
Air passage continuity Air passage continuity

Condition
Existed Not existed

A
EC

P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM via the stop lamp switch when the brake pedal is depressed. This
signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is being driven.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
A brake switch signal is not sent to ECM for • Harness or connectors
P1805 Brake switch extremely long time while the vehicle is being (Stop lamp switch circuit is open or shorted.)
driven. • Stop lamp switch

2. Fully depress the brake pedal for at least 5 seconds.
3. Erase the DTC.
1.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT

2. Check the stop lamp when depressing and releasing the brake pedal.
Brake pedal Stop lamp

Fully released Not illuminated
Slightly depressed Illuminated
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.
Stop lamp switch

Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
• 10 A fuse (No. 7)
• Harness for open or short between battery and stop lamp switch

P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
>> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. A
1. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. EC
C
Continuity
E115 2 E16 106 Existed D
E
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
• Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch
G
6.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH H
I
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT J
>> INSPECTION END K
L
1.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH-I
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. M
Terminals Condition Continuity N

1 and 2 Brake pedal
O
NO >> GO TO 2.
P
2.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH-II
1. Adjust stop lamp switch installation. Refer to BR-49, "Inspection and Adjustment".

P1805 BRAKE SWITCH

1 and 2 Brake pedal

P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
A
Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via the throttle control motor relay. The throt- EC
tle control motor relay is controlled ON/OFF by the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ECM
sends an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is provided to the ECM. When the igni-
tion switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is
not provided to the ECM. C
D
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause E
Throttle control motor ECM detects that the voltage of power source (Throttle control motor relay circuit is
P2100
relay circuit open for throttle control motor is excessively low. open)
F
• Throttle control motor relay
Throttle control motor ECM detects that the throttle control motor relay (Throttle control motor relay circuit is
P2103 G
relay circuit short is stuck ON. shorted)

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8 V.
Witch DTC is detected? J
P2100 >> GO TO 2.
P2103 >> GO TO 3.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR DTC P2100 K

3. Check DTC. L
Is DTC detected?
NO >> INSPECTION END M

1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. N
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to EC-301, "Diagnosis Procedure". O
P
1.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
4. Check the continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and ECM harness connector.

IPDM E/R ECM

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-II
IPDM E/R ECM

Continuity
F12 54 F7 2 Existed
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK FUSE
2. Check if 15 A fuse is blown.
YES >> GO TO 4.

P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
A
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. EC
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve.
The current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor. The throttle position
sensor provides feedback to the ECM, when opens/closes the throttle valve in response to driving conditions
via the throttle control motor. C
D
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
E
F
Electric throttle control Electric throttle control function does not oper- (Throttle control motor circuit is open or G
P2101
performance ate properly. shorted.)
• Electric throttle control actuator
H
1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11 V when J
engine is running.
>> GO TO 2. K
2. Start engine and let it idle for 5 seconds. L
3. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
N
YES >> GO TO 2. P
2.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I
1. Check the voltage between ECM harness connector and ground.

ECM
Connector Terminal Condition Terminal
Ignition switch OFF Approx. 0 V
F7 2 E16 112
Ignition switch ON Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
IPDM E/R ECM

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 4.
IPDM E/R ECM

Continuity
F12 54 F7 2 Existed
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK FUSE
YES >> GO TO 6.
7.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
4. Check the continuity between electric throttle control actuator harness connector and ECM harness con-
nector.

Electric throttle control actuator ECM A

Continuity
5 Not existed
5 EC
6 Existed
F29 F7
5 Existed
6
6 Not existed C
D
YES >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR VISUALLY E
and the housing. F
- : Vehicle front
G
YES >> GO TO 9.
control actuator inside.
H
JMBIA1132ZZ
9.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR I

J
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> GO TO 11.
10.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT K
YES >> GO TO 11. L
11.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR M
N
>> INSPECTION END
O
1.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
2. Disconnect electric throttle control actuator harness connector. P
3. Check resistance between electric throttle control actuator terminals as per the following.
5 and 6 Approx. 1 - 15 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]

NO >> GO TO 2.
>> INSPECTION END


>> GO TO 2.
>> END

P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
A
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. EC
via the throttle control motor.
C
Throttle control motor ECM detects short in both circuits between (Throttle control motor circuit is shorted.)
P2118
circuit short ECM and throttle control motor. • Electric throttle control actuator
(Throttle control motor)
F
1.PRECONDITIONING G
H
>> GO TO 2.
I
3. Check DTC.
J
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to EC-307, "DTC Logic".
K
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION L

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT N

3. Check the continuity between electric throttle control actuator harness connector and ECM harness con- O
nector.
Electric throttle control actuator ECM P

Continuity
5 Not existed
5
6 Existed
F29 F7
5 Existed
6
6 Not existed

YES >> GO TO 3.
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 5.
YES >> GO TO 5.
>> INSPECTION END


5 and 6 Approx. 1 - 15 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
NO >> GO TO 2.
>> INSPECTION END


>> GO TO 2.
>> END

P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
A
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. EC
The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position, and the opening and closing speed of the throt-
tle valve and sends the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle
valve from these signals and opens/closes the throttle valve in response to driving conditions via the throttle C
control motor.
D
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

E
Electric throttle control actuator does not func-
A) tion properly due to the return spring malfunc-
F
tion.
Electric throttle control
P2119 Throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is • Electric throttle control actuator
actuator B)
not in specified range.
G
ECM detects that the throttle valve is stuck
C)
open.

1.PRECONDITIONING
I
>> GO TO 2. J
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B
2. Shift selector lever position to D and wait at least 3 seconds. K
3. Shift selector lever position to P.
5. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. L
6. Shift selector lever position to D and wait at least 3 seconds.
8. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn ON.
9. Check DTC. M
Is DTC detected?
NO >> GO TO 3. N
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. O
3. Shift selector lever position to N or P.
5. Check DTC. P
Is DTC detected?


and the housing.
- : Vehicle front
YES >> GO TO 2.
JMBIA1132ZZ

>> INSPECTION END


>> GO TO 2.
>> END

P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR
A
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end EC

of the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor detects the accelera-
tor position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors
are a kind of potentiometer which transform the accelerator pedal C
position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signals to the ECM.
The ECM judges the current opening angle of the accelerator pedal
from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on D
these signals.
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM
receiving the signal from the accelerator pedal position sensor. The
ECM uses this signal for engine operations such as fuel cut.
PBIB1741E E
F
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
G
H
Accelerator pedal position An excessively low voltage from the accelerator • Harness or connectors
P2122
sensor 1 circuit low input pedal position sensor 1 is sent to ECM. [Accelerator pedal position (APP)
Accelerator pedal position An excessively high voltage from the Accelerator sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.]
P2123 • APP sensor 1 I
sensor 1 circuit high input pedal position sensor 1 is sent to ECM.

J
1.PRECONDITIONING
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. K
TESTING CONDITION:
L
>> GO TO 2.
1. Start engine and let it idle for 1 second. M
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to EC-311, "Diagnosis Procedure". N
O
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

APP sensor
Ground Voltage (V)
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK APP SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check the continuity between APP sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.
APP sensor ECM

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
APP sensor ECM

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK APP SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 6.
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

A
1.CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR
2. Turn ignition switch ON. EC
ECM C
Connector
Terminal Terminal
D
81 Fully released 0.5 - 1.0
84
(APP sensor 1
(Sensor ground) Fully depressed 4.2 - 4.8
signal)
E16 Accelerator pedal E
100
(APP sensor 2
signal)
NO >> GO TO 2.
G
2. Go to EC-313, "Special Repair Requirement". H
>> INSPECTION END

I
1.PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING J

>> GO TO 2. K
L
>> GO TO 3.
3.PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING M
N
>> END

The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end

are a kind of potentiometer which transform the accelerator pedal
from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on
these signals.
PBIB1741E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Accelerator pedal posi- • Harness or connectors
An excessively low voltage from the accelerator
P2127 tion sensor 2 circuit low [Accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor
pedal position sensor 2 is sent to ECM.
input 2 circuit is open or shorted.]
[Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS)
circuit is shorted.]
Accelerator pedal posi- (Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is
An excessively high voltage from the accelerator shorted.)
P2128 tion sensor 2 circuit high
pedal position sensor 2 is sent to ECM. • APP sensor
input
• CKP sensor (POS)
• Refrigerant pressure sensor

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?

YES >> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I A

EC
APP sensor
Ground Voltage (V)
Connector Terminal C
YES >> GO TO 6. D
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II E
F
APP sensor ECM

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal G
H
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT I
ECM Sensor J
F8 K
76 CKP sensor (POS) F20 1
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK COMPONENTS M
• Crankshaft position sensor (POS) (Refer to EC-231, "Component Inspection".)
• Refrigerant pressure sensor (Refer to EC-356, "Diagnosis Procedure".) N
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning components. O

APP sensor ECM

Continuity

YES >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
APP sensor ECM

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK APP SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> GO TO 9.
2. Refer to EC-317, "Special Repair Requirement"
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END


ECM
Connector
Terminal Terminal
84
(APP sensor 1
signal)
E16 Accelerator pedal
100
(APP sensor 2
signal)
NO >> GO TO 2.

2. Go to EC-317, "Special Repair Requirement". A
>> INSPECTION END

EC
1.PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING C

>> GO TO 2. D
Refer to EC-22, "THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement". E
>> GO TO 3.
3.PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING F
G
>> END

P2135 TP SENSOR
P2135 TP SENSOR

PBIB0145E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
• Harness or connector
Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM (Throttle position (TP) sensor 1 or 2 circuit
Throttle position sensor
P2135 compared with the signals from throttle position is open or shorted.)
circuit range/performance
sensor 1 and 2. • Electric throttle control actuator
(TP sensor 1 or 2)

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

P2135 TP SENSOR

Ground Voltage (V)
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT D
3. Check the continuity between electric throttle control actuator harness connector and ECM harness con- E
nector.
Electric throttle control actuator ECM F

Continuity
F29 4 F8 36 Existed
G
YES >> GO TO 4. H
4.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Check the continuity between electric throttle control actuator harness connector and ECM harness con- I
nector.
Electric throttle control actuator ECM J

Continuity
2 37
F29 F8 Existed K
3 38
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR M

YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 6.
6.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR O
P
>> INSPECTION END
>> INSPECTION END

P2135 TP SENSOR

ECM
Connector
Terminal Terminal

36
38 (TP sensor 2
NO >> GO TO 2.
>> INSPECTION END


>> GO TO 2.
>> END

P2138 APP SENSOR
P2138 APP SENSOR
A

these signals.
PBIB1741E E
F
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
G
H
[Accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor
1 or 2 circuit is open or shorted.]
[Crankshaft position sensor (CKP) sensor I
Accelerator pedal posi- Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM
(POS) circuit is shorted.]
P2138 tion sensor circuit range/ compared with the signals from accelerator
(Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is
performance pedal position sensor 1 and 2.
shorted.)
• APP sensor 1 or 2 J
• CKP sensor (POS)
K
1.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at L
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8 V at idle. M
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE N

2. Check DTC.
O
Is DTC detected?
P


P2138 APP SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 2.
APP sensor
Ground Voltage (V)
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
APP sensor
Ground Voltage (V)
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
APP sensor ECM

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 5.
ECM Sensor
F8
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK COMPONENTS

P2138 APP SENSOR
• Refrigerant pressure sensor (Refer to EC-356, "Diagnosis Procedure".)
Is the inspection result normal? A
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning components.
7.CHECK APP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT EC

C
APP sensor ECM

Continuity D
2 84
E110 E16 Existed
1 100 E
F
YES >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK APP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT G
APP sensor ECM H

Continuity
3 81
E110 E16 Existed I
6 82
YES >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK APP SENSOR K

YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> GO TO 10.
10.REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY M
N
>> INSPECTION END
11.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT O
>> INSPECTION END P


P2138 APP SENSOR
ECM
Connector
Terminal Terminal
84
(APP sensor 1
signal)
100
(APP sensor 2
signal)
NO >> GO TO 2.
>> INSPECTION END


>> GO TO 2.
>> GO TO 3.
>> END

P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1
A
JMBIA0112GB E
mately 800°C (1,472°F).
G
PBIB3354E

I
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

To judge the malfunction, the A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is monitored so it will J
not shift to LEAN side or RICH side.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible Cause K
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 • The output voltage computed by ECM from the
P2A00 (bank 1) circuit range/per- • A/F sensor 1
A/F sensor 1 signal shifts to the lean side for a
formance • A/F sensor 1 heater
specified period. L
• Fuel pressure
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 • The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F
• Fuel injector
P2A03 (bank 2) circuit range/per- sensor 1 signal shifts to the rich side for a spec-
formance ified period.
M
1.PRECONDITIONING N
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11 V at idle. O
>> GO TO 2.
P
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load.
5. Keep engine speed between 2,500 and 3,000 rpm for 20 minutes.


YES >> GO TO 2.
2.RETIGHTEN A/F SENSOR 1
Loosen and retighten the A/F sensor 1. Refer to EM-34, "Removal and Installation".
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace harness connector.
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CLEAR THE MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE
NO >> GO TO 6.
A/F sensor
P2A00 1 F27 4
P2A03 2 F64 4
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 7.
• IPDM E/R harness connector F12 A
• 15 A fuse (No. 46)
EC
C
D
A/F sensor 1 ECM
DTC Continuity
E
1 45
P2A00 1 F27
2 49 Existed
F8
1 53 F
P2A03 2 F64
2 57
and ground. G
A/F sensor 1
DTC Ground Continuity H
1
P2A00 1 F27
2 I
Ground Not existed
1
P2A03 2 F64
2
J
ECM
Connector Terminal K
45
P2A00
49
F8 Ground Not existed L
53
P2A03
57
5. Also check harness for short to power. M
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. N
O
YES >> GO TO 10.
P
CAUTION:
Cleaner [commercial service tool (J-43897-18 or J-43897-12)] and approved anti-seize lubricant.

>> INSPECTION END

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
A
When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON. EC
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000004690633 C
1.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH FUNCTION

With CONSULT-III D
3. Check “BRAKE SW1” indication under the following conditions. E

Slightly depressed OFF F
Fully released ON
Without CONSULT-III G
H
ECM
Connector
Terminal Terminal I
E16 (ASCD brake 112 Brake pedal
switch signal) Fully released Battery voltage
J
NO >> Go to EC-329, "Diagnosis Procedure". K
1.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT L

4. Check the voltage between ASCD brake switch harness connector and ground.
ASCD brake switch

N
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
O
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2. P
• 10 A fuse (No. 3)

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
3.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
ASCD brake switch ECM

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 4.
Refer to EC-330, "Component Inspection (ASCD Brake Switch)".
YES >> GO TO 5.
>> INSPECTION END



1 and 2 Brake pedal
NO >> GO TO 2.
1. Adjust ASCD brake switch installation. Refer to BR-49, "Inspection and Adjustment".

1 and 2 Brake pedal

ASCD INDICATOR
ASCD INDICATOR
A
ASCD indicator lamp illuminates to indicate ASCD operation status. CRUISE is integrated in combination EC
meter.
CRUISE illuminates when MAIN switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON to indicated that ASCD system
is ready for operation.
Refer to EC-56, "System Diagram" for the ASCD function. C
D
1.CHECK ASCD INDICATOR FUNCTION
Check ASCD indicator under the following conditions.
E
ASCD INDICATOR CONDITION SPECIFICATION
• MAIN switch: Pressed at the
CRUISE LAMP • Ignition switch: ON ON → OFF
1st time →at the 2nd time
F
NO >> Go to EC-331, "Diagnosis Procedure". G
1.CHECK DTC H
Check that DTC U1000 or U1001 is not displayed.

YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-139, "Diagnosis Procedure".
2.CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION J
K
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT L
YES >> Replace combination meter. M

COOLING FAN
COOLING FAN
COOLING FAN MOTOR
The cooling fan operates at each speed when the current flows in the cooling fan motor as per the following.
Cooling fan motor terminals

Cooling fan speed
(+) (−)
1 3 and 4
2 3 and 4
Middle (MID)
1 and 2 3
1 and 2 4
High (HI) 1 and 2 3 and 4
The cooling fan operates at low (LOW) speed when cooling fan motors-1 and -2 are circuited in series under
the middle speed condition.
Refer to EC-64, "System Diagram".
1.CHECK COOLING FAN FUNCTION

With CONSULT-III
3. Check that cooling fan operates at each speed.
Without CONSULT-III
Description".
1.CHECK COOLING FAN RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect cooling fan relays-2, -3.
4. Check the voltage between cooling fan relays-2, -3 harness connectors and ground.
Cooling fan relay

Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
E57 2
(cooling fan relay-2) 5
E59 2
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.

COOLING FAN
2.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART A

• 40 A fusible link (letter K)
• 10 A fuse (No. 42)
EC
• IPDM E/R harness connector E10
• Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-2 and battery
• Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-2 and IPDM E/R C
• Harness for open or short between cooling fan relay-3 and IPDM E/R
>> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. D
3.CHECK COOLING FAN RELAY OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. E
3. Check the continuity between cooling fan relay-2, -3 harness connectors and IPDM E/R harness connec-
tor.
F
Cooling fan relay IPDM E/R
Continuity
G
E57
1 E11 42
(cooling fan relay-2)
Existed
E59 H
1 E10 34
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT J
1. Disconnect cooling fan motor-1 harness connector.
2. Check the voltage between cooling fan motor-1 harness connector and ground.
K
Cooling fan motor-1
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
L
1
E301 Ground Battery voltage
2
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART N

• Harness connector E70, E305
O
• 40 A fusible link (letter M)
• Harness for open or short between cooling fan motor-1 and battery
P
6.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR CIRCUIT-I
2. Check the continuity between cooling fan relay-2, -3 harness connectors and cooling fan motor-1, -2 har-
ness connectors.

COOLING FAN
Cooling fan relay Cooling fan motor

Continuity
E302
3 2
E57 (Cooling fan motor-2)
(cooling fan relay-2) E301
7 3
(Cooling fan motor-1)
Existed
E302
3 1
7 4
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 7.
• Harness for open or short between cooling fan motor-1 and cooling fan relay-2
8.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR CIRCUIT-II
1. Check the continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and cooling fan motor-1, -2 harness connec-
tor.
IPDM E/R Cooling fan motor

Continuity
E301
35 4
E10 Existed
E302
38 1
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> GO TO 9.
• Harness for open or short between cooling fan motor-1 and IPDM E/R
10.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR CIRCUIT-III
1. Check the continuity between cooling fan relay-2, -3 harness connectors and ground.

COOLING FAN
Cooling fan motor A

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
E57
6 EC
Ground Existed
E59
6
C
YES >> GO TO 11. D
11.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR CIRCUIT-IV
1. Check the continuity between cooling fan motor-2 harness connector and ground. E
Cooling fan motor-2

Ground Continuity F
Connector Terminal
3
E302 Ground Existed
4 G
YES >> GO TO 12. H
12.CHECK COOLING FAN RELAYS-2 AND -3 I
Refer to EC-336, "Component Inspection (Cooling Fan Relay)".
YES >> GO TO 13. J
NO >> Replace malfunctioning cooling fan relay.
13.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS-1 AND -2
K
Refer to EC-335, "Component Inspection (Cooling Fan Motor)".
YES >> GO TO 14. L
NO >> Replace malfunctioning cooling fan motor.
Perform GI-36, "Intermittent Incident". M
NO >> Repair or replace harness connectors. N
Component Inspection (Cooling Fan Motor) INFOID:0000000004690642
1.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR O

2. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connector. P
3. Supply cooling fan motor terminals with battery voltage and check operation.

COOLING FAN
Terminals
Condition
(+) (−)
1 3 and 4
2 3 and 4
A
Cooling fan motor 1 and 2 3
1 and 2 4
B 1, 2 3, 4
Check that cooling fan speed of condition B is higher than that of A.
NO >> Replace cooling fan motor.
Component Inspection (Cooling Fan Relay) INFOID:0000000004690643
1.CHECK COOLING FAN RELAY

1. Disconnect cooling fan relays -2, -3 harness connectors.
2. Check continuity between cooling fan relay -2, -3 terminals
Terminals Conditions Continuity
3 and 5 12 V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Existed

6 and 7 No current supply Not existed
NO >> Replace cooling fan relay.
SEF745U

ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
A
The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, rear window defogger switch signal, etc.) is transferred via EC
the CAN communication.
C
1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH FUNCTION
2. Connect CONSULT-III and select “DATA MONITOR” mode. D
3. Select “LOAD SIGNAL” and check indication under the following conditions.
Monitor item Condition Indication E

ON ON
LOAD SIGNAL Rear window defogger switch
OFF OFF
F
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Go to EC-337, "Diagnosis Procedure". G
2.CHECK LIGHTING SWITCH FUNCTION
Check “LOAD SIGNAL” indication under the following conditions.
H
ON at 2nd position ON
LOAD SIGNAL Lighting switch I
OFF OFF
YES >> GO TO 3. J
3.CHECK HEATER FAN CONTROL SWITCH FUNCTION
K
Select “HEATER FAN SW” and check indication under the following conditions.
Monitor item Condition Indication L

ON ON
HEATER FAN SW Heater fan control switch
OFF OFF
N
1.INSPECTION START O
Confirm the malfunctioning circuit (rear window defogger, headlamp or heater fan). Refer to EC-337, "Compo-
nent Function Check".
Which circuit is related to the incident? P
Rear window defogger>>GO TO 2.
Headlamp>>GO TO 3.
Heater fan>>GO TO 4.
2.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM
Refer to DEF-4, "Work Flow".

>> INSPECTION END
3.CHECK HEADLAMP SYSTEM
Refer to EXL-10, "Work Flow".
>> INSPECTION END

4.CHECK HEATER FAN CONTROL SYSTEM
Refer to VTL-3, "System Description".
>> INSPECTION END

A
The electronic controlled engine mount control solenoid valve controls the intake manifold vacuum signal for EC
electronic controlled engine mount. The electronic controlled engine mount control solenoid valve is moved by
ON/OFF signal from the ECM. When the solenoid is OFF, the vacuum signal from the intake manifold is cut.
When the solenoid is ON, the intake manifold vacuum signal is sent to the electronic controlled engine mount.
C
1.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION D

2. Selector level position is D while depressing the brake pedal and parking brake pedal.
3. Disconnect electronic controlled engine mount control solenoid valve harness connector. E
4. Check that body vibration increases compared to the condition of step 2 above (with vehicle stopped).
YES >> INSPECTION END F
NO >> EC-339, "Diagnosis Procedure".
G
1.CHECK VACUUM SOURCE
2. Reconnect electronic controlled engine mount control solenoid valve harness connector. H
3. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to electronic controlled engine mount.
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum existence. I
Vacuum should exist.

YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK VACUUM HOSES AND VACUUM GALLERY K

2. Check vacuum hoses and vacuum gallery for clogging, cracks or improper connection. Refer to EC-72,
"System Diagram". L
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace vacuum hoses and vacuum gallery. M
3.CHECK ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY
CIRCUIT N
1. Disconnect electronic controlled engine mount control solenoid valve harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between front electronic controlled engine mount harness connector and ground. O
Electronic controlled engine mount

control solenoid valve Ground Voltage P
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 4.
• 10 A fuse (No. 3)
• Harness for open or short between electronic controlled engine mount control solenoid valve and fuse
5.CHECK ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIG-
NAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check the continuity between ECM harness connector and electronic controlled engine mount control
solenoid valve harness connector.
Electronic controlled engine

ECM
mount control solenoid valve Continuity
F7 28 F11 2 Existed
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness connectors.
6.CHECK ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Replace electronic controlled engine mount control solenoid valve.
7.CHECK ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT
2. Install vacuum pump (A) to electronic controlled engine mount
(1).
3. Check that a vacuum is maintained when applying the vacuum
of -40 kPa (-400 mbar, -0.41 kg/cm2, -5.8 psi) to electronic con-
trolled engine mount.
4. Also visually check electronic controlled engine mount.
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Replace electronic controlled engine mount.
MBIB1237E

YES >> Replace intake manifold collector.

With CONSULT-III
2. Reconnect electronic controlled engine mount control solenoid valve harness connector.
3. Disconnect vacuum hoses connected to electronic controlled engine mount control solenoid valve.

5. Select “ENGINE MOUNTING” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
6. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the A
Condition Air passage continuity Air passage continuity EC

(ENGINE MOUNTING) between (A) and (B) between (A) and (C)
TRVL Existed Not existed
IDLE Not existed Existed C
Without CONSULT-III
2. Disconnect electronic controlled engine mount control solenoid JMBIA0180ZZ D
valve harness connector.
4. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the E
Air passage continuity Air passage continuity F

Condition
Existed Not existed
G
YES >> INSPECTION END PBIB2532E H
NO >> Replace electronic controlled engine mount control sole-
noid valve.
I

FUEL INJECTOR
FUEL INJECTOR
The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM
supplies a ground to the fuel injector circuit, the coil in the fuel injec-
tor is energized. The energized coil pulls the ball valve back and
allows fuel to flow through the fuel injector into the intake manifold.
The amount of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse dura-
tion. Pulse duration is the length of time the fuel injector remains
open. The ECM controls the injection pulse duration based on
engine fuel needs.
PBIA9664J
1.INSPECTION START
Turn ignition switch to START.
Are any cylinders ignited?
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
Without CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.

PBIB3332E
1.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

2. Disconnect fuel injector harness connector.
4. Check the voltage between fuel injector harness connector and ground.

FUEL INJECTOR
Fuel injector A
Ground Voltage
Cylinder Connector Terminal
1 F37 1
EC
2 F38 1
3 F39 1
4 F40 1 C
5 F41 1
6 F42 1
D
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2. E
• 10 A fuse (No. 44) F
• Harness for open or short between fuel injector and IPDM E/R
G
3.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
H
3. Check the continuity between fuel injector harness connector and ECM harness connector.
I
Fuel injector ECM
Continuity
Cylinder Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
J
1 F37 2 32
2 F38 2 31
3 F39 2 30 K
F7 Existed
4 F40 2 29
5 F41 2 3
L
6 F42 2 1
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR N

YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning fuel injector.

FUEL INJECTOR

3. Check resistance between fuel injector terminals as per the fol-
lowing.
1 and 2 11.1 - 14.5 Ω [at 10 - 60°C (50 - 140°F)]
PBIB1727E

FUEL PUMP
FUEL PUMP
A
EC
Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM Function Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Fuel pump relay
Engine speed*
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Fuel pump control ↓ C
Battery Battery voltage* Fuel pump
The ECM activates the fuel pump for several seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON to improve engine D
start ability. If the ECM receives a engine speed signal from the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), it knows
that the engine is rotating, and causes the pump to operate. If the engine speed signal is not received when
the ignition switch is ON, the engine stalls. The ECM stops pump operation and prevents battery discharging,
E
thereby improving safety. The ECM does not directly drive the fuel pump. It controls the ON/OFF fuel pump
relay, which in turn controls the fuel pump.
Condition Fuel pump operation F

Ignition switch is turned to ON. Operates for 1 second.
Engine running and cranking Operates.
G
When engine is stopped Stops in 1.5 seconds.
Except as shown above Stops.
H
1.CHECK FUEL PUMP FUNCTION I

2. Pinch fuel feed hose with two fingers.
- : Vehicle front (Illustration shows the view with intake air duct J
removed)
Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt on the fuel feed

hose for 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON. K

YES >> INSPECTION END L
JMBIA1891ZZ
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004690657 M
1.CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

4. Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals. O
ECM
+ – Voltage P
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.

FUEL PUMP
2.CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

Check the voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground.
IPDM E/R
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 16.
• Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and ECM
4.CHECK CONDENSER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
3. Disconnect condenser harness connector.
5. Check the voltage between condenser harness connector and ground.
Condenser
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
Battery voltage should exist for 1 seconds
B81 1 Ground
after ignition switch is turned ON.
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK 15 A FUSE
2. Disconnect 15 A fuse (No. 41).
3. Check 15 A fuse.
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Replace fuse.
6.CHECK CONDENSER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
2. Check the continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and condenser harness connector.
IPDM E/R Condenser

Continuity
E10 13 B81 1 Existed
YES >> GO TO 16.
NO >> GO TO 7.

FUEL PUMP
• Harness connectors E104, B4 A
• Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and condenser
EC
8.CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT
C
2. Check the continuity between condenser harness connector and ground.
D
Condenser
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
B81 2 Ground Existed E
YES >> GO TO 10. F
NO >> GO TO 9.
9.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART G
• Harness connectors B4, E104 (with rear view camera)
• Harness for open or short between condenser and ground
H

10.CHECK CONDENSER I
Refer to EC-348, "Component Inspection (Condenser)".
J
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> Replace condenser.
11.CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III K
1. Disconnect “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector.
2. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel
pump” harness connector. L
Fuel level sensor unit and fuel

IPDM E/R
pump Continuity M
YES >> GO TO 13.
NO >> GO TO 12.
12.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART O

• Harness connectors B4, E104
P
• Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and IPDM E/R

13.CHECK FUEL PUMP GROUND CIRCUIT
2. Check the continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector and ground.

FUEL PUMP

pump Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
B40 3 Ground Existed
YES >> GO TO 15.
NO >> GO TO 14.
• Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and ground

15.CHECK FUEL PUMP
Refer to EC-348, "Component Inspection (Fuel Pump)".
YES >> GO TO 16.
NO >> Replace fuel pump.
Component Inspection (Fuel Pump) INFOID:0000000004690658
1.CHECK FUEL PUMP

3. Check resistance between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminals as per the following.
1 and 3 0.2 - 5.0 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
NO >> Replace “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
Component Inspection (Condenser) INFOID:0000000004690659
1.CHECK CONDENSER
3. Check resistance between condenser terminals as per the following.
1 and 2 Above 1 MΩ [at 25°C (77°F)]

IGNITION SIGNAL
IGNITION SIGNAL
A
The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the power transistor. The power transistor turns EC
ON and OFF the ignition coil primary circuit. This ON/OFF operation induces the proper high voltage in the coil
secondary circuit.
1.INSPECTION START
Turn ignition switch OFF, and restart engine. D
Does the engine start?
YES-2 >> Without CONSULT-III: GO TO 3. E
2.CHECK IGNITION SIGNAL FUNCTION
F
With CONSULT-III
G
NO >> Go to EC-349, "Diagnosis Procedure". H
Without CONSULT-III
1. Let engine idle. I
2. Read the voltage signal between ECM harness connector terminals with an oscilloscope.
ECM J
+ – Voltage signal
K
9
10
11 L
F7 E16 112
18
19
M
21 JMBIA0035GB
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle. N
NO >> Go to EC-349, "Diagnosis Procedure". O
1.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I P
1. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON.

IGNITION SIGNAL
ECM
+ – Voltage
Connector
Terminal Terminal
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Refer to EC-136, "Diagnosis Procedure".
2.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
Condenser
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
IPDM E/R Condenser

Continuity
YES >> Refer to EC-136, "Diagnosis Procedure".
4.CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
Condenser
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
F13 2 Ground Existed
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors.
5.CHECK CONDENSER
Refer to EC-353, "Component Inspection (Condenser)"
YES >> GO TO 6.

IGNITION SIGNAL
6.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V A

2. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.
EC
4. Check the voltage between ignition coil harness connector and ground.
Ignition coil
Ground Voltage C
1 F31 3
2 F32 3 D
3 F33 3
4 F34 3
E
5 F35 3
6 F36 3
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT G
2. Check the continuity between ignition coil harness connector and ground.
H
Ignition coil
Ground Continuity
Cylinder Connector Terminal I
1 F31 2
2 F32 2
3 F33 2 J
Ground Existed
4 F34 2
5 F35 2
K
6 F36 2
YES >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK IGNITION COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT M

2. Check the continuity between ignition coil harness connector and ECM harness connector.
N
Ignition coil ECM

Continuity
Cylinder Connector Terminal Connector Terminal O
1 F31 1 11
2 F32 1 10
3 F33 1 9 P
F7 Existed
4 F34 1 21
5 F35 1 19
6 F36 1 18

IGNITION SIGNAL
YES >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR
Refer to EC-352, "Component Inspection (Ignition Coil with Power Transistor)".
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning ignition coil with power transistor.
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection (Ignition Coil with Power Transistor) INFOID:0000000004690663
1.CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR-I

3. Check resistance between ignition coil terminals as per the following.
Terminal No. (Polarity) Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]

1 and 2 Except 0 or ∞
1 and 3
Except 0
2 and 3
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR-II
CAUTION:
NOTE:
Do not use CONSULT-III to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the following pro-
cedure.
4. Start engine.
9. Crank engine for 5 seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder.
0.66 in) between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal
metal portion.

CAUTION:

IGNITION SIGNAL
not to get an electrical shock while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage becomes
20 kV or more. A
NOTE:
EC
tioning.
C
D
1.CHECK CONDENSER
2. Disconnect condenser harness connector. E
Terminals Resistance F
1 and 2 Above 1 MΩ [at 25C° (77C°)]
G
H

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) is located on the combination

meter.
The MIL will illuminate when the ignition switch is turned ON without
the engine running. This is a bulb check.
When the engine is started, the MIL should turn off. If the MIL
remains illuminated, the on board diagnostic system has detected an
engine system malfunction.
SAT652J
1.CHECK MIL FUNCTION

2. Check that MIL illuminates.
1.CHECK DTC
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-139, "Description".
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace.
YES >> Replace combination meter.

POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
A
EC
SEC921C
This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold. G

The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake
manifold.
During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the PCV
valve. H
Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of ventilating air.
The ventilating air is drawn from the air inlet tubes into the crankcase. In this process the air passes through
the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover. I
Under full-throttle condition, the manifold vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the valve.
The flow goes through the hose connection in the reverse direction.
On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not
meet the requirement. This is because some of the flow will go J
through the hose connection to the air inlet tubes under all condi-
tions.
K
PBIB1588E
M
1.CHECK PCV VALVE N

With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from rocker cover. A
properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes through
it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger is O
placed over valve inlet.
YES >> INSPECTION END P
NO >> Replace PCV valve.
PBIB1589E

REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the condenser of the air conditioner system. The sensor uses an
electrostatic volume pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The voltage signal is sent
to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system.
PBIB2657E
1.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR FUNCTION

2. Turn A/C switch and blower fan switch ON.
ECM
+ – Voltage (V)
Connector
Terminal Terminal
39 40
F8 1.0 - 4.0
(Refrigerant pressure sensor signal) (Sensor ground)

1. Turn A/C switch and blower fan switch OFF.
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector and ground.
Refrigerant pressure sensor

Ground Voltage (V)
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.


• IPDM E/R harness connectors E10, E346
EC
• IPDM E/R
• Harness for open or short between ECM and refrigerant pressure sensor
C
4.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. D
3. Check the continuity between refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector and ECM harness connec-
tor. E
Refrigerant pressure sensor ECM

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal F
E300 3 F8 40 Existed
G
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
H
• Harness connectors E6, F123 I
• IPDM E/R
J
6.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT K
tor.
L
Continuity
M
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 7.

• IPDM E/R harness connectors E10, E346 P
• IPDM E/R

YES >> Replace refrigerant pressure sensor.

A
Power Valves 1 and 2 EC

The power valves 1 and 2 are installed in intake manifold collector and used to control the suction passage of
the variable induction air control system. They are set in the fully closed or fully opened position by the power
valve actuators 1 and 2 operated by the vacuum stored in the vacuum tank. The vacuum to power valve actu- C
ators is controlled by the VIAS control solenoid valves 1 and 2.
D
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. E
2. Perform “VIAS S/V-1” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Turn VIAS control solenoid valve 1 ON and OFF, and check that power valve actuator 1 rod moves.
F
JMBIA1386ZZ
I
1. Power valve actuator 1 2. Power valve actuator 1 rod 3. Power valve actuator 2
4. Power valve actuator 2 rod
J
: Vehicle front
Without CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. K
2. Rev engine quickly up to approximately 5,000 rpm.
3. Check that power valve actuator 1 rod moves.
L
JMBIA1386ZZ
O
P
: Vehicle front

YES >> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III

JMBIA1386ZZ
: Vehicle front
Without CONSULT-III
1. When revving engine up to 5,000 rpm quickly.
JMBIA1386ZZ
: Vehicle front

1.INSPECTION START
Confirm the malfunctioning system (power valve 1 or power valve 2). Refer to EC-359, "Component Function
Check".
Which system is related to the incident?
Power valve 1>>GO TO 2.
2.CHECK VACUUM EXISTENCE-I
With CONSULT-III
1. Stop engine and disconnect vacuum hose connected to power valve actuator 1.
4. Turn VIAS control solenoid valve 1 ON and OFF, and check vacuum existence under the following condi-
tions.

VIAS S/V-1 Vacuum A

ON Existed
OFF Not existed
EC
Without CONSULT-III
2. Disconnect VIAS control solenoid valve 1 harness connector. C
3. Start engine.
5. Check vacuum existence under the following conditions.
D
Condition Vacuum
Idle Existed
E
Rev engine quickly up to approximately 5,000 rpm Not existed
YES >> Repair or replace power valve actuator 1. F
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK VACUUM TANK
G
1. Stop engine and disconnect vacuum hose connected to intake manifold collector.
3. Check vacuum existence from intake manifold collector.
H
Does vacuum existence from the intake manifold collector?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace intake manifold collector.
I
4.CHECK VACUUM HOSE
1. Stop engine.
2. Check vacuum hose for cracks, clogging, improper connection J
or disconnection. Refer to EC-98, "System Diagram".
YES >> GO TO 5. K
NO >> Repair hoses or tubes.
SEF109L M
N
YES >> GO TO 9.
O
6.CHECK VACUUM EXISTENCE-II
With CONSULT-III
1. Stop engine and disconnect vacuum hose connected to power valve actuator 2. P
tions.

VIAS S/V-2 Vacuum

ON Existed
OFF Not existed
Without CONSULT-III
3. Start engine.
Condition Vacuum
Idle Existed
YES >> Repair or replace power valve actuator 2.
NO >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK VACUUM HOSE
1. Stop engine.
2. Check vacuum hose for cracks, clogging, improper connection
YES >> GO TO 8.
SEF109L

YES >> GO TO 9.
>> INSPECTION END

ECM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS > [VQ35DE (TYPE 1)]
ECU DIAGNOSIS A
ECM
Reference Value INFOID:0000000004690676
EC
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL

Remarks: C
z Specification data are reference values.
z Specification data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector.
* Specification data may not be directly related to their components signals/values/operations.
I.e. Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING, because the monitor may show D
the specification data in spite of the ignition timing not being adjusted to the specification data. This IGN TIM-
ING monitors the data calculated by the ECM according to the signals input from the camshaft position sensor
and other ignition timing related sensors. E
Monitor Item Condition Values/Status

Almost the same speed as F
ENG SPEED Run engine and compare CONSULT-III value with the tachometer indication.
the tachometer indication.
MAS A/F SE-B1 See EC-128, "Description".
B/FUEL SCHDL See EC-128, "Description". G
A/F ALPHA-B1 See EC-128, "Description".
H
COOLAN TEMP/S • Engine: After warming up More than 70°C (158°F)
A/F SEN1 (B1) • Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm Fluctuates around 2.2 V
A/F SEN1 (B2) • Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm Fluctuates around 2.2 V I
• Revving engine from idle to 3,000 rpm quickly after the following conditions
are met.
0 - 0.3 V ←→ Approx. 0.6 -
HO2S2 (B1) - Engine: After warming up
- After keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at
1.0 V J
idle for 1 minute under no load
are met. K
0 - 0.3 V ←→ Approx. 0.6 -
1.0 V
L
are met.
HO2S2 MNTR (B1) - Engine: After warming up LEAN ←→ RICH
- After keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at M
are met. N
• Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-III value with the speedometer in- Almost the same speed as O
VHCL SPEED SE
dication. speedometer indication
BATTERY VOLT • Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) 11 - 14 V
P
• Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released 0.5 - 1.0 V
ACCEL SEN 1
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 4.2 - 4.8 V

ACCEL SEN 2*1 (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 4.2 - 4.8 V

ECM
• Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released More than 0.36 V
TP SEN 1-B1 (Engine stopped)
• Selector lever: D Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75 V

TP SEN 2-B1*1 (Engine stopped)
• Selector lever: D Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75 V
Indicates intake air tempera-

INT/A TEMP SE • Ignition switch: ON
ture
START SIGNAL • Ignition switch: ON → START → ON OFF → ON → OFF
• Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON

CLSD THL POS
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
Air conditioner switch: OFF OFF
• Engine: After warming up, idle the
AIR COND SIG Air conditioner switch: ON
engine ON
(Compressor operates.)
Selector lever: P or N ON
P/N POSI SW • Ignition switch: ON
Selector lever: Except above OFF
• Engine: After warming up, idle the Steering wheel: Not being turned OFF
PW/ST SIGNAL
engine Steering wheel: Being turned ON
Rear window defogger switch: ON
and/or ON
LOAD SIGNAL • Ignition switch: ON Lighting switch: 2nd position
Rear window defogger switch and lighting
OFF
switch: OFF
IGNITION SW • Ignition switch: ON → OFF → ON ON → OFF → ON
• Engine: After warming up, idle the Heater fan switch: ON ON

HEATER FAN SW
engine Heater fan switch: OFF OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released OFF
BRAKE SW • Ignition switch: ON
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON
• Engine: After warming up Idle 2.0 - 3.0 msec
• Selector lever: P or N
INJ PULSE-B1
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm 1.9 - 2.9 msec
• No load
INJ PULSE-B2
• No load
• Engine: After warming up Idle 7° - 17° BTDC
IGN TIMING
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm 25° - 45° BTDC
• No load
• Engine: After warming up Idle 5% - 35%
CAL/LD VALUE
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,500 rpm 5% - 35%
• No load
• Engine: After warming up Idle 2.0 - 6.0 g·m/s
MASS AIRFLOW
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,500 rpm 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/s
• No load
• Engine: After warming up Idle

• Selector lever: P or N (Accelerator pedal: Not depressed even 0%
PURG VOL C/V slightly, after engine starting.)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF
• No load 2,000 rpm —

ECM
A
• Engine: After warming up Idle −5° - 5°CA
INT/V TIM (B1)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm Approx. 0° - 30°CA
• No load EC
• Engine: After warming up Idle −5° - 5°CA
INT/V TIM (B2)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm Approx. 0° - 30°CA
• No load
C
INT/V SOL (B1) D
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm Approx. 0% - 50%
• No load
• Selector lever: P or N E
INT/V SOL (B2)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm Approx. 0% - 50%
• No load
• Engine: After warming up
• Selector lever: P or N Rev engine quickly up to approximately
F
VIAS S/V-1 OFF →ON → OFF
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 5,000 rpm
• No load
• Selector lever: P or N Rev engine quickly up to approximately
• No load
H
AIR COND RLY Air conditioner switch: ON
engine ON
(Compressor operates)
I
Below 950 rpm IDLE
ENGINE MOUNT • Engine: After warming up
Above 950 rpm TRVL
• For 1 second after turning ignition switch: ON J
ON
FUEL PUMP RLY • Engine running or cranking
• Except above OFF
THRTL RELAY • Ignition switch: ON ON K
Engine coolant temperature: 97°C
OFF
(206°F) or less
L
Engine coolant temperature: Between
• Engine: After warming up, idle the LOW
98°C (208°F) and 99°C (210°F)
COOLING FAN engine
• Air conditioner switch: OFF Engine coolant temperature: Between
MID M
100°C (212°F) and 104°C (219°F)
HI
(221°F) or more
• Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met. N
- Engine: After warming up
ON
HO2S2 HTR (B1) - Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at
O
• Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm OFF
• Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.
- Engine: After warming up P
ON
Almost the same speed as
I/P PULLY SPD • Vehicle speed: More than 20km/h (12 MPH)
the tachometer indication
• Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-III value with the speedometer in- Almost the same speed as
VEHICLE SPEED
dication. the speedometer indication

ECM
Idle air volume learning has not been per-
YET
formed yet.
IDL A/V LEARN • Engine: Running
Idle air volume learning has already been
CMPLT
performed successfully.
ENG OIL TEMP • Engine: After warming up More than 70°C (158°F)
Vehicle has traveled after MIL has illumi- 0 - 65,535 km
TRVL AFTER MIL • Ignition switch: ON
nated. (0 - 40,723 miles)
• Engine: After warming up, idle the engine
A/F S1 HTR (B1) 4 - 100%
(More than 140 seconds after starting engine)
A/F S1 HTR (B2) 4 - 100%
• Engine: Idle
AC PRESS SEN 1.0 - 4.0 V
• Both A/C switch and blower fan switch: ON (Compressor operates)
VHCL SPEED SE
The preset vehicle speed is
SET VHCL SPD • Engine: Running ASCD: Operating
displayed
MAIN switch: Pressed ON
MAIN SW • Ignition switch: ON
MAIN switch: Released OFF
CANCEL switch: Pressed ON
CANCEL SW • Ignition switch: ON
CANCEL switch: Released OFF
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch:
ON
Pressed
RESUME/ACC SW • Ignition switch: ON
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Re-
OFF
leased
SET/COAST switch: Pressed ON
SET SW • Ignition switch: ON
SET/COAST switch: Released OFF
BRAKE SW1 Brake pedal: Fully released ON

(ASCD brake switch) Brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
BRAKE SW2 Brake pedal: Fully released OFF

(Stop lamp switch) Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON
VHCL SPD CUT • Ignition switch: ON NON
LO SPEED CUT • Ignition switch: ON NON
AT OD MONITOR • Ignition switch: ON OFF
AT OD CANCEL • Ignition switch: ON OFF
MAIN switch: Pressed at the 1st time →
at the 2nd time
• MAIN switch: ON ASCD: Operating ON
• When vehicle speed is between
SET LAMP
40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h ASCD: Not operating OFF
(89 MPH)
ALT DUTY • Engine: Idle 0 - 80%
A/F ADJ-B1 • Engine: Running −0.330 - 0.330
• Battery: Fully charged*2
BAT CUR SEN • Selector lever: P or N Approx. 2,600 - 3,500 mV
• No load

ECM
A
• Power generation voltage variable control: Operating ON
ALT DUTY SIG
• Power generation voltage variable control: Not operating OFF
*1: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal and throttle position sensor 2 signal are converted by ECM internally. Thus, they differ EC
from ECM terminals voltage signal.
*2: Before measuring the terminal voltage, confirm that the battery is fully charged. Refer to PG-3, "How to Handle Battery".
TERMINAL LAYOUT C
PBIA9221J F
PHYSICAL VALUES
NOTE: G
• ECM is located in the engine room left side near battery.
• Specification data are reference values.
• Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III. H
Terminal No. Description

Value
Input/ Condition
+ -– Signal name (Approx.) I
Output
1 BATTERY VOLTAGE
Fuel injector No. 6
(P/B) (11 - 14 V)
[Engine is running]
J
3
Fuel injector No. 5 • Warm-up condition
(L/W)
• Idle speed
NOTE: K
The pulse cycle changes de-
29
Fuel injector No. 4 pending on rpm at idle
(LG/R)
112 JMBIA0047GB L
Output
30 (B) BATTERY VOLTAGE
Fuel injector No. 3
(R/Y) (11 - 14 V)
31
Fuel injector No. 2
M
(R/W) [Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition
• Engine speed: 2,000 rpm
32 N
Fuel injector No. 1
(R/B)
JMBIA0048GB
2 112 Throttle control motor power BATTERY VOLTAGE O

Input [Ignition switch: ON]
(G/W) (B) supply (11 - 14 V)
2.9 - 8.8 V
P
[Engine is running]
4 112
A/F sensor 1 heater (bank 1) Output • Idle speed
(BR/Y) (B)
(More than 140 seconds after
starting engine)
JMBIA0902GB

ECM
Value
Input/ Condition
+ -– Signal name (Approx.)
Output
0 - 14 V
[Ignition switch: ON]

• Engine stopped
• Selector lever: D position
• Accelerator pedal: Fully de-
pressed
JMBIA0031GB
5 112
Throttle control motor (Open) Output
(L) (B)
0 - 14 V

• Engine stopped
• Accelerator pedal: Fully re-
leased
JMBIA0032GB
0 - 14 V

• Engine stopped
6 112
Throttle control motor (Close) Output • Selector lever: D position
(P) (B)
leased
JMBIA1125GB
2.9 - 8.8 V
[Engine is running]
8 112
(SB) (B)
starting engine)
JMBIA0030GB
9 0 - 0.2 V
Ignition signal No. 3
(L/B)
[Engine is running]
10 • Warm-up condition
(G/R) • Idle speed
NOTE:
11
Ignition signal No. 1 pending on rpm at idle
(Y/R)
112 JMBIA0035GB
Output
18 (B)
Ignition signal No. 6 0.1 - 0.4 V
(GR/R)
19
Ignition signal No. 5 [Engine is running]
(P)
21
(W)
JMBIA0036GB
12
— ECM ground — — —
(B)

ECM
Value A
Input/ Condition
Output
[Engine is running] 10 V
• Engine speed: Below 3,600 EC
rpm after the following condi-
tions are met
- Engine: after warming up
- Keeping the engine speed be-
C
13 112 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heat- tween 3,500 and 4,000 rpm
Output for 1 minute and at idle for 1
(P/B) (B) er (bank 1)
minute under no load JMBIA0902GB
D
• Engine stopped
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Engine is running]
(11 - 14 V) E
• Engine speed: Above 3,600
rpm
• For 1 second after turning ig-
0 - 1.5 V
F
nition switch ON
14 112 [Engine is running]
Fuel pump relay Output
(GR) (B)
[Ignition switch: ON] G
BATTERY VOLTAGE
• More than 1 second after turn-
(11 - 14 V)
ing ignition switch ON
0 - 1.0 V → BATTERY VOLTAGE
15 112 [Ignition switch: ON → OFF] H
Throttle control motor relay Output (11 - 14 V) → 0 V
(O) (B)
[Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.0 V
16
— ECM ground — — — I
(B/Y)
• Engine speed: Below 3,600
rpm after the following condi- J
tions are met
tween 3,500 and 4,000 rpm
K
17 112 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heat-
(R) (B) er (bank 2)
[Ignition switch: ON] L

• Engine stopped
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Engine is running]
(11 - 14 V)
rpm M
[Engine is running]
[Ignition switch: OFF]
0 - 1.5 V
• A few seconds after turning N
24 112 ECM relay ignition switch OFF
Output
(W/B) (B) (Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
• More than a few seconds after O
(11 - 14 V)
turning ignition switch OFF

ECM
Value
Input/ Condition
Output
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
• Accelerator pedal: Not de-
pressed even slightly, after
engine starting
25 112 EVAP canister purge volume JMBIA0039GB

Output
(P/L) (B) control solenoid valve BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: approximately
2,000 rpm (More than 100
seconds after starting engine)
JMBIA0040GB
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
• Idle speed
26 112 BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14 V)
VIAS control solenoid valve 2 Output [Engine is running]
(GR/B) (B) ↓
0 - 1.0 V
• Rev engine quickly up to ap-
↓
proximately 5,000 rpm
BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 - 14 V)
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
• Idle speed
(V) (B) ↓
0 - 1.0 V
↓
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0 V
• Idle speed
28 112 Electronic controlled engine
Output [Engine is running]
(BR/W) (B) mount control solenoid valve BATTERY VOLTAGE
• Engine speed: More than 950
(11 - 14 V)
rpm
[Engine is running]
• Revving engine from idle to
3,000 rpm quickly after the fol-
lowing conditions are met
33 112 Heated oxygen sensor 2
Input - Engine: after warming up 0 - 1.0 V
(W) (B) (bank 1)
for 1 minute and at idle for 1
minute under no load
[Engine is running]
(W/L) (B) (bank 2)

ECM
Value A
Input/ Condition
Output
35 Sensor ground
— — — — EC
(B) (Heated oxygen sensor 2)
36 Sensor ground
— — — —
(B) (Throttle position sensor)
[Ignition switch: ON] C
• Engine stopped
• Selector lever: D position More than 0.36 V
• Accelerator pedal: Fully re- D
37 112 leased
Throttle position sensor 1 Input
(W) (B) [Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Selector lever: D position Less than 4.75 V E
pressed
[Ignition switch: ON] F
• Engine stopped
• Selector lever: D position Less than 4.75 V
38 112 leased G
(R) (B) [Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Selector lever: D position More than 0.36 V H
pressed
[Engine is running]
I
39 40
Refrigerant pressure sensor Input • Both A/C switch and blower 1.0 - 4.0 V
(R) (G)
fan motor switch: ON (Com-
pressor operates) J
40 Sensor ground
— — — —
(G) (Refrigerant pressure sensor)
[Engine is running]
0.5 - 4.5 V
K
• Steering wheel: Being turned
41 48 Power steering pressure sen-
Input [Engine is running]
(O/B) (B/P) sor
• Steering wheel: Not being 0.4 - 0.8 V L
turned
[Engine is running]
42 44
Battery current sensor Input • Battery: Fully charged*2 2.6 - 3.5 V
(BR) (G/B) M
• Idle speed
44 Sensor ground
— — — —
(G/B) (Battery current sensor)
N
45 112
A/F sensor 1 (bank 1) Input [Ignition switch: ON] 2.2 V
(P) (B)
0 - 4.8 V
46 52 Engine coolant temperature O
Input [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with engine
(Y) (B/R) sensor
coolant temperature.
47 36 Sensor power supply
— [Ignition switch: ON] 5V
(G) (B) (Throttle position sensor) P
Sensor ground
48
— (Power steering pressure — — —
(B/P)
sensor)
[Engine is running] 1.8 V
49 112
A/F sensor 1 (bank 1) Input • Warm-up condition Output voltage varies with air fuel
(L) (B)
• Engine speed: 2,000 rpm ratio.

ECM
Value
Input/ Condition
Output
0 - 4.8 V
50 56
Intake air temperature sensor Input [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with intake
(L/Y) (G/B)
air temperature.
(R/Y) (G/B) (Battery current sensor)
Sensor ground
52 (Engine coolant temperature
— — — —
(B/R) sensor/Engine oil tempera-
ture sensor)
53 112
(V) (B)
0 - 4.8 V
54 52
Engine oil temperature sensor Input [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with engine
(G) (B/R)
oil temperature.
Sensor power supply
55 48
(Power steering pressure — [Ignition switch: ON] 5V
(SB) (B/P)
sensor)
Sensor ground
56
— (Mass air flow sensor/Intake — — —
(G/B)
air temperature sensor)
57 112
(LG) (B)
0.4 V
• Engine stopped
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition 0.9 - 1.2 V
58 56
Mass air flow sensor Input • Idle speed
(O) (G/B)
[Engine is running] 0.9 - 1.2 V to 2.4 V (Check for liner
• Warm-up condition voltage rise in response to engine
• Engine is revving from idle to being increased to approximately
approximately 4,000 rpm 4,000 rpm.)
Sensor power supply
59 64
[Camshaft position sensor — [Ignition switch: ON] 5V
(G/W) (B/R)
(PHASE) (bank 1)]
Sensor ground
60
— [Crankshaft position sensor — — —
(Y/B)
(POS)]
(B) (—)
Knock sensor (bank 1) Input
• Idle speed 2.5 V*1
(W) (—)
Sensor power supply

63 68
(R/W) (Y/G)
(PHASE) (bank 2)]
Sensor ground
64
— [Camshaft position sensor — — —
(B/R)
(PHASE) (bank 1)]

ECM
Value A
Input/ Condition
Output
4.0 - 5.0 V
EC
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
NOTE: C
pending on rpm at idle
JMBIA0041GB
65 60 Crankshaft position sensor D
Input
(W/B) (Y/B) (POS)
4.0 - 5.0 V
E
[Engine is running]
F
JMBIA0042GB
67 Sensor ground
— — — —
(—) (Knock sensor) G
Sensor ground
68
(Y/G)
(PHASE) (bank 2)] H
3.0 - 5.0 V
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition I
• Idle speed
NOTE:
pending on rpm at idle J
69 68 Camshaft position sensor JMBIA0045GB
Input
(BR/W) (Y/G) (PHASE) (bank 2)
3.0 - 5.0 V
K
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed is 2,000 rpm L
JMBIA0046GB
M
3.0 - 5.0 V
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
N
NOTE:
pending on rpm at idle O
Input
(W/R) (B/R) (PHASE) (bank 1)
3.0 - 5.0 V
P
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
JMBIA0046GB

ECM
Value
Input/ Condition
Output
(BR/W) (G) (Refrigerant pressure sensor)
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
• Idle speed
7 - 12 V
75 112 Intake valve timing control so-
Output
(Y) (B) lenoid valve (bank 2) [Engine is running]
JMBIA0038GB
Sensor power supply

76 60
[Crankshaft position sensor — [Ignition switch: ON] 5V
(R/G) (Y/B)
(POS)]
77 112 Power supply for ECM (Back- BATTERY VOLTAGE
Input [Ignition switch: OFF]
(W/L) (B) up) (11 - 14 V)
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
• Idle speed
7 - 12 V
Output
(R/L) (B) lenoid valve (bank 1) [Engine is running]
JMBIA0038GB

• Engine stopped
0.5 - 1.0 V
81 84 Accelerator pedal position leased
Input
(W) (B) sensor 1 [Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
4.2 - 4.8 V
pressed
• Engine stopped
0.25 - 0.50 V
Input
(O) (G) sensor 2 [Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
2.0 - 2.5 V
pressed
Sensor power supply
83 84
(Accelerator pedal position — [Ignition switch: ON] 5V
(BR) (B)
sensor 1)
Sensor ground
84
— (Accelerator pedal position — — —
(B)
sensor 1)

ECM
Value A
Input/ Condition
Output
4V EC
• ASCD steering switch: OFF
0V
• MAIN switch: Pressed
85 92 1V
ASCD steering switch Input • CANCEL switch: Pressed
(Y) (BR)
• RESUME/ACCELERATE 3V D
switch: Pressed
2V
• SET/COAST switch: Pressed E
Sensor power supply
87 100
(GR) (G)
sensor 2)
F
88 Input/
— Data link connector — —
(O) Output
92 Sensor ground
— — — — G
(BR) (ASCD steering switch)
[Ignition switch: OFF] 0V
93 112
Ignition switch Input BATTERY VOLTAGE
(BR) (B) [Ignition switch: ON] H
(11 - 14 V)
1V
[Engine is running] I
• Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes de- J
94 112 JMBIA0076GB
Engine speed output signal Output
(GR) (B) K
1V
[Engine is running] L
M
JMBIA0077GB
95*3 — — — — —
(Y)
N
97 Input/
— CAN communication line — —
(P) Output
98 Input/
— CAN communication line — — O
(L) Output
Sensor ground
100
(G) P
sensor 2)
[Ignition switch: ON] BATTERY VOLTAGE
• Selector lever: P or N position (11 - 14 V)
102 112
PNP signal Input [Ignition switch: ON]
(R) (B)
• Selector lever: Except above 0V
position

ECM
Value
Input/ Condition
Output
104*3 — — — — —
(SB)
105 112 BATTERY VOLTAGE
Power supply for ECM Input [Ignition switch: ON]
(V) (B) (11 - 14 V)
0V
• Brake pedal: Fully released
106 112
Stop lamp switch Input [Ignition switch: OFF]
(SB) (B) BATTERY VOLTAGE
• Brake pedal: Slightly de-
(11 - 14 V)
pressed
107
(B)
108
(B)
• Brake pedal: Slightly de- 0V
110 112 pressed
ASCD brake switch Input
(G) (B)
• Brake pedal: Fully released (11 - 14 V)
111
(B)
112
(B)
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.)
*1: This may vary depending on internal resistance of the tester.
*3: This harness is not used.

ECM
Wiring Diagram—ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM— INFOID:0000000004690677
EC
JCBWM1074GB
P

ECM
JCBWM1075GB

ECM
EC
JCBWM1076GB

ECM
JCBWM1077GB

ECM
EC
JCBWM1078GB

ECM
JCBWM1079GB

ECM
EC
JCBWM1080GB

ECM
JCBWM1081GB

ECM
EC
JCBWM1082GB

ECM
JCBWM1083GB

ECM
EC
JCBWM1084GB

ECM
JCBWM1085GB

ECM
EC
JCBWM1086GB

ECM
JCBWM1087GB

ECM
EC
JCBWM1088GB

ECM
JCBWM1089GB
Fail-safe INFOID:0000000004690678
NON DTC RELATED ITEM

ECM
Engine operating condi- Reference A

Detected items Remarks
tion in fail-safe mode page
Engine speed will not Malfunction indicator When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the
rise more than 2,500 rpm circuit driver by illuminating MIL when there is malfunction on engine control
EC
due to the fuel cut system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related
diagnoses are continuously detected as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the EC-354
driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open C
by means of operating the fail-safe function.
The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL
circuit are detected and demands the driver to repair the malfunction.
D
DTC RELATED ITEM
DTC No. Detected items Engine operating condition in fail-safe mode

E
P0011 Intake valve timing control The signal is not energized to the intake valve timing control solenoid valve and the valve
P0021 control does not function.
P0102 Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
F
P0103
P0117 Engine coolant tempera- Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the following condition.
P0118 ture sensor circuit CONSULT-III displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
G
Engine coolant temperature decided
Condition
(CONSULT-III display)
Just as ignition switch is turned ON
40°C (104°F) H
or START
Approx. 4 minutes or more after
80°C (176°F)
engine starting
I
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
Except as shown above
(Depends on the time)
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling
fan operates while engine is running. J
P0122 Throttle position sensor The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in
P0123 order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
P0222 The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal K
P0223 condition.
P2135 Therefore the acceleration will be poor.
P0197 Engine oil temperature L
Intake valve timing control does not function.
P0198 sensor
P0500 Vehicle speed sensor The cooling fan operates (Highest) while engine is running.
P0605 ECM (When ECM calculation function is a malfunctioning:) M
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
ECM deactivates ASCD operation.
N
P0643 Sensor power supply ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
P1805 Brake switch ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to a
small range. O
Therefore, acceleration will be poor.
Vehicle condition Driving condition
When engine is idling Normal P
When accelerating Poor acceleration
P2100 Throttle control motor relay ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
P2103 fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P2101 Electric throttle control ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
function fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.

ECM
P2118 Throttle control motor ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
P2119 Electric throttle control ac- (When electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return spring
tuator malfunction:)
ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the
idle position. The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.
(When throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is not in specified range:)
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20
degrees or less.
(When ECM detects the throttle valve is stuck open:)
While the vehicle is being driver, it slows down gradually because of fuel cut. After the ve-
hicle stops, the engine stalls.
The engine can restart in N or P position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm or
more.
P2122 Accelerator pedal position The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in
P2123 sensor order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
P2127 The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal
P2128 condition.
P2138 Therefore the acceleration will be poor.
DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000004690679
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority
chart.
Priority Detected items (DTC)

1 • U1000 U1001 CAN communication line
• P0102 P0103 Mass air flow sensor
• P0112 P0113 Intake air temperature sensor
• P0117 P0118 Engine coolant temperature sensor
• P0122 P0123 P0222 P0223 P1225 P1226 P2135 Throttle position sensor
• P0197 P0198 Engine oil temperature sensor
• P0327 P0328 P0332 P0333 Knock sensor
• P0335 Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
• P0340 P0345 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
• P0500 Vehicle speed sensor
• P0605 P0607 ECM
• P0643 Sensor power supply
• P0705 P0850 Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch
• P1550 P1551 P1552 P1553 P1554 Battery current sensor
• P1610 - P1615 NATS
• P1700 CVT control system
• P2122 P2123 P2127 P2128 P2138 Accelerator pedal position sensor

ECM
A
2 • P0031 P0032 P0051 P0052 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater
• P0037 P0038 P0057 P0058 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
• P0075 P0081 Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
• P0130 P0131 P0132 P0133 P0150 P0151 P0152 P0153 P2A00 P2A03 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 EC
• P0137 P0138 P0139 P0157 P0158 P0159 Heated oxygen sensor 2
• P0444 EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
• P0550 Power steering pressure sensor
• P0603 ECM power supply C
• P0710 P0715 P0720 P0740 P0744 P0745 P0746 P0776 P0778 P0840 P0845 P1740 CVT related sensors, solenoid valves
and switches
• P1217 Engine over temperature (OVERHEAT)
• P1777 P1778 CVT step motor D
• P1800 P1801 VIAS control solenoid valve
• P1805 Brake switch
• P2100 P2103 Throttle control motor relay
• P2101 Electric throttle control function
E
• P2118 Throttle control motor
3 • P0011 P0021 Intake valve timing control
• P0171 P0172 P0174 P0175 Fuel injection system function F
• P0300 - P0306 Misfire
• P0420 P0430 Three way catalyst function
• P1211 TCS control unit
• P1212 TCS communication line G
• P1564 ASCD steering switch
• P1572 ASCD brake switch
• P1574 ASCD vehicle speed sensor
H
• P1715 Primary speed sensor
• P2119 Electric throttle control actuator
DTC Index INFOID:0000000004690680

I
×:Applicable —: Not applicable
1
DTC* J
Items Reference
CONSULT-III SRT code Trip MIL
(CONSULT-III screen terms) page
ECM*3
GST*2
U1000 1000*4 CAN COMM CIRCUIT — 1 × EC-139 K
U1001 1001*4 CAN COMM CIRCUIT — 2 — EC-139
NO DTC IS DETECTED. L
P0000 0000 FURTHER TESTING — — Blinking —
MAY BE REQUIRED.
P0011 0011 INT/V TIM CONT-B1 — 2 — EC-140
M
P0021 0021 INT/V TIM CONT-B2 — 2 — EC-140
P0031 0031 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) — 2 × EC-144
P0032 0032 A/F SEN1 HTR (B1) — 2 × EC-144 N
P0037 0037 HO2S2 HTR (B1) — 2 × EC-147
P0038 0038 HO2S2 HTR (B1) — 2 × EC-147
O
P0051 0051 A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) — 2 × EC-144
P0052 0052 A/F SEN1 HTR (B2) — 2 × EC-144
P0057 0057 HO2S2 HTR (B2) — 2 × EC-147 P
P0058 0058 HO2S2 HTR (B2) — 2 × EC-147
P0075 0075 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 — 2 × EC-150
P0081 0081 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B2 — 2 × EC-150
P0102 0102 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 — 1 × EC-153
P0103 0103 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 — 1 × EC-153

ECM
DTC*1
Items Reference
ECM*3
GST*2
P0112 0112 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 — 2 × EC-158
P0113 0113 IAT SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 — 2 × EC-158
P0117 0117 ECT SEN/CIRC — 1 × EC-161
P0118 0118 ECT SEN/CIRC — 1 × EC-161
P0122 0122 TP SEN 2/CIRC-B1 — 1 × EC-164
P0123 0123 TP SEN 2/CIRC-B1 — 1 × EC-164
P0130 0130 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) — 2 × EC-167
P0131 0131 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) — 2 × EC-171
P0132 0132 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) — 2 × EC-174
P0133 0133 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) × 2 × EC-177
P0137 0137 HO2S2 (B1) × 2 × EC-182
P0138 0138 HO2S2 (B1) × 2 × EC-189
P0139 0139 HO2S2 (B1) × 2 × EC-198
P0150 0150 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) — 2 × EC-167
P0151 0151 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) — 2 × EC-171
P0152 0152 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) — 2 × EC-174
P0153 0153 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) × 2 × EC-177
P0157 0157 HO2S2 (B2) × 2 × EC-182
P0158 0158 HO2S2 (B2) × 2 × EC-189
P0159 0159 HO2S2 (B2) × 2 × EC-198
P0171 0171 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B1 — 2 × EC-205
P0172 0172 FUEL SYS-RICH-B1 — 2 × EC-209
P0174 0174 FUEL SYS-LEAN-B2 — 2 × EC-205
P0175 0175 FUEL SYS-RICH-B2 — 2 × EC-209
P0197 0197 EOT SEN/CIRC — 2 × EC-213
P0198 0198 EOT SEN/CIRC — 2 × EC-213
P0222 0222 TP SEN 1/CIRC-B1 — 1 × EC-216
P0223 0223 TP SEN 1/CIRC-B1 — 1 × EC-216
P0300 0300 MULTI CYL MISFIRE — 1 or 2 × EC-219
P0301 0301 CYL 1 MISFIRE — 1 or 2 × EC-219
P0327 0327 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 — 2 — EC-225
P0335 0335 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT — 2 × EC-228
P0340 0340 CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 — 2 × EC-232
P0345 0345 CMP SEN/CIRC-B2 — 2 × EC-232

ECM
DTC*1
Items Reference A
ECM*3
GST*2
P0420 0420 TW CATALYST SYS-B1 × 2 × EC-236 EC
P0430 0430 TW CATALYST SYS-B2 × 2 × EC-236
P0444 0444 PURG VOLUME CONT/V — 2 × EC-241
× C
P0500 0500 VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC*5 — 2 EC-244
P0550 0550 PW ST P SEN/CIRC — 2 — EC-246
P0603 0603 ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT — 2 × EC-248 D
P0605 0605 ECM — 1 or 2 × or — EC-250
P0607 0607 ECM — 1 × EC-252
P0643 0643 SENSOR POWER/CIRC — 1 × EC-253 E
P0705 0705 PNP SW/CIRC — 2 × TM-51
P0710 0710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC — 1 × TM-54
F
P0715 0715 INPUT SPD SEN/CIRC — 2 × TM-56
P0720 0720 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*5 — 2 × TM-59
P0740 0740 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC — 2 × TM-66 G
P0744 0744 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN — 2 × TM-68
P0745 0745 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC — 2 × TM-70
H
P0746 0746 PRS CNT SOL/A FCTN — 1 × TM-72
P0776 0776 PRS CNT SOL/B FCTN — 2 × TM-74
P0778 0778 PRS CNT SOL/B CIRC — 2 × TM-76 I
P0840 0840 TR PRS SENS/A CIRC — 2 × TM-81
P0845 0845 TR PRS SENS/B CIRC — 2 × TM-87
J
P0850 0850 P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT — 2 × EC-255
P1211 1211 TCS C/U FUNCTN — 2 — EC-258
P1212 1212 TCS/CIRC — 2 — EC-259 K
P1217 1217 ENG OVER TEMP — 1 × EC-260
P1225 1225 CTP LEARNING-B1 — 2 — EC-264
L
P1226 1226 CTP LEARNING-B1 — 2 — EC-266
P1550 1550 BAT CURRENT SENSOR — 2 — EC-268
P1551 1551 BAT CURRENT SENSOR — 2 — EC-271 M
N
P1564 1564 ASCD SW — 1 — EC-280
P1572 1572 ASCD BRAKE SW — 1 — EC-283
O
P1574 1574 ASCD VHL SPD SEN — 1 — EC-288
P1610 1610 LOCK MODE — 2 — SEC-38
P1611 1611 ID DISCORD, IMMU-ECM — 2 — SEC-39 P
P1612 1612 CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU — 2 — SEC-41
P1614 1614 CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY — 2 — SEC-42
P1615 1615 DIFFERENCE OF KEY — 2 — SEC-45
P1700 1700 CVT C/U FUNCT — 1 — EC-290
P1715 1715 IN PULY SPEED — 2 — EC-291

ECM
DTC*1
Items Reference
ECM*3
GST*2
P1740 1740 LU-SLCT SOL/CIRC — 2 × TM-101
P1777 1777 STEP MOTR CIRC — 1 × TM-104
P1778 1778 STEP MOTR FNC — 2 × TM-107
P1800 1800 VIAS S/V-1 — 2 — EC-292
P1801 1801 VIAS S/V-2 — 2 — EC-295
P1805 1805 BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT — 2 — EC-298
P2100 2100 ETC MOT PWR-B1 — 1 × EC-301
P2101 2101 ETC FNCTN/CIRC-B1 — 1 × EC-303
P2103 2103 ETC MOT PWR — 1 × EC-301
P2118 2118 ETC MOT-B1 — 1 × EC-307
P2119 2119 ETC ACTR-B1 — 1 × EC-309
P2122 2122 APP SEN 1/CIRC — 1 × EC-311
P2123 2123 APP SEN 1/CIRC — 1 × EC-311
P2127 2127 APP SEN 2/CIRC — 1 × EC-314
P2128 2128 APP SEN 2/CIRC — 1 × EC-314
P2135 2135 TP SENSOR-B1 — 1 × EC-318
P2138 2138 APP SENSOR — 1 × EC-321
P2A00 2A00 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) — 2 × EC-325
P2A03 2A03 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) — 2 × EC-325
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*2: This number is prescribed by ISO 15031-6.
*3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN.
*4: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-III.
*5: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur, the MIL illuminates.
How to Set SRT Code INFOID:0000000004690681
To set all SRT codes, self-diagnoses for the items indicated above must be performed one or more times.
Each diagnosis may require a long period of actual driving under various conditions.
WITH CONSULT-III
Perform corresponding DTC Confirmation Procedure one by one based on Performance Priority in the table
on “SRT Item”.
WITHOUT CONSULT-III
The most efficient driving pattern in which SRT codes can be properly set is explained below. The driving pat-
tern should be performed one or more times to set all SRT codes.

ECM
DRIVING PATTERN
A
EC
JMBIA0864GB
P
• The time required for each diagnosis varies with road surface conditions, weather, altitude, individual driving
habits, etc.
Zone A refers to the range where the time, required for the diagnosis under normal conditions*, is the short-
est.
Zone B refers to the range where the diagnosis can still be performed if the diagnosis is not completed within
zone A.
*: Normal conditions refer to the following:

ECM
• Sea level
• Flat road
• Ambient air temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
• Diagnosis is performed as quickly as possible under normal conditions.
Under different conditions [For example: ambient air temperature other than 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)], diagno-
sis may also be performed.
Pattern 1:
• The engine is started at the engine coolant temperature of −10 to 35°C (14 to 95°F)
(where the voltage between the ECM terminal 46 and ground is 3.0 - 4.3 V).
• The engine must be operated at idle speed until the engine coolant temperature is greater than 70°C
(158°F) (where the voltage between the ECM terminal 46 and ground is lower than 1.4 V).
Pattern 2:
• When steady-state driving is performed again even after it is interrupted, each diagnosis can be conducted.
In this case, the time required for diagnosis may be extended.
Pattern 3:
• Operate vehicle following the driving pattern shown in the figure.
• Release the accelerator pedal during deceleration of vehicle speed
from 90 km/h (56 MPH) to 0 km/h (0 MPH).
Pattern 4:
• The accelerator pedal must be held very steady during steady-
state driving.
• If the accelerator pedal is moved, the test must be conducted
again.
*1: Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle speed is 90 km/h (56
MPH), then release the accelerator pedal and keep it released for
more than 10 seconds. Depress the accelerator pedal until vehicle
PBIB2244E
speed is 90 km/h (56 MPH) again.
*2: Checking the vehicle speed with GST is advised.
Suggested Transmission Gear Position.
Selector lever position is D.
Test Value and Test Limit INFOID:0000000004690682
The following is the information specified in Service $06 of ISO 15031-5.

The test value is a parameter used to determine whether a system/circuit diagnostic test is OK or NG while
being monitored by the ECM during self-diagnosis. The test limit is a reference value which is specified as the
maximum or minimum value and is compared with the test value being monitored.
These data (test value and test limit) are specified by On Board Monitor ID (OBDMID), Test ID (TID), Unit and
Scaling ID and can be displayed on the GST screen.
The items of the test value and test limit will be displayed with GST screen which items are provided by the
ECM. (eg., if bank 2 is not applied on this vehicle, only the items of bank 1 are displayed)

ECM
Test value and Test
limit A
OBD- (GST display)
Item Self-diagnostic test item DTC Description
MID Unit and
TID Scaling EC
ID
Minimum sensor output voltage for test
P0131 83H 0BH
cycle
C
Maximum sensor output voltage for test
P0131 84H 0BH
cycle
Minimum sensor output voltage for test D
P0130 85H 0BH
cycle
P0130 86H 0BH
cycle
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 E
01H Response rate: Response ratio (Lean to
(Bank 1) P0133 87H 04H
Rich)
Response rate: Response ratio (Rich to
P0133 88H 04H
Lean)
F
P2A00 89H 84H The amount of shift in air fuel ratio
P2A00 8AH 84H The amount of shift in air fuel ratio
G
HO2S P0130 8BH 0BH Difference in sensor output voltage
P0133 8CH 83H Response gain at the limited frequency
Minimum sensor output voltage for test H
P0138 07H 0CH
cycle
Heated oxygen sensor 2 Maximum sensor output voltage for test

02H P0137 08H 0CH
(Bank 1) cycle I
P0138 80H 0CH Sensor output voltage
P0139 81H 0CH Difference in sensor output voltage
J
P0143 07H 0CH
cycle

03H P0144 08H 0CH K
(Bank 1) cycle
L

ECM
Test value and Test
limit
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling
ID
P0151 83H 0BH
cycle
P0151 84H 0BH
cycle
P0150 85H 0BH
cycle
P0150 86H 0BH
cycle
05H Response rate: Response ratio (Lean to
(Bank 2) P0153 87H 04H
Rich)
Response rate: Response ratio (Rich to
P0153 88H 04H
Lean)
P2A03 89H 84H The amount of shift in air fuel ratio
P2A03 8AH 84H The amount of shift in air fuel ratio
HO2S P0150 8BH 0BH Difference in sensor output voltage
P0153 8CH 83H Response gain at the limited frequency
P0158 07H 0CH
cycle

06H P0157 08H 0CH
(Bank 2) cycle
P0163 07H 0CH
cycle

07H P0164 08H 0CH
(Bank2) cycle
P0420 80H 01H O2 storage index
Switching time lag engine exhaust index
P0420 82H 01H
Three way catalyst function value
21H
(Bank1) Difference in 3rd O2 sensor output volt-
P2423 83H 0CH
age
CATA- P2423 84H 84H O2 storage index in HC trap catalyst

LYST P0430 80H 01H O2 storage index
Switching time lag engine exhaust index
P0430 82H 01H
Three way catalyst function value
22H
(Bank2) Difference in 3rd O2 sensor output volt-
P2424 83H 0CH
age
P2424 84H 84H O2 storage index in HC trap catalyst

ECM
Test value and Test
limit A
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling EC
ID
Low Flow Faults: EGR temp change
P0400 80H 96H
rate (short term)
C
Low Flow Faults: EGR temp change
P0400 81H 96H
rate (long term)
EGR Low Flow Faults: Difference between D
31H EGR function
SYSTEM P0400 82H 96H max EGR temp and EGR temp under
idling condition
P0400 83H 96H Low Flow Faults: Max EGR temp
E
High Flow Faults: EGR temp increase
P1402 84H 96H
rate
VTC intake function diagnosis (VTC
P0011 80H 9DH
alignment check diagnosis)
F
VTC exhaust function diagnosis (VTC
P0014 81H 9DH
35H VVT Monitor (Bank1) G
P0011 82H 9DH
drive failure diagnosis)
P0014 83H 9DH H
VVT drive failure diagnosis)
SYSTEM VTC intake function diagnosis (VTC
P0021 80H 9DH
I
P0024 81H 9DH
36H VVT Monitor (Bank2)
P0021 82H 9DH J
P0024 83H 9DH
EVAP control system leak Difference in pressure sensor output K
39H P0455 80H 0CH
(Cap Off) voltage before and after pull down
EVAP control system leak Leak area index (for more than 0.04
3BH P0442 80H 05H
(Small leak) inch) L
Leak area index (for more than 0.02
EVAP P0456 80H 05H
EVAP control system leak inch)
SYSTEM 3CH
(Very small leak) Maximum internal pressure of EVAP M
P0456 81H FDH
system during monitoring
Difference in pressure sensor output
3DH Purge flow system P0441 83H 0CH voltage before and after vent control N
valve close
A/F sensor 1 heater Low Input:P0031 Converted value of Heater electric cur-
41H 81H 0BH
(Bank 1) High Input:P0032 rent to voltage
O
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heat- Low Input:P0037 Converted value of Heater electric cur-
42H 80H 0CH
er (Bank 1) High Input:P0038 rent to voltage
Heated oxygen sensor 3 heat- Converted value of Heater electric cur- P
O2 SEN- 43H P0043 80H 0CH
er (Bank 1) rent to voltage
SOR
HEATER A/F sensor 1 heater Low Input:P0051 Converted value of Heater electric cur-
45H 81H 0BH
(Bank 2) High Input:P0052 rent to voltage
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heat- Low Input:P0057 Converted value of Heater electric cur-
46H 80H 0CH
er (Bank 2) High Input:P0058 rent to voltage
Heated oxygen sensor 3 heat- Converted value of Heater electric cur-
47H P0063 80H 0CH
er (Bank 2) rent to voltage

ECM
Test value and Test
limit
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling
ID
Secondary Air Injection System Incor-
P0411 80H 01H
rect Flow Detected
Bank1: P0491 Secondary Air Injection System Insuffi-
81H 01H
Bank2: P0492 cient Flow
Secondary Air Injection System Pump
P2445 82H 01H
Stuck Off
SEC-
Secondary Air Injection System High
OND- 71H Secondary Air system P2448 83H 01H
Airflow
ARY AIR
Bank1: P2440 Secondary Air Injection System Switch-
84H 01H
Bank2: P2442 ing Valve Stuck Open
Secondary Air Injection System Switch-
P2440 85H 01H
ing Valve Stuck Open
Secondary Air Injection System Pump
P2444 86H 01H
Stuck On
Fuel injection system function P0171 or P0172 80H 2FH Long term fuel trim
81H
(Bank 1) P0171 or P0172 81H 24H The number of lambda control clamped
FUEL
SYSTEM P0174 or P0175 80H 2FH Long term fuel trim
Fuel injection system function
82H
(Bank 2) P0174 or P0175 81H 24H The number of lambda control clamped

ECM
Test value and Test
limit A
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling EC
ID
Misfiring counter at 1000 revolution of
P0301 80H 24H
the first cylinder
C
P0302 81H 24H
the second cylinder
Misfiring counter at 1000 revolution of D
P0303 82H 24H
the third cylinder
P0304 83H 24H
the fourth cylinder
E
P0305 84H 24H
the fifth cylinder
P0306 85H 24H
the sixth cylinder
F
P0307 86H 24H
the seventh cylinder
G
P0308 87H 24H
the eighth cylinder
P0300 88H 24H H
the multiple cylinders
Misfiring counter at 200 revolution of the
P0301 89H 24H
first cylinder
MISFIRE A1H Multiple Cylinder Misfires I
P0302 8AH 24H
second cylinder
P0303 8BH 24H J
third cylinder
P0304 8CH 24H
fourth cylinder
Misfiring counter at 200 revolution of the K
P0305 8DH 24H
fifth cylinder
P0306 8EH 24H
sixth cylinder L
P0307 8FH 24H
seventh cylinder
Misfiring counter at 200 revolution of the M
P0308 90H 24H
eighth cylinder
P0300 91H 24H
the single cylinder N
P0300 92H 24H
single cylinder
Misfiring counter at 200 revolution of the O
P0300 93H 24H
multiple cylinders

ECM
Test value and Test
limit
OBD- (GST display)
MID Unit and
TID Scaling
ID
EWMA (Exponential Weighted Moving
P0301 0BH 24H Average) misfire counts for last 10 driv-
A2H No. 1 Cylinder Misfire ing cycles
Misfire counts for last/current driving cy-
P0301 0CH 24H
cles
P0302 0CH 24H
cles
P0303 0CH 24H
cles
P0304 0CH 24H
cles
MISFIRE
P0305 0CH 24H
cles
P0306 0CH 24H
cles
P0307 0CH 24H
cles
P0308 0CH 24H
cles

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [VQ35DE (TYPE 1)]
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
Symptom Table INFOID:0000000004690683
EC
SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

C
SYMPTOM
OVERHEATS/WATER TEMPERATURE HIGH

LACK OF POWER/POOR ACCELERATION
D
HARD/NO START/RESTART (EXCP. HA)
BATTERY DEAD (UNDER CHARGE)

HESITATION/SURGING/FLAT SPOT
EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
EXCESSIVE OIL CONSUMPTION

E
SPARK KNOCK/DETONATION
SLOW/NO RETURN TO IDLE

Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
F
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL
H
Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA
Fuel Fuel pump circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 EC-345
Fuel pressure regulator system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-418 I
Fuel injector circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 2 EC-342
Evaporative emission system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-81
J
Air Positive crankcase ventilation sys-
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 EC-355
tem 3 3
Incorrect idle speed adjustment 1 1 1 1 1 EC-17
K
EC-303,
Electric throttle control actuator 1 1 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
EC-309
Ignition Incorrect ignition timing adjustment 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 EC-17
L
Ignition circuit 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-349
Power supply and ground circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 EC-136
Mass air flow sensor circuit 2 EC-153 M
1
Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit 3 3 EC-161
EC-167,
3 EC-171, N
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit EC-174,
1 2 2 2 2 2 EC-177,
EC-325
O
EC-164,
EC-216,
Throttle position sensor circuit EC-264,
EC-266, P
2 2 EC-318
EC-253,
EC-311,
Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit 3 2 1
EC-314,
EC-321
Knock sensor circuit 2 3 EC-225

SYMPTOM




Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
Warranty symptom code AA ENGINE STALL
AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA
Engine oil temperature sensor 4 2 3 EC-213
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit 2 2 EC-228
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit 3 2 EC-232
Vehicle speed signal circuit 2 3 3 3 EC-244
Power steering pressure sensor circuit 2 3 3 EC-246
EC-248,
ECM 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
EC-250
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cir-
3 2 1 3 2 2 3 3 EC-150
cuit
PNP signal circuit 3 3 3 3 3 EC-255
VIAS control solenoid valve 1 circuit 1 EC-292
Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit 2 3 3 4 EC-356
Electrical load signal circuit 3 EC-337
Air conditioner circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 HAC-40
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) 4 BRC-29
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection.
(continued on the next figure)
SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER

SYMPTOM A

EC



C
Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
D
ENGINE STALL
E
Warranty symptom code AA AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA F

Fuel Fuel tank FL-12
5
Fuel piping 5 5 5 5 5 5 FL-4
Vapor lock — G
5
Valve deposit —
Poor fuel (Heavy weight gasoline, 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
— H
Low octane)
Air Air duct EM-27
Air cleaner EM-27 I
Air leakage from air duct
(Mass air flow sensor — electric EM-27
5 5 5 5 5 5
throttle control actuator)
5 5 5 5 J
Electric throttle control actuator EM-29
Air leakage from intake manifold/ EM-29,
Collector/Gasket EM-32
K
Cranking Battery PG-129
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Generator circuit CHG-21
Starter circuit 3 1 STR-5 L
Signal plate 6 EM-104
PNP signal 4 TM-52
M
Engine Cylinder head
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-97
Cylinder head gasket 4 3
Cylinder block N
Piston 4
Piston ring
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 EM-108 O
Connecting rod
Bearing
Crankshaft P
Valve Timing chain EM-54
mecha-
Camshaft EM-84
nism
Intake valve timing control 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-66
Intake valve
3 EM-97
Exhaust valve

SYMPTOM




Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
Warranty symptom code AA ENGINE STALL
AB AC AD AE AF AG AH AJ AK AL AM HA
Exhaust Exhaust manifold/Tube/Muffler/
Gasket EM-34, EX-
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
4
Three way catalyst
Lubrica- LU-7, LU-
Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil pump/Oil
tion 10, LU-11,
filter/Oil gallery/Oil cooler 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 LU-13
Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil LU-7
Cooling CO-12,
Radiator/Hose/Radiator filler cap
CO-12
Thermostat 5 CO-23
Water pump CO-18
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 5
Water gallery CO-2
Cooling fan CO-16
Coolant level (Low)/Contaminat- 5
CO-8
ed coolant
NVIS (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System —
1 1 SEC-19
NATS)

NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
A
FUEL CUT CONTROL (AT NO LOAD AND HIGH ENGINE SPEED) EC

If the engine speed is above 1,500 rpm under no load (for example, the selector lever position is P or N and
engine speed is over 1,500 rpm) fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off var-
ies based on engine speed. C
Fuel cut will be operated until the engine speed reaches 1,100 rpm, then fuel cut will be cancelled.
NOTE:
This function is different from deceleration control listed under Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System, EC-33,

PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [VQ35DE (TYPE 1)]
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000004690685
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIRBAG” and
“SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the “SRS AIRBAG”.
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or har-
ness connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the igni-
tion ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover INFOID:0000000004807595
When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover
the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc.
PIIB3706J
On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and CVT INFOID:0000000004690688
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
CAUTION:
• Always turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery cable before any repair or
inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc. will cause
the MIL to illuminate.
• Always connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to illuminate due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
• Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-lock-
ing type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-115, "Description".
• Always route and secure the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness with a
bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to illuminate due to the short circuit.

PRECAUTIONS
• Always connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube may
cause the MIL to illuminate due to the malfunction of the fuel injection system, etc. A
• Always erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM and TCM
(Transmission control module) before returning the vehicle to the customer.
General Precautions INFOID:0000000004690689 EC
• Always use a 12 volt battery as power source.

• Never attempt to disconnect battery cables while engine is C
running.
• Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness con-
nector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect negative bat-
tery cable. Failure to do so may damage the ECM because D
battery voltage is applied to ECM even if ignition switch is
turned OFF.
• Before removing parts, turn ignition switch OFF and then dis- E
connect battery ground cable.
SEF289H
F
• Never disassemble ECM.
• If a battery cable is disconnected, the memory will return to the ECM value.
The ECM will now start to self-control at its initial value. Thus, engine operation can vary slightly in G
this case. However, this is not an indication of a malfunction. Never replace parts because of a slight
variation.
• If the battery is disconnected, the following emission-related diagnostic information will be lost
within 24 hours. H
- Freeze frame data I
- Test values
• When connecting ECM harness connector, fasten (B) it J
securely with a lever (1) as far as it will go as shown in the fig-
ure.
- ECM (2) K
- Loosen (A)
M
PBIB2947E
• When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or

from ECM, never damage pin terminals (bends or break). N
Check that there are not any bends or breaks on ECM pin ter-
minal, when connecting pin connectors.
• Securely connect ECM harness connectors. O
A poor connection can cause an extremely high (surge) volt-
age to develop in coil and condenser, thus resulting in dam-
age to ICs.
• Keep engine control system harness at least 10 cm (4 in) away P
from adjacent harness, to prevent engine control system mal-
functions due to receiving external noise, degraded operation
PBIB0090E
of ICs, etc.
• Keep engine control system parts and harness dry.

PRECAUTIONS
• Before replacing ECM, perform ECM Terminals and Reference
Value inspection and check that the ECM functions properly.
Refer to EC-363, "Reference Value".
• Handle mass air flow sensor carefully to avoid damage.
• Never clean mass air flow sensor with any type of detergent.
• Never disassemble electric throttle control actuator.
• Even a slight leakage in the air intake system can cause seri-
ous incidents.
• Never shock or jar the camshaft position sensor (PHASE),
crankshaft position sensor (POS).
MEF040D
• After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform DTC

Confirmation Procedure or Component Function Check.
The DTC should not be displayed in the DTC Confirmation
Procedure if the repair is completed. The Component Func-
tion Check should be a good result if the repair is completed.
SAT652J
• When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never allow

the two tester probes to contact.
Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and
damage the ECM power transistor.
SEF348N

PRECAUTIONS
• B1 indicates bank 1, B2 indicates bank 2 as shown in the fig-
ure. A
• Never operate fuel pump when there is no fuel in lines.
• Tighten fuel hose clamps to the specified torque.
EC
SEC893C
D
• Never depress accelerator pedal when starting.
• Immediately after starting, never rev up engine unnecessarily.
• Never rev up engine just prior to shutdown. E
G
SEF709Y
• When installing C.B. ham radio or a mobile phone, be sure to H

observe the following as it may adversely affect electronic
control systems depending on installation location.
- Keep the antenna as far as possible from the electronic con- I
trol units.
- Keep the antenna feeder line more than 20 cm (8 in) away
from the harness of electronic controls.
J
Never let them run parallel for a long distance.
- Adjust the antenna and feeder line so that the standing-wave
ratio can be kept smaller.
- Be sure to ground the radio to vehicle body. K
SEF708Y

PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [VQ35DE (TYPE 1)]
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools INFOID:0000000004703532
Tool number
Description
Tool name
EG17550000 Measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester
Break-out box
ZZA1194D

Y-cable adapter
PBIA9379J
KV10118400 Measuring fuel pressure

Fuel tube adapter
PBIB3043E
Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000004690691
Tool name
Description
(SPX-North America No.)
Quick connector release Removes fuel tube quick connectors in engine
(J-45488) room
(Available in SEC. 164 of PARTS CATALOG: Par
No. 16441 6N210)
PBIC0198E
Socket wrench Removes and installing engine coolant tempera-

ture sensor
S-NT705

PREPARATION
Tool name
Description
(SPX-North America No.) A
Oxygen sensor thread Reconditions the exhaust system threads before
cleaner installing a new oxygen sensor. Use with anti-
i.e.: (J-43897-18) seize lubricant shown below. EC
(J-43897-12) a: 18 mm diameter with pitch 1.5 mm for Zirco-
nia Oxygen Sensor
b: 12 mm diameter with pitch 1.25 mm for Tita-
nia Oxygen Sensor C
AEM488
Anti-seize lubricant i.e.: Lubricates oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool

when reconditioning exhaust system threads. D
(PermatexTM 133AR or
equivalent meeting MIL
specification MIL-A-907)
E
S-NT779
F

FUEL PRESSURE
< ON-VEHICLE MAINTENANCE > [VQ35DE (TYPE 1)]
ON-VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
FUEL PRESSURE
Inspection INFOID:0000000004690692
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE

With CONSULT-III
2. Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Start engine.
Without CONSULT-III
1. Remove fuel pump fuse (2) located in IPDM E/R (1).
2. Start engine.
3. After engine stalls, crank it 2 or 3 times to release all fuel pres-
sure.
5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system.
JMBIA1659ZZ
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK

CAUTION:
Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger.
NOTE:
• Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel
pressure cannot be completely released because Z51 models do not have fuel return system.
• Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that the quick
connector o-ring maintains seal ability.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero.
2. Remove fuel hose using Quick Connector Release (commercial service tool).
• Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose.
• Keep fuel hose connections clean.
3. Install Fuel tube adapter [SST (KV10118400)] (B) and Fuel pres-
sure gauge (A) as shown in figure.
• Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pres-
sure gauge.
• When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for
damage and abnormality.
4. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump) and check for fuel
leakage.
5. Start engine and check for fuel leakage.
6. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge kit.
• During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel JMBIA1392ZZ
connection every 3 minutes.
At idling : Approximately 350 kPa (3.50 bar, 3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi)

7. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step.
8. Check the following.

FUEL PRESSURE
• Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging
• Fuel filter for clogging A
• Fuel pump
• Fuel pressure regulator for clogging
9. If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. EC
If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part.
10. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel tube Adapter, release fuel pressure to zero.
C

< ON-VEHICLE REPAIR > [VQ35DE (TYPE 1)]
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR
1. Visually inspect EVAP vapor lines for improper attachment and for cracks, damage, loose connections,
chafing and deterioration.
2. Check EVAP canister as per the following:
a. Block port (B). Orally blow air through port (A).
Check that air flows freely through port (C).
b. Block port (A). Orally blow air through port (B).
PBIB0663E
3. Inspect fuel tank filler cap vacuum relief valve for clogging, stick-
ing, etc.
a. Wipe clean valve housing.
SEF989X
b. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.
Pressure: 15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.153 - 0.200 bar, 0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2, 2.22
- 2.90 psi)
–6.0 to –3.4 kPa (–0.06 to –0.034 bar, –0.061 to –0.035 kg/
Vacuum:
cm2, –0.87 to –0.49 psi)
c. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly.
SEF943S

SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [VQ35DE (TYPE 1)]
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) A

Idle Speed INFOID:0000000004690694
EC
Condition Specification
C
No load* (in P or N position) 600 ± 50 rpm
*: Under the following conditions
• A/C switch: OFF D
• Electric load: OFF (Lights, heater fan & rear window defogger)
• Steering wheel: Kept in straight-ahead position
Ignition Timing INFOID:0000000004690695

E
Condition Specification F
No load* (in P or N position) 12 ± 5°BTDC
• A/C switch: OFF G
H
Calculated Load Value INFOID:0000000004690696
I
Condition Specification (Using CONSULT-III or GST)
At idle 10 – 35 %
At 2,500 rpm 10 – 35 % J
Mass Air Flow Sensor INFOID:0000000004690697
K
Supply voltage Battery voltage (11 – 14 V)
Output voltage at idle (in N position) 0.9 – 1.2 V*
L
2.0 – 6.0 g·m/sec at idle*
Mass air flow (Using CONSULT-III or GST)
7.0 – 20.0 g·m/sec at 2,500 rpm*
*: Engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature and running under no load.
M

APPLICATION NOTICE
< FEATURES OF NEW MODEL > [VQ35DE (TYPE 2)]
FEATURES OF NEW MODEL

APPLICATION NOTICE
How to Check Vehicle Type INFOID:0000000004692748
Check the vehicle type to confirm the service information in EC section.
Vehicle type Service information

For Australia and New Zealand VQ35DE (TYPE1)
Except Australia and New Zealand VQ35DE (TYPE2)

BASIC INSPECTION A
Work Flow INFOID:0000000004689460
EC
OVERALL SEQUENCE
C
JMBIA1416GB
DETAILED FLOW

1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM

Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurred) using the “Diagnostic Work Sheet”. (Refer to EC-425, "Diagnostic Work
Sheet".)
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC
1. Check DTC.
2. Perform the following procedure if DTC is displayed.
- Record DTC and freeze frame data. (Print them out with CONSULT-III.)
- Erase DTC. (Refer to EC-516, "Diagnosis Description".)
- Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC and the symptom described by the customer.
(Symptom Table is useful. Refer to EC-772, "Symptom Table".)
3. Check related service bulletins for information.
Are any symptoms described and any DTCs detected?
Symptom is described, DTC is displayed>>GO TO 3.
Symptom is described, DTC is not displayed>>GO TO 4.
Symptom is not described, DTC is displayed>>GO TO 5.
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer (except MIL ON).
766, "Fail-safe".
>> GO TO 5.
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer.
766, "Fail-safe".
>> GO TO 6.
Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for the displayed DTC, and then check that DTC is detected
again.
If two or more DTCs are detected, refer to EC-768, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" and determine trouble
diagnosis order.
NOTE:
• Freeze frame data is useful if the DTC is not detected.
• Perform Component Function Check if DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE is not included on Service
Manual. This simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC cannot be detected during
this check.
If the result of Component Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC by DTC CONFIR-
MATION PROCEDURE.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> Check according to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident".
6.PERFORM BASIC INSPECTION
Perform EC-427, "BASIC INSPECTION : Special Repair Requirement".

YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 9. A
With CONSULT-III EC
Check that “MAS A/F SE-B1”, “B/FUEL SCHDL”, “A/F ALPHA-B1” and “A/F ALPHA-B2” are within the SP
value using “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Refer to EC-529, "Component Function
Check".
Are they within the SP value? C
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> GO TO 8.
D
8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE
Detect malfunctioning part according to EC-530, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is a malfunctioning part detected? E
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> GO TO 9.
9.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM TABLE F
Detect malfunctioning system according to EC-772, "Symptom Table" based on the confirmed symptom in
step 4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptoms.
G
>> GO TO 10.
10.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE H
Inspect according to Diagnostic Procedure of the system.
NOTE:
The Diagnostic Procedure in EC section described based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit inspection I
is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. For details, refer to “Circuit Inspection” in GI-
38, "Circuit Inspection".
Is a malfunctioning part detected? J
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> Monitor input data from related sensors or check voltage of related ECM terminals using CON-
SULT-III. Refer to EC-737, "Reference Value". K
11.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART
1. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
2. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnostic Procedure again after repair and replace- L
ment.
3. Check DTC. If DTC is displayed, erase it, refer to EC-516, "Diagnosis Description".
M
>> GO TO 12.
12.FINAL CHECK
N
When DTC was detected in step 2, perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE or Overall Function Check
again, and then check that the malfunction have been completely repaired.
When symptom was described from the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and check that
the symptom is not detected. O
Is DTC detected and does symptom remain?
YES-1 >> DTC is detected: GO TO 10.
YES-2 >> Symptom remains: GO TO 6. P
NO >> Before returning the vehicle to the customer, make sure to always erase unnecessary DTC in
ECM.(EC-516, "Diagnosis Description".)
Diagnostic Work Sheet INFOID:0000000004689461
DESCRIPTION

There are many operating conditions that lead to the malfunction of
engine components. A good grasp of such conditions can make trou-
bleshooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about symptoms. It is
important to fully understand the symptoms or conditions for a cus-
tomer complaint.
Utilize a diagnostic worksheet like the WORKSHEET SAMPLE
below in order to organize all the information for troubleshooting.
Some conditions may cause the MIL to illuminate or blink, and DTC
to be detected. Examples:
• Vehicle ran out of fuel, which caused the engine to misfire.
SEF907L
• Fuel filler cap was left off or incorrectly screwed on, allowing fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere.
WORKSHEET SAMPLE
MTBL0017

A
BASIC INSPECTION
BASIC INSPECTION : Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000004689462
EC
1.INSPECTION START
1. Check service records for any recent repairs that may indicate a related malfunction, or a current need for
scheduled maintenance. C
2. Open engine hood and check the following:
- Harness connectors for improper connections
- Wiring harness for improper connections, pinches and cut D
- Vacuum hoses for splits, kinks and improper connections
- Hoses and ducts for leakage
- Air cleaner clogging E
- Gasket
3. Check that electrical or mechanical loads are not applied.
- Head lamp switch is OFF.
- Air conditioner switch is OFF. F
- Rear window defogger switch is OFF.
SEF983U
- Steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position, etc.
G
4. Start engine and warm it up until engine coolant temperature
indicator points to the middle of gauge.
Check that engine stays below 1,000 rpm. H
J
SEF976U
5. Run engine at approximately 2,000 rpm for approximately 2 min- K

utes under no load.
6. Check that no DTC is displayed with CONSULT-III or ECM
[Diagnostic Test Mode II (self-diagnostic results)]. L
Are any DTCs detected?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3. M
SEF977U N
2.REPAIR OR REPLACE
Repair or replace components as necessary according to corresponding Diagnostic Procedure. O
>> GO TO 3
3.CHECK IDLE SPEED P
1. Run engine at approximately 2,000 rpm for approximately 2 minutes under no load.

2. Rev engine between 2,000 and 3,000 rpm 2 or 3 times under no
load, then run engine at idle speed for approximately 1 minute.
For procedure, refer to EC-430, "IDLE SPEED : Special Repair
Requirement".
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> GO TO 4.
PBIA8513J

1. Stop engine.
ment".
>> GO TO 5.
Perform EC-432, "THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement".
>> GO TO 6.
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully?
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK IDLE SPEED AGAIN
For procedure, refer to EC-430, "IDLE SPEED : Special Repair Requirement".
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> GO TO 8.
Check the Following.
YES >> GO TO 9.
SEC-12, "ECM RECOMMUNICATING FUNCTION : Description".
>> GO TO 4.

For specification, refer to EC-786, "Ignition Timing". A
YES >> GO TO 19.
NO >> GO TO 11. EC
11. PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
1. Stop engine.
C
ment".
D
>> GO TO 12.
Perform EC-432, "THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement". E
>> GO TO 13.
F
Is Idle Air Volume Learning carried out successfully? G
YES >> GO TO 14.
14.CHECK IDLE SPEED AGAIN H

For procedure, refer to EC-430, "IDLE SPEED : Special Repair Requirement". I
YES >> GO TO 15. J
NO >> GO TO 17.
15.CHECK IGNITION TIMING AGAIN K
L
For specification, refer to EC-786, "Ignition Timing".
YES >> GO TO 19. M
NO >> GO TO 16.
Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-54, "Removal and Installation". N
YES >> GO TO 17.
NO >> Repair the timing chain installation.Then GO TO 4. O
Check the following. P
YES >> GO TO 18.
NO >> Repair the timing chain installation.Then GO TO 4.
EC-430, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement".
>> GO TO 4.
19.INSPECTION END
It ECM is replaced during this Basic Inspection procedure, perform EC-430, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN
REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement".
>> INSPECTION END

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Description
INFOID:0000000004689463
When replacing ECM, the following procedure must be performed.

ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Re-
1.PERFORM INITIALIZATION OF NVIS (NATS) SYSTEM AND REGISTRATION OF ALL NVIS (NATS) IGNI-
TION KEY IDS
Refer to SEC-12, "ECM RECOMMUNICATING FUNCTION : Special Repair Requirement".
>> GO TO 2.
Refer to EC-431, "ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Require-
ment".
>> GO TO 3.
>> GO TO 4.
>> END
IDLE SPEED
IDLE SPEED : Description INFOID:0000000004689465
This describes how to check the idle speed. For the actual procedure, follow the instructions in “BASIC
INSPECTION”.
IDLE SPEED : Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000004689466
1.CHECK IDLE SPEED

With CONSULT-III
Check idle speed in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
Without CONSULT-III

Check idle speed by installing the pulse type tachometer clamp on the loop wire or suitable high-tension wire
which installed between No.1 ignition coil and No.1 Spark plug. A
>> INSPECTION END

IGNITION TIMING EC
IGNITION TIMING : Description INFOID:0000000004689467
C
This describes how to check the ignition timing. For the actual procedure, follow the instructions in “BASIC
INSPECTION”.
IGNITION TIMING : Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000004689468 D

1. Attach timing light to loop wire as shown. E
- Timing light (A)
- : Vehicle front
F
JMBIA1388ZZ
H
2. Check ignition timing.

I
>> INSPECTION END
J
JMBIA1135GB
L
ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING
ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING : Description INFOID:0000000004689469
M
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is a function of ECM to learn the fully released position of the
accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be performed each
time the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is disconnected.
N
ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Re-
O
1.START
>> END
THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING

THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING : Description INFOID:0000000004689471
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is a function of ECM to learn the fully closed position of the throttle
valve by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each time harness connec-
tor of electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected.
THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement
INFOID:0000000004689472
1.START
Check that throttle valve moves during the above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound.
>> END
IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING
IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING : Description INFOID:0000000004689473
Idle Air Volume Learning is a function of ECM to learn the idle air volume that keeps engine idle speed within
the specific range. It must be performed under the following conditions:
• Each time the electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.
• Idle speed or ignition timing is out of the specification.
IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000004689474
1.PRECONDITIONING
Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a moment.
• Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle)
• Selector lever position: P or N
• Electric load switch: OFF
(Air conditioner, head lamp, rear window defogger)
- For vehicle equipped with daytime light systems, perform one of the following procedures before
starting engine not to illuminate headlamps.
• Apply parking brake
• Set lighting switch to the 1st position
• Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)
• Vehicle speed: Stopped
- With CONSULT-III: Drive vehicle until “ATF TEMP SEN” in “DATA MONITOR” mode of “CVT” system indi-
cates less than 0.9 V.
- Without CONSULT-III: Drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III
ment".
4. Select “IDLE AIR VOL LEARN” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
5. Touch “START” and wait 20 seconds.
Is “CMPLT” displayed on CONSULT-III screen?
YES >> GO TO 4.

NO >> GO TO 5.
3.PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING A
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE: EC
a malfunction.
1. Perform EC-431, "ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Require- C
ment".
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. D
- Fully depress the accelerator pedal. E
7. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal for approx. 20 seconds until the MIL stops blinking
and turns ON. F
8. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the MIL turns ON.
10. Wait 20 seconds.
G
PBIB0665E
J
>> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK IDLE SPEED AND IGNITION TIMING K
Rev up the engine 2 or 3 times and check that idle speed and ignition timing are within the specifications.
For procedure, refer to EC-430, "IDLE SPEED : Special Repair Requirement" and EC-431, "IGNITION TIM-
ING : Special Repair Requirement". L
For specifications, refer to EC-786, "Idle Speed" and EC-786, "Ignition Timing".
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART-I
Check the following N
• Check that throttle valve is fully closed.
• Check PCV valve operation.
• Check that downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. O
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part. P
6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART-II
Engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the cause of
the incident.
It is useful to perform “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE”. Refer to EC-529, "Description".
If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the incident and
perform Idle Air Volume Learning again:

• Engine stalls.
• Incorrect idle.
>> INSPECTION END

MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE CLEAR
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE CLEAR : Description INFOID:0000000004689475
This describes show to erase the mixture ratio self-learning value. For the actual procedure, follow the instruc-
tions in “Diagnosis Procedure”.
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE CLEAR : Special Repair Requirement
INFOID:0000000004689476
1.START
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “SELF-LEARNING CONT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Clear mixture ratio self-learning value by touching “CLEAR”.
Without CONSULT-III
4. Restart engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds.
5. Stop engine and reconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector.
6. Check DTC.Make sure DTC P0102 is detected.
7. Erase the DTC P0102.
>> END

FUNCTION DIAGNOSIS A
EC
JMBIA2095GB

ECM performs various controls such as fuel injection control and ignition timing control.
JMBIA1824ZZ
temperature sensor)
solenoid valve

EC
JMBIA1374ZZ
D
temperature sensor)
: Vehicle front
E
H
JMBIA1110ZZ
J
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1377ZZ
N
(bank 2) (bank 1)
: Vehicle front
O

JMBIA1112ZZ
nector nector
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1378ZZ

: Vehicle front
JMBIA1689ZZ

: Vehicle front

EC
JMBIA1832GB
JMBIA1116ZZ I
nector nector
J
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1380ZZ N

: Vehicle front

JMBIA2057ZZ
solenoid valve
JMBIA1763ZZ
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1825ZZ

: Vehicle front
JMBIA1384ZZ

EC
D
JMBIA1120ZZ

JMBIA1385ZZ
I
harness connector
: Vehicle front J
K
Component Reference
L
A/F sensor 1 heater EC-690, "Description"
ASCD brake switch EC-634, "Description" M
Battery current sensor EC-619, "Description"
N
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) EC-587, "Description" O
Electronic controlled engine mount EC-700, "Description"
Engine coolant temperature sensor EC-554, "Description" P
Engine oil temperature sensor EC-578, "Description"
Fuel pump EC-709, "Description"

Component Reference
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater EC-718, "Description"
Ignition coil with power transistor EC-723, "Description"
PCV valve EC-729, "Description"
Power valves 1 and 2 EC-359, "Description"
Throttle control motor EC-662, "Description"
Throttle control motor relay EC-656, "Description"

A
EC
JMBIA1833GB
I
J

K
Mass air flow sensor Amount of intake air L
Intake air temperature sensor Intake air temperature
M
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position Fuel injection N
TCM Gear position & mixture ratio Fuel injector
control
O
Knock sensor Engine knocking condition
Heated oxygen sensor 2*1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas P

ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) VDC/TCS operation command*2
BCM Air conditioner operation*2
*1: This sensor is not used to control the engine system under normal conditions.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The amount of fuel injected from the fuel injector is determined by the ECM. The ECM controls the length of
time the valve remains open (injection pulse duration). The amount of fuel injected is a program value in the
ECM memory. The program value is preset by engine operating conditions. These conditions are determined
by input signals (for engine speed and intake air) from the crankshaft position sensor (POS), camshaft position
sensor (PHASE) and the mass air flow sensor.
VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION
In addition, the amount of fuel injected is compensated to improve engine performance under various operat-
ing conditions as listed below.
<Fuel increase>
• During warm-up
• When starting the engine
• Hot-engine operation
• When selector lever position is changed from N to D
• High-load, high-speed operation
<Fuel decrease>
• During deceleration
• During high engine speed operation
MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP CONTROL)
PBIB3020E
The mixture ratio feedback system provides the best air-fuel mixture ratio for driveability and emission control.
The three way catalyst (manifold) can better reduce CO, HC and NOx emissions. This system uses A/F sen-
sor 1 in the exhaust manifold to monitor whether the engine operation is rich or lean. The ECM adjusts the
injection pulse width according to the sensor voltage signal. For more information about A/F sensor 1, refer to
EC-560, "Description". This maintains the mixture ratio within the range of stoichiometric (ideal air-fuel mix-
ture).
This stage is referred to as the closed loop control condition.
Heated oxygen sensor 2 is located downstream of the three way catalyst (manifold). Even if the switching
characteristics of A/F sensor 1 shift, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric by the signal from heated
oxygen sensor 2.
• Open Loop Control
The open loop system condition refers to when the ECM detects any of the following conditions. Feedback
control stops in order to maintain stabilized fuel combustion.
- Deceleration and acceleration
- High-load, high-speed operation
- Malfunction of A/F sensor 1 or its circuit
- Insufficient activation of A/F sensor 1 at low engine coolant temperature
- High engine coolant temperature
- During warm-up
- After shifting from N to D
- When starting the engine
MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL
The mixture ratio feedback control system monitors the mixture ratio signal transmitted from A/F sensor 1.
This feedback signal is then sent to the ECM. The ECM controls the basic mixture ratio as close to the theoret-
ical mixture ratio as possible. However, the basic mixture ratio is not necessarily controlled as originally

designed. Both manufacturing differences (i.e., mass air flow sensor hot wire) and characteristic changes dur-
ing operation (i.e., fuel injector clogging) directly affect mixture ratio. A
Accordingly, the difference between the basic and theoretical mixture ratios is monitored in this system. This is
then computed in terms of “injection pulse duration” to automatically compensate for the difference between
the two ratios.
EC
“Fuel trim” refers to the feedback compensation value compared against the basic injection duration. Fuel trim
includes “short-term fuel trim” and “long-term fuel trim”.
“Short-term fuel trim” is the short-term fuel compensation used to maintain the mixture ratio at its theoretical
value. The signal from A/F sensor 1 indicates whether the mixture ratio is RICH or LEAN compared to the the- C
oretical value. The signal then triggers a reduction in fuel volume if the mixture ratio is rich, and an increase in
fuel volume if it is lean.
“Long-term fuel trim” is overall fuel compensation carried out over time to compensate for continual deviation D
of the “short-term fuel trim” from the central value. Continual deviation will occur due to individual engine differ-
ences, wear over time and changes in the usage environment.
FUEL INJECTION TIMING E
SEF179U
H
Two types of systems are used.
• Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected into each cylinder during each engine cycle according to the ignition order. This system is
used when the engine is running. I
• Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System
Fuel is injected simultaneously into all six cylinders twice each engine cycle. In other words, pulse signals of
the same width are simultaneously transmitted from the ECM. J
The six injectors will then receive the signals 2 times for each engine cycle.
This system is used when the engine is being started and/or if the fail-safe system (CPU) is operating.
FUEL SHUT-OFF K
Fuel to each cylinder is cut off during deceleration, operation of the engine at excessively high speeds or oper-
ation of the vehicle at excessively high speeds.
L

JMBIA1824ZZ
temperature sensor)
solenoid valve

EC
JMBIA1374ZZ
D
temperature sensor)
: Vehicle front
E
H
JMBIA1110ZZ
J
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1377ZZ
N
(bank 2) (bank 1)
: Vehicle front
O

JMBIA1112ZZ
nector nector
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1378ZZ

: Vehicle front
JMBIA1689ZZ

: Vehicle front

EC
JMBIA1832GB
JMBIA1116ZZ I
nector nector
J
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1380ZZ N

: Vehicle front

JMBIA2057ZZ
solenoid valve
JMBIA1763ZZ
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1825ZZ

: Vehicle front
JMBIA1384ZZ

EC
D
JMBIA1120ZZ

JMBIA1385ZZ
I
harness connector
: Vehicle front J
K
Component Reference
L
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) EC-587, "Description" M
N
Knock sensor EC-584, "Description" O
TCM EC-606, "Description" P

JMBIA1834GB

Ignition timing Ignition coil
Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position control (with power transistor)
TCM Gear position
Knock sensor Engine knocking
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Ignition order: 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6
The ignition timing is controlled by the ECM to maintain the best air-fuel ratio for every running condition of the
engine. The ignition timing data is stored in the ECM.
The ECM receives information such as the injection pulse width and camshaft position sensor (PHASE) sig-
nal. Computing this information, ignition signals are transmitted to the power transistor.
During the following conditions, the ignition timing is revised by the ECM according to the other data stored in
the ECM.
• At starting
• During warm-up
• At idle
• At low battery voltage
The knock sensor retard system is designed only for emergencies. The basic ignition timing is programmed
within the anti-knocking zone, if recommended fuel is used under dry conditions. The retard system does not

operate under normal driving conditions. If engine knocking occurs, the knock sensor monitors the condition.
The signal is transmitted to the ECM. The ECM retards the ignition timing to eliminate the knocking condition. A
EC
L
JMBIA1824ZZ
1. Intake valve timing control solenoid 2. Intake valve timing control solenoid 3. Electronic controlled engine mount M
7. Ignition coil (with power transistor) 8. Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) 9. Crankshaft position sensor (POS) N
13. Refrigerant pressure sensor 14. Battery current sensor 15. Cooling fan relay-2 O
temperature sensor)
solenoid valve P

JMBIA1374ZZ
temperature sensor)
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1110ZZ
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1377ZZ
(bank 2) (bank 1)
: Vehicle front

EC
JMBIA1112ZZ
D
nector nector
E
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1378ZZ
I
: Vehicle front
J
JMBIA1689ZZ
M

: Vehicle front

JMBIA1832GB
JMBIA1116ZZ
nector nector
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1380ZZ

: Vehicle front

EC
JMBIA2057ZZ
D
solenoid valve E
JMBIA1763ZZ
: Vehicle front J
JMBIA1825ZZ
N
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1384ZZ

JMBIA1120ZZ

JMBIA1385ZZ
harness connector
: Vehicle front
Component Reference
Ignition signal EC-723, "Description"

A
EC
JMBIA1835GB
I
J

K
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature L

Accelerator pedal position sensor Accelerator pedal position IPDM E/R
↓
Battery Battery voltage*2 Air conditioner
Air conditioner relay
cut control M
Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure ↓
Compressor
Combination meter Vehicle speed*1 N
BCM 1
Air conditioner ON signal*
O
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This system improves engine operation when the air conditioner is used. P
Under the following conditions, the air conditioner is turned OFF.
• When the accelerator pedal is fully depressed.
• When cranking the engine.
• At high engine speeds.
• When the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high.
• When operating power steering during low engine speed or low vehicle speed.
• When engine speed is excessively low.
• When refrigerant pressure is excessively low or high.

JMBIA1824ZZ
temperature sensor)
solenoid valve

EC
JMBIA1374ZZ
D
temperature sensor)
: Vehicle front
E
H
JMBIA1110ZZ
J
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1377ZZ
N
(bank 2) (bank 1)
: Vehicle front
O

JMBIA1112ZZ
nector nector
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1378ZZ

: Vehicle front
JMBIA1689ZZ

: Vehicle front

EC
JMBIA1832GB
JMBIA1116ZZ I
nector nector
J
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1380ZZ N

: Vehicle front

JMBIA2057ZZ
solenoid valve
JMBIA1763ZZ
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1825ZZ

: Vehicle front
JMBIA1384ZZ

EC
D
JMBIA1120ZZ

JMBIA1385ZZ
I
harness connector
: Vehicle front J
K
Component Reference
L
N

JMBIA1826GB

ASCD brake switch Brake pedal operation
Stop lamp switch Brake pedal operation
ASCD steering switch ASCD steering switch operation ASCD vehicle speed Electric throttle control
Gear position control actuator
TCM
Powertrain revolution*
BASIC ASCD SYSTEM

Refer to Owner's Manual for ASCD operating instructions.
Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) allows a driver to keep vehicle at predetermined constant speed
without depressing accelerator pedal. Driver can set vehicle speed in advance between approximately 40 km/
h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89 MPH).
ECM controls throttle angle of electric throttle control actuator to regulate engine speed.
Operation status of ASCD is indicated by CRUISE lamp on combination meter. If any malfunction occurs in the
ASCD system, it automatically deactivates control.
NOTE:
Always drive vehicle in a safe manner according to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws.
SET OPERATION
Press MAIN switch. (The CRUISE lamp on combination meter illuminates.)
When vehicle speed reaches a desired speed between approximately 40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h (89
MPH), press SET/COAST switch.
ACCELERATE OPERATION
If the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch is pressed during cruise control driving, increase the vehicle speed until
the switch is released or vehicle speed reaches maximum speed controlled by the system.
And then ASCD will maintain the new set speed.
CANCEL OPERATION
When any of following conditions exist, cruise operation will be canceled.
• CANCEL switch is pressed
• More than 2 switches on ASCD steering switch are pressed at the same time (Set speed will be cleared)
• Brake pedal is depressed

• Selector lever position is changed to N, P or R
• Vehicle speed decreased to 13 km/h (8 MPH) lower than the set speed A
• TCS system is operated
• CVT control system has a malfunction. Refer to EC-290, "Description".
• Engine coolant temperature is slightly higher than the normal operating temperature
EC
When the ECM detects any of the following conditions, the ECM will cancel the cruise operation and inform
the driver by blinking indicator lamp.
• Malfunction for some self-diagnoses regarding ASCD control: CRUISE will blink quickly.
If MAIN switch is turned to OFF while ASCD is activated, all of ASCD operations will be canceled and vehicle C
speed memory will be erased.
COAST OPERATION
When the SET/COAST switch is pressed during cruise control driving, decrease vehicle set speed until the D
switch is released. And then ASCD will maintain the new set speed.
RESUME OPERATION
E
When the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch is pressed after canceling operation other than pressing the MAIN
switch, vehicle speed will return to last set speed. To resume vehicle set speed, vehicle condition must meet
• Brake pedal is released F
• Selector lever position is other than P and N
• Vehicle speed is greater than 40 km/h (25 MPH) and less than 144 km/h (89 MPH)
G
JMBIA1824ZZ

temperature sensor)
solenoid valve
JMBIA1374ZZ
temperature sensor)
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1110ZZ
: Vehicle front

EC
JMBIA1377ZZ
D
(bank 2) (bank 1)
: Vehicle front
E
H
JMBIA1112ZZ
1. Cooling fan motor-1 2. Cooling fan motor-1 harness con- 3. Cooling fan motor-2 harness con- I
nector nector
: Vehicle front
J
M
JMBIA1378ZZ
1. Refrigerant pressure sensor 2. Battery current sensor N

: Vehicle front
JMBIA1689ZZ


: Vehicle front
JMBIA1832GB
JMBIA1116ZZ
nector nector
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1380ZZ

: Vehicle front

EC
JMBIA2057ZZ
D
solenoid valve E
JMBIA1763ZZ
: Vehicle front J
JMBIA1825ZZ
N
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1384ZZ

JMBIA1120ZZ

JMBIA1385ZZ
harness connector
: Vehicle front
Component Reference
ASCD brake switch EC-634, "Description"
ASCD indicator EC-686, "Description"

CAN COMMUNICATION
CAN COMMUNICATION
A
Refer to LAN-25, "CAN System Specification Chart", about CAN communication for detail.
D

COOLING FAN CONTROL
COOLING FAN CONTROL
JMBIA1857GB

Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature IPDM E/R

↓
Refrigerant pressure sensor Refrigerant pressure Cooling fan
Cooling fan relay
control
Battery Battery voltage*1 ↓
Cooling fan motor
BCM Air conditioner ON signal*2
*1: The ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage.
*2: This signal is sent to ECM via the CAN communication line.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

COOLING FAN CONTROL
Cooling Fan Operation
A
EC
H
JMBIA0179GB
Cooling Fan Relay Operation

The ECM controls cooling fan relays in the IPDM E/R via the CAN communication line. I
Cooling fan relay
Cooling fan speed
1 2 3 J
Stop (OFF) OFF OFF OFF
Low (LOW) ON OFF OFF
Middle (MID) OFF ON OFF K
High (HI) OFF ON ON

COOLING FAN CONTROL
JMBIA1824ZZ
temperature sensor)
solenoid valve

COOLING FAN CONTROL
EC
JMBIA1374ZZ
D
temperature sensor)
: Vehicle front
E
H
JMBIA1110ZZ
J
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1377ZZ
N
(bank 2) (bank 1)
: Vehicle front
O

COOLING FAN CONTROL
JMBIA1112ZZ
nector nector
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1378ZZ

: Vehicle front
JMBIA1689ZZ

: Vehicle front

COOLING FAN CONTROL
EC
JMBIA1832GB
JMBIA1116ZZ I
nector nector
J
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1380ZZ N

: Vehicle front

COOLING FAN CONTROL
JMBIA2057ZZ
solenoid valve
JMBIA1763ZZ
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1825ZZ

: Vehicle front
JMBIA1384ZZ

COOLING FAN CONTROL
EC
D
JMBIA1120ZZ

JMBIA1385ZZ
I
harness connector
: Vehicle front J
K
Component Reference
L

JMBIA1827GB

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Electronic controlled en-
Engine speed Engine mount
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) gine mount control solenoid
control
Combination meter Vehicle speed* valve
*: This signal is sent to the ECM via the CAN communication line.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The ECM controls the engine mount operation corresponding to the engine speed. The control system has a
2-step control [Soft/Hard]
Vehicle condition Engine mount control

Engine speed: Below 950 rpm Soft
Engine speed: Above 950 rpm Hard
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT LINE DRAWING

EC
L
JMBIA2161ZZ
1. Electronic controlled engine mount 2. Intake manifold collector M

: From next figure
N

JMBIA2072ZZ
1. Front electronic controlled engine mount 2. Rear electronic controlled engine mount
: To previous figure
NOTE:
Do not use soapy water or any type of solvent while installing vacuum hose.

EC
JMBIA1824ZZ
L
N
temperature sensor)
O
solenoid valve

JMBIA1374ZZ
temperature sensor)
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1110ZZ
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1377ZZ
(bank 2) (bank 1)
: Vehicle front

EC
JMBIA1112ZZ
D
nector nector
E
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1378ZZ
I
: Vehicle front
J
JMBIA1689ZZ
M

: Vehicle front

JMBIA1832GB
JMBIA1116ZZ
nector nector
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1380ZZ

: Vehicle front

EC
JMBIA2057ZZ
D
solenoid valve E
JMBIA1763ZZ
: Vehicle front J
JMBIA1825ZZ
N
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1384ZZ

JMBIA1120ZZ

JMBIA1385ZZ
harness connector
: Vehicle front
Component Reference
Electronic controlled engine mount control solenoid valve EC-700, "Description"

A
EC
JMBIA1828GB
G
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART H

Crankshaft position sensor (POS) I
Engine speed*1
J
Density of oxygen in exhaust gas EVAP canister EVAP canister purge vol-
(Mixture ratio feedback signal) purge flow control ume control solenoid valve K
L
*1: ECM determines the start signal status by the signals of engine speed and battery voltage. M

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
JMBIA1464GB
The evaporative emission system is used to reduce hydrocarbons emitted into the atmosphere from the fuel
system. This reduction of hydrocarbons is accomplished by activated charcoals in the EVAP canister.
The fuel vapor in the sealed fuel tank is led into the EVAP canister which contains activated carbon and the
vapor is stored there when the engine is not operating or when refueling to the fuel tank.
The vapor in the EVAP canister is purged by the air through the purge line to the intake manifold when the
engine is operating. EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is controlled by ECM. When the
engine operates, the flow rate of vapor controlled by EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is
proportionally regulated as the air flow increases.
EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve also shuts off the vapor purge line during decelerating and
idling.
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING

EC
JMBIA1393ZZ
K
1. Intake manifold 2. EVAP canister purge volume control

solenoid valve L
A. From EVAP canister
: Vehicle front
M

JMBIA1829ZZ
1. EVAP canister A. To previous figure B. To/From B in this figure

: Vehicle front
NOTE:
Do not use soapy water or any type of solvent while installing vacuum hose or purge hoses.

EC
JMBIA1824ZZ
L
N
temperature sensor)
O
solenoid valve

JMBIA1374ZZ
temperature sensor)
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1110ZZ
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1377ZZ
(bank 2) (bank 1)
: Vehicle front

EC
JMBIA1112ZZ
D
nector nector
E
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1378ZZ
I
: Vehicle front
J
JMBIA1689ZZ
M

: Vehicle front

JMBIA1832GB
JMBIA1116ZZ
nector nector
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1380ZZ

: Vehicle front

EC
JMBIA2057ZZ
D
solenoid valve E
JMBIA1763ZZ
: Vehicle front J
JMBIA1825ZZ
N
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1384ZZ

JMBIA1120ZZ

JMBIA1385ZZ
harness connector
: Vehicle front
Component Reference

A
EC
D
JMBIA1830GB

E

F
Engine speed and piston position G
Intake valve Intake valve timing control
Engine oil temperature sensor Engine oil temperature
timing control solenoid valve
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature H
I
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
N
JMBIA0060GB
This mechanism hydraulically controls cam phases continuously with the fixed operating angle of the intake
valve. O
The ECM receives signals such as crankshaft position, camshaft position, engine speed, and engine coolant
temperature. Then, the ECM sends ON/OFF pulse duty signals to the intake valve timing (IVT) control sole-
noid valve depending on driving status. This makes it possible to control the shut/open timing of the intake P
valve to increase engine torque in low/mid speed range and output in high-speed range.

JMBIA1824ZZ
temperature sensor)
solenoid valve

EC
JMBIA1374ZZ
D
temperature sensor)
: Vehicle front
E
H
JMBIA1110ZZ
J
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1377ZZ
N
(bank 2) (bank 1)
: Vehicle front
O

JMBIA1112ZZ
nector nector
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1378ZZ

: Vehicle front
JMBIA1689ZZ

: Vehicle front

EC
JMBIA1832GB
JMBIA1116ZZ I
nector nector
J
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1380ZZ N

: Vehicle front

JMBIA2057ZZ
solenoid valve
JMBIA1763ZZ
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1825ZZ

: Vehicle front
JMBIA1384ZZ

EC
D
JMBIA1120ZZ

JMBIA1385ZZ
I
harness connector
: Vehicle front J
K
Component Reference
L
Engine oil temperature sensor EC-578, "Description" M
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve EC-541, "DTC Logic"

JMBIA1831GB

Engine speed*
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature VIAS control solenoid valve 1
VIAS control
Battery Battery voltage*
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
JMBIA0181GB
In the medium speed range, the ECM sends the ON signal to the VIAS control solenoid valve. This signal
introduces the intake manifold vacuum into the power valve actuator and therefore closes the power valve.

Under this condition, the pressure waves of the exhaust stroke do not disturb the pressure waves of the intake
stroke of each opposite bank. Therefore, charging efficiency is increased together with the effect of the long A
intake passage.
However, in the high speed range, the ECM sends the OFF signal to the VIAS control solenoid valve and the
power valve is opened. Under this condition, the pressure waves of intake stroke are resonant with those of
EC
each opposite bank exhaust stroke. Therefore, charging efficiency is also increased.
In addition, both valves 1 and 2 are opened or closed in other ranges mentioned above. Thus maximum
charging efficiency is obtained for the various driving conditions.
C
VACUUM HOSE DRAWING
O
JMBIA0172ZZ
1. Power valve actuator 1 2. VIAS control solenoid valve 1 3. VIAS control solenoid valve 2
P
4. Power valve actuator 2 5. Intake manifold collector

JMBIA1824ZZ
temperature sensor)
solenoid valve

EC
JMBIA1374ZZ
D
temperature sensor)
: Vehicle front
E
H
JMBIA1110ZZ
J
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1377ZZ
N
(bank 2) (bank 1)
: Vehicle front
O

JMBIA1112ZZ
nector nector
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1378ZZ

: Vehicle front
JMBIA1689ZZ

: Vehicle front

EC
JMBIA1832GB
JMBIA1116ZZ I
nector nector
J
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1380ZZ N

: Vehicle front

JMBIA2057ZZ
solenoid valve
JMBIA1763ZZ
: Vehicle front
JMBIA1825ZZ

: Vehicle front
JMBIA1384ZZ

EC
D
JMBIA1120ZZ

JMBIA1385ZZ
I
harness connector
: Vehicle front J
K
Component Reference
L
Power valve 1 and 2 EC-733, "Description"
N
VIAS control solenoid valve 2 EC-650, "Description" O

DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (ECM)
Diagnosis Description INFOID:0000000004689518
INTRODUCTION
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system, which detects malfunctions related to engine sensors or actua-
tors. The ECM also records various emission-related diagnostic information including:
Emission-related diagnostic information

Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Freeze Frame data
1st Trip Diagnostic Trouble Code (1st Trip DTC)
1st Trip Freeze Frame data
The above information can be checked using procedures listed in the table below.
1st trip Freeze Frame

DTC 1st trip DTC Freeze Frame data
data
CONSULT-III × × × ×
ECM × ×* — —
*: When DTC and 1st trip DTC simultaneously appear on the display, they cannot be clearly distinguished from each other.
The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on the instrument panel illuminates when the same malfunction is
detected in two consecutive trips (Two trip detection logic), or when the ECM enters fail-safe mode. (Refer to
EC-766, "Fail-safe".)
TWO TRIP DETECTION LOGIC
When a malfunction is detected for the first time, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip Freeze Frame data are stored in the
ECM memory. The MIL will not illuminate at this stage. <1st trip>
If the same malfunction is detected again during the next drive, the DTC and Freeze Frame data are stored in
the ECM memory, and the MIL illuminates. The MIL illuminates at the same time when the DTC is stored.
<2nd trip> The “trip” in the “Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is per-
formed during vehicle operation.
DTC AND FREEZE FRAME DATA
DTC and 1st Trip DTC
The 1st trip DTC (whose number is the same as the DTC number) is displayed for the latest self-diagnostic
result obtained. If the ECM memory was cleared previously, and the 1st trip DTC did not recur, the 1st trip DTC
will not be displayed.
If a malfunction is detected during the 1st trip, the 1st trip DTC is saved in the ECM memory. The MIL will not
illuminate (two trip detection logic). If the same malfunction is not detected in the 2nd trip (meeting the required
driving pattern), the 1st trip DTC is cleared from the ECM memory. If the same malfunction is detected in the
2nd trip, both the 1st trip DTC and DTC are saved in the ECM memory and the MIL illuminates. In other words,
the DTC is stored in the ECM memory and the MIL illuminates when the same malfunction occurs in two con-
secutive trips. If a 1st trip DTC is stored and a non-diagnostic operation is performed between the 1st and 2nd
trips, only the 1st trip DTC will continue to be stored. For malfunctions that blink or illuminate the MIL during
the 1st trip, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are stored in the ECM memory.
Procedures for clearing the DTC and the 1st trip DTC from the ECM memory are described in “How to Erase
DTC and 1st Trip DTC”.
For malfunctions in which 1st trip DTCs are displayed, refer to EC-769, "DTC Index". These items are
required by legal regulations to continuously monitor the system/component. In addition, the items monitored
non-continuously are also displayed on CONSULT-III.
1st trip DTC is specified in Service $07 of ISO 15031-5. 1st trip DTC detection occurs without illuminating the
MIL and therefore does not warn the driver of a malfunction. However, 1st trip DTC detection will not prevent
the vehicle from being tested, for example during Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) tests.
When a 1st trip DTC is detected, check, print out or write down and erase (1st trip) DTC and Freeze Frame
data as specified in Work Flow procedure Step 2, refer to EC-423, "Work Flow". Then perform DTC Confirma-
tion Procedure or Component Function Check to try to duplicate the malfunction. If the malfunction is dupli-
cated, the item requires repair.

The ECM records the driving conditions such as fuel system status, calculated load value, engine coolant tem- A
perature, short-term fuel trim, long-term fuel trim, engine speed, vehicle speed, absolute throttle position, base
fuel schedule and intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data.
EC
The data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT-III. The
1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT-III screen.
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data) can be stored in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no priority C
for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. D
Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM mem-
ory is erased. Procedures for clearing the ECM memory are described in “HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-
RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION”.
E
How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC
With CONSULT-III
CONSULT-III displays the DTC in “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” mode Examples: P0117, P0340, P1217, etc.(CON-
SULT-III also displays the malfunctioning component or system.) F
Time data indicates how many times the vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC.
If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be [0].
If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be [1t]. G
Without CONSULT-III
The number of blinks of the MIL in the Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results) indicates the DTC.
Example: 0117 0340, 1217, etc. H
These DTCs are controlled by NISSAN.
• 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
• Output of a DTC indicates a malfunction. However, the Diagnostic Test Mode II do not indicate
whether the malfunction is still occurring or has occurred in the past and has returned to normal. I
CONSULT-III can identify malfunction status. Therefore, using CONSULT-III (if available) is recom-
mended.
How to Erase DTC and 1st Trip DTC J
With CONSULT-III
NOTE:
• If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 10 K
1. Select “ENGINE” with CONSULT-III.
2. Select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. L
3. Touch “ERASE”. (DTC in ECM will be erased.)
Without CONSULT-III
NOTE: M
1. Erase DTC in ECM. Refer to How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results). N
• If the battery is disconnected, the emission-related diagnostic information will be cleared within 24
hours.
• The following data are cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
- Diagnostic trouble codes O
- Freeze frame data
- 1st trip freeze frame data P
Actual work procedures are explained using a DTC as an example. Be careful so that not only the DTC, but all
of the data listed above, are cleared from the ECM memory during work procedures.
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL)
Description

The MIL is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MIL will illuminate when the ignition switch is turned ON
without the engine running. This is a bulb check.
If the MIL does not illuminate, check MIL circuit. Refer to EC-
728, "Component Function Check".
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should turn off.
If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic system has
detected an engine system malfunction.
SAT652J
On Board Diagnostic System Function

The on board diagnostic system has the following three functions.
Diagnostic Test KEY and ENG. Function Explanation of Function

Mode Status
Mode I Ignition switch in BULB CHECK This function checks the MIL bulb for damage (blown, open
ON position circuit, etc.).
If the MIL does not illuminate, check MIL circuit.
Engine stopped
Engine running MALFUNCTION When a malfunction is detected twice in two consecutive

WARNING driving cycles (two trip detection logic), the MIL will illumi-
nate to inform the driver that a malfunction has been detect-
ed.
The following malfunctions will illuminate or blink the MIL in
the 1st trip.
Mode II Ignition switch in SELF-DIAGNOSTIC This function allows DTCs and 1st trip DTCs to be read.
ON position RESULTS
Engine stopped
Diagnostic Test Mode I — Bulb Check

In this mode, the MIL on the instrument panel should stay ON. If it remains OFF, check MIL circuit. Refer to
EC-728, "Component Function Check".
Diagnostic Test Mode I — Malfunction Warning
MIL Condition
ON When the malfunction is detected.
OFF No malfunction.
This DTC number is clarified in Diagnostic Test Mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS)
Diagnostic Test Mode II — Self-diagnostic Results

In this mode, the DTC and 1st trip DTC are indicated by the number of blinks of the MIL as shown below.
The DTC and 1st trip DTC are displayed at the same time. If the MIL does not illuminate in diagnostic test
mode I (Malfunction warning), all displayed items are 1st trip DTCs. If only one code is displayed when the MIL
illuminates in diagnostic test mode II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS), it is a DTC; if two or more codes are
displayed, they may be either DTCs or 1st trip DTCs. DTC No. is same as that of 1st trip DTC. These uniden-

tified codes can be identified by using the CONSULT-III. A DTC will be used as an example for how to read a
code. A
EC
JMBIA1140GB
A particular trouble code can be identified by the number of four-digit numeral blinks as per the following.
J
Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
Blinks 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 12 13 14 15 16
K
The length of time the 1,000th-digit numeral blinks on and off is 1.2 seconds consisting of an ON (0.6-sec-
onds) - OFF (0.6-seconds) cycle.
The 100th-digit numeral and lower digit numerals consist of a 0.3-seconds ON and 0.3-seconds OFF cycle.
A change from one digit numeral to another occurs at an interval of 1.0-second OFF. In other words, the later L
numeral appears on the display 1.3 seconds after the former numeral has disappeared.
A change from one trouble code to another occurs at an interval of 1.8-seconds OFF.
In this way, all the detected malfunctions are classified by their DTC numbers. The DTC 0000 refers to no mal- M
function. (See EC-769, "DTC Index")
How to Switch Diagnostic Test Mode
NOTE: N
a malfunction.
O
• ECM always returns to Diagnostic Test Mode I after the ignition switch is turned OFF.
HOW TO SET DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS)
2. Repeat the following procedure quickly 5 times within 5 seconds. P
- Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
3. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it depressed for approx. 10 seconds until the
MIL starts blinking.
4. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
ECM has entered to Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results).
NOTE:

Wait until the same DTC (or 1st trip DTC) appears to completely confirm all DTCs.
PBIB0092E
HOW TO ERASE DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II (SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS)

1. Set ECM in Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results). Refer to “How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II
(Self-diagnostic Results)”.
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it depressed for more than 10 seconds.
The emission-related diagnostic information has been erased from the backup memory in the ECM.
3. Fully release the accelerator pedal, and confirm the DTC 0000 is displayed.
• If the battery is disconnected, the DTC will be lost from the backup memory within 24 hours.
• Do not erase the stored memory before starting trouble diagnoses.
CONSULT-III Function INFOID:0000000004689519
FUNCTION
Diagnostic test mode Function

This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately by following the in-
Work Support
dications on the CONSULT-III unit.
Self-diagnostic results such as 1st trip DTC, DTCs and 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data
Self Diagnostic Result
can be read and erased quickly.*2
Data Monitor Input/Output data in the ECM can be read.
Diagnostic Test Mode in which CONSULT-III drives some actuators apart from the ECM and also shifts
Active Test
some parameters in a specified range.
DTC & SRT Confirmation*1 The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/results can be confirmed.
Function Test This mode is used to inform customers when the vehicle requires periodic maintenance.
ECU Part Number ECM part number can be read.
*2: The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared when the ECM memory is erased.
• Diagnostic trouble codes
• 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes
• Freeze frame data
• 1st trip freeze frame data
• System readiness test (SRT) codes
• Test values
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL SYSTEMS APPLICATION

DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE A

SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RE-
SULTS
Item WORK SUP- DATA ACTIVE
PORT FREEZE MONITOR TEST EC
DTC* 1 FRAME DA-
TA*1
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) × × × C
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) × × ×
Mass air flow sensor × ×
D
Engine coolant temperature sensor × × × ×
Engine oil temperature sensor ×
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 × × E
Heated oxygen sensor 2 × ×
Vehicle speed signal × × ×

Accelerator pedal position sensor × × F
Throttle position sensor × × ×
Intake air temperature sensor × ×
G
Knock sensor ×
INPUT
Refrigerant pressure sensor ×

Closed throttle position switch (accelerator ped- H
×
al position sensor signal)
Air conditioner switch ×
Park/neutral position (PNP) signal × × I
Stop lamp switch × ×
Power steering pressure sensor × ×
J
Battery voltage ×
Load signal ×
Primary speed sensor × × K
Battery current sensor × ×
ASCD steering switch × ×
L
ASCD brake switch × ×

SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RE-
SULTS
Item WORK SUP- DATA ACTIVE
PORT FREEZE MONITOR TEST
DTC*1 FRAME DA-
TA*1
Fuel injector × ×
Power transistor (Ignition timing) × ×
Throttle control motor relay × ×
Throttle control motor ×

EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
× × ×
valve
Air conditioner relay ×
Fuel pump relay × × ×
OUTPUT
Cooling fan relay × × ×

Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater × ×
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater × ×
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve × × ×
Electronic controlled engine mount × ×
Alternator × ×
Calculated load value × ×
X: Applicable
*1: This item includes 1st trip DTCs.
*2: This mode includes 1st trip freeze frame data or freeze frame data. The items appear on CONSULT-III screen in freeze frame data
mode only if a 1st trip DTC or DTC is detected. For details, refer to EC-516, "Diagnosis Description".
WORK SUPPORT MODE

Work Item
WORK ITEM CONDITION USAGE

FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE • FUEL PUMP WILL STOP BY TOUCHING “START” DUR- When releasing fuel pressure from
ING IDLING. fuel line
CRANK A FEW TIMES AFTER ENGINE STALLS.
IDLE AIR VOL LEARN • THE IDLE AIR VOLUME THAT KEEPS THE ENGINE When learning the idle air volume
WITHIN THE SPECIFIED RANGE IS MEMORIZED IN
ECM.
SELF-LEARNING CONT • THE COEFFICIENT OF SELF-LEARNING CONTROL When clearing mixture ratio self-
MIXTURE RATIO RETURNS TO THE ORIGINAL COEF- learning value
FICIENT.
TARGET IDLE RPM ADJ* • IDLE CONDITION When setting target idle speed
TARGET IGN TIM ADJ* • IDLE CONDITION When adjusting target ignition tim-
ing
*: This function is not necessary in the usual service procedure.
SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE

Self Diagnostic Item
Regarding items of DTC and 1st trip DTC, refer to EC-769, "DTC Index".

Freeze frame data item* Description A

DIAG TROUBLE CODE • The engine control component part/control system has a trouble code that is displayed as PXXXX. (Refer
[PXXXX] to EC-769, "DTC Index".)
FUEL SYS-B1 • “Fuel injection system status” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. EC
• One of in the following mode is displayed.
Mode2: Open loop due to detected system malfunction
FUEL SYS-B2 Mode3: Open loop due to driving conditions (power enrichment, deceleration enleanment)
Mode4: Closed loop - using oxygen sensor(s) as feedback for fuel control C
Mode5: Open loop - has not yet satisfied condition to go to closed loop
CAL/LD VALUE [%] • The calculated load value at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
COOLANT TEMP [°C] or D
• The engine coolant temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[°F]
L-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] • “Long-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
• The long-term fuel trim indicates much more gradual feedback compensation to the base fuel schedule E
L-FUEL TRM-B2 [%] than short-term fuel trim.
S-FUEL TRM-B1 [%] • “Short-term fuel trim” at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
• The short-term fuel trim indicates dynamic or instantaneous feedback compensation to the base fuel F
S-FUEL TRM-B2 [%] schedule.
ENGINE SPEED [rpm] • The engine speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
VEHICL SPEED G
• The vehicle speed at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[km/h] or [mph]
ABSOL TH·P/S [%] • The throttle valve opening angle at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
B/FUEL SCHDL [msec] • The base fuel schedule at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed. H
INT/A TEMP SE [°C] or
• The intake air temperature at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed.
[°F]
INT MANI PRES [kPa] I
• These items are displayed but are not applicable to this model.
COMBUST CONDITION
*: The items are the same as those of 1st trip freeze frame data.
J
DATA MONITOR MODE
Monitored Item
×: Applicable
K
• Accuracy becomes poor if engine
• Indicates the engine speed computed from the speed drops below the idle rpm.
L
ENG SPEED rpm signal of the crankshaft position sensor (POS) • If the signal is interrupted while the
and camshaft position sensor (PHASE). engine is running, an abnormal value
may be indicated. M
• The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor is value is indicated.
MAS A/F SE-B1 V
displayed. • When engine is running, specification
range is indicated in “SPEC”. N
• “Base fuel schedule” indicates the fuel injection
B/FUEL SCHDL msec pulse width programmed into ECM, prior to any
learned on board correction. O
A/F ALPHA-B1 • When the engine is stopped, a certain
value is indicated.
• The mean value of the air-fuel ratio feedback cor- • This data also includes the data for P
%
A/F ALPHA-B2 rection factor per cycle is indicated. the air-fuel ratio learning control.
• When the engine coolant temperature
• The engine coolant temperature (determined by sensor is open or short-circuited,
COOLAN TEMP/S °C or °F the signal voltage of the engine coolant tempera- ECM enters fail-safe mode. The en-
ture sensor) is displayed. gine coolant temperature determined
by the ECM is displayed.

A/F SEN1 (B1) • The A/F signal computed from the input signal of
V
A/F SEN1 (B2) the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is displayed.
HO2S2 (B1) • The signal voltage of the heated oxygen sensor 2

V
HO2S2 (B2) is displayed.
HO2S2 MNTR(B1) • Display of heated oxygen sensor 2 signal:

RICH: means the amount of oxygen after three
RICH/LEAN way catalyst is relatively small.
HO2S2 MNTR(B2) value is indicated.
LEAN: means the amount of oxygen after three
way catalyst is relatively large.
played.
BATTERY VOLT V • The power supply voltage of ECM is displayed.
ACCEL SEN 1 • ACCEL SEN 2 signal is converted by
• The accelerator pedal position sensor signal volt-
ACCEL SEN 2 age is displayed.
TP SEN 1-B1 • TP SEN 2-B1 signal is converted by
• The throttle position sensor signal voltage is dis-
TP SEN 2-B1 played.
• The intake air temperature (determined by the
INT/A TEMP SE °C or °F signal voltage of the intake air temperature sen-
sor) is indicated.
• Indicates start signal status [ON/OFF] computed • After starting the engine, [OFF] is dis-
START SIGNAL ON/OFF by the ECM according to the signals of engine played regardless of the starter sig-
speed and battery voltage. nal.
• Indicates idle position [ON/OFF] computed by
CLSD THL POS ON/OFF ECM according to the accelerator pedal position
sensor signal.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of the air condition-
AIR COND SIG ON/OFF er switch as determined by the air conditioner sig-
nal.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the park/neu-
P/N POSI SW ON/OFF
tral position (PNP) signal.
• [ON/OFF] condition of the power steering system
PW/ST SIGNAL ON/OFF (determined by the signal voltage of the power
steering pressure sensor) is indicated.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the electrical
load signal.
ON: Rear window defogger switch is ON and/or
LOAD SIGNAL ON/OFF
lighting switch is in 2nd position.
OFF: Both rear window defogger switch and light-
ing switch are OFF.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ignition switch
IGNITION SW ON/OFF
signal.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the heater fan
HEATER FAN SW ON/OFF
switch signal.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from the stop lamp
BRAKE SW ON/OFF
switch signal.
INJ PULSE-B1 • Indicates the actual fuel injection pulse width
msec compensated by ECM according to the input sig-
INJ PULSE-B2 computed value is indicated.
nals.
• Indicates the ignition timing computed by ECM • When the engine is stopped, a certain
IGN TIMING BTDC
according to the input signals. value is indicated.
• “Calculated load value” indicates the value of the
CAL/LD VALUE %
current air flow divided by peak air flow.

A
• Indicates the mass air flow computed by ECM ac-
MASS AIRFLOW g·m/s cording to the signal voltage of the mass air flow
sensor.
• Indicates the EVAP canister purge volume con- EC
trol solenoid valve control value computed by the
PURG VOL C/V % ECM according to the input signals.
• The opening becomes larger as the value in-
creases.
C
INT/V TIM (B1) • Indicates [°CA] of intake camshaft advance an-
°CA
INT/V TIM (B2) gle.
D
INT/V SOL-B1 • The control value of the intake valve timing con-
trol solenoid valve (determined by ECM accord-
ing to the input signals) is indicated.
INT/V SOL-B2 % E
• The advance angle becomes larger as the value
increases.
valve 1 (determined by ECM according to the in- F
VIAS S/V-1 ON/OFF
ing. G
VIAS S/V-2 ON/OFF
put signals) is indicated. H
ing.
I
• The air conditioner relay control condition (deter-
AIR COND RLY ON/OFF mined by ECM according to the input signals) is
indicated.
• The control condition of the electronic controlled J
engine mount (determined by ECM according to
ENGINE MOUNT IDLE/TRVL the input signals) is indicated.
IDLE: Engine speed is below 950 rpm
TRVL: Engine speed is above 950 rpm
K
• Indicates the fuel pump relay control condition

FUEL PUMP RLY ON/OFF determined by ECM according to the input sig-
nals. L
• The control condition of the EVAP canister vent
control valve (determined by ECM according to
VENT CONT/V* ON/OFF the input signals) is indicated. M
ON: Closed
OFF: Open
• Indicates the throttle control motor relay control
N
THRTL RELAY ON/OFF condition determined by the ECM according to
the input signals.
• The control condition of the cooling fan (deter-
mined by ECM according to the input signals) is O
indicated.
HI/MID/LOW/
COOLING FAN HI: High speed operation
OFF
MID: Middle speed operation
LOW: Low speed operation P
OFF: Stop
HO2S2 HTR (B1) • Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of heated oxygen
ON/OFF sensor 2 heater determined by ECM according to
HO2S2 HTR (B2) the input signals.
• Indicates the engine speed computed from the
I/P PULLY SPD rpm
turbine revolution sensor signal.

VEHICLE SPEED km/h or mph
speed signal sent from TCM is displayed.
• Displays the condition of idle air volume learning
YET: Idle Air Volume Learning has not been per-
IDL A/V LEARN YET/CMPLT formed yet.
CMPLT: Idle Air Volume Learning has already
been performed successfully.
• The engine oil temperature (determined by the
ENG OIL TEMP °C or °F signal voltage of the engine oil temperature sen-
sor) is displayed.
TRVL AFTER MIL km or mile • Distance traveled while MIL is activated.
A/F S1 HTR(B1) • Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 heater control value
computed by ECM according to the input signals.
%
A/F S1 HTR(B2) • The current flow to the heater becomes larger as
the value increases.
• The signal voltage from the refrigerant pressure
AC PRESS SEN V
sensor is displayed.
played.
SET VHCL SPD km/h or mph • The preset vehicle speed is displayed.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from MAIN switch
MAIN SW ON/OFF
signal.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from CANCEL
CANCEL SW ON/OFF
switch signal.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from RESUME/AC-
RESUME/ACC SW ON/OFF
CELERATE switch signal.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from SET/COAST
SET SW ON/OFF
switch signal.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition from ASCD brake
BRAKE SW1 ON/OFF
switch signal.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of stop lamp switch
BRAKE SW2 ON/OFF
signal.
set speed.
VHCL SPD CUT NON/CUT
low compared with the ASCD set speed, and
ASCD operation is cut off.
LO SPEED CUT NON/CUT set speed.
low, and ASCD operation is cut off.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of CVT O/D ac-
AT OD MONITOR ON/OFF
cording to the input signal from the TCM.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of CVT O/D cancel
AT OD CANCEL ON/OFF
request signal.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of CRUISE lamp
CRUISE LAMP ON/OFF determined by the ECM according to the input
signals.
• Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of SET lamp deter-
SET LAMP ON/OFF
mined by the ECM according to the input signals.
• The signal voltage of battery current sensor is
BAT CUR SEN mV
displayed.

A
• The control condition of the power generation
voltage variable control (determined by ECM ac-
cording to the input signals) is indicated.
ALT DUTY SIG ON/OFF ON: Power generation voltage variable control is EC
active.
OFF: Power generation voltage variable control
is inactive.
A/F ADJ-B1 • Indicates the correction of a factor stored in ECM.
C
The factor is calculated from the difference be-
— tween the target air-fuel ratio stored in ECM and
A/F ADJ-B2 the air-fuel ratio calculated from A/F sensor 1 sig- D
nal.
• Indicates the duty ratio of the power generation
ALT DUTY % command value. The ratio is calculated by ECM
based on the battery current sensor signal. E
*: This item is not used on this vehicle.
NOTE:
Any monitored item that does not match the vehicle being diagnosed is deleted from the display automatically.
F
ACTIVE TEST MODE

Test Item G

H
FUEL INJEC- non-standard condition If malfunctioning symptom disap-
• Fuel injector
TION • Change the amount of fuel injec- pears, see CHECK ITEM.
• Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
tion using CONSULT-III.
I
non-standard condition
IGNITION TIM- If malfunctioning symptom disap-
• Timing light: Set • Perform Idle Air Volume Learning.
ING pears, see CHECK ITEM. J
• Retard the ignition timing using
CONSULT-III.
• Engine: After warming up, idle the • Harness and connectors
engine. • Compression K
POWER BAL- • A/C switch OFF • Fuel injector
Engine runs rough or stops.
ANCE • Selector lever: P or N position • Power transistor
• Cut off each injector signal one at • Spark plug
a time using CONSULT-III. • Ignition coil L
• Turn the cooling fan “HI”, “MID”,
COOLING FAN*1 “LOW” and “OFF” using CON-
Cooling fan moves and stops. • Cooling fan motor
• IPDM E/R M
SULT-III.
• Engine: Return to the original • Harness and connectors
ENG COOLANT non-standard condition If malfunctioning symptom disap- • Engine coolant temperature sen-
N
TEMP • Change the engine coolant tem- pears, see CHECK ITEM. sor
perature using CONSULT-III. • Fuel injector
stopped) O
FUEL PUMP RE- Fuel pump relay makes the operat- • Harness and connectors
• Turn the fuel pump relay “ON”
LAY ing sound. • Fuel pump relay
and “OFF” using CONSULT-III
and listen to operating sound.
P
VIAS S/V-1

VIAS S/V-2
ENGINE • Turn electronic controlled engine Electronic controlled engine mount • Harness and connectors
MOUNTING mount “IDLE” and “TRVL” with makes the operating sound. • Electronic controlled engine mount
CONSULT-III.
• Engine: After warming up, run en-
gine at 1,500 rpm.
PURG VOL • Change the EVAP canister purge Engine speed changes according to • Harness and connectors
CONT/V volume control solenoid valve the opening percent. • Solenoid valve
opening percent using CON-
SULT-III.
VENT CON- stopped)
Solenoid valve makes an operating • Harness and connectors
• Turn solenoid valve “ON” and
TROL/V*2 “OFF” with the CONSULT-III and
sound. • Solenoid valve
listen to operating sound.
INT V/T ASSIGN trouble condition If trouble symptom disappears, see
• Intake valve timing control sole-
ANGLE • Change intake valve timing using CHECK ITEM.
noid valve
CONSULT-III.
• Engine: Idle • Harness and connectors
ALTERNATOR
• Change duty ratio using CON- Battery voltage changes. • IPDM E/R
DUTY
SULT-III. • Alternator
*1: Leaving cooling fan OFF with CONSULT-III while engine is running may cause the engine to overheat.

COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS A
EC
The specification (SP) value indicates the tolerance of the value that is displayed in “SPEC” in “DATA MONI-
TOR” mode of CONSULT-III during normal operation of the Engine Control System. When the value in “SPEC”
in “DATA MONITOR” mode is within the SP value, the Engine Control System is confirmed OK. When the C
value in “SPEC” in “DATA MONITOR” mode is NOT within the SP value, the Engine Control System may have
one or more malfunctions.
The SP value is used to detect malfunctions that may affect the Engine Control System, but will not illuminate D
the MIL.
The SP value will be displayed for the following three items:
• B/FUEL SCHDL (The fuel injection pulse width programmed into ECM prior to any learned on board correc-
tion) E
• A/F ALPHA-B1/B2 (The mean value of air-fuel ratio feedback correction factor per cycle)
• MAS A/F SE-B1 (The signal voltage of the mass air flow sensor)
F
1.START
G
• Vehicle driven distance: More than 5,000 km (3,107 miles)
• Barometric pressure: 98.3 - 104.3 kPa (0.983 - 1.043 bar, 1.003 - 1.064 kg/cm2, 14.25 - 15.12 psi) H
• Atmospheric temperature: 20 - 30°C (68 - 86°F)
- After the engine is warmed up to normal operating temperature, drive vehicle until “ATF TEMP SEN” in I
“DATA MONITOR” mode of “CVT” system indicates less than 0.9 V.
• Electrical load: Not applied
- Rear window defogger switch, air conditioner switch lighting switch are OFF. Steering wheel is straight J
ahead.
K
>> GO TO 2.
L
With CONSULT-III
NOTE:
Perform “SPEC” in “DATA MONITOR” mode in maximum scale display.
1. Perform “EC-427, "BASIC INSPECTION : Special Repair Requirement". M
2. Select “B/FUEL SCHDL”, “A/F ALPHA-B1”, “A/F ALPHA-B2” and “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “SPEC” of “DATA
MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Check that monitor items are within the SP value.
N

OVERALL SEQUENCE
JMBIA1468GB

EC
PBIB3213E
DETAILED PROCEDURE P
1.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
2. Confirm that the testing conditions are met. Refer to EC-529, "Component Function Check".
3. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the each indication is
within the SP value.

NOTE:
Check “A/F ALPHA-B1” for approximately 1 minute because they may fluctuate. It is NG if the indication is
out of the SP value even a little.
YES >> GO TO 19.
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the
SP value.
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> More than the SP value: GO TO 21.
SP value.
YES >> GO TO 6.
1. Stop the engine.
2. Disconnect PCV hose, and then plug it.
3. Start engine.
4. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the indication is within
the SP value.
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 6.
5.CHANGE ENGINE OIL
1. Stop the engine.
2. Change engine oil.
NOTE:
This symptom may occur when a large amount of gasoline is mixed with engine oil because of driving
conditions (such as when engine oil temperature does not rise enough since a journey distance is too
short during winter). The symptom will not be detected after changing engine oil or changing driving con-
dition.
>> INSPECTION END

Check fuel pressure. (Refer to FL-4, "Inspection".)
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO-1 >> Fuel pressure is too high: Replace “fuel filter and fuel pump assembly” and then GO TO 8.
NO-2 >> Fuel pressure is too low: GO TO 7.
Check fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging
YES >> Replace “fuel filter and fuel pump assembly” and then GO TO 8.
NO >> Repair or replace and then GO TO 8.
1. Start engine.
2. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the indication is within A
the SP value.
YES >> INSPECTION END EC
NO >> GO TO 9.
C
1. Perform “POWER BALANCE” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
2. Make sure that the each cylinder produces a momentary engine speed drop.
D
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> GO TO 10.
10.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART E
1. Ignition coil and its circuit (Refer to EC-723, "Component Function Check".)
2. Fuel injector and its circuit (Refer to EC-706, "Component Function Check".) F
3. Intake air leakage
4. Low compression pressure (Refer to FL-4, "Inspection".)
G
YES >> Replace fuel injector and then GO TO 11.
11.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1” H
1. Start engine.
the SP value. I
NO >> GO TO 12. J
12.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER FUNCTION
Perform Component Function Check related with A/F sensor 1 heater. Refer to EC-690, "Component Function
Check". K
YES >> GO TO 14.
L
NO >> GO TO 13.
13.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER CIRCUIT
Perform Diagnosis Procedure. Refer to EC-690, "Diagnosis Procedure". M
>> GO TO 16.
N
Perform Component Function Check related with A/F sensor 1. Refer to EC-687, "Component Function
Check". O
YES >> GO TO 16.
NO >> GO TO 15. P
15.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT
Perform Diagnostic Procedure. Refer to EC-687, "Diagnosis Procedure".
>> GO TO 16.
1. Start engine.
2. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the each indication is
NO >> GO TO 17.
17.DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT ECM HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Stop the engine.
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. Check pin terminal and connector for damage, and then reconnect it.
>> GO TO 18.
1. Start engine.
the SP value.
SP value.
1. Check for the cause of large engine friction. Refer to the following.
- Engine oil level is too high
- Engine oil viscosity
- Belt tension of power steering, alternator, A/C compressor, etc. is excessive
- Noise from engine
- Noise from transmission, etc.
2. Check for the cause of insufficient combustion. Refer to the following.
- Valve clearance malfunction
- Intake valve timing control function malfunction
- Camshaft sprocket installation malfunction, etc.
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 32.

• Improper specification of intake air system
YES >> GO TO 23.
22.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1”, AND “B/FUEL SCHDL”
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” and “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the
each indication is within the SP value.

NO >> “B/FUEL SCHDL” is more, “A/F ALPHA-B1” is less than the SP value: GO TO 23.
23.DISCONNECT AND RECONNECT MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR HARNESS CONNECTOR A
1. Stop the engine.

2. Disconnect mass air flow sensor harness connector. Check pin terminal and connector for damage and
EC
then reconnect it again.
>> GO TO 24.
C
1. Start engine.
2. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the indication is within D
the SP value.
YES >> Detect malfunctioning part of mass air flow sensor circuit and repair it. Refer to EC-549, "DTC E
Logic". Then GO TO 31.
NO >> GO TO 25.
25.CHECK “MAS A/F SE-B1” F
Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the
SP value.
Is the measurement value within the SP value? G
YES >> GO TO 26.
NO >> More than the SP value: Replace mass air flow sensor, and then GO TO 31.
H
26.REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
2. Go to EC-430, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Require- I
ment".
>> GO TO 31. J
• Crushed air ducts K
• Improper specification of intake air system L
YES >> GO TO 29.
NO >> Repair or replace malfunctioning part, and then GO TO 28. M
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the N
SP value.
YES >> INSPECTION END O
NO >> Less than the SP value: GO TO 29.
Select “MAS A/F SE-B1” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the indication is within the P
SP value.
YES >> GO TO 30.
NO >> Less than the SP value: Replace mass air flow sensor, and then GO TO 32.
Check for the cause of air leakage after the mass air flow sensor. Refer to the following.

• Disconnection, looseness, and cracks in air duct
• Looseness of oil filler cap
• Disconnection of oil level gauge
• Open stuck, breakage, hose disconnection, or cracks of PCV valve
• Disconnection or cracks of EVAP purge hose, open stuck of EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid
valve
• Malfunctioning seal of rocker cover gasket
• Disconnection, looseness, or cracks of hoses, such as vacuum hose, connecting to intake air system parts
• Malfunctioning seal of intake air system, etc.
>> GO TO 32.
31.CHECK “A/F ALPHA-B1” AND “B/FUEL SCHDL”
Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” and “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and make sure that the
Select “B/FUEL SCHDL” in “SPEC” of “DATA MONITOR” mode, and then make sure that the indication is

A
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION EC

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ECM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT D

2. Check the continuity between ECM harness connector and ground. E
ECM
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal F
12
F7
16
G
107
Ground Existed
108
E16
111 H
112
is the inspection result normal? I
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
J
• Harness connectors F121, E7 K
• Harness for open or short between ECM and ground
>> Repair open circuit or short to power in harness or connectors. L

4.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Reconnect ECM harness connector.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF and then ON. M
ECM N
+ – Voltage
Connector
Terminal Terminal
O
YES >> GO TO 6. P
NO >> GO TO 5.
• 10 A fuse (No. 44)
• Harness for open or short between ECM and IPDM E/R

6.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
ECM
Connector
Terminal Terminal
After turning ignition switch OFF, battery
Ignition switch
E16 105 112 voltage will exist for a few seconds, then
ON → OFF
drop to approximately 0 V.
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 9.
7.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
2. Check the voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground.
IPDM E/R
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
49
F12 Ground Battery voltage
53
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Replace IPDM E/R.
>> INSPECTION END

9.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-IV
ECM
+ – Voltage
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> GO TO 10.
10.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V
ECM IPDM E/R

Continuity

YES >> GO TO 11.
11.CHECK 15 A FUSE EC

2. Check 15 A fuse.
C
YES >> GO TO 13.
NO >> Replace 15 A fuse. D
12.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-VI
2. Disconnect IPDM E/R harness connector. E
ECM IPDM E/R F

Continuity
G
YES >> GO TO 13. H
Refer to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident". I
J

CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle mul-
communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Trouble diagnosis
name
When ECM is not transmitting or receiving CAN com-
U1000 munication signal of OBD (emission related diagno-
sis) for 2 seconds or more. • Harness or connectors
CAN communication
(CAN communication line is open or
line When ECM is not transmitting or receiving CAN com- shorted)
U1001 munication signal other than OBD (emission related
diagnosis) for 2 seconds or more.

2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> EC-540, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Go to LAN-16, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".

A

NOTE:
If DTC P0011 or P0021 is displayed with DTC P0075 or P0081, first perform the trouble diagnosis for
DTC P0075, P0081. Refer to EC-546, "DTC Logic". C
Trouble diagnosis
name
D
Intake valve timing • Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
P0011 control performance • Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
(bank 1) • Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
There is a gap between angle of target and • Accumulation of debris to the signal pick-up E
Intake valve timing phase-control angle degree. portion of the camshaft
P0021 control performance • Timing chain installation
(bank 2) • Foreign matter caught in the oil groove for in-
take valve timing control F

1.INSPECTION START G
Will CONSULT-III be used? H
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 5.
2.PRECONDITIONING I
TESTING CONDITION: J
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is between 10 V and 16 V at
idle.
K
>> GO TO 3.
L
With CONSULT-III
3. Maintain the following conditions for at least 6 consecutive seconds. Hold the accelerator pedal as steady M
as possible.
VHCL SPEED SE 100 - 120 km/h (63 - 75 mph) N

O
CAUTION: P
4. Stop vehicle with engine running and let engine idle for 10 seconds.
NO >> GO TO 4.


With CONSULT-III
ENG SPEED 1,200 - 3,175 rpm (A constant rotation is maintained.)

Selector lever 1st or 2nd position
Driving vehicle uphill
Driving location (Increased engine load will help maintain the driving conditions re-
quired for this test.)
CAUTION:
NOTE:
Use component function check to check the overall function of intake valve timing control system. During this

Without CONSULT-III
4. Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals under the following condition.

ECM A
DTC + – Condition Voltage
Bank
EC
At idle BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 – 14 V)
0 – 14 V
C
P0011 1 78
Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
D
JMBIA0038GB
F8 E16 112
At idle BATTERY VOLTAGE (11 – 14 V) E
0 – 14 V
F
P0021 2 75
Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
JMBIA0038GB
: Average voltage for pulse signal (Actual pulse signal can be confirmed by oscilloscope.) H
NO >> Go to EC-543, "Diagnosis Procedure". I
J
1.CHECK OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP
1. Start engine.
2. Check oil pressure warning lamp and confirm it is not illumi- K
nated.
Is oil pressure warming lamp illuminated?
YES >> Go to LU-7, "Inspection". L
NO >> GO TO 2.
PBIA8559J
N
O
YES >> GO TO 3.
P
YES >> GO TO 4.
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK CAMSHAFT (INTAKE)
• Accumulation of debris on the signal plate of camshaft rear end
YES >> GO TO 6.
JMBIA0058ZZ

Check service records for any recent repairs that may cause timing chain misalignment.
Are there any service records that may cause timing chain misalignment?
YES >> Check timing chain installation. Refer to EM-54, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK LUBRICATION CIRCUIT
Refer to EM-18, "Inspection and Adjustment".
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Clean lubrication line.
>> INSPECTION END


1. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector.
1 and 2 7.0 - 7.5 Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]
∞Ω
1 or 2 and ground
YES >> GO TO 2.
1. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve.

valve terminals 1 and 2, and then interrupt it. Check that the A
CAUTION:
EC
NOTE:
Always replace O-ring when intake valve timing control C
YES >> INSPECTION END D


Intake valve timing control solenoid valve is activated by ON/OFF

pulse duty (ratio) signals from the ECM.
The intake valve timing control solenoid valve changes the oil
amount and direction of flow through intake valve timing control unit
or stops oil flow.
The longer pulse width advances valve angle.
The shorter pulse width retards valve angle.
When ON and OFF pulse widths become equal, the solenoid valve
stops oil pressure flow to fix the intake valve angle at the control
position.
PBIB1842E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Intake valve timing control so- • Harness or connectors
P0075 An improper voltage is sent to the ECM
lenoid valve (bank 1) circuit (Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
through intake valve timing control solenoid
Intake valve timing control so- circuit is open or shorted.)
P0081 valve.
lenoid valve (bank 2) circuit • Intake valve timing control solenoid valve

1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
1.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect intake valve timing (IVT) control solenoid valve harness connector.
4. Check the voltage between intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector and ground with
CONSULT-III or tester.
IVT control solenoid valve

DTC Ground Voltage
P0075 1 F81 2
P0081 2 F82 2
YES >> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN A
AND SHORT
EC
3. Check the continuity between intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector and ECM har-
ness connector.
C
IVT control solenoid valve ECM
DTC Continuity
D
P0075 1 F81 1 78
F8 Existed
P0081 2 F82 1 75
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. E
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. F
Refer to EC-547, "Component Inspection". G
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning intake valve timing control solenoid valve. H
I
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection INFOID:0000000004702806 J

1. Disconnect intake valve timing control solenoid valve harness connector. K
L
1 and 2 7.0 - 7.5 Ω [at 20°C (68°F)]
∞Ω
1 or 2 and ground M
YES >> GO TO 2. N
1. Remove intake valve timing control solenoid valve. O

CAUTION:
NOTE:


A
The mass air flow sensor (1) is placed in the stream of intake air. It EC
measures the intake flow rate by measuring a part of the entire
intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the
hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is
reduced as the intake air flows around it. The greater air flow, the C
greater the heat loss.
Therefore, the electric current supplied to hot wire is changed to
maintain the temperature of the hot wire as air flow increases. The D
ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change.
PBIA9559J E
Trouble diagnosis
name G
Mass air flow sensor An excessively low voltage from the sensor is sent (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
P0102
circuit low input to ECM. • Intake air leakage H
Mass air flow sensor An excessively high voltage from the sensor is
circuit high input sent to ECM. I

1.PRECONDITIONING J
K
P0102 >> GO TO 2.
P0103 >> GO TO 3.
L
2. Check DTC. M
Is DTC detected?
3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0103-I
2. Check DTC. O
Is DTC detected?
NO >> GO TO 4. P
4.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0103-II

2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?

1.INSPECTION START
Confirm the detected DTC.
P0102 >> GO TO 2.
P0103 >> GO TO 3.
Check the following for connection.
• Air duct
• Vacuum hoses
• Intake air passage between air duct to intake manifold
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Reconnect the parts.
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK MAF SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
MAF sensor
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
• Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and ECM
• Harness for open or short between mass air flow sensor and IPDM E/R
6.CHECK MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
MAF sensor ECM

Continuity
F4 4 F8 56 Existed

YES >> GO TO 7. A
7.CHECK MAF SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
EC
MAF sensor ECM C

Continuity
F4 3 F8 58 Existed
YES >> GO TO 8.
E
Refer to EC-551, "Component Inspection". F
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> Replace mass air flow sensor. G
Refer to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident". H
>> INSPECTION END

I
1.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR-I

J
With CONSULT-III
3. Connect CONSULT-III and select “DATA MONITOR” mode. K
Monitor item Condition MAS A/F SE-B1 (V) L

M
Without CONSULT-III N
O
ECM P
Connector
Terminal Terminal
58 56
sor signal) ground)

NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FOR THE CAUSE OF UNEVEN AIR FLOW THROUGH MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
• Improper specification of intake air system parts
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR-II
With CONSULT-III
Monitor item Condition MAS A/F SE-B1 (V)

Without CONSULT-III
ECM
Connector
Terminal Terminal
58 56
sor signal) ground)
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR-III
With CONSULT-III

Monitor item Condition MAS A/F SE-B1 (V) A

EC
Without CONSULT-III C
4. Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals under the following conditions. D
E
ECM
Connector
Terminal Terminal F
58 56
sor signal) ground)
G
NO >> Clean or replace mass air flow sensor.
I

The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine

coolant temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the
ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine coolant
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the ther-
mistor decreases as temperature increases.
SEF594K
<Reference data>
Engine coolant temperature

[°C (°F)]
–10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
SEF012P
(Engine coolant temperature sensor) and 52 (Sensor ground).
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Trouble Diagnosis
Name
Engine coolant tem-
cuit low input
Engine coolant tem- • Engine coolant temperature sensor
sent to ECM.
cuit high input

1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?

A
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ECT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor harness connector. D
3. Check the voltage between ECT sensor harness connector and ground.
E
ECT sensor
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK ECT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

3. Check the continuity between ECT sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.
I
ECT sensor ECM
Continuity
K
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR L
YES >> GO TO 5. M
>> INSPECTION END O

1.CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR P

2. Disconnect engine coolant temperature sensor harness connector.
3. Remove engine coolant temperature sensor.

4. Check resistance between engine coolant temperature sensor
terminals as per the following.
Terminals Condition Resistance (kΩ)

20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260

A
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, EC

kind of potentiometer which transform the throttle valve position into C
nals and controls the throttle valve opening angle in response to D
PBIB0145E E

NOTE:
Refer to EC-604, "DTC Logic". G
Throttle position sensor An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor H
2 circuit low input 2 is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 2 circuit is open or shorted.)
Throttle position sensor An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor • Electric throttle control actuator
P0123 (TP sensor 2)
2 circuit high input 2 is sent to ECM. I

1.PRECONDITIONING J
>> GO TO 2. L
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
O
2. Check ground connection E38. Refer to Ground Inspection in GI-38, "Circuit Inspection". P
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

3. Check the voltage between electric throttle control actuator harness connector and ground.

Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
nector.

Continuity
F29 4 F8 36 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
nector.

Continuity
F29 3 F8 38 Existed
YES >> GO TO 5.
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 6.
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

A
2. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. EC
5. Set selector lever position to D. C
ECM D
Connector
Terminal Terminal
E
37 Fully released More than 0.36 V
(TP sensor 1 signal) Fully depressed Less than 4.75 V
36
38 F
(TP sensor 2 signal) Fully depressed More than 0.36 V
YES >> INSPECTION END G
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR H
I
>> INSPECTION END
J
K
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING L
M
>> END

JMBIA0112GB
mately 800°C (1,472°F).
PBIB3354E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

To judge the malfunction, the diagnosis checks that the A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1
signal fluctuates according to fuel feedback control.
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 • Harness or connectors
P0130
(bank 1) circuit The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 2.2 V. or shorted.)
(bank 2) circuit

NOTE:
1.INSPECTION START
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3.

2.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 FUNCTION A

With CONSULT-III
2. Select “A/F SEN1 (B1)” or “A/F SEN1 (B2)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. EC
Does the indication fluctuates around 2.2 V?
YES >> GO TO 3. C
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. D
3. Drive the vehicle at a speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) for a few minutes in the suitable gear position.
4. Shift the selector lever to the D position, then release the accelerator pedal fully until the vehicle speed E
decreases to 50 km/h (31 MPH).
CAUTION:
NOTE: F
Never apply brake during releasing the accelerator pedal.
5. Repeat steps 3 to 4 for five times.
6. Stop the vehicle and turn ignition switch OFF. G
7. Wait at least 10 seconds and restart engine.
8. Repeat steps 3 to 4 for five times.
9. Stop the vehicle.
10. Check 1st trip DTC. H
NO >> INSPECTION END I
J
2. Check ground connection E38. Refer to Ground Inspection in GI-38, "Circuit Inspection". K
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace ground connection. L
M
N
A/F sensor 1
DTC Ground Voltage
P0130 1 F27 4 O
P0150 2 F64 4
YES >> GO TO 4. P
NO >> GO TO 3.
• 15 A fuse (No. 46)


A/F sensor 1 ECM

DTC Continuity
1 45
P0130 1 F27
2 49
F8 Existed
1 53
P0150 2 F64
2 57
and ground.
A/F sensor 1
1
P0130 1 F27
2
Ground Not existed
1
P0150 2 F64
2
ECM
Connector Terminal
45
P0130
49
53
P0150
57
YES >> GO TO 5.
YES >> GO TO 6.
CAUTION:
>> INSPECTION END

A
JMBIA0112GB E
mately 800°C (1,472°F).
G
PBIB3354E

I
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

signal is not inordinately low.
P0131
(bank 1) circuit low voltage • The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/ (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 F sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 0 V. shorted.) L
(bank 2) circuit low voltage

M
1.INSPECTION START
Will CONSULT-III be used? N
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 5.
2.PRECONDITIONING O
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK A/F SENSOR FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III

NO >> GO TO 4.
CAUTION:
3. Maintain the following conditions for about 20 consecutive seconds.

NOTE:
• Keep the accelerator pedal as steady as possible during the cruising.
1.
NOTE:

Without CONSULT-III
CAUTION:
Engine speed 1,000 - 3,200 rpm

Vehicle speed More than 40 km/h (25 MPH)
Driving at level road
Driving condition (To avoid overloading will help maintain the
driving conditions required for this test.)
NOTE:

• If this procedure is not completed within 1 minute after restarting engine at step 2, return to step 2.
5. Repeat steps 2 to 4. A
C
D
YES >> GO TO 2. E
1. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector. F
G
A/F sensor 1
DTC Ground Voltage
P0131 1 F27 4 H
P0151 2 F64 4
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART J
• 15 A fuse (No. 46) K
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors. L

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. M
N
A/F sensor 1 ECM
DTC Continuity
1 45 O
P0131 1 F27
2 49
F8 Existed
1 53
P0151 2 F64 P
2 57
and ground.

A/F sensor 1
1
P0131 1 F27
2
Ground Not existed
1
P0151 2 F64
2
ECM
Connector Terminal
45
P0131
49
53
P0151
57
YES >> GO TO 5.
YES >> GO TO 6.
CAUTION:
>> INSPECTION END

A
JMBIA0112GB E
mately 800°C (1,472°F).
G
PBIB3354E

I
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

signal is not inordinately high.
P0132
(bank 1) circuit high voltage • The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F (The A/F sensor 1 circuit is open or
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 sensor 1 signal is constantly approx. 5 V. shorted.) L
(bank 2) circuit high voltage

M
1.INSPECTION START
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 5.
2.PRECONDITIONING O
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK A/F SENSOR FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III

NO >> GO TO 4.
CAUTION:

NOTE:
1.
Is 1st trip DTC is detected?
NOTE:

Without CONSULT-III
CAUTION:
Engine speed 1,000 - 3,200 rpm

Vehicle speed More than 40 km/h (25 MPH)
Driving at level road
Driving condition (To avoid overloading will help maintain the
driving conditions required for this test.)
NOTE:

• If this procedure is not completed within 1 minute after restarting engine at step 2, return to step 2.
5. Repeat steps 2 to 4. A
C
D
YES >> GO TO 2. E
1. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector. F
G
A/F sensor 1
DTC Ground Voltage
P0132 1 F27 4 H
P0152 2 F64 4
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART J
• 15 A fuse (No. 46) K
>> Repair or replace harness or connectors. L

N
A/F sensor 1 ECM
DTC Continuity
1 45 O
P0132 1 F27
2 49
F8 Existed
1 53
P0152 2 F64 P
2 57
and ground.

A/F sensor 1
1
P0132 1 F27
2
Ground Not existed
1
P0152 2 F64
2
ECM
Connector Terminal
45
P0132
49
53
P0152
57
YES >> GO TO 5.
YES >> GO TO 6.
CAUTION:
>> INSPECTION END

P0139, P0159 HO2S2
P0139, P0159 HO2S2
A

nal from the heated oxygen sensor 2. C
ditions. D
SEF327R E

gen storage capacity of the three way catalyst 1 causes the longer G
2, ECM monitors whether the switching response of the sensor's
voltage is faster than specified during various driving conditions such
H
as fuel cut.
I
SEF302U
J
Heated oxygen sensor 2 • Harness or connectors K
sponse It takes more time for the sensor to respond be- • Heated oxygen sensor 2
Heated oxygen sensor 2 tween rich and lean than the specified time. • Fuel pressure
P0159 (bank 2) circuit slow re- • Fuel injector L
sponse • Intake air leakage
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE M

1.INSPECTION START
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 11.
O
2.PRECONDITIONING
completed.
TESTING CONDITION:

P0139, P0159 HO2S2
>> GO TO 3.
>> GO TO 4.
>> GO TO 5.
3. Select “HO2S2 (B1) P0139” or “HO2S2 (B2) P0159” of “HO2S2” in “DTC WORK SUPPORT” mode with
CONSULT-III.
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> GO TO 6.
6.PERFORM PROCEDURE FOR COND1-IV

CAUTION:
“COND1: OUT OF CONDITION”>>GO TO 4.
7.PERFORM PROCEDURE FOR COND2
take approximately 4 seconds).
CAUTION:
PLETED”
>> GO TO 9.

P0139, P0159 HO2S2
Which displayed on CONSULT-III screen? A
“CAN NOT BE DIAGNOSED”>>GO TO 10. EC
C
D
>> GO TO 5.
11.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK E
NOTE:
Use component function check the overall function of the heated oxygen sensor 2 circuit. During this F
YES >> INSPECTION END. G
H
Without CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. I
4. Let engine idle for 1 minute. J
ECM K
L
33
P0139 [HO2S2 (bank 1)
Revving up to 4,000 rpm under no
34 load at least 10 times M
ground) procedure.
P0159 [HO2S2 (bank 2)
signal]
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK-II O
.
P

P0139, P0159 HO2S2
ECM
33
P0139 [HO2S2 (bank 1)
F8 (Sensor Keeping engine at idle for 10 minutes than 0.12 V for 1 second during this
34 ground) procedure.
P0159 [HO2S2 (bank 2)
signal]
NO >> GO TO 3.
ECM
33
P0139 [HO2S2 (bank 1)
Coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH)
34 with selector lever in the D position
ground) procedure.
P0159 [HO2S2 (bank 2)
signal]

YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3.
connector.

P0139, P0159 HO2S2
HO2S2 ECM A
DTC Continuity
P0139 1 F70 1
F8 35 Existed EC
P0159 2 F71 1
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK HO2S2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT D
E
HO2S2 ECM
DTC Continuity
P0139 1 F70 4 33 F
F8 Existed
P0159 2 F71 4 34
ground. G
HO2S2
DTC Ground Continuity H
P0139 1 F70 4
Ground Not existed
P0159 2 F71 4 I
ECM
DTC Ground Continuity J
Connector Terminal
P0139 33
P0159 34 K
L
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 M
YES >> GO TO 7. N
NO >> GO TO 6.
O
CAUTION:
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. P
>> INSPECTION END

P0139, P0159 HO2S2
>> INSPECTION END

1.INSPECTION START
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III
with CONSULT-III.
PBIB3458E
NO >> GO TO 6.
Without CONSULT-III
ECM
Connector
Terminal Terminal
33
signal] 35
F8 (Sensor
ground)
signal]

P0139, P0159 HO2S2
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2-II A
EC
ECM
Connector
Terminal Terminal C
33
signal] 35
least once during this procedure. D
ground)
signal]
E
NO >> GO TO 5. F
G
ECM
+ – Condition Voltage H
Connector
Terminal Terminal
33
[HO2S2 (bank 1) The voltage should be above 0.68 V at I
signal] 35
F8 (Sensor
ground)
J
signal]
YES >> INSPECTION END K
NO >> GO TO 6.
Replace malfunctioning heated oxygen sensor 2. L
CAUTION:
in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one. M
N
>> INSPECTION END

O

The engine oil temperature sensor is used to detect the engine oil
temperature. The sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM.
The modified signal returns to the ECM as the engine oil tempera-
ture input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the
change in temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor
decreases as temperature increases.
SEF594K
<Reference data>
Engine oil temperature

[°C (°F)]
–10 (14) 4.4 7.0 - 11.4
20 (68) 3.5 2.1 - 2.9
50 (122) 2.2 0.68 - 1.00
90 (194) 0.9 0.236 - 0.260
110 (230) 0.6 0.143 - 0.153
SEF012P
(Engine oil temperature sensor) and 52 (Sensor ground).
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Trouble Diagnosis
Name
Engine oil tempera-
P0197 ture sensor circuit low
input
Engine oil tempera- • Engine oil temperature sensor
sent to ECM.
high input

1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.

A
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK EOT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

1. Disconnect engine oil temperature (EOT) sensor harness connector. D
3. Check the voltage between EOT sensor harness connector and ground.
E
EOT sensor
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK EOT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

3. Check the continuity between EOT sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.
I
EOT sensor ECM
Continuity
K
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR L
YES >> GO TO 5. M
>> INSPECTION END O

1.CHECK ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR P

2. Disconnect engine oil temperature sensor harness connector.
3. Remove engine oil temperature sensor.

4. Check resistance between engine oil temperature sensor termi-
nals by heating with hot water as shown in the figure.

20 (68) 2.1 - 2.9 kΩ
1 and 2 Temperature [°C (°F)] 50 (122) 0.68 - 1.00 kΩ
90 (194) 0.236 - 0.260 kΩ

A

PBIB0145E E

NOTE:
Refer to EC-604, "DTC Logic". G
Throttle position sensor An excessively low voltage from the TP sensor H
1 circuit low input 1 is sent to ECM. (TP sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.)
Throttle position sensor An excessively high voltage from the TP sensor • Electric throttle control actuator
P0223 (TP sensor 1)
1 circuit high input 1 is sent to ECM. I

1.PRECONDITIONING J
>> GO TO 2. L
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
O
2. Check ground connection E38. Refer to Ground Inspection in GI-38, "Circuit Inspection". P
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I


Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

Continuity
F29 4 F8 36 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.

Continuity
F29 2 F8 37 Existed
YES >> GO TO 5.
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 6.
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END


2. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. A
EC
ECM
C
Connector
Terminal Terminal
37 Fully released More than 0.36 V D

(TP sensor 1 signal) Fully depressed Less than 4.75 V
36
38
E
(TP sensor 2 signal) Fully depressed More than 0.36 V
YES >> INSPECTION END F
NO >> GO TO 2.
1. Replace electric throttle control actuator. G
H
>> INSPECTION END
I
J
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING K
>> END L

P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS
P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric element. A
knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This pressure is converted into a
voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Trouble diagnosis
DTC No. DTC detected condition Possible cause
name
Knock sensor (bank 1) An excessively low voltage from the sensor is
P0327
Knock sensor (bank 2) An excessively low voltage from the sensor is • Knock sensor
P0332
P0333

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
1. Start engine and run it for at least 5 seconds at idle speed.

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK KNOCK SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
1. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector.

P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS
Knock sensor ECM A

DTC Continuity
P0327, P0328 1 F201 2
F8 67 Existed EC
P0332, P0333 2 F202 2
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART D

• Harness for open or short between knock sensor and ECM E
F
4.CHECK KNOCK SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
G
Knock sensor ECM
DTC Continuity
H
P0327, P0328 1 F201 1 61
F8 Existed
P0332, P0333 2 F202 1 62
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. I
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5. J
Check the following. K
L
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning knock sensor. N

Refer to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident". O
>> INSPECTION END

P

2. Disconnect knock sensor harness connector.
3. Check resistance between knock sensor terminal as per the following.
NOTE:

P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS
It is necessary to use an ohmmeter which can measure more than 10 MΩ.
1 and 2 Approx. 532 - 588 kΩ [at 20°C (68°F)]
CAUTION:
Never use any knock sensors that have been dropped or physically damaged. Use only new ones.

A
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the oil pan facing EC
the gear teeth (cogs) of the signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of
When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth C
cause the gap with the sensor to change.
change. D
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor
changes.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of
JMBIA0062ZZ E
H
JMBIA0001GB

I
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

J
• The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal
[CKP sensor (POS) circuit is open or K
is not detected by the ECM during the first
shorted.]
few seconds of engine cranking.
(APP sensor 2 circuit is shorted.)
• The proper pulse signal from the crankshaft
Crankshaft position sen- (Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit is
P0335 position sensor (POS) is not sent to ECM
sor (POS) circuit shorted.) L
while the engine is running.
• Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
• The crankshaft position sensor (POS) signal
• Accelerator pedal position sensor
is not in the normal pattern during engine run-
ning. M
• Signal plate

1.PRECONDITIONING N
TESTING CONDITION: O
tion switch ON.
P
>> GO TO 2.


YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
1. Disconnect crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (POS) harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between CKP sensor (POS) harness connector and ground.
CKP sensor (POS)

Ground Voltage (V)
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR (POS) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

Continuity
F20 1 F8 76 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
ECM Sensor
F8
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Refer to EC-730, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Replace refrigerant pressure sensor.

6.CHECK APP SENSOR A

YES >> GO TO 12. EC
NO >> GO TO 7.
C
D
>> INSPECTION END
8.CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
F
Continuity
F20 2 F8 60 Existed G

YES >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK CKP SENSOR (POS) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT I

J
Continuity
F20 3 F8 65 Existed K
YES >> GO TO 10. L
M
YES >> GO TO 11. N
11.CHECK GEAR TOOTH
Visually check for chipping signal plate gear tooth. O
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> Replace the signal plate. P

>> INSPECTION END

1.CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)-I

2. Disconnect crankshaft position sensor (POS) harness connector.
YES >> GO TO 2.
JMBIA0063ZZ
2.CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)-II

Check resistance crankshaft position sensor (POS) terminals as per the following.

1 (+) - 2 (-)
1 (+) - 3 (-) Except 0 or ∞Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
2 (+) - 3 (-)

A
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the protrusion of EC

camshaft (INT) to identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft position
sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position.
When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoper-
ative, the camshaft position sensor (PHASE) provides various con- C
trols of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder identification
signals.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC. D
When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause
the gap with the sensor to change.
change.
JMBIA0064ZZ E
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
F
JMBIA0001GB
I
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

J
NOTE:
K
Camshaft position sen- • Harness or connectors
• The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM for L
P0340 sor (PHASE) (bank 1) (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
the first few seconds during engine cranking.
circuit • Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
• The cylinder No. signal is not sent to ECM
• Camshaft (INT)
Camshaft position sen- during engine running.
• Starter motor (Refer to STR-5)
P0345 sor (PHASE) (bank 2) • The cylinder No. signal is not in the normal M
• Starting system circuit (Refer to STR-5.)
circuit pattern during engine running.
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE N

1.PRECONDITIONING
O
TESTING CONDITION:
tion switch ON. P
>> GO TO 2.

NO >> GO TO 3.
1. Maintaining engine speed at more than 800 rpm for at least 5 seconds.
1.CHECK STARTING SYSTEM

Turn ignition switch to START position.
Does the engine turn over? Does the starter motor operate?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Check starting system. (Refer to STR-2, "Work Flow".)
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR (PHASE) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect camshaft position (CMP) sensor (PHASE) harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between CMP sensor (PHASE) harness connector and ground.
CMP sensor (PHASE)

P0340 1 F26 1
Ground Approx. 5
P0345 2 F69 1
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

DTC Continuity
P0340 1 F26 2 64
F8 Existed
P0345 2 F69 2 68
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK CMP SENSOR (PHASE) INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

A
DTC Continuity
EC
P0340 1 F26 3 70
F8 Existed
P0345 2 F69 3 69
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. C
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. D
Refer to EC-593, "Component Inspection". E
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning camshaft position sensor (PHASE). F
7.CHECK CAMSHAFT (INT)
• Accumulation of debris to the signal plate of camshaft rear end G
YES >> GO TO 8. H
I
JMBIA0058ZZ
J
Refer to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident". K
>> INSPECTION END

L
1.CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)-I M

3. Disconnect camshaft position sensor (PHASE) harness connector.
4. Remove the sensor. N
YES >> GO TO 2. O
NO >> Replace malfunctioning camshaft position sensor
(PHASE).
P
JMBIA0065ZZ
2.CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)-II

Check resistance camshaft position sensor (PHASE) terminals as per the following.


1 (+) - 2 (-)
1 (+) - 3 (-) Except 0 or ∞ Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
2 (+) - 3 (-)

P0500 VSS
P0500 VSS
A
The vehicle speed signal is sent to the combination meter from the “ABS actuator and electric unit (control EC
unit)” via the CAN communication line. The combination meter then sends a signal to the ECM via the CAN
communication line.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE: D
E
F
(The CAN communication line is open or short-
ed)
The almost 0 km/h (0 MPH) signal from • Harness or connectors G
P0500 Vehicle speed sensor vehicle speed signal is sent to ECM even (The vehicle speed signal circuit is open or
when vehicle is being driven. shorted)
• Wheel sensor
• Combination meter H

I
1.INSPECTION START
Will CONSULT-III be used? J
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 5.
K
2.PRECONDITIONING
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. L
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL M
NOTE:
This procedure may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle. If a
road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle. N
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine (VDC switch OFF).
2. Read “VHCL SPEED SE” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. The vehicle speed on CON- O
SULT-III should exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suitable gear position.
YES >> GO TO 4. P
2. Warm engine up to normal operating temperature.
CAUTION:

P0500 VSS

Selector lever Except P or N position
PW/ST SIGNAL OFF
Perform Component Function Check. Refer to EC-596, "Component Function Check".
Use Component Function Check to check the overall function of the vehicle speed signal circuit. During this

Without CONSULT-III
1. Lift up drive wheels.
2. Start engine.
3. Read vehicle speed with combination meter.
The vehicle speed indication should be able to exceed 10 km/h (6 MPH) when rotating wheels with suit-
able gear position.
YES >> GO TO 2.
>> INSPECTION END

P0550 PSP SENSOR
P0550 PSP SENSOR
A
Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power steering high-pressure tube and detects a EC
power steering load.
This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering load into output voltage, and emits the
voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator and adjusts the throttle valve
opening angle to increase the engine speed and adjusts the idle speed for the increased load. C
D
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
E
F
Power steering pressure An excessively low or high voltage from the
P0550 (The sensor circuit is open or shorted)
sensor circuit sensor is sent to ECM.
G
1.PRECONDITIONING
H
I
>> GO TO 2.
1. Start engine and let it idle for at least 5 seconds. J
YES >> Go to EC-597, "Diagnosis Procedure". K
L

YES >> GO TO 2. N
2.CHECK PSP SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect power steering pressure (PSP) sensor harness connector. O
3. Check the voltage between PSP sensor harness connector and ground.
P
PSP sensor
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.

P0550 PSP SENSOR
3.CHECK PSP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

PSP sensor ECM

Continuity
F62 1 F8 48 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair open circuit or short to ground short to power in harness or connectors.
4.CHECK PSP SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
PSP sensor ECM

Continuity
F62 2 F8 41 Existed
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK PSP SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Replace PSP sensor.
>> INSPECTION END

1.CHECK POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR

3. Check the voltage between ECM terminals under the following conditions.
ECM
Connector
Terminal Terminal
41 Steering wheel: Being turned. 0.5 - 4.5 V
48
F8 (Power steering pressure
(Sensor ground) Steering wheel: Not being turned. 0.4 - 0.8 V
sensor signal)
NO >> Replace power steering pressure sensor.

A
Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch EC
is turned OFF for the ECM memory function of the DTC memory, the
air-fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the idle air vol-
ume learning value memory, etc.
C
PBIA9222J E
G
ECM power supply cir- ECM back up RAM system does not function [ECM power supply (back up) circuit is
P0603
cuit properly. open or shorted.]
• ECM H

1.PRECONDITIONING I
J
>> GO TO 2.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn it ON. L
M
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004689575 N
1.CHECK ECM POWER SUPPLY

3. Check the voltage between ECM harness connector and ground.
P
ECM
+ – Voltage

YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
• 15 A fuse (No. 50)
• Harness for open or short between ECM and battery

YES >> GO TO 4.
2. Erase DTC.
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
ment".
>> INSPECTION END

P0605 ECM
P0605 ECM
A
The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal EC

input and output and for power supply. The ECM controls the engine.
PBIA9222J E
G
A) ECM calculation function is malfunctioning.
P0605 Engine control module B) ECM EEP-ROM system is malfunctioning. • ECM
C) ECM self shut-off function is malfunctioning. H
1.PRECONDITIONING I
J
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A K
Is 1st trip DTC detected? L
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B M
3. Check 1st trip DTC. N
NO >> GO TO 4. O
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 1 second. P
3. Repeat step 2 for 32 times.

P0605 ECM
1.INSPECTION START
2. Erase DTC.
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE ECM
1. Replace ECM.
ment".
>> INSPECTION END

P0607 ECM
P0607 ECM
A
D
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

E
When detecting error during the initial diagno-
P0607 CAN communication bus • ECM
sis of CAN controller of ECM.
F
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE G
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected? H
I
1.INSPECTION START
J
2. Erase DTC.
See EC-603, "DTC Logic". K
4. Check DTC.
Is the DTC P0607 displayed again?
Yes >> GO TO 2. L
No >> INSPECTION END
2.REPLACE ECM M
1. Replace ECM.
ment".
N
>> INSPECTION END

O

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Trouble diagnosis
name
(APP sensor 1 circuit is shorted.)
(TP sensor circuit is shorted.)
[CMP sensor (PHASE) circuit is shorted.)
(PSP sensor circuit is shorted.)
Sensor power supply ECM detects that the voltage of power
P0643 (Battery current sensor circuit is shorted.)
circuit short source for sensor is excessively low or high.
• Throttle position sensor
• Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
• Battery current sensor

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
3. Check DTC
Is DTC detected?

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
APP sensor
Ground Voltage (V)
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 7.

NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A
EC
ECM Sensor
47 TP sensor F29 1 C
51 Battery current sensor F76 1
F8 55 PSP sensor F62 3
D
E16 83 APP sensor E110 4 E
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. F
4.CHECK COMPONENTS
Check the following. G
• Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) (Refer to EC-593, "Component Inspection".)
• Battery current sensor (Refer to EC-620, "Component Inspection".)
• Power steering pressure sensor (Refer to EC-598, "Component Inspection".)
H
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning component.
I
5.CHECK TP SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> GO TO 6.
6.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR K

2. Go to EC-559, "Special Repair Requirement". L
>> INSPECTION END

7.CHECK APP SENSOR M
N
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> GO TO 8.
8.REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY O
P
>> INSPECTION END
>> INSPECTION END

P0850 PNP SWITCH
P0850 PNP SWITCH
When the selector lever position is P or N, park/neutral position (PNP) signal from the TCM is sent to ECM.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
The signal of the park/neutral position (PNP)
Park/neutral position [The park/neutral position (PNP) signal
P0850 signal does not change during driving after the
switch circuit is open or shorted.]
engine is started.
• TCM

1.INSPECTION START
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 5.
2.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK PNP SIGNAL
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “P/N POSI SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. Then check the “P/N POSI SW” sig-
nal under the following conditions.
Position (Selector lever) Known-good signal

N or P position ON
Except above position OFF
YES >> GO TO 4.
CAUTION:


P0850 PNP SWITCH
Is 1st trip DTC detected? A
5.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK EC

NOTE:
C
Use component function check to check the overall function of the park/neutral position (PNP) signal circuit.
During this check, a 1st trip DTC might not be confirmed.
D
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000004689586 E

1. Turn ignition switch ON. F
ECM G
Connector
Terminal Terminal
H
P or N Battery voltage
E16 102 112 Selector lever position
Except above Approx. 0 V
J

K
Refer to EC-769, "DTC Index".
YES >> GO TO 2. L
2.CHECK PNP SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-I
2. Disconnect TCM harness connector.
4. Check the continuity between TCM harness connector and IPDM E/R harness connector. N
TCM IPDM E/R

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal O
5. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. P
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK PNP SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT-II

P0850 PNP SWITCH
ECM IPDM E/R

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 4.

A
The malfunction information related to TCS is transferred via the CAN communication line from “ABS actuator EC
and electric unit (control unit)” to ECM.
C

DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause E
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control
ECM receives malfunction information from
P1211 TCS control unit unit)
“ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)”.
• TCS related parts
F
1.PRECONDITIONING G
TESTING CONDITION:
H
>> GO TO 2.
I
J
YES >> EC-609, "Diagnosis Procedure"
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004702652 K

L

This CAN communication line is used to control the smooth engine operation during the TCS operation. Pulse
signals are exchanged between ECM and “ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)”.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
ECM cannot receive the information from (The CAN communication line is open or short-
P1212 TCS communication line “ABS actuator and electric unit (control ed.)
unit)” continuously. • ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.

A

NOTE:
U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-540, "DTC Logic". C
If the cooling fan or another component in the cooling system malfunctions, engine coolant temperature will
rise. D
When the engine coolant temperature reaches an abnormally high temperature condition, a malfunction is
indicated.
E
• Cooling fan does not operate properly (Over- (The cooling fan circuit is open or short- F
heat). ed.)
• Cooling fan system does not operate proper- • IPDM E/R (Cooling fan relays)
Engine over tempera- ly (Overheat). • Cooling fan motor
P1217 G
ture (Overheat) • Engine coolant was not added to the system • Radiator hose
using the proper filling method. • Radiator
• Engine coolant is not within the specified • Radiator cap
range. • Water pump
H
• Thermostat
CAUTION:
When a malfunction is indicated, always replace the coolant. Refer to CO-8, "Draining". Also, replace
the engine oil. Refer to LU-8, "Draining". I
1. Fill radiator with coolant up to specified level with a filling speed of 2 liters per minute. Always use
coolant with the proper mixture ratio. Refer to MA-9, "Engine Coolant Mixture Ratio".
2. After refilling coolant, run engine to ensure that no water-flow noise is emitted. J
1.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK K
NOTE:
Use component function check to check the overall function of the cooling fan. During this check, a DTC might L
not be confirmed.
N
WARNING:
O
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pres-
sure fluid escaping from the radiator.
Wrap a thick cloth around cap. Carefully remove the cap by turning it a quarter turn to allow built-up
pressure to escape. Then turn the cap all the way off. P

Check the coolant level in the reservoir tank and radiator.
Allow engine to cool before checking coolant level.
Is the coolant level in the reservoir tank and/or radiator below the
proper range?
NO >> GO TO 2.
SEF621W

Confirm whether customer filled the coolant or not.
Did customer fill the coolant?
NO >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III
3. Check that cooling fan motors-1 and -2 operate at each speed (LOW/MID/HI).
Without CONSULT-III
Perform IPDM E/R auto active test and check cooling fan motors operation, refer to PCS-11, "Diagnosis
Description".
1.CHECK COOLING FAN OPERATION

With CONSULT-III
3. Check that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at each speed (LOW/MID/HI).
Without CONSULT-III
Description".
2. Check that cooling fans-1 and -2 operate at each speed (Low/Middle/High).
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKAGE-I
Check cooling system for leakage. Refer to CO-8, "Inspection".
Is leakage detected?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 4.
3.CHECK COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKAGE-II
Check the following for leakage.
• Hose
• Radiator
• Water pump

4.CHECK RADIATOR CAP A
Check radiator cap. Refer to CO-12, "RADIATOR CAP : Inspection".

YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace radiator cap.
5.CHECK THERMOSTAT C
Check thermostat. Refer to CO-24, "Inspection".
D
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Replace thermostat
6.CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR E
YES >> GO TO 7. F
7.CHECK MAIN 12 CAUSES
G
If the cause cannot be isolated, check the following.
Engine Step Inspection item Equipment Standard Reference page

H
OFF 1 • Blocked radiator • Visual No blocking —
• Blocked condenser
• Blocked radiator grille
• Blocked bumper I
2 • Coolant mixture • Coolant tester MA-8, "Fluids and Lubricants"
3 • Coolant level • Visual Coolant up to MAX level in CO-8, "Inspection"
reservoir tank and radiator J
filler neck
4 • Radiator cap • Pressure tester CO-12, "RADIATOR CAP : Inspection"
5 • Coolant leakage • Visual No leakage CO-8, "Inspection" K
ON*2
ON*2 6 • Thermostat • Touch the upper and Both hoses should be hot CO-24, "Inspection"
lower radiator hoses
L
ON*1 7 • Cooling fan • CONSULT-III Operating EC-693, "Component
Function Check"
OFF 8 • Combustion gas leak- • Color checker chemical Negative —
age tester 4 Gas analyzer M
ON*3 9 • Coolant temperature • Visual Gauge less than 3/4 when —

gauge driving
N
• Coolant overflow to res- • Visual No overflow during driving CO-8, "Inspection"
ervoir tank and idling
OFF*4 10 • Coolant return from res- • Visual Should be initial level in CO-8, "Inspection"
ervoir tank to radiator reservoir tank O
OFF 11 • Cylinder head • Straight gauge feeler 0.1 mm (0.004 in) Maxi- EM-104, "Inspection"
gauge mum distortion (warping)
12 • Cylinder block and pis- • Visual No scuffing on cylinder EM-116, "Inspection" P
tons walls or piston
*1: Turn the ignition switch ON.
*2: Engine running at 3,000 rpm for 10 minutes.
*3: Drive at 90 km/h (56 MPH) for 30 minutes and then let idle for 10 minutes.
*4: After 60 minutes of cool down time.
For more information, refer to CO-3, "Troubleshooting Chart".

>> INSPECTION END

P1225 TP SENSOR
P1225 TP SENSOR
A

PBIB0145E E
G
Closed throttle position Closed throttle position learning value is exces- • Electric throttle control actuator
P1225
learning performance sively low. (TP sensor 1 and 2)

1.PRECONDITIONING
I
TESTING CONDITION:
J
>> GO TO 2.
3. Turn ignition switch ON. L
N
2. Remove the intake air duct. O

P1225 TP SENSOR
and the housing.
YES >> GO TO 2.
JMBIA1390ZZ

>> INSPECTION END


>> GO TO 2.
>> END

P1226 TP SENSOR
P1226 TP SENSOR
A

PBIB0145E E
G
Closed throttle position Closed throttle position learning is not per- • Electric throttle control actuator
P1226
learning performance formed successfully, repeatedly. (TP sensor 1 and 2)

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
J
>> GO TO 2.


P1226 TP SENSOR
and the housing.
YES >> GO TO 2.
JMBIA1390ZZ

>> INSPECTION END


>> GO TO 2.
>> END

A
"System Diagram". D
CAUTION:
charge may occur. E
F
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
G
H
Battery current sensor circuit
P1550 sensor remains within the specified (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
range/performance
range while engine is running. • Battery current sensor
I
1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8 V at idle. K
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE L

2. Check 1st trip DTC. M
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION O

Is the inspection result normal? P
YES >> GO TO 2.


Ground Voltage (V)
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.

Continuity
F76 2 F8 44 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.

Continuity
F76 3 F8 42 Existed
YES >> GO TO 5.
YES >> GO TO 6.
>> INSPECTION END



- : Vehicle front A
- : To body ground
body ground. EC
C
ECM
ALBIA0076ZZ
+ – Voltage (V) D
Connector
Terminal Terminal
42
44
(Sensor ground)
sensor signal)
G

"System Diagram".
CAUTION:
charge may occur.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
Battery current sensor circuit An excessively low voltage from the sen-
low input sor is sent to ECM.
Battery current sensor circuit An excessively high voltage from the sen- • Battery current sensor
P1552
high input sor is sent to ECM.

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8 V with ignition
switch ON
>> GO TO 2.

YES >> GO TO 2.

2. Turn ignition switch ON. A
Battery current sensor EC

Ground Voltage (V)
Connector Terminal
C
YES >> GO TO 3.
D
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. E
Battery current sensor ECM F

Continuity
F76 2 F8 44 Existed
G
YES >> GO TO 4. H
1. Check the continuity between battery current sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector. I

Continuity J
F76 3 F8 42 Existed
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. K
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. L
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Replace battery negative cable assembly. N
O
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000004702838 P


- : Vehicle front
- : To body ground
body ground.
ECM
ALBIA0076ZZ
+ – Voltage (V)
Connector
Terminal Terminal
42
44
(Sensor ground)
sensor signal)

A
"System Diagram". D
CAUTION:
charge may occur. E
F
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
G
H
The signal voltage transmitted from the • Harness or connectors
P1553 sensor to ECM is higher than the amount (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
mance
of the maximum power generation. • Battery current sensor
I
1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8 V at idle. K
>> GO TO 2.

1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION O

YES >> GO TO 2.


Ground Voltage (V)
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.

Continuity
F76 2 F8 44 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.

Continuity
F76 3 F8 42 Existed
YES >> GO TO 5.
YES >> GO TO 6.
>> INSPECTION END



- : Vehicle front A
- : To body ground
body ground. EC
C
ECM
ALBIA0076ZZ
+ – Voltage (V) D
Connector
Terminal Terminal
42
44
(Sensor ground)
sensor signal)
G

"System Diagram".
CAUTION:
charge may occur.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
P1554 sensor is lower than the specified value (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
mance
while the battery voltage is high enough. • Battery current sensor

NOTE:
Use component function check to check the overall function of the battery current sensor circuit. During this
1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
• Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 12.8 V at idle.
• Before performing the following procedure, confirm that all load switches and A/C switch are turned
OFF.
>> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “BAT CUR SEN” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Check “BAT CUR SEN” indication for 10 seconds.
“BAT CUR SEN” should be above 2,300 mV at least once.
Without CONSULT-III
2. Check voltage between ECM harness connector terminals under the following conditions.

ECM A
+ – Voltage (V)
Connector
Terminal Terminal
EC
42
44
F8 (Battery current Above 2.3 at least once
(Sensor ground)
sensor signal)
C
NO >> Go to EC-629, "Diagnosis Procedure"
D
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION E

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT G

H

Ground Voltage (V) I
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT K

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. L

Continuity M
F76 2 F8 44 Existed
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. N
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. O
1. Check the continuity between battery current sensor harness connector and ECM harness connector. P

Continuity
F76 3 F8 42 Existed

YES >> GO TO 5.
YES >> GO TO 6.
>> INSPECTION END


- : Vehicle front
- : To body ground
body ground.
ECM
ALBIA0076ZZ
+ – Voltage (V)
Connector
Terminal Terminal
42
44
(Sensor ground)
sensor signal)

A
ASCD steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for each button. ECM reads voltage variation EC
of switch, and determines which button is operated.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE: D
E
Trouble diagnosis
name
• An excessively high voltage signal from the
ASCD steering switch is sent to ECM. F
• ECM detects that input signal from the
(The switch circuit is open or shorted.)
P1564 ASCD steering switch ASCD steering switch is out of the specified
• ASCD steering switch
range.
• ECM detects that the ASCD steering switch
• ECM G
is stuck ON.

1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
J
2. Press MAIN switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds. K
3. Press CANCEL switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds.
4. Press RESUME/ACCELERATE switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 sec-
onds.
5. Press SET/COAST switch for at least 10 seconds, then release it and wait at least 10 seconds. L
6. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
M
N

YES >> GO TO 2. P
2.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT-III
2. Select “MAIN SW”, “CANCEL SW”, “RESUME/ACC SW” and “SET SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with
CONSULT-III.

3. Check each item indication under the following conditions.

Pressed ON
MAIN SW MAIN switch
Released OFF
Pressed ON
CANCEL SW CANCEL switch
Released OFF
RESUME/ACCEL- Pressed ON
RESUME/ACC SW
ERATE switch Released OFF
Pressed ON
SET SW SET/COAST switch
Released OFF
Without CONSULT-III
ECM
Con- + – Condition Voltage (V)

nector Terminal Terminal
85 92
E16 (ASCD steering switch (ASCD steering switch SET/COAST switch: Pressed Approx. 2
signal) ground)
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Pressed Approx. 3
All ASCD steering switches: Released Approx. 4
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Disconnect combination switch harness connector.

Continuity
16 E16 92 Existed
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 4.
5.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT

Combination switch ECM A

Continuity
13 E16 85 Existed
EC
YES >> GO TO 7. C
NO >> GO TO 6.
D
• Harness for open and short between ECM and combination switch E
7.CHECK ASCD STEERING SWITCH F

Is the inspection result normal? G
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Replace ASCD steering switch.
8.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT H
I
>> INSPECTION END
J
2. Disconnect combination switch (spiral cable) harness connector. K
3. Check resistance between combination switch harness connector terminals as per the following.
Combination switch L
Condition Resistance (Ω)
Connector Terminals
M
M303 13 and 16 SET/COAST switch: Pressed Approx. 660
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Pressed Approx. 1,480 N
All ASCD steering switches: Released Approx. 4,000
O
NO >> Replace ASCD steering switch
P

When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
• This self-diagnosis has the one trip detection logic. When malfunction A is detected, DTC is not
stored in ECM memory. And in that case, 1st trip DTC and 1st trip freeze frame data are displayed.
1st trip DTC is erased when ignition switch is turned OFF. And even when malfunction A is detected
in two consecutive trips, DTC is not stored in ECM memory.
Trouble diagnosis
name
When the vehicle speed is above 30 km/h • Harness or connectors
(19 MPH), ON signals from the stop lamp (The stop lamp switch circuit is shorted.)
A)
switch and the ASCD brake switch are sent • Harness or connectors
to the ECM at the same time. (The ASCD brake switch circuit is shorted.)
P1572 ASCD brake switch • Stop lamp switch
ASCD brake switch signal is not sent to • ASCD brake switch
B) ECM for extremely long time while the ve- • Incorrect stop lamp switch installation
hicle is being driven. • Incorrect ASCD brake switch installation
• ECM

1.INSPECTION START
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 5.
2.PRECONDITIONING
NOTE:
The procedure for malfunction B is not described. It takes an extremely long time to complete the procedure
for malfunction B. By performing the procedure for malfunction A, the condition that causes malfunction B can
be detected.
>> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III
3. Press MAIN switch and check that CRUISE lamp illuminates.
CAUTION:
NOTE:

VHCL SPEED SE More than 30 km/h (19 mph) A

5. Check 1st trip DTC. EC
NO >> GO TO 4. C
With CONSULT-III
1. Drive the vehicle for at least 5 consecutive seconds under the following conditions. D
CAUTION:
NOTE: E
F
Depress the brake pedal for more than 5 G
Driving location seconds so as not to come off from the
above-mentioned vehicle speed.
2. Check 1st trip DTC. H
NO >> INSPECTION END I
Perform component check. Refer to EC-635, "Component Function Check"
J
Use component function check to check the overall function of the ASCD brake circuit. During this check, a 1st
trip DTC might not be confirmed.
K
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000004689625 L

Without CONSSULT-III M
2. Check voltage between ECM harness connector terminals as per the following.
N
ECM
+ − Condition Voltage
Connector O
Terminal Terminal

E16 112 Brake pedal P


With CONSULT-III

Fully released ON
Without CONSULT-III
ECM
Connector
Terminal Terminal

E16 112 Brake pedal
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3.
With CONSULT-III
Check “BRAKE SW2” indication in “DATA MONITOR” mode.

Slightly depressed ON
Fully released OFF
Without CONSULT-III
ECM
Connector
Terminal Terminal

E16 112 Brake pedal
YES >> GO TO 12.
NO >> GO TO 7.

ASCD brake switch A

Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
EC
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 4. C
• Fuse block (J/B) connector E103 D
• 10 A fuse (No. 3)
E
5.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT F
G

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal H
YES >> GO TO 6.
J
Refer to EC-638, "Component Inspection (ASCD Brake Switch)"
YES >> GO TO 12.
7.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT L

3. Check the voltage between stop lamp switch harness connector and ground. M
Stop lamp switch

Ground Voltage N
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO >> GO TO 8.
8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART P

• 10 A fuse (No. 7)
• Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and battery


Continuity
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> GO TO 10.
• Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and ECM
Refer to EC-639, "Component Inspection (Stop Lamp Switch)"
YES >> GO TO 12.
>> INSPECTION END



1 and 2 Brake pedal
NO >> GO TO 2.
1. Adjust ASCD brake switch installation. Refer to BR-7, "Inspection and Adjustment" (LHD models) or BR-
49, "Inspection and Adjustment" (RHD models).

1 and 2 Brake pedal

NO >> Replace ASCD brake switch. A
1.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH-I EC

3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals under the following conditions. C

D
1 and 2 Brake pedal
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH-II F
1. Adjust stop lamp switch installation. Refer to BR-7, "Inspection and Adjustment" (LHD models) or BR-49,
"Inspection and Adjustment" (RHD models).
2. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals under the following conditions. G

H
1 and 2 Brake pedal
J

The ECM receives two vehicle speed signals via CAN communication line. One is sent from combination
meter, and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses these signals for ASCD con-
trol. Refer to EC-466, "System Diagram" for ASCD functions.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
• If DTC P1574 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
Trouble diagnosis
name
(The CAN communication line is open or
shorted.)
ASCD vehicle speed The difference between the two vehicle speed • Combination meter
P1574
sensor signals is out of the specified range. • ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
• Wheel sensor
• TCM
• ECM

1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
2. Drive the vehicle at more than 40 km/h (25 MPH).
CAUTION:
NOTE:
3. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?

Check DTC with TCM. Refer to TM-39, "Diagnosis Description".
YES >> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK DTC WITH “ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)” A

YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION C
D
>> INSPECTION END

This DTC is displayed with other DTC regarding TCM. Perform the trouble diagnosis for corresponding DTC.
Refer to EC-769, "DTC Index". When this DTC is detected, the ASCD control is canceled.

A
ECM receives primary speed sensor signal from TCM via the CAN communication line. ECM uses this signal EC
for engine control.
C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
NOTE:
• If DTC P1715 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001 first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, D
E
• If DTC P1715 is displayed with DTC P0340, P0345, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC P0340,
P0345. Refer to EC-591, "DTC Logic".
to EC-601, "DTC Logic". F
G
(The CAN communication line is open or short- H
Primary speed sensor signal is different
Input speed sensor ed)
from the theoretical value calculated by
P1715 (Primary speed sensor) • Harness or connectors
ECM from secondary sensor signal and
(TCM output) (Primary speed sensor circuit is open or short-
engine rpm signal.
ed) I
• TCM

J
1.PRECONDITIONING
least 10 seconds before conducting the next test. K
>> GO TO 2.
1. Start engine.
2. Drive vehicle at a speed of more than 50 km/h (31 MPH) for at least 5 seconds.
O
Check DTC with TCM. Refer to TM-134, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart".
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE TCM
Replace TCM. Refer to TM-168, "Removal and Installation".

>> INSPECTION END

P1720 VSS
P1720 VSS
A
ECM receives two vehicle speed signals via the CAN communication line. One is sent from “ABS actuator and EC
electric unit (control unit)” via combination meter, and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module).
ECM uses these signals for engine control.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE: D
• If DTC P1720 is displayed with DTC U1000, U1001 first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
E
F
(Secondary speed sensor circuit is open or
shorted.)
• Harness or connectors G
Vehicle speed sensor The difference between two vehicle speed (Wheel sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
P1720
(TCM output) signals is out of the specified range. • TCM
• Secondary speed sensor
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) H
• Wheel sensor
• Combination meter
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE I
1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2. K
1. Start engine. L
2. Drive vehicle at a speed of 20 km/h (12 MPH) or more for at least 5 seconds without depressing the brake
pedal.
N
1.CHECK DTC WITH TCM O

Check DTC with TCM. Refer to TM-134, "DTC Index".
YES >> GO TO 2. P
Refer to BRC-97, "DTC No. Index".
YES >> GO TO 3.

P1720 VSS

Refer to MWI-84, "DTC Index".
>> INSPECTION END

A
The VIAS control solenoid valve 1 cuts the intake manifold vacuum signal for power valve 1 control. It EC
C
P1800 is sent to ECM through the VIAS control
circuit shorted.)
solenoid valve 1.
F
1.CONDITIONING
G
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm battery voltage is more than 11 V at idle. H
>> GO TO 2.
I
2. Check 1st trip DTC. J
NO >> INSPECTION END K
1.CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT L

VIAS control solenoid valve 1 N

Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
O
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. P
nector.

VIAS control solenoid valve 1 ECM

Continuity
F74 2 F7 27 Existed
YES >> GO TO 3.
YES >> GO TO 4.
>> INSPECTION END


With CONSULT-III

(VIAS S/V 1) between (A) and (B) between (A) and (C)
JMBIA0180ZZ
Without CONSULT-III

Condition
Existed Not existed

A
EC

The VIAS control solenoid valve 2 cuts the intake manifold vacuum signal for power valve 2 control. It
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
P1801 is sent to ECM through the VIAS control
circuit shorted.)
solenoid valve 2.

1.CONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
1.CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT


Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 2.
nector.

VIAS control solenoid valve 2 ECM A

Continuity
F75 2 F7 26 Existed
EC
YES >> GO TO 3. C
D
YES >> GO TO 4. E
Refer to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident". F
>> INSPECTION END

G
1.CHECK VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 2 H

With CONSULT-III
2. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. I
6. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the J
Condition Air passage continuity Air passage continuity K

(VIAS S/V 2) between (A) and (B) between (A) and (C)
L
M
JMBIA0180ZZ
Without CONSULT-III
4. Check air passage continuity and operation delay time under the O
Air passage continuity Air passage continuity P

Condition
Existed Not existed


P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
A
Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp switch when the brake pedal is depressed. EC
This signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is being driven.
C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause D
A brake switch signal is not sent to ECM for ex-
(Stop lamp switch circuit is open or short-
P1805 Brake switch tremely long time while the vehicle is being driv-
ed.) E
en.
• Stop lamp switch

F
2. Fully depress the brake pedal for at least 5 seconds. G
3. Erase the DTC.
Is 1st trip DTC detected? H
I
1.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH CIRCUIT

J
2. Check the stop lamp when depressing and releasing the brake pedal.
K
Brake pedal Stop lamp
Fully released Not illuminated
Slightly depressed Illuminated L
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2. M
1. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. N
Stop lamp switch

Ground Voltage O
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
• 10 A fuse (No. 7)

P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
• Harness for open or short between battery and stop lamp switch

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
• Harness for open or short between ECM and stop lamp switch
YES >> GO TO 7.
>> INSPECTION END

1.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH-I


1 and 2 Brake pedal
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH-II
1. Adjust stop lamp switch installation. Refer to BR-7, "Inspection and Adjustment" (LHD models) or BR-49,
"Inspection and Adjustment" (RHD models).

P1805 BRAKE SWITCH
Terminals Condition Continuity A

1 and 2 Brake pedal
EC
NO >> Replace stop lamp switch. C

Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay. The throttle
control motor relay is controlled ON/OFF by the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the ECM sends
an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is provided to the ECM. When the ignition
switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not
provided to the ECM.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Throttle control motor ECM detects that the voltage of power source (Throttle control motor relay circuit is
P2100
relay circuit open for throttle control motor is excessively low. open)
Throttle control motor ECM detects that the throttle control motor relay (Throttle control motor relay circuit is
P2103
relay circuit short is stuck ON. shorted)

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 8 V.
Witch DTC is detected?
P2100 >> GO TO 2.
P2103 >> GO TO 3.
3. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
1.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT


IPDM E/R ECM A

Continuity
EC
YES >> GO TO 2. C
D
IPDM E/R ECM

Continuity E
F12 54 F7 2 Existed
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. F
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK FUSE
1. Disconnect 15 A fuse (No. 51) from IPDM E/R. H
YES >> GO TO 4. I
NO >> Replace 15A fuse.
Refer to GI-36, "Intermittent Incident". J
K

Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
Electric throttle control Electric throttle control function does not oper- (Throttle control motor circuit is open or
P2101
performance ate properly. shorted)
• Electric throttle control actuator

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
Before performing the following procedure, confirm that battery voltage is more than 11 V when
engine is running.
>> GO TO 2.
3. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT-I

ECM A
EC
Ignition switch OFF Approx. 0 V
F7 2 E16 112
Ignition switch ON Battery voltage
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II D

E
IPDM E/R ECM

F
Continuity
F12 70 F7 15 Existed G
YES >> GO TO 4. H
I
IPDM E/R ECM J

Continuity
F12 54 F7 2 Existed
K
YES >> GO TO 5. L
5.CHECK FUSE
1. Disconnect 15 A fuse (No. 51) from IPDM E/R. M
YES >> GO TO 6. N
O
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. P
7.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN OR SHORT
nector.


Continuity
5 Not existed
5
6 Existed
F29 F7
5 Existed
6
6 Not existed
YES >> GO TO 8.
and the housing.
YES >> GO TO 9.
JMBIA1390ZZ

YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> GO TO 11.
YES >> GO TO 11.
>> INSPECTION END


5 and 6 Approx. 1 - 15 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]

NO >> GO TO 2. A
EC
>> INSPECTION END

C
1.PERFORM THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING D

E
>> GO TO 2.
Refer to EC-432, "IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement" F
>> END
G

DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Throttle control motor ECM detects short in both circuits between (Throttle control motor circuit is shorted.)
P2118
circuit short ECM and throttle control motor. • Electric throttle control actuator
(Throttle control motor)

1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
3. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to EC-662, "DTC Logic".

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
nector.

Continuity
5 Not existed
5
6 Existed
F29 F7
5 Existed
6
6 Not existed

YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR EC

YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 5.
E
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR F
G
>> INSPECTION END
H
J
5 and 6 Approx. 1 - 15 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR L

M
>> INSPECTION END

Special Repair Requirement INFOID:0000000004702816 N

Refer to EC-432, "THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement" O
>> GO TO 2.
P
>> END

Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc.
The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position, and the opening and closing speed of the throt-
tle valve and sends the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle
valve from these signals and opens/closes the throttle valve in response to driving conditions via the throttle
control motor.
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Electric throttle control actuator does not func-
A) tion properly due to the return spring malfunc-
tion.
Electric throttle control
P2119 Throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is • Electric throttle control actuator
actuator B)
not in specified range.
ECM detects that the throttle valve is stuck
C)
open.

1.PRECONDITIONING
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B
8. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn ON.
9. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
NO >> GO TO 3.
3. Shift selector lever position to N or P.
5. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?

A
2. Remove the intake air duct. EC
and the housing.
- Electric throttle control actuator (2) C
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Remove the foreign matter and clean the electric throttle D
E
JMBIA1390ZZ
2.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR F

G
>> INSPECTION END
H
I
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING J
K
>> END


these signals.
PBIB1741E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
Accelerator pedal posi-
An excessively low voltage from the APP sen-
P2122 tion sensor 1 circuit low • Harness or connectors
sor 1 is sent to ECM.
input (APP sensor 1 circuit is open or shorted.)
Accelerator pedal posi- • Accelerator pedal position sensor
An excessively high voltage from the APP sen- (APP sensor 1)
P2123 tion sensor 1 circuit high
input

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?

YES >> GO TO 2.

2.CHECK APP SENSOR 1 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT A

EC
APP sensor
Ground Voltage (V)
Connector Terminal C
YES >> GO TO 3. D
3.CHECK APP SENSOR 1 GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT E
F
APP sensor ECM

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal G
H
YES >> GO TO 4.
I
J
APP sensor ECM
Continuity
K
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK APP SENSOR M
N
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 6.
6.REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY O
P
>> INSPECTION END
>> INSPECTION END


ECM
Connector
Terminal Terminal
84
(APP sensor 1
signal)
100
(APP sensor 2
signal)
NO >> GO TO 2.
>> INSPECTION END


ment".
>> GO TO 2.
>> GO TO 3.
>> END

A

these signals.
PBIB1741E E
F
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible cause G
Accelerator pedal posi- • Harness or connectors
An excessively low voltage from the APP sen-
P2127 tion sensor 2 circuit low (APP sensor 2 circuit is open or shorted.)
input [CKP sensor (POS) circuit is shorted.] H
shorted.)
Accelerator pedal posi- • Accelerator pedal position sensor
An excessively high voltage from the APP sen-
P2128 tion sensor 2 circuit high (APP sensor 2)
sor 2 is sent to ECM. I
input • Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE J

1.PRECONDITIONING
If DTC Confirmation Procedure has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at K
TESTING CONDITION:
L
>> GO TO 2.
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected? N
O
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION P

YES >> GO TO 2.
APP sensor
Ground Voltage (V)
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
APP sensor ECM

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 4.
ECM Sensor
F8
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK COMPONENTS
YES >> GO TO 10.
APP sensor ECM

Continuity

YES >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
EC
APP sensor ECM

Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal C
YES >> GO TO 8.
E
8.CHECK APP SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> GO TO 9.
9.REPLACE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY G

H
>> INSPECTION END

10.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT I
J
>> INSPECTION END
K
ECM M
Connector
Terminal Terminal
N
84
(APP sensor 1
signal)
82 Fully released 0.25 - 0.50 O
100
(APP sensor 2
signal)
NO >> GO TO 2.

>> INSPECTION END

ment".
>> GO TO 2.
>> GO TO 3.
>> END

P2135 TP SENSOR
P2135 TP SENSOR
A

PBIB0145E E

NOTE:
EC-604, "DTC Logic". G
• Harness or connector H
Throttle position sensor Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM (TP sensor 1 or 2 circuit is open or short-
P2135 circuit range/perfor- compared with the signals from TP sensor 1 ed.)
mance and TP sensor 2. • Electric throttle control actuator
I
(TP sensor 1 or 2)

1.PRECONDITIONING J
K
TESTING CONDITION:
L
>> GO TO 2.
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?
O
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

P2135 TP SENSOR

Ground Voltage (V)
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
nector.

Continuity
F29 4 F8 36 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
nector.

Continuity
2 37
F29 F8 Existed
3 38
YES >> GO TO 5.
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 6.
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END

P2135 TP SENSOR
A
2. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected. EC
5. Shift selector lever position to D. C
ECM D
Connector
Terminal Terminal
E
36
38 (TP sensor 2 F
YES >> INSPECTION END G
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.REPLACE ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR H
I
>> INSPECTION END
J
K
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM IDLE AIR VOLUME LEARNING L
M
>> END

P2138 APP SENSOR
P2138 APP SENSOR

these signals.
PBIB1741E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

NOTE:
(APP sensor 1 or 2 circuit is open or
shorted.)
[CKP sensor (POS) circuit is shorted.]
Accelerator pedal posi- Rationally incorrect voltage is sent to ECM
P2138 tion sensor circuit range/ compared with the signals from APP sensor 1
shorted.)
performance and APP sensor 2.
(APP sensor 1 or 2)
• Crankshaft position sensor (POS)

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
2. Check DTC.
Is DTC detected?


P2138 APP SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace ground connection. A
EC
APP sensor
C
Ground Voltage (V)
Connector Terminal
E110 4 Ground Approx. 5 D
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. E
F
APP sensor
Ground Voltage (V) G
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK APP SENSOR 2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II I

2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. J
APP sensor ECM

Continuity K
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT M
N
ECM Sensor
72 Refrigerant pressure sensor E300 1 O
F8
P
YES >> GO TO 6.
6.CHECK COMPONENTS

P2138 APP SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 11.
7.CHECK APP SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
APP sensor ECM

Continuity
2 84
E110 E16 Existed
1 100
YES >> GO TO 8.
APP sensor ECM

Continuity
3 81
E110 E16 Existed
6 82
YES >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK APP SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO >> GO TO 10.
>> INSPECTION END

Refer to GI-38, "Circuit Inspection".
>> INSPECTION END



P2138 APP SENSOR
ECM A
Connector
Terminal Terminal
EC
84
(APP sensor 1
signal)
E16 Accelerator pedal C
100
(APP sensor 2
signal)
NO >> GO TO 2.
E
2. Go to EC-679, "Special Repair Requirement". F
>> INSPECTION END

G

H
ment".
I
>> GO TO 2.
Refer to EC-432, "THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING : Special Repair Requirement". J
>> GO TO 3.
K
L
>> END

JMBIA0112GB
mately 800°C (1,472°F).
PBIB3354E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC

To judge the malfunction, the A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F sensor 1 signal is monitored so it will
not shift to LEAN side or RICH side.
DTC No. Trouble diagnosis name DTC detecting condition Possible Cause
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 • The output voltage computed by ECM from the
P2A00 (bank 1) circuit range/per- • A/F sensor 1
A/F sensor 1 signal shifts to the lean side for a
formance • A/F sensor 1 heater
specified period.
• Fuel pressure
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 • The A/F signal computed by ECM from the A/F
• Fuel injector
P2A03 (bank 2) circuit range/per- sensor 1 signal shifts to the rich side for a spec-
formance ified period.

1.PRECONDITIONING
TESTING CONDITION:
>> GO TO 2.
3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute under no load.
5. Keep engine speed between 2,500 and 3,000 rpm for 20 minutes.

Is 1st trip DTC detected? A
EC
1.CHECK GROUND CONNECTION C

YES >> GO TO 2.
2.RETIGHTEN A/F SENSOR 1 E
Loosen and retighten the A/F sensor 1. Refer to EM-34, "Removal and Installation".
F
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
1. Disconnect A/F sensor 1 harness connector. G
YES >> GO TO 4. H
NO >> Repair or replace harness connector.
I
Is intake air leakage detected? J
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CLEAR THE MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING VALUE K
2. Run engine for at least 10 minutes at idle speed. L
or EC-209, "DTC Logic". M
NO >> GO TO 6.
N
O
A/F sensor
P
P2A00 1 F27 4
P2A03 2 F64 4
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 7.
• 15 A fuse (No. 46)

A/F sensor 1 ECM

DTC Continuity
1 45
P2A00 1 F27
2 49 Existed
F8
1 53
P2A03 2 F64
2 57
and ground.
A/F sensor 1
1
P2A00 1 F27
2
Ground Not existed
1
P2A03 2 F64
2
ECM
Connector Terminal
45
P2A00
49
53
P2A03
57
YES >> GO TO 9.
YES >> GO TO 10.
CAUTION:
Cleaner [commercial service tool (J-43897-18 or J-43897-12)] and approved anti-seize lubricant.

>> INSPECTION END A
EC

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is turned ON.
1.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH FUNCTION

With CONSULT-III

Fully released ON
Without CONSULT-III
ECM
Connector
Terminal Terminal
E16 (ASCD brake 112 Brake pedal
switch signal) Fully released Battery voltage


ASCD brake switch

Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
• 10 A fuse (No. 3)

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
3.CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT A

EC

Continuity C
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. E
Refer to EC-685, "Component Inspection (ASCD Brake Switch)". F
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace ASCD brake switch. G
H
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection (ASCD Brake Switch) INFOID:0000000004702846 I

1. Turn ignition switch OFF. J
K
1 and 2 Brake pedal L
NO >> GO TO 2.
1. Adjust ASCD brake switch installation. Refer to BR-7, "Inspection and Adjustment" (LHD models) or BR- N
49, "Inspection and Adjustment" (RHD models).
O
1 and 2 Brake pedal P

ASCD INDICATOR
ASCD INDICATOR
ASCD indicator lamp illuminates to indicate ASCD operation status. CRUISE is integrated in combination
meter.
CRUISE illuminates when MAIN switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON to indicated that ASCD system
is ready for operation.
1.CHECK ASCD INDICATOR FUNCTION

Check ASCD indicator under the following conditions.
ASCD INDICATOR CONDITION SPECIFICATION

• MAIN switch: Pressed at the
1st time →at the 2nd time
1.CHECK DTC
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-540, "Diagnosis Procedure".
YES >> GO TO 3.

A/F SENSOR 1
A/F SENSOR 1
A
JMBIA0112GB E
mately 800°C (1,472°F).
G
PBIB3354E

I

J
2. Select “A/F ALPHA-B1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Check “A/F ALPHA-B1” indication with engine idling.
K
A/F ALPHA-B1 indication: Remain between 75 - 125 %
L
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK-II M
1. Select “A/F SEN1(B1)” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III.
2. Check “A/F SEN1(B1)” indication with engine idling.
N
A/F SEN1(B1) indication: Fluctuates between 2.0 - 2.3 V
YES >> INSPECTION END O
P
YES >> GO TO 2.

A/F SENSOR 1

A/F sensor 1
Ground Voltage
1 F27 4
2 F64 4
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
• 15 A fuse (No. 46)
• Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse

A/F sensor 1 ECM

Continuity
1 45
1 F27
2 49
F8 Existed
1 53
2 F64
2 57
and ground.
A/F sensor 1
Ground Continuity
1
1 F27
2
Ground Not existed
1
2 F64
2
ECM
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
45
49
53
57

A/F SENSOR 1
YES >> GO TO 5.
EC
YES >> GO TO 6.
C
CAUTION: D
• Before installing new A/F sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Oxygen Sensor Thread E
Cleaner (commercial service tool) and approved anti-seize lubricant (commercial service tool).
>> INSPECTION END F

A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Sensor Input Signal to ECM ECM function Actuator

Engine speed Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
heater control heater
The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the A/F sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine operating
condition to keep the temperature of A/F sensor 1 element at the specified range.
1.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER FUNCTION

2. Check the voltage between ECM harness connector and ground under the following condition.
ECM
+ – Condition Voltage signal
4 2.9 - 8.8 V
(A/F sensor 1 heater signal)
F7 E16 112 At idle

8
(A/F sensor 2 heater signal)
JMBIA0902GB

YES >> GO TO 2.
1. Disconnect air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 harness connector.
A/F sensor 1
Ground Voltage
1 F27 4
2 F64 4

A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
YES >> GO TO 4. A
NO >> GO TO 3.
EC
• 15 A fuse (No. 46)
• Harness for open or short between A/F sensor 1 and fuse C

D
4.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. E
3. Check harness continuity between A/F sensor 1 harness connector and ECM harness connector.
A/F sensor 1 ECM F

Continuity
1 F27 3 4
F7 Existed G
2 F64 3 8
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER I
J
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 6.
6.REPLACE AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 K
CAUTION:
• Discard any A/F sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a L
M
>> INSPECTION END

>> INSPECTION END O
P
1.CHECK AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1
3. Check resistance between A/F sensor 1 terminals as per the following.

A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
3 and 4 1.8 - 2.44 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
3 and 1, 2 ∞Ω
4 and 1, 2 (Continuity should not exist)

NO >> GO TO 2.
Replace air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1.
CAUTION:
• Discard any sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 in) onto a hard
surface such as a concrete floor; use a new one.
• Before installing new sensor, clean exhaust system threads using Heated Oxygen Sensor Thread
>> INSPECTION END

COOLING FAN
COOLING FAN
A
The ECM controls the cooling fan corresponding to the vehicle speed, engine coolant temperature, refrigerant EC
COOLING FAN MOTOR
The cooling fan operates at each speed when the current flows in the cooling fan motor as per the following. C
Cooling fan motor terminals

Cooling fan speed
(+) (−) D
1 3 and 4
2 3 and 4
Middle (MID) E
1 and 2 3
1 and 2 4
High (HI) 1 and 2 3 and 4 F
The cooling fan operates at low (LOW) speed when cooling fan motors-1 and -2 are circuited in series under
the middle speed condition.
Refer to EC-474, "System Diagram". G
H
1.CHECK COOLING FAN FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON. I
Without CONSULT-III J
Description".
K
L
1.CHECK COOLING FAN RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT M

2. Disconnect cooling fan relays-2, -3.
3. Turn ignition switch ON. N
4. Check the voltage between cooling fan relays-2, -3 harness connectors and ground.
Cooling fan relay O

Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
E57 2
(cooling fan relay-2) P
5
E59 2
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.

COOLING FAN

• 40 A fusible link (letter K)
• 10 A fuse (No. 42)
3.CHECK COOLING FAN RELAY OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
3. Check the continuity between cooling fan relay-2, -3 harness connectors and IPDM E/R harness connec-
tor.
Cooling fan relay IPDM E/R

Continuity
E57
1 E11 42
Existed
E59
1 E10 34
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
2. Check the voltage between cooling fan motor-1 harness connector and ground.
Cooling fan motor-1

Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
1
E301 Ground Battery voltage
2
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
• 40 A fusible link (letter M)
• Harness for open or short between cooling fan motor-1 and battery
6.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR CIRCUIT-I
2. Check the continuity between cooling fan relay-2, -3 harness connectors and cooling fan motor-1, -2 har-
ness connectors.

COOLING FAN
Cooling fan relay Cooling fan motor A

Continuity
E302
3 2 EC
7 3
Existed C
E302
3 1
7 4 D
E
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 7.
• Harness for open or short between cooling fan motor-1 and cooling fan relay-2 G
H
8.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR CIRCUIT-II I
1. Check the continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and cooling fan motor-1, -2 harness connec-
tor.
J
IPDM E/R Cooling fan motor
Continuity
K
E301
35 4
E10 Existed
E302
38
1 L

YES >> GO TO 10.
NO >> GO TO 9.
9.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART N
• Harness for open or short between cooling fan motor-1 and IPDM E/R O
>> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. P
10.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR CIRCUIT-III
1. Check the continuity between cooling fan relay-2, -3 harness connectors and ground.

COOLING FAN
Cooling fan motor

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
E57
6
Ground Existed
E59
6
YES >> GO TO 11.
11.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR CIRCUIT-IV
1. Check the continuity between cooling fan motor-2 harness connector and ground.
Cooling fan motor-2

Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
3
E302 Ground Existed
4
YES >> GO TO 12.
12.CHECK COOLING FAN RELAYS-2 AND -3
Refer to EC-697, "Component Inspection (Cooling Fan Relay)".
YES >> GO TO 13.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning cooling fan relay.
13.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTORS-1 AND -2
Refer to EC-696, "Component Inspection (Cooling Fan Motor)".
YES >> GO TO 14.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning cooling fan motor.
NO >> Repair or replace harness connectors.
Component Inspection (Cooling Fan Motor) INFOID:0000000004689705
1.CHECK COOLING FAN MOTOR

2. Disconnect cooling fan motor harness connector.
3. Supply cooling fan motor terminals with battery voltage and check operation.

COOLING FAN
Terminals A
Condition
(+) (−)
1 3 and 4
EC
2 3 and 4
A
Cooling fan motor 1 and 2 3
1 and 2 4 C
B 1, 2 3, 4
Check that cooling fan speed of condition B is higher than that of A.
D
NO >> Replace cooling fan motor.
E
Component Inspection (Cooling Fan Relay) INFOID:0000000004689706
1.CHECK COOLING FAN RELAY F

1. Disconnect cooling fan relays -2, -3 harness connectors.
2. Check continuity between cooling fan relay -2, -3 terminals
under the following conditions. G
Terminals Conditions Continuity

12 V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2 Existed H
3 and 5
6 and 7 No current supply Not existed
NO >> Replace cooling fan relay.
SEF745U

The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, rear window defogger switch signal, etc.) is transferred via
the CAN communication line.
1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH FUNCTION

3. Select “LOAD SIGNAL” and check indication under the following conditions.

ON ON
LOAD SIGNAL Rear window defogger switch
OFF OFF
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK LIGHTING SWITCH FUNCTION
Check “LOAD SIGNAL” indication under the following conditions.

ON at 2nd position ON
LOAD SIGNAL Lighting switch
OFF OFF
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK HEATER FAN CONTROL SWITCH FUNCTION
Select “HEATER FAN SW” and check indication under the following conditions.

ON ON
HEATER FAN SW Heater fan control switch
OFF OFF
1.INSPECTION START
Confirm the malfunctioning circuit (rear window defogger, headlamp or heater fan). Refer to EC-698, "Compo-
nent Function Check".
Which circuit is related to the incident?
Rear window defogger>>GO TO 2.
Headlamp>>GO TO 3.
Heater fan>>GO TO 4.
2.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM
Refer to DEF-4, "Work Flow".

>> INSPECTION END
3.CHECK HEADLAMP SYSTEM A
Refer to EXL-10, "Work Flow" (EXCEPT FOR ZAF) or EXL-237, "Work Flow" (FOR SOUTH AFRICA).
EC
>> INSPECTION END
4.CHECK HEATER FAN CONTROL SYSTEM
C
Refer to HA-3, "Work Flow".
>> INSPECTION END D

The electronic controlled engine mount control solenoid valve controls the intake manifold vacuum signal for
electronic controlled engine mount. The electronic controlled engine mount control solenoid valve is moved by
ON/OFF signal from the ECM. When the solenoid is OFF, the vacuum signal from the intake manifold is cut.
When the solenoid is ON, the intake manifold vacuum signal is sent to the electronic controlled engine mount.
1.CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION

2. Selector level position is D while depressing the brake pedal and parking brake pedal.
4. Check that body vibration increases compared to the condition of step 2 above (with vehicle stopped).
1.CHECK VACUUM SOURCE

3. Disconnect vacuum hose connected to electronic controlled engine mount.
5. Check vacuum hose for vacuum existence.
Vacuum should exist.

YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK VACUUM HOSES AND VACUUM GALLERY
2. Check vacuum hoses and vacuum gallery for clogging, cracks or improper connection. Refer to EC-482,
"System Diagram".
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace vacuum hoses and vacuum gallery.
3.CHECK ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY
CIRCUIT
3. Check the voltage between front electronic controlled engine mount harness connector and ground.
Electronic controlled engine mount

control solenoid valve Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> GO TO 4.
• Harness connectors E6, F123 A
• 10 A fuse (No. 3)
• Harness for open or short between electronic controlled engine mount control solenoid valve and fuse
EC
5.CHECK ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIG- C
NAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
2. Check the continuity between ECM harness connector and electronic controlled engine mount control D
solenoid valve harness connector.
Electronic controlled engine E

ECM
mount control solenoid valve Continuity
F7 28 F11 2 Existed F
G
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness connectors.
6.CHECK ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE H
YES >> GO TO 7. I
NO >> Replace electronic controlled engine mount control solenoid valve.
7.CHECK ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED ENGINE MOUNT J
2. Install vacuum pump (A) to electronic controlled engine mount
(1).
K
3. Check that a vacuum is maintained when applying the vacuum
of -40 kPa (-400 mbar, -0.41 kg/cm2, -5.8 psi) to electronic con-
trolled engine mount.
4. Also visually check electronic controlled engine mount. L
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Replace electronic controlled engine mount. M
MBIB1237E

O
YES >> Replace intake manifold collector.
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000004689713 P

With CONSULT-III

5. Select “ENGINE MOUNTING” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.

(ENGINE MOUNTING) between (A) and (B) between (A) and (C)
TRVL Existed Not existed
IDLE Not existed Existed
Without CONSULT-III
2. Disconnect electronic controlled engine mount control solenoid JMBIA0180ZZ
valve harness connector.


Condition
Existed Not existed
NO >> Replace electronic controlled engine mount control sole-

noid valve.

EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
A
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve is used to EC

control the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The EVAP
canister purge volume control solenoid valve is moved by ON/OFF
pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse, the greater the
amount of fuel vapor that will flow through the valve. C
PBIB3489E E
1.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION F
With CONSULT-III
2. Disconnect the EVAP purge hose from EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve (EVAP canis- G
ter side).
4. Select “PURG VOL C/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode wit CONSULT-III. H
5. Touch “Qu” and “Qd” on CONSULT-III screen to adjust “PURG VOL C/V” and check vacuum existence
I
PURG VOL C/V Vacuum
100% Existed
0% Not existed J
Without CONSULT-III
2. Disconnect the EVAP purge hose from EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve (EVAP canis- K
ter side).
4. Check vacuum existence under the following conditions. L
Condition Vacuum
At idle Not existed M
Approximately 2,000 rpm Existed
N
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004689716 O
1.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
4. Check the voltage between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector and
ground.


solenoid valve Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
• Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and IPDM E/R
• Harness for open or short between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve and ECM
3.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
FOR OPEN AND SHORT
3. Check the continuity between EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve harness connector and
ECM harness connector.
EVAP canister purge volume con-

ECM
trol solenoid valve Continuity
F30 2 F7 25 Existed
4.CHECK EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
With CONSULT-III
2. Start engine.
3. Perform “PURG VOL C/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III. Check that engine speed varies
according to the valve opening.
Does engine speed vary according to the valve opening?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve.
>> INSPECTION END

A
With CONSULT-III
EC
4. Turn ignition switch ON. C
5. Select “PURG VOL C/V” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with CONSULT-III.
6. Touch “Qd” and “Qu” on CONSULT-III screen to adjust “PURG
VOL C/V” opening and check air passage continuity of EVAP D
canister purge volume control solenoid valve under the following
conditions.
E
Condition Air passage continuity
(PURG VOL C/V value) between (A) and (B)
100% Existed
F
0% Not existed
PBIB2058E
G
Without CONSULT-III
H
4. Check air passage continuity of EVAP canister purge volume
control solenoid valve under the following conditions.
I
Air passage continuity
Condition
between (A) and (B)
12 V direct current supply between J
Existed
terminals 1 and 2
No supply Not existed
K
NO >> Replace EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid

valve L

FUEL INJECTOR
FUEL INJECTOR
The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM
supplies a ground to the fuel injector circuit, the coil in the fuel injec-
tor is energized. The energized coil pulls the ball valve back and
allows fuel to flow through the fuel injector into the intake manifold.
The amount of fuel injected depends upon the injection pulse dura-
tion. Pulse duration is the length of time the fuel injector remains
open. The ECM controls the injection pulse duration based on
engine fuel needs.
PBIA9664J
1.INSPECTION START
Turn ignition switch to START.
Are any cylinders ignited?
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR FUNCTION
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.
Without CONSULT-III
1. Start engine.

PBIB3332E
1.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

4. Check the voltage between fuel injector harness connector and ground.

FUEL INJECTOR
Fuel injector A
Ground Voltage
1 F37 1
EC
2 F38 1
3 F39 1
4 F40 1 C
5 F41 1
6 F42 1
D
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2. E
• 10 A fuse (No. 44) F
• Harness for open or short between fuel injector and IPDM E/R
G
3.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
H
3. Check the continuity between fuel injector harness connector and ECM harness connector.
I
Fuel injector ECM
Continuity
Cylinder Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
J
1 F37 2 32
2 F38 2 31
3 F39 2 30 K
F7 Existed
4 F40 2 29
5 F41 2 3
L
6 F42 2 1
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK FUEL INJECTOR N

YES >> GO TO 5.

FUEL INJECTOR

3. Check resistance between fuel injector terminals as per the fol-
lowing.
1 and 2 11.1 - 14.5 Ω [at 10 - 60°C (50 - 140°F)]
PBIB1727E

FUEL PUMP
FUEL PUMP
A
EC
Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM Function Actuator
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) Fuel pump relay
Engine speed*
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) Fuel pump control ↓ C
Battery Battery voltage* Fuel pump
The ECM activates the fuel pump for several seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON to improve engine D
start ability. If the ECM receives a engine speed signal from the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), it knows
that the engine is rotating, and causes the pump to operate. If the engine speed signal is not received when
the ignition switch is ON, the engine stalls. The ECM stops pump operation and prevents battery discharging,
E
thereby improving safety. The ECM does not directly drive the fuel pump. It controls the ON/OFF fuel pump
relay, which in turn controls the fuel pump.
Condition Fuel pump operation F

Ignition switch is turned to ON. Operates for 1 second.
Engine running and cranking Operates.
G
When engine is stopped Stops in 1.5 seconds.
Except as shown above Stops.
H
1.CHECK FUEL PUMP FUNCTION I

2. Pinch fuel feed hose with two fingers.
- : Vehicle front (Illustration shows the view with intake air duct J
removed)
Fuel pressure pulsation should be felt on the fuel feed

hose for 1 second after ignition switch is turned ON. K

YES >> INSPECTION END L
JMBIA1891ZZ
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000004777026 M
1.CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I

4. Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals. O
ECM
+ – Voltage P
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 2.

FUEL PUMP
2.CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II

Check the voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground.
IPDM E/R
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 16.
• Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and ECM
4.CHECK CONDENSER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I
Condenser
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
Battery voltage should exist for 1 seconds
B81 1 Ground
after ignition switch is turned ON.
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK 15 A FUSE
2. Disconnect 15 A fuse (No. 41).
3. Check 15 A fuse.
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Replace fuse.
6.CHECK CONDENSER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
IPDM E/R Condenser

Continuity
YES >> GO TO 16.
NO >> GO TO 7.

FUEL PUMP
• Harness connectors E104, B4 A
• Harness for open or short between IPDM E/R and condenser
EC
8.CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT
C
D
Condenser
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
B81 2 Ground Existed E
YES >> GO TO 10. F
NO >> GO TO 9.
9.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART G
• Harness for open or short between condenser and ground
H

10.CHECK CONDENSER I
Refer to EC-712, "Component Inspection (Condenser)".
J
YES >> GO TO 11.
11.CHECK FUEL PUMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III K
2. Check harness continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and “fuel level sensor unit and fuel
pump” harness connector. L

IPDM E/R
pump Continuity M
YES >> GO TO 13.
NO >> GO TO 12.

• Harness connectors B4, E104
P
• Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and IPDM E/R

13.CHECK FUEL PUMP GROUND CIRCUIT
2. Check the continuity between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” harness connector and ground.

FUEL PUMP

pump Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
B40 3 Ground Existed
YES >> GO TO 15.
NO >> GO TO 14.
• Harness for open or short between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” and ground

15.CHECK FUEL PUMP
Refer to EC-712, "Component Inspection (Fuel Pump)".
YES >> GO TO 16.
NO >> Replace fuel pump.
Component Inspection (Fuel Pump) INFOID:0000000004777027
1.CHECK FUEL PUMP

3. Check resistance between “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump” terminals as per the following.
1 and 3 0.2 - 5.0 Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]
NO >> Replace “fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump”
1.CHECK CONDENSER
1 and 2 Above 1 MΩ [at 25°C (77°F)]

HO2S2
HO2S2
A

Even if switching characteristics of the heated oxygen sensor 1 are
shifted, the air-fuel ratio is controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal
from the heated oxygen sensor 2. C
ditions. D
SEF327R E
1.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK-I F

3. Start engine and keep the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for at least 1 minute under no load. G
H
ECM
Connec- + – Condition Voltage

tor I
Terminal Terminal
33
[HO2S2 (bank 1) signal] 35 Revving up to 4,000 rpm under no The voltage does not remain in the
F8
(Sensor ground) load at least 10 times range of 0.2 – 0.4 V
J
34
[HO2S2 (bank 2) signal]
K
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK-II L
Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals under the following condition.
ECM M

N
33
[HO2S2 (bank 1) signal] 35 Keeping engine speed at idle for 10 The voltage does not remain in the
F8
34 (Sensor ground) minutes range of 0.2 – 0.4 V
O
NO >> GO TO 3.
Check the voltage between ECM harness connector terminals under the following condition.

HO2S2
ECM

33
[HO2S2 (bank 1) signal] 35 Coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D The voltage does not remain in the
F8
34 (Sensor ground) position range of 0.2 – 0.4 V

YES >> GO TO 2.
HO2S2 ECM
Continuity
1 F70 1
F8 35 Existed
2 F71 1
YES >> GO TO 3.
HO2S2 ECM
Continuity
1 F70 4 33
F8 Existed
2 F71 4 34
ground.
HO2S2
Ground Continuity
1 F70 4
Ground Not existed
2 F71 4

HO2S2
ECM A
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
33
F8 Ground Not existed EC
34
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 D

YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.REPLACE HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 F
CAUTION:
• Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m (19.7 G
Cleaner (commercial service tool) and approved anti-seize lubricant (commercial service tool). H
>> INSPECTION END

6.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT I
J
>> INSPECTION END
K
1.INSPECTION START
L
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> GO TO 3.
M
With CONSULT-III
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT-III. N
5. Let engine idle for 1 minute. O
with CONSULT-III.
P

HO2S2
PBIB3458E
NO >> GO TO 6.
Without CONSULT-III
ECM
Connector
Terminal Terminal
33
signal] 35
F8 (Sensor
ground)
signal]
NO >> GO TO 4.
ECM
Connector
Terminal Terminal
33
signal] 35
ground)
signal]
NO >> GO TO 5.

HO2S2
ECM A
Connector
Terminal Terminal
EC
33
signal] 35
Coasting from 80 km/h (50 MPH) in D po- least once during this procedure.
F8 (Sensor C
34 sition The voltage should be below 0.18 V at
ground)
signal]
NO >> GO TO 6.
E
CAUTION: F
Cleaner (commercial service tool) and approved anti-seize lubricant (commercial service tool). G
>> INSPECTION END

H

HO2S2 HEATER
HO2S2 HEATER
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Engine speed
Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater
Engine coolant temperature sensor Engine coolant temperature heater control
The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater corresponding to the engine speed,
amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature.
OPERATION
Engine speed Heated oxygen sensor 2 heater

Above 3,600 rpm OFF
Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.
ON
• Keeping the engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1
minute and at idle for 1 minute under no load
1.CHECK HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HRATER FUNCTION

ECM
Approximately 10 V
13
At idle
[HO2S2 heater (bank 1)]
F7 E16 112
JMBIA0902GB
17 BATTERY VOLTAGE
Engine speed: Above 3,600 rpm
[HO2S2 heater (bank 2)] (11 - 14 V)
s the inspection result normal?


HO2S2 HEATER
YES >> GO TO 2. A
2.CHECK HO2S2 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
EC
3. Check the voltage between HO2S2 harness connector and ground.
C
HO2S2
Ground Voltage
D
1 F70 2
2 F71 2
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.

• IPDM E/R connector F12 G
• 15 A fuse (No. 46)
• Harness for open or short between heated oxygen sensor 2 and fuse
H
4.CHECK HO2S2 OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
J
HO2S2 ECM
Continuity
K
1 F70 3 13
F7 Existed
2 F71 3 17
YES >> GO TO 5.
N
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> GO TO 6.
O
CAUTION: P
>> INSPECTION END

HO2S2 HEATER

>> INSPECTION END


3. Check resistance between heated oxygen sensor 2 terminals as per the following.
Terminals Resistance [at 25°C (77°F)

2 and 3 3.4 - 4.4 Ω
1 and 2, 3, 4 ∞Ω
4 and 1, 2, 3 (Continuity should not exist)

NO >> GO TO 2.
Replace heated oxygen sensor 2.
CAUTION:
>> INSPECTION END

IAT SENSOR
IAT SENSOR
A
The intake air temperature sensor is built-into the mass air flow sen- EC
sor (1). The sensor detects intake air temperature and transmits a
signal to the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to
the change in temperature. Electrical resistance of the thermistor C
decreases in response to the rise in temperature.
PBIA9559J E
<Reference data>
F
Intake air temperature [°C (°F)] Voltage* (V) Resistance (kΩ)
25 (77) 3.3 1.800 - 2.200
80 (176) 1.2 0.283 - 0.359 G
(Intake air temperature sensor) and 56 (Sensor ground).
H
SEF012P
I
1.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR FUNCTION J

K
ECM
+ – Voltage
Connector
Terminal Terminal L
F8 50 56 Approx. 0 - 4.8 V
M

YES >> GO TO 2. P
2.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

IAT SENSOR
MAF sensor
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
MAF sensor ECM

Continuity
F4 1 F8 55 Existed
YES >> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace MAF sensor (with intake air temperature sensor).
>> INSPECTION END

1.CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

3. Check resistance between mass air flow sensor terminals as per the following.

1 and 2 Temperature 25°C (77°F) 1.800 - 2.200 kΩ

IGNITION SIGNAL
IGNITION SIGNAL
A
The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the power transistor. The power transistor turns EC
ON and OFF the ignition coil primary circuit. This ON/OFF operation induces the proper high voltage in the coil
secondary circuit.
1.INSPECTION START
Turn ignition switch OFF, and restart engine. D
Does the engine start?
YES-2 >> Without CONSULT-III: GO TO 3. E
F
With CONSULT-III
G
NO >> Go to EC-723, "Diagnosis Procedure". H
Without CONSULT-III
1. Let engine idle. I
2. Read the voltage signal between ECM harness connector terminals with an oscilloscope.
ECM J
+ – Voltage signal
K
9
10
11 L
F7 E16 112
18
19
M
21 JMBIA0035GB
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes depending on rpm at idle. N
1.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-I P
1. Turn ignition switch OFF, wait at least 10 seconds and then turn it ON.

IGNITION SIGNAL
ECM
+ – Voltage
Connector
Terminal Terminal
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Refer to EC-537, "Diagnosis Procedure".
2.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-II
Condenser
Ground Voltage
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-III
IPDM E/R Condenser

Continuity
YES >> Refer to EC-537, "Diagnosis Procedure".
4.CHECK CONDENSER GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
Condenser
Ground Continuity
Connector Terminal
F13 2 Ground Existed
YES >> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK CONDENSER
Refer to EC-727, "Component Inspection (Condenser)"
YES >> GO TO 6.

IGNITION SIGNAL
6.CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT-V A

EC
4. Check the voltage between ignition coil harness connector and ground.
Ignition coil
Ground Voltage C
1 F31 3
2 F32 3 D
3 F33 3
4 F34 3
E
5 F35 3
6 F36 3
YES >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK IGNITION COIL GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT G
2. Check the continuity between ignition coil harness connector and ground.
H
Ignition coil
Ground Continuity
Cylinder Connector Terminal I
1 F31 2
2 F32 2
3 F33 2 J
Ground Existed
4 F34 2
5 F35 2
K
6 F36 2
YES >> GO TO 8.
8.CHECK IGNITION COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT M

2. Check the continuity between ignition coil harness connector and ECM harness connector.
N
Ignition coil ECM

Continuity
Cylinder Connector Terminal Connector Terminal O
1 F31 1 11
2 F32 1 10
3 F33 1 9 P
F7 Existed
4 F34 1 21
5 F35 1 19
6 F36 1 18

IGNITION SIGNAL
YES >> GO TO 9.
9.CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR
Refer to EC-726, "Component Inspection (Ignition Coil with Power Transistor)".
YES >> GO TO 10.
>> INSPECTION END

Component Inspection (Ignition Coil with Power Transistor) INFOID:0000000004689742
1.CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR-I

3. Check resistance between ignition coil terminals as per the following.
Terminal No. (Polarity) Resistance Ω [at 25°C (77°F)]

1 and 2 Except 0 or ∞
1 and 3
Except 0
2 and 3
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR-II
CAUTION:
NOTE:
Do not use CONSULT-III to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the following pro-
cedure.
4. Start engine.
9. Crank engine for 5 seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder.
0.66 in) between the edge of the spark plug and grounded metal
metal portion.

CAUTION:

IGNITION SIGNAL
not to get an electrical shock while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage becomes
20 kV or more. A
NOTE:
EC
tioning.
C
D
1.CHECK CONDENSER
2. Disconnect condenser harness connector. E
Terminals Resistance F
1 and 2 Above 1 MΩ [at 25C° (77C°)]
G
H

The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) is located on the combination

meter.
The MIL will illuminate when the ignition switch is turned ON without
the engine running. This is a bulb check.
When the engine is started, the MIL should turn off. If the MIL
remains illuminated, the on board diagnostic system has detected an
engine system malfunction.
SAT652J
1.CHECK MIL FUNCTION

2. Check that MIL illuminates.
1.CHECK DTC
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000, U1001. Refer to EC-540, "Description".
YES >> GO TO 3.

A
EC
SEC921C
This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold. G

The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake
manifold.
During partial throttle operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the PCV
valve. H
Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of ventilating air.
The ventilating air is drawn from the air inlet tubes into the crankcase. In this process the air passes through
the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover. I
Under full-throttle condition, the manifold vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the valve.
The flow goes through the hose connection in the reverse direction.
On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not
meet the requirement. This is because some of the flow will go J
through the hose connection to the air inlet tubes under all condi-
tions.
K
PBIB1588E
M
1.CHECK PCV VALVE N

With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from rocker cover. A
properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes through
it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger is O
placed over valve inlet.
NO >> Replace PCV valve.
PBIB1589E

The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the condenser of the air conditioner system. The sensor uses an
electrostatic volume pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage. The voltage signal is sent
to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system.
PBIB2657E
1.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR FUNCTION

2. Turn A/C switch and blower fan switch ON.
ECM
+ – Voltage (V)
Connector
Terminal Terminal
39 40
F8 1.0 - 4.0
(Refrigerant pressure sensor signal) (Sensor ground)

1. Turn A/C switch and blower fan switch OFF.
YES >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector.
3. Check the voltage between refrigerant pressure sensor harness connector and ground.
Refrigerant pressure sensor

Ground Voltage (V)
Connector Terminal
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.


EC
C
4.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
tor.
E
Continuity
E300 3 F8 40 Existed F
G
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> GO TO 5.
5.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART H
• IPDM E/R harness connectors E10, E346 I
>> Repair open circuit, short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. J
6.CHECK REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT
K
tor.

Continuity L
2. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. M
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 7. N
Check the following. O
P
YES >> Replace refrigerant pressure sensor.


A
Power Valves 1 and 2 EC

The power valves 1 and 2 are installed in intake manifold collector and used to control the suction passage of
the variable induction air control system. They are set in the fully closed or fully opened position by the power
valve actuators 1 and 2 operated by the vacuum stored in the vacuum tank. The vacuum to power valve actu- C
ators is controlled by the VIAS control solenoid valves 1 and 2.
D
With CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. E
F
JMBIA1386ZZ
I
J
: Vehicle front
Without CONSULT-III
1. Start engine and warm it up to the normal operating temperature. K
L
JMBIA1386ZZ
O
P
: Vehicle front

YES >> GO TO 2.
With CONSULT-III

JMBIA1386ZZ
: Vehicle front
Without CONSULT-III
1. When revving engine up to 5,000 rpm quickly.
JMBIA1386ZZ
: Vehicle front

1.INSPECTION START
Confirm the malfunctioning system (power valve 1 or power valve 2). Refer to EC-733, "Component Function
Check".
Which system is related to the incident?
2.CHECK VACUUM EXISTENCE-I
With CONSULT-III
tions.

VIAS S/V-1 Vacuum A

ON Existed
OFF Not existed
EC
Without CONSULT-III
2. Disconnect VIAS control solenoid valve 1 harness connector. C
3. Start engine.
D
Condition Vacuum
Idle Existed
E
YES >> Repair or replace power valve actuator 1. F
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK VACUUM TANK
G
1. Stop engine and disconnect vacuum hose connected to intake manifold collector.
3. Check vacuum existence from intake manifold collector.
H
Does vacuum existence from the intake manifold collector?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Replace intake manifold collector.
I
4.CHECK VACUUM HOSE
1. Stop engine.
2. Check vacuum hose for cracks, clogging, improper connection J
YES >> GO TO 5. K
SEF109L M
N
YES >> GO TO 9.
O
6.CHECK VACUUM EXISTENCE-II
With CONSULT-III
1. Stop engine and disconnect vacuum hose connected to power valve actuator 2. P
tions.

VIAS S/V-2 Vacuum

ON Existed
OFF Not existed
Without CONSULT-III
3. Start engine.
Condition Vacuum
Idle Existed
YES >> Repair or replace power valve actuator 2.
NO >> GO TO 7.
7.CHECK VACUUM HOSE
1. Stop engine.
2. Check vacuum hose for cracks, clogging, improper connection
YES >> GO TO 8.
SEF109L

YES >> GO TO 9.
>> INSPECTION END

ECM
ECU DIAGNOSIS A
ECM
Reference Value INFOID:0000000004702792
EC
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL

Remarks: C
z Specification data are reference values.
z Specification data are output/input values which are detected or supplied by the ECM at the connector.
* Specification data may not be directly related to their components signals/values/operations.
I.e. Adjust ignition timing with a timing light before monitoring IGN TIMING, because the monitor may show D
the specification data in spite of the ignition timing not being adjusted to the specification data. This IGN TIM-
ING monitors the data calculated by the ECM according to the signals input from the camshaft position sensor
and other ignition timing related sensors. E

Almost the same speed as F
ENG SPEED Run engine and compare CONSULT-III value with the tachometer indication.
the tachometer indication.
MAS A/F SE-B1 See EC-128, "Description".
B/FUEL SCHDL See EC-128, "Description". G
H
COOLAN TEMP/S • Engine: After warming up More than 70°C (158°F)
A/F SEN1 (B1) • Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm Fluctuates around 2.2 V
A/F SEN1 (B2) • Engine: After warming up Maintaining engine speed at 2,000 rpm Fluctuates around 2.2 V I
are met.
0 - 0.3 V ←→ Approx. 0.6 -
1.0 V J
are met. K
0 - 0.3 V ←→ Approx. 0.6 -
1.0 V
L
are met.
- After keeping engine speed between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm for 1 minute and at M
are met. N
• Turn drive wheels and compare CONSULT-III value with the speedometer in- Almost the same speed as O
VHCL SPEED SE
dication. speedometer indication
BATTERY VOLT • Ignition switch: ON (Engine stopped) 11 - 14 V
P
ACCEL SEN 1
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 4.2 - 4.8 V

ACCEL SEN 2*1 (Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed 4.2 - 4.8 V

ECM
TP SEN 1-B1 (Engine stopped)
• Selector lever: D position Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75 V

TP SEN 2-B1*1 (Engine stopped)
• Selector lever: D position Accelerator pedal: Fully depressed Less than 4.75 V
Indicates intake air tempera-

INT/A TEMP SE • Ignition switch: ON
ture
START SIGNAL • Ignition switch: ON → START → ON OFF → ON → OFF
• Ignition switch: ON Accelerator pedal: Fully released ON

CLSD THL POS
(Engine stopped) Accelerator pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
AIR COND SIG Air conditioner switch: ON
engine ON
(Compressor operates.)
Selector lever: P or N position ON
P/N POSI SW • Ignition switch: ON
Selector lever: Except above position OFF
• Engine: After warming up, idle the Steering wheel: Not being turned OFF
PW/ST SIGNAL
engine Steering wheel: Being turned ON
Rear window defogger switch: ON
and/or ON
LOAD SIGNAL • Ignition switch: ON Lighting switch: 2nd position
Rear window defogger switch and lighting
OFF
switch: OFF
IGNITION SW • Ignition switch: ON → OFF → ON ON → OFF → ON
• Engine: After warming up, idle the Heater fan switch: ON ON

HEATER FAN SW
engine Heater fan switch: OFF OFF
Brake pedal: Fully released OFF
BRAKE SW • Ignition switch: ON
Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON
• Selector lever: P or N position
INJ PULSE-B1
• No load
INJ PULSE-B2
• No load
• Engine: After warming up Idle 7 - 17° BTDC
IGN TIMING
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm 25 - 45° BTDC
• No load
• Engine: After warming up Idle 5 - 35%
CAL/LD VALUE
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,500 rpm 5 - 35%
• No load
• Engine: After warming up Idle 2.0 - 6.0 g·m/s
MASS AIRFLOW
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,500 rpm 7.0 - 20.0 g·m/s
• No load
• Engine: After warming up Idle

• Selector lever: P or N position (Accelerator pedal: Not depressed even 0%
PURG VOL C/V slightly, after engine starting.)
• No load 2,000 rpm —

ECM
A
• Engine: After warming up Idle −5 - 5°CA
INT/V TIM (B1)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm Approx. 0 - 30°CA
• No load EC
• Engine: After warming up Idle −5 - 5°CA
INT/V TIM (B2)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm Approx. 0 - 30°CA
• No load
C
INT/V SOL (B1) D
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm Approx. 0 - 50%
• No load
• Selector lever: P or N position E
INT/V SOL (B2)
• Air conditioner switch: OFF 2,000 rpm Approx. 0 - 50%
• No load
• Selector lever: P or N position Rev engine quickly up to approximately
F
• No load
• Selector lever: P or N position Rev engine quickly up to approximately
• No load
H
AIR COND RLY Air conditioner switch: ON
engine ON
(Compressor operates)
I
Below 950 rpm IDLE
ENGINE MOUNT • Engine: After warming up
Above 950 rpm TRVL
• For 1 second after turning ignition switch: ON J
ON
FUEL PUMP RLY • Engine running or cranking
• Except above OFF
THRTL RELAY • Ignition switch: ON ON K
OFF
(206°F) or less
L
Engine coolant temperature: Between
• Engine: After warming up, idle the LOW
98°C (208°F) and 99°C (210°F)
COOLING FAN engine
• Air conditioner switch: OFF Engine coolant temperature: Between
MID M
100°C (212°F) and 104°C (219°F)
HI
(221°F) or more
• Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met. N
- Engine: After warming up
ON
O
• Engine speed: Below 3,600 rpm after the following conditions are met.
- Engine: After warming up P
ON
Almost the same speed as
I/P PULLY SPD • Vehicle speed: More than 20 km/h (12 MPH)
the tachometer indication
VEHICLE SPEED

ECM
Idle air volume learning has not been per-
YET
formed yet.
IDL A/V LEARN • Engine: Running
Idle air volume learning has already been
CMPLT
performed successfully.
ENG OIL TEMP • Engine: After warming up More than 70°C (158°F)
Vehicle has traveled after MI has illumi- 0 - 65,535 km
TRVL AFTER MIL • Ignition switch: ON
nated. (0 - 40,723 miles)
A/F S1 HTR (B1) 4 - 100%
A/F S1 HTR (B2) 4 - 100%
• Engine: Idle
AC PRESS SEN 1.0 - 4.0 V
• Both A/C switch and blower fan switch: ON (Compressor operates)
VHCL SPEED SE
The preset vehicle speed is
SET VHCL SPD • Engine: Running ASCD: Operating
displayed
MAIN switch: Pressed ON
MAIN SW • Ignition switch: ON
MAIN switch: Released OFF
CANCEL switch: Pressed ON
CANCEL SW • Ignition switch: ON
CANCEL switch: Released OFF
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch:
ON
Pressed
RESUME/ACC SW • Ignition switch: ON
RESUME/ACCELERATE switch: Re-
OFF
leased
SET/COAST switch: Pressed ON
SET SW • Ignition switch: ON
SET/COAST switch: Released OFF
BRAKE SW1 Brake pedal: Fully released ON

(ASCD brake switch) Brake pedal: Slightly depressed OFF
BRAKE SW2 Brake pedal: Fully released OFF

(Stop lamp switch) Brake pedal: Slightly depressed ON
VHCL SPD CUT • Ignition switch: ON NON
LO SPEED CUT • Ignition switch: ON NON
AT OD MONITOR • Ignition switch: ON OFF
AT OD CANCEL • Ignition switch: ON OFF
MAIN switch: Pressed at the 1st time →
at the 2nd time
• MAIN switch: ON ASCD: Operating ON
• When vehicle speed is between
SET LAMP
40 km/h (25 MPH) and 144 km/h ASCD: Not operating OFF
(89 MPH)
ALT DUTY • Engine: Idle 0 - 80%
• Battery: Fully charged*2
BAT CUR SEN • Selector lever: P or N position Approx. 2,600 - 3,500 mV
• No load

ECM
A
• Power generation voltage variable control: Operating ON
ALT DUTY SIG
• Power generation voltage variable control: Not operating OFF
*1: Accelerator pedal position sensor 2 signal and throttle position sensor 2 signal are converted by ECM internally. Thus, they differ EC
from ECM terminals voltage signal.
TERMINAL LAYOUT C
PBIA9221J F
PHYSICAL VALUES
NOTE: G
• ECM is located in the engine room left side near battery.
• Specification data are reference values.
• Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III. H

Value
Input/ Condition
+ -– Signal name (Approx.) I
Output
1 BATTERY VOLTAGE
Fuel injector No. 6
(P/B) (11 - 14 V)
[Engine is running]
J
3
Fuel injector No. 5 • Warm-up condition
(L/W)
• Idle speed
NOTE: K
29
Fuel injector No. 4 pending on rpm at idle
(LG/R)
112 JMBIA0047GB L
Output
30 (B) BATTERY VOLTAGE
Fuel injector No. 3
(R/Y) (11 - 14 V)
31
Fuel injector No. 2
M
(R/W) [Engine is running]
32 N
Fuel injector No. 1
(R/B)
JMBIA0048GB
2 112 Throttle control motor power BATTERY VOLTAGE O

Input [Ignition switch: ON]
(G/W) (B) supply (11 - 14 V)
2.9 - 8.8 V
P
[Engine is running]
4 112
(BR/Y) (B)
starting engine)
JMBIA0902GB

ECM
Value
Input/ Condition
Output
0 - 14 V

• Engine stopped
pressed
JMBIA0031GB
5 112
Throttle control motor (Open) Output
(L) (B)
0 - 14 V

• Engine stopped
leased
JMBIA0032GB
0 - 14 V

• Engine stopped
6 112
Throttle control motor (Close) Output • Selector lever: D position
(P) (B)
leased
JMBIA1125GB
2.9 - 8.8 V
[Engine is running]
8 112
(SB) (B)
starting engine)
JMBIA0030GB
9 0 - 0.2 V
(L/B)
[Engine is running]
10 • Warm-up condition
(G/R) • Idle speed
NOTE:
11
Ignition signal No. 1 pending on rpm at idle
(Y/R)
112 JMBIA0035GB
Output
18 (B)
Ignition signal No. 6 0.1 - 0.4 V
(GR/R)
19
Ignition signal No. 5 [Engine is running]
(P)
21
(W)
JMBIA0036GB
12
(B)

ECM
Value A
Input/ Condition
Output
• Engine speed: Below 3,600 EC
rpm after the following condi-
tions are met
C
13 112 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heat- tween 3,500 and 4,000 rpm
(P/B) (B) er (bank 1)
D
• Engine stopped
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Engine is running]
(11 - 14 V) E
rpm
• For 1 second after turning ig-
0 - 1.5 V
F
nition switch ON
Fuel pump relay Output
(GR) (B)
[Ignition switch: ON] G
BATTERY VOLTAGE
• More than 1 second after turn-
(11 - 14 V)
ing ignition switch ON
0 - 1.0 V → BATTERY VOLTAGE
15 112 [Ignition switch: ON → OFF] H
Throttle control motor relay Output (11 - 14 V) → 0 V
(O) (B)
[Ignition switch: ON] 0 - 1.0 V
16
— ECM ground — — — I
(B/Y)
• Engine speed: Below 3,600
rpm after the following condi- J
tions are met
K
17 112 Heated oxygen sensor 2 heat-
(R) (B) er (bank 2)
[Ignition switch: ON] L

• Engine stopped
BATTERY VOLTAGE
[Engine is running]
(11 - 14 V)
rpm M
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.5 V
• A few seconds after turning N
24 112 ECM relay ignition switch OFF
Output
(W/B) (B) (Self shut-off)
BATTERY VOLTAGE
• More than a few seconds after O
(11 - 14 V)
turning ignition switch OFF

ECM
Value
Input/ Condition
Output
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
• Accelerator pedal: Not de-
pressed even slightly, after
engine starting
25 112 EVAP canister purge volume JMBIA0039GB

Output
(P/L) (B) control solenoid valve BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed: approximately
2,000 rpm (More than 100
seconds after starting engine)
JMBIA0040GB
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
• Idle speed
(GR/B) (B) ↓
0 - 1.0 V
↓
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
• Idle speed
(V) (B) ↓
0 - 1.0 V
↓
[Engine is running]
0 - 1.0 V
• Idle speed
28 112 Electronic controlled engine
Output [Engine is running]
(BR/W) (B) mount control solenoid valve BATTERY VOLTAGE
• Engine speed: More than 950
(11 - 14 V)
rpm
[Engine is running]
(W) (B) (bank 1)
[Engine is running]
(W/L) (B) (bank 2)

ECM
Value A
Input/ Condition
Output
35 Sensor ground
— — — — EC
(B) (Heated oxygen sensor 2)
36 Sensor ground
— — — —
(B) (Throttle position sensor)
• Engine stopped
• Selector lever: D position More than 0.36 V
• Accelerator pedal: Fully re- D
37 36 leased
(W) (B) [Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Selector lever: D position Less than 4.75 V E
pressed
[Ignition switch: ON] F
• Engine stopped
• Selector lever: D position Less than 4.75 V
38 36 leased G
(R) (B) [Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
• Selector lever: D position More than 0.36 V H
pressed
[Engine is running]
I
39 40
Refrigerant pressure sensor Input • Both A/C switch and blower 1.0 - 4.0 V
(R) (G)
fan motor switch: ON (Com-
pressor operates) J
40 Sensor ground
— — — —
(G) (Refrigerant pressure sensor)
[Engine is running]
0.5 - 4.5 V
K
• Steering wheel: Being turned
41 48 Power steering pressure sen-
Input [Engine is running]
(O/B) (B/P) sor
• Steering wheel: Not being 0.4 - 0.8 V L
turned
[Engine is running]
42 44
Battery current sensor Input • Battery: Fully charged*2 2.6 - 3.5 V
(BR) (G/B) M
• Idle speed
44 Sensor ground
— — — —
(G/B) (Battery current sensor)
N
45 112
(P) (B)
0 - 4.8 V
46 52 Engine coolant temperature O
Input [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with engine
(Y) (B/R) sensor
coolant temperature.
(G) (B) (Throttle position sensor) P
Sensor ground
48
— (Power steering pressure — — —
(B/P)
sensor)
49 112
(L) (B)

ECM
Value
Input/ Condition
Output
0 - 4.8 V
50 56
Intake air temperature sensor Input [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with intake
(L/Y) (G/B)
air temperature.
(R/Y) (G/B) (Battery current sensor)
Sensor ground
52 (Engine coolant temperature
— — — —
(B/R) sensor/Engine oil tempera-
ture sensor)
53 112
(V) (B)
0 - 4.8 V
54 52
Engine oil temperature sensor Input [Engine is running] Output voltage varies with engine
(G) (B/R)
oil temperature.
Sensor power supply
55 48
(Power steering pressure — [Ignition switch: ON] 5V
(SB) (B/P)
sensor)
Sensor ground
56
— (Mass air flow sensor/Intake — — —
(G/B)
air temperature sensor)
57 112
(LG) (B)
0.4 V
• Engine stopped
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition 0.9 - 1.2 V
58 56
Mass air flow sensor Input • Idle speed
(O) (G/B)
[Engine is running] 0.9 - 1.2 V to 2.4 V (Check for liner
• Warm-up condition voltage rise in response to engine
• Engine is revving from idle to being increased to approximately
approximately 4,000 rpm 4,000 rpm.)
Sensor power supply
59 64
(G/W) (B/R)
(PHASE) (bank 1)]
Sensor ground
60
— [Crankshaft position sensor — — —
(Y/B)
(POS)]
(B) (—)
(W) (—)
Sensor power supply

63 68
(R/W) (Y/G)
(PHASE) (bank 2)]
Sensor ground
64
(B/R)
(PHASE) (bank 1)]

ECM
Value A
Input/ Condition
Output
4.0 - 5.0 V
EC
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
NOTE: C
JMBIA0041GB
65 60 Crankshaft position sensor D
Input
(W/B) (Y/B) (POS)
4.0 - 5.0 V
E
[Engine is running]
F
JMBIA0042GB
67 Sensor ground
— — — —
(—) (Knock sensor) G
Sensor ground
68
(Y/G)
(PHASE) (bank 2)] H
3.0 - 5.0 V
[Engine is running]
• Warm-up condition I
• Idle speed
NOTE:
pending on rpm at idle J
Input
(BR/W) (Y/G) (PHASE) (bank 2)
3.0 - 5.0 V
K
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed is 2,000 rpm L
JMBIA0046GB
M
3.0 - 5.0 V
[Engine is running]
• Idle speed
N
NOTE:
pending on rpm at idle O
Input
(W/R) (B/R) (PHASE) (bank 1)
3.0 - 5.0 V
P
[Engine is running]
• Engine speed is 2,000 rpm
JMBIA0046GB

ECM
Value
Input/ Condition
Output
(BR/W) (G) (Refrigerant pressure sensor)
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
• Idle speed
7 - 12 V
Output
(Y) (B) lenoid valve (bank 2) [Engine is running]
JMBIA0038GB
Sensor power supply

76 60
[Crankshaft position sensor — [Ignition switch: ON] 5V
(R/G) (Y/B)
(POS)]
77 112 Power supply for ECM (Back- BATTERY VOLTAGE
Input [Ignition switch: OFF]
(W/L) (B) up) (11 - 14 V)
[Engine is running]
BATTERY VOLTAGE
(11 - 14 V)
• Idle speed
7 - 12 V
Output
(R/L) (B) lenoid valve (bank 1) [Engine is running]
JMBIA0038GB

• Engine stopped
0.5 - 1.0 V
Input
(W) (B) sensor 1 [Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
4.2 - 4.8 V
pressed
• Engine stopped
0.25 - 0.50 V
Input
(O) (G) sensor 2 [Ignition switch: ON]
• Engine stopped
2.0 - 2.5 V
pressed
Sensor power supply
83 84
(BR) (B)
sensor 1)
Sensor ground
84
(B)
sensor 1)

ECM
Value A
Input/ Condition
Output
4V EC
• ASCD steering switch: OFF
0V
• MAIN switch: Pressed
85 92 1V
ASCD steering switch Input • CANCEL switch: Pressed
(Y) (BR)
• RESUME/ACCELERATE 3V D
switch: Pressed
2V
• SET/COAST switch: Pressed E
Sensor power supply
87 100
(GR) (G)
sensor 2)
F
88 Input/
— Data link connector — —
(O) Output
92 Sensor ground
— — — — G
(BR) (ASCD steering switch)
[Ignition switch: OFF] 0V
93 112
Ignition switch Input BATTERY VOLTAGE
(BR) (B) [Ignition switch: ON] H
(11 - 14 V)
1V
[Engine is running] I
• Idle speed
NOTE:
The pulse cycle changes de- J
94 112 JMBIA0076GB
Engine speed output signal Output
(GR) (B) K
1V
[Engine is running] L
M
JMBIA0077GB
95*3 — — — — —
(Y)
N
97 Input/
— CAN communication line — —
(P) Output
98 Input/
— CAN communication line — — O
(L) Output
Sensor ground
100
(G) P
sensor 2)
• Selector lever: P or N position (11 - 14 V)
102 112
PNP signal Input [Ignition switch: ON]
(R) (B)
• Selector lever: Except above 0V
position

ECM
Value
Input/ Condition
Output
104*3 — — — — —
(SB)
105 112 BATTERY VOLTAGE
Power supply for ECM Input [Ignition switch: ON]
(V) (B) (11 - 14 V)
0V
• Brake pedal: Fully released
106 112
Stop lamp switch Input [Ignition switch: OFF]
(SB) (B) BATTERY VOLTAGE
• Brake pedal: Slightly de-
(11 - 14 V)
pressed
107
(B)
108
(B)
• Brake pedal: Slightly de- 0V
110 112 pressed
ASCD brake switch Input
(G) (B)
• Brake pedal: Fully released (11 - 14 V)
111
(B)
112
(B)
*1: This may vary depending on internal resistance of the tester.
*3: This harness is not used.

ECM
Wiring Diagram—ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM— INFOID:0000000004702793
EC
JCBWM1074GB
P

ECM
JCBWM1075GB

ECM
EC
JCBWM1076GB

ECM
JCBWM1077GB

ECM
EC
JCBWM1078GB

ECM
JCBWM1079GB

ECM
EC
JCBWM1080GB

ECM
JCBWM1081GB

ECM
EC
JCBWM1082GB

ECM
JCBWM1083GB

ECM
EC
JCBWM1084GB

ECM
JCBWM1085GB

ECM
EC
JCBWM1086GB

ECM
JCBWM1087GB

ECM
EC
JCBWM1088GB

ECM
JCBWM1089GB
Fail-safe INFOID:0000000004689757
NON DTC RELATED ITEM

ECM
Engine operating condi- Reference A

Detected items Remarks
tion in fail-safe mode page
Engine speed will not Malfunction indicator When there is an open circuit on MIL circuit, the ECM cannot warn the
rise more than 2,500 rpm lamp circuit driver by illuminating MIL when there is malfunction on engine control
EC
due to the fuel cut system.
Therefore, when electrical controlled throttle and part of ECM related
diagnoses are continuously detected as NG for 5 trips, ECM warns the EC-728
driver that engine control system malfunctions and MIL circuit is open C
by means of operating the fail-safe function.
The fail-safe function also operates when above diagnoses except MIL
circuit are detected and demands the driver to repair the malfunction.
D
DTC RELATED ITEM

E
P0011 Intake valve timing control The signal is not energized to the intake valve timing control solenoid valve and the valve
P0021 control does not function.
P0102 Mass air flow sensor circuit Engine speed will not rise more than 2,400 rpm due to the fuel cut.
F
P0103
P0117 Engine coolant tempera- Engine coolant temperature will be determined by ECM based on the following condition.
P0118 ture sensor circuit CONSULT-III displays the engine coolant temperature decided by ECM.
G
Engine coolant temperature decided
Condition
(CONSULT-III display)
Just as ignition switch is turned ON
40°C (104°F) H
or START
Approx. 4 minutes or more after
80°C (176°F)
engine starting
I
40 - 80°C (104 - 176°F)
Except as shown above
(Depends on the time)
When the fail-safe system for engine coolant temperature sensor is activated, the cooling
fan operates while engine is running. J
P0122 Throttle position sensor The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in
P0123 order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
P0222 The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal K
P0223 condition.
P2135 Therefore, the acceleration will be poor.
P0500 Vehicle speed sensor The cooling fan operates (Highest) while engine is running. L
P0605 ECM (When ECM calculation function is a malfunctioning:)
ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
ECM deactivates ASCD operation. M
P0643 Sensor power supply ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
N
P1805 Brake switch ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to a
small range.
Therefore, acceleration will be poor.
Vehicle condition Driving condition O
When engine is idling Normal
When accelerating Poor acceleration
P
P2100 Throttle control motor relay ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
P2103 fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P2101 Electric throttle control ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a
function fixed opening (approx. 5 degrees) by the return spring.
P2118 Throttle control motor ECM stops the electric throttle control actuator control, throttle valve is maintained at a

ECM
P2119 Electric throttle control ac- (When electric throttle control actuator does not function properly due to the return spring
tuator malfunction:)
ECM controls the electric throttle actuator by regulating the throttle opening around the
idle position. The engine speed will not rise more than 2,000 rpm.
(When throttle valve opening angle in fail-safe mode is not in specified range:)
ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator by regulating the throttle opening to 20
degrees or less.
(When ECM detects the throttle valve is stuck open:)
While the vehicle is being driven, it slows down gradually because of fuel cut. After the
vehicle stops, the engine stalls.
The engine can restart in the N or P position, and engine speed will not exceed 1,000 rpm
or more.
P2122 Accelerator pedal position The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator in regulating the throttle opening in
P2123 sensor order for the idle position to be within +10 degrees.
P2127 The ECM regulates the opening speed of the throttle valve to be slower than the normal
P2128 condition.
P2138 Therefore, the acceleration will be poor.
DTC Inspection Priority Chart INFOID:0000000004689758
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority
chart.

1 • U1000 U1001 CAN communication line
• P0102 P0103 Mass air flow sensor
• P0117 P0118 Engine coolant temperature sensor
• P0122 P0123 P0222 P0223 P1225 P1226 P2135 Throttle position sensor
• P0197 P0198 Engine oil temperature sensor
• P0327 P0328 P0332 P0333 Knock sensor
• P0335 Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
• P0340 P0345 Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
• P0605 P0607 ECM
• P0643 Sensor power supply
• P0705 P0850 Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch
• P1550 P1551 P1552 P1553 P1554 Battery current sensor
• P1610 - P1615 NATS
• P1700 CVT control system
• P2122 P2123 P2127 P2128 P2138 Accelerator pedal position sensor

ECM
A
2 • P0075 P0081 Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
• P0130 P0131 P0132 P0150 P0151 P0152 P2A00 P2A03 Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1
• P0139 P0159 Heated oxygen sensor 2
• P0550 Power steering pressure sensor EC
• P0603 ECM power supply
• P0710 P0715 P0720 P0740 P0744 P0745 P0746 P0776 P0778 P0840 P0845 P1740 CVT related sensors, solenoid valves
and switches
• P1217 Engine over temperature (OVERHEAT) C
• P1777 P1778 CVT step motor
• P1800 P1801 VIAS control solenoid valve
• P1805 Brake switch D
• P2100 P2103 Throttle control motor relay
• P2101 Electric throttle control function
• P2118 Throttle control motor
E
3 • P0011 P0021 Intake valve timing control
• P1211 TCS control unit
• P1212 TCS communication line
• P1564 ASCD steering switch F
• P1572 ASCD brake switch
• P1574 ASCD vehicle speed sensor
• P1715 Primary speed sensor
• P2119 Electric throttle control actuator G
DTC Index INFOID:0000000004689759
H
×:Applicable —: Not applicable
DTC*1 Items Reference
Trip MIL
CONSULT-III*2 ECM*3 I
U1000 1000*4 CAN COMM CIRCUIT — EC-540
U1001 1001*4 CAN COMM CIRCUIT 2 — EC-540

J
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
P0000 0000 FURTHER TESTING — Blinking —
MAY BE REQUIRED.
K
P0011 0011 INT/V TIM CONT-B1 2 — EC-541
P0021 0021 INT/V TIM CONT-B2 2 — EC-541
P0075 0075 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B1 2 × EC-546 L
P0081 0081 INT/V TIM V/CIR-B2 2 × EC-546
P0102 0102 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 1 × EC-549
M
P0103 0103 MAF SEN/CIRCUIT-B1 1 × EC-549
P0117 0117 ECT SEN/CIRC 2 × EC-554
P0118 0118 ECT SEN/CIRC 2 × EC-554 N
P0122 0122 TP SEN 2/CIRC-B1 1 × EC-557
P0123 0123 TP SEN 2/CIRC-B1 1 × EC-557
P0130 0130 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) 2 × EC-560
O
P0131 0131 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) 2 × EC-563
P0132 0132 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) 2 × EC-567
P
P0139 0139 HO2S2 (B1) 2 × EC-571
P0150 0150 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) 2 × EC-560
P0151 0151 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) 2 × EC-563
P0152 0152 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) 2 × EC-567
P0159 0159 HO2S2 (B2) 2 × EC-571

ECM

Trip MIL
2 3 (CONSULT-III screen terms) page
CONSULT-III* ECM*
P0197 0197 EOT SEN/CIRC 2 × EC-578
P0198 0198 EOT SEN/CIRC 2 × EC-578
P0222 0222 TP SEN 1/CIRC-B1 1 × EC-581
P0223 0223 TP SEN 1/CIRC-B1 1 × EC-581
P0327 0327 KNOCK SEN/CIRC-B1 2 — EC-584
P0335 0335 CKP SEN/CIRCUIT 2 × EC-587
P0340 0340 CMP SEN/CIRC-B1 2 × EC-591
P0345 0345 CMP SEN/CIRC-B2 2 × EC-591
P0500 0500 VEH SPEED SEN/CIRC* 5 2 × EC-595
P0550 0550 PW ST P SEN/CIRC 2 — EC-597
P0603 0603 ECM BACK UP/CIRCUIT 2 × EC-599
P0605 0605 ECM 1 or 2 × or — EC-601
P0607 0607 ECM 2 — EC-603
P0643 0643 SENSOR POWER/CIRC 1 × EC-604
P0705 0705 PNP SW/CIRC 2 — TM-51
P0710 0710 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC 2 — TM-54
P0715 0715 INPUT SPD SEN/CIRC 2 × TM-56
P0720 0720 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*5 2 — TM-59
P0740 0740 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC 2 — TM-66
P0744 0744 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN 2 — TM-68
P0745 0745 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC 2 — TM-70
P0746 0746 PRS CNT SOL/A FCTN 2 — TM-72
P0776 0776 PRS CNT SOL/B FCTN 2 — TM-74
P0778 0778 PRS CNT SOL/B CIRC 2 — TM-76
P0840 0840 TR PRS SENS/A CIRC 2 — TM-81
P0845 0845 TR PRS SENS/B CIRC 2 — TM-87
P0850 0850 P-N POS SW/CIRCUIT 2 × EC-606
P1211 1211 TCS C/U FUNCTN 2 — EC-609
P1212 1212 TCS/CIRC 2 — EC-610
P1217 1217 ENG OVER TEMP 1 × EC-611
P1225 1225 CTP LEARNING-B1 2 — EC-615
P1226 1226 CTP LEARNING-B1 2 — EC-617
P1550 1550 BAT CURRENT SENSOR 2 — EC-619
P1564 1564 ASCD SW 1 — EC-631
P1572 1572 ASCD BRAKE SW 1 — EC-634
P1574 1574 ASCD VHL SPD SEN 1 — EC-640

ECM

Trip MIL A
2 3 (CONSULT-III screen terms) page
CONSULT-III* ECM*
P1610 1610 LOCK MODE 2 — SEC-38
P1611 1611 ID DISCORD, IMMU-ECM 2 — SEC-39 EC
P1612 1612 CHAIN OF ECM-IMMU 2 — SEC-41
P1614 1614 CHAIN OF IMMU-KEY 2 — SEC-42
C
P1615 1615 DIFFERENCE OF KEY 2 — SEC-45
P1700 1700 CVT C/U FUNCT 1 — EC-642
P1715 1715 IN PULY SPEED 2 — EC-643 D
P1720 1720 V/SP SEN(A/T OUT) 2 — EC-645
P1740 1740 LU-SLCT SOL/CIRC 2 — TM-101
E
P1777 1777 STEP MOTR CIRC 2 — TM-104
P1778 1778 STEP MOTR FNC 2 × TM-107
P1800 1800 VIAS S/V-1 2 — EC-647 F
P1801 1801 VIAS S/V-2 2 — EC-650
P1805 1805 BRAKE SW/CIRCUIT 1 × EC-653
P2100 2100 ETC MOT PWR-B1 1 × EC-656 G
P2101 2101 ETC FNCTN/CIRC-B1 1 × EC-658
P2103 2103 ETC MOT PWR 1 × EC-656 H
P2118 2118 ETC MOT-B1 1 × EC-662
P2119 2119 ETC ACTR-B1 1 × EC-664
P2122 2122 APP SEN 1/CIRC 1 × EC-666 I
P2123 2123 APP SEN 1/CIRC 1 × EC-666
P2127 2127 APP SEN 2/CIRC 1 × EC-669
J
P2128 2128 APP SEN 2/CIRC 1 × EC-669
P2135 2135 TP SENSOR-B1 1 × EC-673
P2138 2138 APP SENSOR 1 × EC-676 K
P2A00 2A00 A/F SENSOR1 (B1) 2 × EC-680
P2A03 2A03 A/F SENSOR1 (B2) 2 × EC-680
L
*1: 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
*2: This number is prescribed by ISO 15031-6.
*3: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), this number is controlled by NISSAN.
M
*4: The troubleshooting for this DTC needs CONSULT-III.
*5: When the fail-safe operations for both self-diagnoses occur, the MIL illuminates.

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
Symptom Table INFOID:0000000004689760
SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
SYMPTOM




Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL

Fuel Fuel pump circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 EC-709
Fuel pressure regulator system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-783
Fuel injector circuit 1 1 2 3 2 2 2 2 EC-706
Evaporative emission system 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 EC-785
Air Positive crankcase ventilation sys-
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 1 EC-729
tem 3 3
Incorrect idle speed adjustment 1 1 1 1 1 EC-427
EC-658,
Electric throttle control actuator 1 1 2 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
EC-664
Ignition Incorrect ignition timing adjustment 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 EC-427
Ignition circuit 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 EC-723
Power supply and ground circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 EC-537
Mass air flow sensor circuit 2 EC-549
1
Engine coolant temperature sensor circuit 3 3 EC-554
3
Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 circuit EC-687
1 2 2 2 2 2 EC-557,
EC-581,
Throttle position sensor circuit EC-615,
EC-617,
2 2 EC-673
EC-604,
EC-666,
Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit 3 2 1
EC-669,
EC-676
Knock sensor circuit 2 3 EC-584
Crankshaft position sensor (POS) circuit 2 2 EC-587
Camshaft position sensor (PHASE) circuit 3 2 EC-591
Vehicle speed signal circuit 2 3 3 3 EC-595

SYMPTOM
A


EC


Reference C
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
D
ENGINE STALL
E

Power steering pressure sensor circuit 2 3 3 EC-597 F
EC-599,
ECM 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
EC-601
G
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cir-
3 2 1 3 2 2 3 3 EC-546
cuit
PNP signal circuit 3 3 3 3 3 EC-606
H
Refrigerant pressure sensor circuit 2 3 3 4 EC-730 I
Electrical load signal circuit 3 EC-698
Air conditioner circuit 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 HAC-40
J
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) 4 BRC-29
(continued on the next figure)
K
SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER

SYMPTOM




Reference
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
ENGINE STALL
Fuel Fuel tank FL-12
5
Fuel piping 5 5 5 5 5 5 FL-4
Vapor lock —
5
Valve deposit —
Poor fuel (Heavy weight gasoline, 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
—
Low octane)
Air Air duct EM-27
Air cleaner EM-15
Air leakage from air duct
(Mass air flow sensor — electric EM-27
5 5 5 5 5 5
throttle control actuator)
5 5 5 5
Electric throttle control actuator EM-29
Air leakage from intake manifold/ EM-29,
Collector/Gasket EM-32
Cranking Battery PG-129
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Generator circuit CHG-21
Starter circuit 3 1 STR-5
Signal plate 6 EM-104
PNP signal 4 TM-52
Engine Cylinder head
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-97
Cylinder head gasket 4 3
Cylinder block
Piston 4
Piston ring
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 EM-108
Connecting rod
Bearing
Crankshaft
Valve Timing chain EM-54
mecha-
Camshaft EM-84
nism
Intake valve timing control 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-66
Intake valve
3 EM-97
Exhaust valve

SYMPTOM
A


EC


Reference C
ROUGH IDLE/HUNTING
HIGH IDLE/LOW IDLE
page
IDLING VIBRATION
D
ENGINE STALL
E

Exhaust Exhaust manifold/Tube/Muffler/ F
Gasket EM-34, EX-
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
4
Three way catalyst
G
Lubrica- LU-10, LU-
Oil pan/Oil strainer/Oil pump/Oil
tion 12, LU-14,
filter/Oil gallery/Oil cooler 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 EM-43
Oil level (Low)/Filthy oil LU-7 H
Cooling CO-12,
Radiator/Hose/Radiator filler cap
CO-12
Thermostat 5 CO-24
I
Water pump CO-21

5 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 5
Water gallery CO-2 J
Cooling fan CO-17
Coolant level (Low)/Contaminat- 5
CO-8
ed coolant K
NVIS (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System —
1 1 SEC-19
NATS)
1 - 6: The numbers refer to the order of inspection. L

FUEL CUT CONTROL (AT NO LOAD AND HIGH ENGINE SPEED)

If the engine speed is above 1,500 rpm under no load (for example, the selector lever position is P or N and
engine speed is over 1,500 rpm) fuel will be cut off after some time. The exact time when the fuel is cut off var-
ies based on engine speed.
Fuel cut will be operated until the engine speed reaches 1,100 rpm, then fuel cut will be cancelled.
NOTE:
This function is different from deceleration control listed under Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System, EC-443,

PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT EC
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000004807597
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIRBAG” and
“SEAT BELT” of this Service Manual.
WARNING: D
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer. E
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see the “SRS AIRBAG”.
F
• Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or har-
ness connectors.
G
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
• When working near the Airbag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Airbag System sensors with the igni- H
tion ON or engine running, DO NOT use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with a
hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the I
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover INFOID:0000000004807598
J
When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover
the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc.
K
M
PIIB3706J
On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and CVT INFOID:0000000004689765

N
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
CAUTION: O
• Always turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery cable before any repair or
inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc. will cause
the MIL to illuminate. P
• Always connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to illuminate due to the open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
• Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-lock-
ing type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG-115, "Description".
• Always route and secure the harnesses properly after work. The interference of the harness with a
bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to illuminate due to the short circuit.

PRECAUTIONS
• Always connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube may
cause the MIL to illuminate due to the malfunction of the fuel injection system, etc.
• Always erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the ECM and TCM
(Transmission control module) before returning the vehicle to the customer.
General Precautions INFOID:0000000004689766
• Always use a 12 volt battery as power source.

• Never attempt to disconnect battery cables while engine is
running.
• Before connecting or disconnecting the ECM harness con-
nector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect negative bat-
tery cable. Failure to do so may damage the ECM because
battery voltage is applied to ECM even if ignition switch is
turned OFF.
• Before removing parts, turn ignition switch OFF and then dis-
connect battery ground cable.
SEF289H
• Never disassemble ECM.

• If a battery cable is disconnected, the memory will return to the ECM value.
The ECM will now start to self-control at its initial value. Thus, engine operation can vary slightly in
this case. However, this is not an indication of a malfunction. Never replace parts because of a slight
variation.
• If the battery is disconnected, the following emission-related diagnostic information will be lost
within 24 hours.
- Freeze frame data
- Test values
• When connecting ECM harness connector, fasten (B) it
securely with a lever (1) as far as it will go as shown in the fig-
ure.
- ECM (2)
- Loosen (A)
PBIB2947E
• When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or

from ECM, never damage pin terminals (bends or break).
Check that there are not any bends or breaks on ECM pin ter-
minal, when connecting pin connectors.
• Securely connect ECM harness connectors.
A poor connection can cause an extremely high (surge) volt-
age to develop in coil and condenser, thus resulting in dam-
age to ICs.
• Keep engine control system harness at least 10 cm (4 in) away
from adjacent harness, to prevent engine control system mal-
functions due to receiving external noise, degraded operation
PBIB0090E
of ICs, etc.
• Keep engine control system parts and harness dry.

PRECAUTIONS
• Before replacing ECM, perform ECM Terminals and Reference
Value inspection and check that the ECM functions properly. A
Refer to EC-737, "Reference Value".
• Handle mass air flow sensor carefully to avoid damage.
• Never clean mass air flow sensor with any type of detergent.
EC
• Never disassemble electric throttle control actuator.
• Even a slight leakage in the air intake system can cause seri-
ous incidents.
• Never shock or jar the camshaft position sensor (PHASE), C
crankshaft position sensor (POS).
MEF040D
D
• After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform DTC
Confirmation Procedure or Component Function Check.
The DTC should not be displayed in the DTC Confirmation E
Procedure if the repair is completed. The Component Func-
tion Check should be a good result if the repair is completed.
F
G
SAT652J
• When measuring ECM signals with a circuit tester, never allow H

the two tester probes to contact.
Accidental contact of probes will cause a short circuit and
damage the ECM power transistor. I
SEF348N

PRECAUTIONS
• B1 indicates bank 1, B2 indicates bank 2 as shown in the fig-
ure.
• Never operate fuel pump when there is no fuel in lines.
• Tighten fuel hose clamps to the specified torque.
SEC893C
• Never depress accelerator pedal when starting.

• Immediately after starting, never rev up engine unnecessarily.
• Never rev up engine just prior to shutdown.
SEF709Y
• When installing C.B. ham radio or a mobile phone, be sure to

observe the following as it may adversely affect electronic
control systems depending on installation location.
- Keep the antenna as far as possible from the electronic con-
trol units.
- Keep the antenna feeder line more than 20 cm (8 in) away
from the harness of electronic controls.
Never let them run parallel for a long distance.
- Adjust the antenna and feeder line so that the standing-wave
ratio can be kept smaller.
- Be sure to ground the radio to vehicle body.
SEF708Y

PREPARATION
PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools INFOID:0000000004703533
EC
Tool number
Description C
Tool name
Break-out box
D
E
ZZA1194D

Y-cable adapter F
PBIA9379J
H
KV10118400 Measuring fuel pressure
Fuel tube adapter
J
PBIB3043E
Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000004702863

K
Tool name
Description
(SPX-North America No.) L
Quick connector release Removes fuel tube quick connectors in engine
(J-45488) room
(Available in SEC. 164 of PARTS CATALOG: Par
M
No. 16441 6N210)
N
PBIC0198E
Socket wrench Removes and installing engine coolant tempera-

ture sensor O
S-NT705

PREPARATION
Tool name
Description
(SPX-North America No.)
Oxygen sensor thread Reconditions the exhaust system threads before
cleaner installing a new oxygen sensor. Use with anti-
i.e.: (J-43897-18) seize lubricant shown below.
(J-43897-12) a: 18 mm diameter with pitch 1.5 mm for Zirco-
nia Oxygen Sensor
b: 12 mm diameter with pitch 1.25 mm for Tita-
nia Oxygen Sensor
AEM488
Anti-seize lubricant i.e.: Lubricates oxygen sensor thread cleaning tool

(PermatexTM 133AR or when reconditioning exhaust system threads.
equivalent meeting MIL
specification MIL-A-907)
S-NT779

FUEL PRESSURE
ON-VEHICLE MAINTENANCE A
FUEL PRESSURE
EC
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE

With CONSULT-III C
2. Perform “FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode with CONSULT-III.
D
3. Start engine.
Without CONSULT-III
1. Remove fuel pump fuse (2) located in IPDM E/R (1).
F
2. Start engine.
3. After engine stalls, crank it 2 or 3 times to release all fuel pres-
sure.
G
5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system.
H
JMBIA1659ZZ
I
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
CAUTION:
Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger. J
NOTE:
• Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out. The fuel
pressure cannot be completely released because Z51 models do not have fuel return system.
• Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that the quick K
connector o-ring maintains seal ability.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero.
2. Remove fuel hose using Quick Connector Release (commercial service tool). L
• Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose.
• Keep fuel hose connections clean.
3. Install Fuel tube adapter [SST (KV10118400)] (B) and Fuel pres- M
sure gauge (A) as shown in figure.
• Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pres-
sure gauge. N
• When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for
damage and abnormality.
4. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump) and check for fuel
leakage. O
5. Start engine and check for fuel leakage.
6. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge kit.
P
• During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel JMBIA1392ZZ
connection every 3 minutes.
At idling : Approximately 350 kPa (3.50 bar, 3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi)

7. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step.
8. Check the following.

FUEL PRESSURE
• Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging
• Fuel filter for clogging
• Fuel pump
• Fuel pressure regulator for clogging
9. If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator.
If NG, repair or replace malfunctioning part.
10. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel tube Adapter, release fuel pressure to zero.

< ON-VEHICLE REPAIR > [VQ35DE (TYPE 2)]
ON-VEHICLE REPAIR A
EC
1. Visually inspect EVAP vapor lines for improper attachment and for cracks, damage, loose connections,
chafing and deterioration.
C
2. Check EVAP canister as per the following:
a. Block port (B). Orally blow air through port (A).
Check that air flows freely through port (C). D
b. Block port (A). Orally blow air through port (B).
E
F
PBIB0663E
3. Inspect fuel tank filler cap vacuum relief valve for clogging, stick- G
ing, etc.
a. Wipe clean valve housing.
H
SEF989X J
b. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.

K
Pressure: 15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.153 - 0.200 bar, 0.156 - 0.204 kg/cm2, 2.22
- 2.90 psi)
–6.0 to –3.4 kPa (–0.06 to –0.034 bar, –0.061 to –0.035 kg/
Vacuum: L
cm2, –0.87 to –0.49 psi)
c. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly.
M
SEF943S

< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) [VQ35DE (TYPE 2)]

Idle Speed INFOID:0000000004702859
No load* (in P or N position) 600 ± 50 rpm
• A/C switch: OFF
Ignition Timing INFOID:0000000004702860
No load* (in P or N position) 12 ± 5°BTDC
• A/C switch: OFF

Ec PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ec PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ENGINE

ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM

Revision: 2008 October EC-1 Z51

Revision: 2008 October EC-2 Z51

Revision: 2008 October EC-3 Z51

Revision: 2008 October EC-4 Z51

Revision: 2008 October EC-5 Z51

Revision: 2008 October EC-6 Z51

Revision: 2008 October EC-7 Z51

Revision: 2008 October EC-8 Z51

P1715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR (PRIMARY Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 666

Revision: 2008 October EC-9 Z51

Revision: 2008 October EC-10 Z51

Revision: 2008 October EC-11 Z51

FEATURES OF NEW MODEL

Check the vehicle type to confirm the service information in EC section.

Vehicle type Service information

Revision: 2008 October EC-12 Z51

Revision: 2008 October EC-13 Z51

1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM

Revision: 2008 October EC-14 Z51

Revision: 2008 October EC-15 Z51

Revision: 2008 October EC-16 Z51

5. Run engine at approximately 2,000 rpm for approximately 2 min- K

Revision: 2008 October EC-17 Z51

4.PERFORM ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING

Revision: 2008 October EC-18 Z51

1. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.

>> INSPECTION END

When replacing ECM, the following procedure must be performed.

1.CHECK IDLE SPEED

Revision: 2008 October EC-20 Z51

>> INSPECTION END A

1.CHECK IGNITION TIMING D

2. Check ignition timing. H

>> INSPECTION END

ACCELERATOR PEDAL RELEASED POSITION LEARNING

Revision: 2008 October EC-21 Z51

Revision: 2008 October EC-22 Z51

Revision: 2008 October EC-23 Z51

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2008 October EC-24 Z51

Revision: 2008 October EC-25 Z51

Revision: 2008 October EC-26 Z51

Revision: 2008 October EC-27 Z51

1. Refrigerant pressure sensor 2. Battery current sensor

1. ECM 2. Cooling fan relay-3 3. Fuel pump fuse

Revision: 2008 October EC-28 Z51

1. HO2S2 (bank 1) 2. HO2S2 (bank 2) 3. HO2S2 (bank 2) harness connector

Revision: 2008 October EC-29 Z51

1. EVAP canister 2. Data link connector

Revision: 2008 October EC-30 Z51

1. ASCD steering switch 2. CANCEL switch 3. RESUME/ACCELERATE switch E

Component Description INFOID:0000000004690365

Revision: 2008 October EC-31 Z51

Revision: 2008 October EC-32 Z51

System Description INFOID:0000000004690367

Sensor Input signal to ECM ECM function Actuator

Heated oxygen sensor 2*1 Density of oxygen in exhaust gas P

Revision: 2008 October EC-33 Z51

Revision: 2008 October EC-34 Z51

Revision: 2008 October EC-35 Z51

Revision: 2008 October EC-36 Z51